Karnataka Gazette, Part Part-1, 18 May 2017

click here for IIIF manifest

ಸಂಪುಟ ೧೫೨

Volume 152

ಬೆಂಗಳೂರು, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ (ವೈಶಾಖ ೨೮, ಶಕ ವರ್ಷ ೧೯೩೯)

Bengaluru, Thursday, May 18, 2017 ( Vaishakha 28, Shaka Varsha 1939)

ಸಂಚಿಕೆ ೨೦

Issue 20

ಭಾಗ ೧

ರಾಜ್ಯ ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಮುಖ್ಯ ಆದೇಶಗಳು ಹಾಗೂ ಸುತ್ತೋಲೆ ಮುಂತಾದ

ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಇಲಾಖೆಗಳಿಗೂ ಸಂಬಂಧಿಸಿದ ಆದೇಶಗಳು

ಕಂದಾಯ ಸಚಿವಾಲಯ

ವಿಷಯ : ಉತ್ತರ ಕನ್ನಡ ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಯ ಜೋಯಿಡಾ ತಾಲೂಕಿನ ರಾಮನಗರ ಗ್ರಾಮದ ಸರಕಾರಿ ಪಡ ರಿ.ಸ. ನಂ.55 ರಲ್ಲಿ ಕ್ಷೇತ್ರ 0-03 ಗುಂಟೆ ಜಮೀನನ್ನು ಶ್ರೀ ರಾಮಲಿಂಗ ದೇವಸ್ಥಾನಕ್ಕೆ ಮಂಜೂರು ಮಾಡುವ ಬಗ್ಗೆ.

ಓದಲಾಗಿದೆ : ಪ್ರಾದೇಶಿಕ ಆಯುಕ್ತರು, ಬೆಳಗಾವಿ ವಿಭಾಗ, ಬೆಳಗಾವಿ ಇವರ ಪತ್ರ ಸಂ:ಪ್ರಾಆಬೆ:ಭೂಮಿ:4:

ಎಲ್ಎನ್‌ಡಿ:ಸಿಆರ್: 99/2013-14 ದಿನಾಂಕ 26-09-2014

ಪ್ರಸ್ತಾವನೆ:-

ಪ್ರಾದೇಶಿಕ ಆಯುಕ್ತರು, ಬೆಳಗಾವಿ ವಿಭಾಗ, ಬೆಳಗಾವಿ ಇವರ ಮೇಲೆ ಓದಲಾದ ಪತ್ರದಲ್ಲಿ ಉತ್ತರ ಕನ್ನಡ ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಯ ಜೋಯಿಡಾ ತಾಲೂಕಿನ ರಾಮನಗರ ಗ್ರಾಮದ ಸರಕಾರಿ ಪಡ ರಿ.ಸ. ನಂ.55 ರಲ್ಲಿ ಕ್ಷೇತ್ರ 0-03 ಗುಂಟೆ ಜಮೀನನ್ನು ಶ್ರೀ ರಾಮಲಿಂಗ ದೇವಸ್ಥಾನ ಸಲುವಾಗಿ ಶ್ರೀ ರಾಮಲಿಂಗ ದೇವಸ್ಥಾನ ವ್ಯವಸ್ಥಾಪನ ಕಮಿಟಿ ಕೇವರ್ಲೆ (ರಾಮನಗರ) ಇವರಿಗೆ ಮಂಜೂರು ಮಾಡುವ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ಶಿಫಾರಸ್ಸಿನೊಂದಿಗೆ ಪ್ರಸ್ತಾವನೆ ಸಲ್ಲಿಸಿರುತ್ತಾರೆ.

ಪ್ರಾದೇಶಿಕ ಆಯುಕ್ತರು ಬೆಳಗಾವಿ ವಿಭಾಗ ಇವರು ತಮ್ಮ ಪತ್ರದಲ್ಲಿ ಕೋರಿರುವ ಜಮೀನು ಸೂಪಾ(ಜೋಯಿಡಾ) ತಾಲ್ಲೂಕಿನ ರಾಮನಗರ(ಶೀತಾವಾಡ) ಗ್ರಾಮದ ರಿ.ಸ.ನಂ.55 ರ ಒಟ್ಟು ಕ್ಷೇತ್ರ 41-14 ಎಕರೆ ಜಮೀನು ಇದ್ದು, ಮೂಲತ ಅರಣ್ಯ ಜಮೀನಾಗಿದ್ದು ನಂತರ ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಆದೇಶ ನಂ. ಎಫ್ಎಫ್‌ಡಿ-79/ಎಫ್‌ಜಿಎಲ್-79 ದಿನಾಂಕ:01-05-1980 ರನ್ವಯ ಅರಣ್ಯ ಜಮೀನು ನವೀಕರಣ ಅಧಿಸೂಚನೆ ರಲ್ಲಿ 39-27 ಗುಂಟೆ ಜಮೀನು ಸರಕಾರಿ ಪಡವೆಂದು ಪರಿವರ್ತನೆ ಹೊಂದಿರುತ್ತದೆ. ಬಾಲಕಿ ಉಳಿದ 1-26 ಗುಂಟೆ 10 ಆಣೆ ಜಮೀನು ಕಾದಿಟ್ಟ ಫಾರೆಸ್ಟ್ ಹಾಗೂ ಸರ್ಕಾರಿ ಪಡಾ ಎಂದು ಕಾಲಂ ನಂ. 9 ರಲ್ಲಿ ದಾಖಲಾಗಿರುವುದಾಗಿ ಹಾಗೂ ಕಾಲಂ ನಂ. 11 ರಲ್ಲಿ ಕಾಳಿ ನದಿ ಜಲ ವಿದ್ಯುತ್ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ಮುಳುಗಡೆಯಾದ ನಿರಾಶ್ರಿತರಿಗೆ ಮಂಜೂರಾಗಿರುತ್ತದೆ. ಮುಖ್ಯ ಅಭಿಯಂತರು ಕೆ.ಪಿ.ಸಿ ಗಣೇಶಗುಡಿ ಇವರು ಲೇಔಟ್ ನಕ್ಷೆ ತಯಾರಿಸಿದ್ದು ಅದರಂತೆ ನಿರಾಶ್ರಿತರಿಗೆ 1135 ಫ್ಲಾಟ್‌ಗಳನ್ನು ನಿರ್ಮಿಸಿ ಪುರ್ನವಸತಿ ಕಲ್ಪಸಿ ಕೊಡಲಾಗಿ ಈ ಲೇಔಟ್ ನಕ್ಷೆ ಪ್ರಕಾರ ರಾಮಲಿಂಗ ದೇವಸ್ಥಾನ, ಮಸೀದಿ ಹಾಗೂ ಚರ್ಚಗಳಿಗೆ ಪ್ಲಾಟ್ ಮೀಸಲಿಟ್ಟಿದ್ದು ಪುರ್ನವಸತಿ ಕೇಂದ್ರಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಮಂಜೂರಿಸಿದ ಪ್ಲಾಟ್‌ಗಳನ್ನು ಹೊರತುಪಡಿಸಿ ಉಳಿದ ಖುಲ್ಲಾ ಜಾಗದಲ್ಲಿ ಹಲವಾರು ವರ್ಷಗಳ ಹಿಂದೆಯೇ ದೇವಸ್ಥಾನಗಳನ್ನು ಅನಧಿಕೃತವಾಗಿ ನಿರ್ಮಿಸಲಾಗಿದ್ದು ಎಲ್ಲಾ ದೇವಸ್ಥಾನಗಳನ್ನು ನೋಂದಣಿ ಹಾಗೂ ಮುದ್ರಾಂಕ ಇಲಾಖೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್ ಡೀಡ್ ಮೂಲಕ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿರುವುದಾಗಿ ತಿಳಿಸಿರುತ್ತಾರೆ. ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ಭೂ ಮಂಜೂರಾತಿ ನಿಯಮಗಳು 1969ರ ನಿಯಮ 21 ರನ್ವಯ ಮಾರುಕಟ್ಟೆ ಬೆಲೆಯ ಶೇಕಡಾ 50 ರಷ್ಟು ಮೌಲ್ಯವನ್ನು ವಿಧಿಸಿ ಶ್ರೀ ರಾಮಲಿಂಗ ದೇವಸ್ತಾನಕ್ಕೆ 0-03 ಗುಂಟೆ ಜಮೀನು ಮಂಜೂರು ಮಾಡುವ ಕುರಿತು ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಪೂರ್ವಾನುಮೋದನೆ ನೀಡುವ ಕುರಿತು ಈ ಕೆಳಕಂಡ ಷರತ್ತುಗಳಿಗೊಳಪಟ್ಟು ಮಂಜೂರು ಮಾಡುವಂತೆ ಶಿಫಾರಸ್ಸು ಮಾಡಿರುತ್ತಾರೆ.

1. ಉದ್ದೇಶಿತ ಜಮಿನನ್ನು ಯಾವ ಉದ್ದೇಶಕ್ಕಾಗಿ ಮಂಜೂರಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆಯೋ ಅದೇ ಉದ್ದೇಶಕ್ಕಾಗಿ ಉಪಯೋಗಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು. 2. ಸದರಿ ಜಮೀನಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಯಾವುದೇ ರೀತಿಯ ಅತಿಕ್ರಮಣವಾಗದಂತೆ ನೋಡಿಕೊಳ್ಳತಕ್ಕದು. 3. ಮಾರುಕಟ್ಟೆ ಬೆಲೆ ಶೇಕಡಾ 50 ರಷ್ಟು ಮೌಲ್ಯ ಹಾಗೂ ಇನ್ನಿತರ ಶುಲ್ಕಗಳ ಸಹಿತ ಸರ್ಕಾರಕ್ಕೆ ಭರಿಸುವ ಷರತ್ತಿಗೊಳಪಟ್ಟು. 4. ಮೇಲ್ಕಂಡ ಷರತ್ತುಗಳನ್ನು ಉಲ್ಲಂಘಿಸಿದಲ್ಲಿ ಸದರಿ ಜಮೀನನ್ನು ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ವಶಕ್ಕೆ ತೆಗೆದುಕೊಳ್ಳಲಾಗುವುದು.

ಪ್ರಸ್ತಾವನೆಯಲ್ಲಿನ ಅಂಶಗಳನ್ನು ಕೂಲಂಕುಷವಾಗಿ ಪರಿಶೀಲಿಸಿ ಈ ಕೆಳಕಂಡಂತೆ ಆದೇಶಿಸಿದೆ:-

ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಆದೇಶ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ: ಆರ್‌ಡಿ 37 ಎಲ್‌ಜಿಎನ್ 2014, ದಿನಾಂಕ: 13.04.2017

ಪ್ರಸ್ತಾವನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ವಿವರಿಸಿರುವ ಅಂಶಗಳ ಹಿನ್ನೆಲೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಶ್ರೀ ರಾಮಲಿಂಗ ದೇವಸ್ಥಾನ ವ್ಯವಸ್ಥಾಪನ ಕಮಿಟಿ ಕೇವರ್ಲೆ (ರಾಮನಗರ) ಇವರಿಗೆ ಉತ್ತರ ಕನ್ನಡ ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಯ ಜೋಯಿಡಾ ತಾಲ್ಲೂಕಿನ ರಾಮನಗರ(ಶೀತವಾಡ) ಗ್ರಾಮದ ಸ.ನಂ.55 ರಲ್ಲಿ 0-03 ಗುಂಟೆ ಜಮೀನನ್ನು ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ಭೂ

(೪೯೭)೪೯೮ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ಭಾಗ ೧ ಮಂಜೂರಾತಿ ನಿಯಮಗಳು 1969ರ ನಿಯಮ 21 ರನ್ವಯ ಮಾರುಕಟ್ಟೆ ಬೆಲೆಯ ಶೇಕಡಾ 50% ಮೌಲ್ಯ ಹಾಗೂ ಇನ್ನಿತರ ಶುಲ್ಕಗಳನ್ನು ಪಾವತಿಸಿಕೊಂಡು ಈ ಕೆಳಕಂಡ ಷರತ್ತುಗಳಿಗೊಳಪಟ್ಟು ಶ್ರೀ ರಾಮಲಿಂಗ ದೇವಸ್ಥಾನಕ್ಕೆ ಮಂಜೂರು ಮಾಡಲು ಅನುಮೋದನೆ ನೀಡಲಾಗಿದೆ.

1. ಉದ್ದೇಶಿತ ಜಮಿನನ್ನು ಯಾವ ಉದ್ದೇಶಕ್ಕಾಗಿ ಮಂಜೂರಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆಯೋ ಅದೇ ಉದ್ದೇಶಕ್ಕಾಗಿ ಉಪಯೋಗಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು ಹಾಗೂ ಯಾವುದೇ ಕಾರಣಕ್ಕೂ ಪರಭಾರೆ ಮಾಡತಕ್ಕದ್ದಲ್ಲ.

2. ಸದರಿ ಜಮೀನಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಯಾವುದೇ ರೀತಿಯ ಅತಿಕ್ರಮಣವಾಗದಂತೆ ನೋಡಿಕೊಳ್ಳತಕ್ಕದು. 3. ಪ್ರಚಲಿತ ಮಾರುಕಟ್ಟೆ ಬೆಲೆಯ ಶೇಕಡಾ 50 ರಷ್ಟು ಹಾಗೂ ಇನ್ನಿತರ ಶುಲ್ಕಗಳ ಸಹಿತ ಸರ್ಕಾರಕ್ಕೆ ಭರಿಸುವ ಷರತ್ತಿಗೊಳಪಟ್ಟು. 4. ಮೇಲ್ಕಂಡ ಷರತ್ತುಗಳನ್ನು ಉಲ್ಲಂಘಿಸಿದಲ್ಲಿ ಸದರಿ ಜಮೀನನ್ನು ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ವಶಕ್ಕೆ ತೆಗೆದುಕೊಳ್ಳಲಾಗುವುದು.

ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪಾಲರ ಆದೇಶಾನುಸಾರ ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಹೆಸರಿನಲ್ಲಿ, PR - 137

ಉದಯ ಆರ್. ನಾಯಕ್

SC - 25

ಪೀಠಾಧಿಕಾರಿ

ಕಂದಾಯ ಇಲಾಖೆ (ಭೂ.ಮಂ-2)

ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಚಿವಾಲಯ

ವಿಷಯ : 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯನ್ನು ಮುಂದುವರೆಸಲು ಹಾಗೂ ಹೊಸ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಆದೇಶ ಹೊರಡಿಸುವ ಬಗ್ಗೆ.

ಓದಲಾಗಿದೆ : ಸರ್ಕಾರಿ ಆದೇಶ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ: ಸಿಒ/162/ಸಿಎಲ್ಎಸ್/2015, ಬೆಂಗಳೂರು ದಿನಾಂಕ:15-04-2016

ಪ್ರಸ್ತಾವನೆ:

ಮೇಲೆ ಓದಲಾದ ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಆದೇಶದಲ್ಲಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ 2016-17ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಆದೇಶ ಹೊರಡಿಸಲಾಗಿತ್ತು. 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ಈ ಯೋಜನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ನೋಂದಣಿ/ನವೀಕರಿಸಲು ಆದೇಶ ಹೊರಡಿಸಬೇಕಾಗುತ್ತದೆ.

ಸರ್ಕಾರಿ ಆದೇಶ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ: ಸಿಒ/695/ಸಿಎಲ್ಎಸ್/2016, ಬೆಂಗಳೂರು ದಿನಾಂಕ: 20-04-2017

ಪ್ರಸ್ತಾವನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ವಿವರಿಸಲಾದ ಅಂಶಗಳ ಹಿನ್ನೆಲೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಗ್ರಾಮೀಣ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘದ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬ ವರ್ಗದವರು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿಕೊಳ್ಳಲು ಅನುವಾಗುವಂತೆ ಮುಂದಿನ ಆದೇಶದವರೆವಿಗೆ ಈ ಕೆಳಕಂಡ ಆದೇಶವನ್ನು ಮಾರ್ಗಸೂಚಿಗಳೊಂದಿಗೆ ಹೊರಡಿಸಿದೆ.

ಮಾರ್ಗಸೂಚಿಗಳು :

1) ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಕಾಯ್ದೆ, 1959ರ ಅಡಿ ಅಥವಾ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ಸೌಹಾರ್ದ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಕಾಯ್ದೆ, 1997ರ ಅಡಿ ಅಥವಾ ಬಹು ರಾಜ್ಯ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಕಾಯ್ದೆ, 2002ರ ಅಡಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿರುವ ಹಾಗೂ ಕಾರ್ಯನಿರ್ವಹಿಸುತ್ತಿರುವ ಯಾವುದೇ ಗ್ರಾಮೀಣ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಒಬ್ಬ ವ್ಯಕ್ತಿ ಸದಸ್ಯನಾಗಿದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ, ಅವನು ಮತ್ತು ಅವನ ಕುಟುಂಬ ವರ್ಗದವರು ನಿಗದಿತ ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಪಾವತಿಸಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಿರುತ್ತಾರೆ. ಈಗಾಗಲೇ ಕಳೆದ ಸಾಲುಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಸದಸ್ಯತ್ವ ಪಡೆದಿದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ ಪ್ರಸಕ್ತ ಸಾಲಿಗೂ ಸಹ ಅಂತಹವರುಗಳು ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಆಯಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ನವೀಕರಿಸಲು/ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಅರ್ಹರಾಗಿತ್ತಾರೆ.

2) ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಕೇಂದ್ರ ಸಹಕಾರ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕುಗಳ ಹಾಗೂ ಪ್ರಾಥಮಿಕ ಕೃಷಿ ಪತ್ತಿನ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ವತಿಯಿಂದ ಸಂಘಟಿಸಲ್ಪಟ್ಟಿರುವ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಗ್ರಾಮೀಣ ಸ್ವ-ಸಹಾಯ ಗುಂಪುಗಳ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬ ವರ್ಗದವರು ನವೀಕರಿಸಲು/ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಅರ್ಹರಾಗಿತ್ತಾರೆ.

3) ಅವಿಭಕ್ತ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಯಾವುದೇ ಒಬ್ಬ ಸದಸ್ಯನು/ಸದಸ್ಯಳು ಮೇಲೆ ತಿಳಿಸಿರುವ ಅರ್ಹ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘದ ಸದಸ್ಯರಾಗಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವ ದಿನಾಂಕಕ್ಕೆ 3 ತಿಂಗಳು ಕಳೆದಿರಬೇಕು. ಸ್ವ-ಸಹಾಯ ಗುಂಪಿನ ಸದಸ್ಯರಾದರೆ ಅಂತಹಃ ಗುಂಪನ್ನು ಸ್ಥಾಪಿಸಿ 3 ತಿಂಗಳು ಗತಿಸಿರಬೇಕು. ಆ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಪ್ರತಿಯೊಬ್ಬ ಸದಸ್ಯನೂ ವಾರ್ಷಿಕ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಪಾವತಿಸುವ ಮೂಲಕ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು. ಅವಿಭಕ್ತ ಕುಟುಂಬ ಅಂದರೆ ತಂದೆ, ತಾಯಿ, ಗಂಡ/ ಹೆಂಡತಿ, ಗಂಡು ಮಕ್ಕಳು & ಮದುವೆಯಾಗದ ಹೆಣ್ಣು ಮಕ್ಕಳು, ಸೊಸೆ, ಮೊಮ್ಮಕ್ಕಳೂ ಸೇರಿ ಎಂದು ಅರ್ಥೈಯಿಸುವುದು.

4) ಮದುವೆಯಾಗಿರುವ ಹೆಣ್ಣು ಮಗಳು ಹಾಗೂ ಅವಳ ಮಕ್ಕಳು ತಂದೆ/ತಾಯಿ/ಅಣ್ಣ/ತಮ್ಮ ಇವರ ಕುಟುಂಬದಲ್ಲಿಯೇ ಅಂದರೆ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರ ಕುಟುಂಬದಲ್ಲಿಯೇ ವಾಸವಾಗಿದ್ದರೆ, ಅವರ ಪಾಲಿನ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣ ಪಾವತಿಸಿದರೆ ನವೀಕರಣ / ನೋಂದಣಿಗೆ ಹಾಗೂ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಾಗಿರುತ್ತಾರೆ. ಆದಾಗ್ಯೂ, 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಅವಧಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಮದುವೆಯಾದ ಹೆಣ್ಣು ಮಗಳು ತಂದೆ/ತಾಯಿ/ಅಣ್ಣ/ತಮ್ಮ ಇವರ ಜೊತೆ ವಾಸವಾಗಿರದೆ ಸಂಘದ ಕಾರ್ಯವ್ಯಾಪ್ತಿಯ ಹೊರಗೆ ವಾಸವಿದ್ದರೆ ಅಂತಹ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿ ಮೇಲೆ ವಿವರಿಸಿದಂತೆ ಅವಿಭಕ್ತ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಸದಸ್ಯೆಯಾಗಿರದೇ ಇರುವುದರಿಂದ, ಈ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯವನ್ನು ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಾಗುವುದಿಲ್ಲ. ಆದರೆ, ಅವಳೇ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘದ ಸದಸ್ಯೆಯಾಗಿ 3 ತಿಂಗಳು ಕಳೆದಿದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ, ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದಾಗಿದೆ. ಹಾಗೂ ಮೇಲೆ ತಿಳಿಸಿರುವ ಈ ನಿರ್ಬಂಧ ಅಂಥವಳಿಗೆ ಅನ್ವಯಿಸುವುದಿಲ್ಲ. ಮದುವೆಯಾಗಿ ಗಂಡನ ಮನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ವಾಸ ಮಾಡುತ್ತಿರುವ ಹಾಗೂ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರ ಜೊತೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ವಾಸ ಮಾಡದೇ ಇರುವ ಹೆಣ್ಣು ಮಕ್ಕಳಿಂದ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳು ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಸ್ವೀಕರಿಸತಕ್ಕದಲ್ಲ.

5) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಮದುವೆಯಾಗದ ಹೆಣ್ಣುಮಕ್ಕಳಿಗೆ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರು ವಂತಿಗೆ ಪಾವತಿಸಿದ್ದು, ಆನಂತರ ಮದುವೆಯಾಗಿದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ ಅಂತಹ ಮದುವೆಯಾದ ಹೆಣ್ಣು ಮಕ್ಕಳು 31-05-2018ರವರೆಗೆ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯವನ್ನು ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದಾಗಿದೆ.

6) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ವಾರ್ಷಿಕ ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಪ್ರತಿಯೊಬ್ಬರಿಗೆ `. 300/-ಕ್ಕೆ ನಿಗದಿಗೊಳಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ. ಈ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಪ್ರಯೋಜನ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಉದ್ದೇಶಿಸಿದ ಪ್ರತಿಯೊಬ್ಬ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿ `. 300/- ವಂತಿಗೆ ಪಾವತಿ ಮಾಡಬೇಕು. ಈ ಪೈಕಿ ಸಂಘದ ಸಾದಿಲ್ವಾರು ವೆಚ್ಚಕ್ಕೆ ಮತ್ತು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಶ್ರಮಿಸಿದವರಿಗೆ ಪ್ರೋತ್ಸಾಹಧನವಾಗಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘ/ಸಂಸ್ಥೆಯು `. 10/-ನ್ನು ಇಟ್ಟುಕೊಂಡು, ಉಳಿದ `. 290/-ಗಳನ್ನು ಹಣ ಸ್ವೀಕರಿಸಿದ 15 ದಿನಗಳೊಳಗಾಗಿ ಸಂಬಂಧಿಸಿದ ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಸಹಕಾರಿ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕುಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್ ಹೊಂದಿರುವ ಖಾತೆಗೆ ಜಮಾ ಮಾಡತಕ್ಕದ್ದು/ವರ್ಗಾಯಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು. ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಸಹಕಾರಿ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕುಗಳು ಜಮಾ ಆಗುವ ವಂತಿಗೆಯ ಮೊತ್ತವನ್ನು ಸ್ವೀಕರಿಸಿದ 7 ದಿನಗಳೊಳಗಾಗಿ ಅಪೆಕ್ಸ್ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕಿನಲ್ಲಿರುವ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್ ಖಾತೆಗೆ ಜಮಾ ಮಾಡತಕ್ಕದ್ದು/ವರ್ಗಾಯಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು. ವಿಳಂಬವಾದಲ್ಲಿ ಆ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಇಟ್ಟುಕೊಂಡ ಸಹಕಾರಿ ಸಂಘ/ಸಂಸ್ಥೆಯವರು ಬ್ಯಾಂಕಿನ ನಿಯಮಗಳ ಪ್ರಕಾರ ವಿಳಂಬದ ಅವಧಿಗೆ ಬಡ್ಡಿ ಪಾವತಿ ಮಾಡಲು ಬದ್ಧರಾಗುತ್ತಾರೆ. ಪರಿಶಿಷ್ಟ ಜಾತಿ/ ಪರಿಶಿಷ್ಟ ವರ್ಗದವರು ವಾರ್ಷಿಕ ವಂತಿಗೆ `. 50/-ನ್ನು ಪಾವತಿಸಬೇಕು ಉಳಿದ ರೂ. 250/-ನ್ನು ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ವತಿಯಿಂದ ಸಹಾಯಧನವಾಗಿ ಪಾವತಿಸಲಾಗುವುದು.

7) ಯಾವುದೇ ಒಂದು ಕುಟುಂಬದಲ್ಲಿ ಐವರು ಅಥವಾ ಅದಕ್ಕಿಂತ ಹೆಚ್ಚಿಗೆ ಕುಟುಂಬ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಗೆ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿದಲ್ಲಿ/ನವೀಕರಿಸಿದಲ್ಲಿ ಅವರು ಪಾವತಿಸಬೇಕಾದ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣದಲ್ಲಿ ಅಂದರೆ ಪ್ರತಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ ರೂ.290/-ರಲ್ಲಿ ಶೇ.15ರಷ್ಟು ರಿಯಾಯಿತಿ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಿರುತ್ತಾರೆ ಹಾಗೂ ಪರಿಶಿಷ್ಟ ಜಾತಿ / ಪರಿಶಿಷ್ಟ ಪಂಗಡದ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ `. 40/- ರಲ್ಲಿ ಶೇ.15 ರಿಯಾಯಿತಿ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಿರುತ್ತಾರೆ.

8) ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ನೋಂದಣಿಯನ್ನು ನವೀಕರಿಸುವ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿ ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರು ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಪಾವತಿಸಿ ನವೀಕರಿಸಿದ ನಂತರವೇ ಉಳಿದ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಪಡೆದು ನವೀಕರಿಸಬೇಕು. ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರು ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಪಾವತಿಸದೇ ಅವರ ಕುಟಂಬ ವರ್ಗದ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಂದ ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಪಡೆದು ಅವರ ಸದಸ್ಯತ್ವನ್ನು ನವೀಕರಿಸದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ ಅಂತಹ ಪ್ರಕರಣಗಳು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆಯನ್ನು ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹತೆ ಹೊಂದುವುದಿಲ್ಲ. 9) ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರಾಗಲು ವಯೋಮಿತಿಯ ನಿರ್ಬಂಧವು ಇರುವುದಿಲ್ಲ. 10) ನವಜಾತ ಶಿಶುವಿನ ತಾಯಿಯ ಹೆಸರು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಕಾರ್ಡ್‌ನಲ್ಲಿದ್ದರೆ 30 ದಿನಗಳವರೆಗೆ ತಾಯಿ ಹೆಸರು ಇರುವ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಕಾರ್ಡಿನ ಆಧಾರದ ಮೇಲೆ ಈ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಬರುವ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯವನ್ನು ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು. 30 ದಿನಗಳ ನಂತರದಲ್ಲಿ ಮಗುವಿನ ಹೆಸರಿನೊಂದಿಗೆ ಆ ವರ್ಷದಲ್ಲಿ ಯಾವ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿಯೂ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿಕೊಂಡು ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸವಲತ್ತು ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು.

11) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಕನಿಷ್ಠ 50.00 ಲಕ್ಷ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವ ಗುರಿ ನಿಗಧಿಪಡಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ. ಪ್ರತಿ ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಯ ಪರಿಸ್ಥಿತಿಯನ್ನು ಗಮನದಲ್ಲಿಟ್ಟುಕೊಂಡು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ನಿಬಂಧಕರು ಪ್ರತಿ ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಗೆ ಪ್ರತ್ಯೇಕ ಗುರಿ ನಿಗಧಿಗೊಳಿಸುವಂತೆ ಸೂಚಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ. 2016-17ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ 41.47 ಲಕ್ಷ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿದ್ದು, ಅವರೆಲ್ಲರನ್ನು 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ನವೀಕರಿಸಲು ಕ್ರಮ ಕೈಗೊಳ್ಳತಕ್ಕದ್ದು. 12) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ಗ್ರಾಮೀಣ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು/ನವೀಕರಣಕ್ಕೆ ಪ್ರಾರಂಭದ ದಿನಾಂಕ: 01-05-2017 ಮತ್ತು ಕೊನೆಯ ದಿನಾಂಕ: 30-06-2017 ಆಗಿರುತ್ತದೆ.

13) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳನ್ನು ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ನೊಂದಾವಣೆ ಫಾರಂ ಒದಗಿಸುವ ತನಕ 2016-17ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಸರಬರಾಜು ಮಾಡಿರುವ ಹೊಸ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಮಾತ್ರ ಉಪಯೋಗಿಸಬೇಕು ಮತ್ತು ಗುರುತಿನ ಚೀಟಿ ಒದಗಿಸಬೇಕು. ಬೇರೆ ಯಾವುದೇ ವರ್ಷಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ನೀಡಿರುವ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಉಪಯೋಗಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದಲ್ಲ. ಮೊದಲು 2016-17ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನ ಸರಬರಾಜಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಉಳಿದ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಉಪಯೋಗಿಸಬೇಕು, ಆನಂತರ ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್ಟ್‌ನಿಂದ 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ಸರಬರಾಜು ಮಾಡಿದ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಉಪಯೋಗಿಸಬೇಕು.

ಈ ವರ್ಷದ ನೋಂದಣಿಗೆ ಬೇಕಾದ ಅವಶ್ಯಕ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆಯ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಗಳ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಉಪನಿಬಂಧಕರುಗಳು ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್ ಕಛೇರಿಯಿಂದ ಪಡೆದು ಅವರ ವ್ಯಾಪ್ತಿಯ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿಗಳಿಗೆ ಫಾರಂ/ಪುಸ್ತಕಗಳನ್ನು ಹಂತಹಂತವಾಗಿ ಪೂರೈಸಿ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿ ಪಡೆಯಬೇಕು. ಒಮ್ಮೆ ಪೂರೈಸಿದ ಫಾರಂಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘದವರು ಮಾಹಿತಿಯನ್ನು ಪೂರ್ತಿಯಾಗಿ ನಮೂದಿಸಿ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಬ್ಯಾಂಕಿಗೆ ಪಾವತಿ ಮಾಡಿದ ನಂತರವೇ ಪುನಃ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಒದಗಿಸಬೇಕು. ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಕ್ಕೆ ಫಾರಂ ಪೂರೈಸುವಾಗ ಪುಸ್ತಕದ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ ಮತ್ತು ಯುನಿಕ್ ಐ.ಡಿ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆಯನ್ನು ನಮೂದಿಸಿ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿಯಿಂದ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿ ಪಡೆದುಕೊಳ್ಳಬೇಕು. ಈ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ಪರಿಶೀಲನೆಗಾಗಿ ಪ್ರತ್ಯೇಕ ಪುಸ್ತಕದಲ್ಲಿ ಬರೆದಿಟ್ಟಿರಬೇಕು. ನವೀಕರಿಸಿದವರಿಗೆ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ಐಡಿ ಕಾರ್ಡ್ ಕೊಡತಕ್ಕದಲ್ಲ, ಅವರಿಗೆ ಹಣಪಾವತಿಸಿದ್ದಕ್ಕೆ ರಶೀತಿ ಕೊಟ್ಟು, ರಶೀತಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಈಗಾಗಲೇ ಕೊಟ್ಟಿರುವ ಕಾರ್ಡ್‌ನ ಯುನಿಕ್ ಐಡಿ ನಂಬರನ್ನು ನಮೂದಿಸಬೇಕು. ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿಗಳು ನವೀಕರಣಕ್ಕಾಗಿ ಭರ್ತಿ ಮಾಡಿದ ಮತ್ತು ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಭರ್ತಿ ಮಾಡಿದ ಫಾರಂಗಳ ಕಛೇರಿ ಪ್ರತಿಯನ್ನು ಡಾಟಾ ಎಂಟ್ರಿಗೆ ಕಳುಹಿಸಬೇಕು.

14) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ನವೀಕರಣ ಮಾಡುತ್ತಿರುವ/ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರ ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬ ವರ್ಗದವರ

ಆಧಾರ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆಯನ್ನು ಪ್ರತ್ಯೇಕವಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಫಾರಂ/ ನವೀಕರಣ ರಸೀದಿಯ ಮೇಲೆ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿಯವರು

ನಮೂದಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು. 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಿಂದ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಗೆ ಆಧಾರ್ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆಯನ್ನು ನಮೂದಿಸುವುದು ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿರುತ್ತದೆ. 2016-

17ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಉಪಯೋಗಿಸುವ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿಯೂ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ಆಧಾರ್ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆಯನ್ನು ಅವರ ಹೆಸರಿನ ಮುಂದೆ

ನಮೂದಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

15) ಅರ್ಹ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳು ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳಿಂದ ನಿಗಧಿತ ವಾರ್ಷಿಕ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣ ಪಡೆದು ಹಣ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿ ರಶೀದಿಯನ್ನು ಕೊಡಬೇಕು. ಫಾರಂನಲ್ಲಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿದ ತಿಂಗಳು, ವರ್ಷ ಮತ್ತು ದಿನಾಂಕವನ್ನು ತಪ್ಪದೆ ನಮೂದಿಸಬೇಕು. ನೋಂದಾವಣೆ ಫಾರಂನ ಕೆಳಭಾಗವನ್ನು ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ ಕೊಡಬೇಕು. ಮೇಲ್ಭಾಗವನ್ನು ಡಾಟಾ ಎಂಟ್ರಿ ಮಾಡಲು ಸಂಬಂಧಿಸಿದ ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಯ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ೫೦೦ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ಭಾಗ ೧ ಉಪನಿಬಂಧಕರಿಗೆ ಪ್ರತಿ ತಿಂಗಳ ಕೊನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಸಂಗ್ರಹಿಸಿದ ವಂತಿಗೆಯ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಬ್ಯಾಂಕಿಗೆ ಜಮೆ ಮಾಡಿ ರಶೀದಿಯೊಂದಿಗೆ ಕಳುಹಿಸಬೇಕು ಮತ್ತು ಆಗಿಂದಾಗ್ಗೆ ಡಾಟಾ ಎಂಟ್ರಿ ಮಾಡಲು ಅನುಕೂಲವಾಗುವಂತೆ ಪ್ರತಿ ತಿಂಗಳ ಕೊನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸ ನೋಂದಾವಣೆ ಅರ್ಜಿ/ ನವೀಕರಣದ ವಿವರಗಳನ್ನು ಅಂದರೆ ಹೊಸ ಅರ್ಜಿಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳ ಪೋಟೋ ಅಂಟಿಸಿ, ಎಲ್ಲಾ ವಿವರಗಳೊಂದಿಗೆ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿದ ಮತ್ತು ನವೀಕರಣವಾದ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳ ತಃಖ್ತೆಯೊಂದಿಗೆ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಉಪನಿಬಂಧಕರ ಕಛೇರಿಗೆ ನೀಡಿ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿ ಪಡೆಯಬೇಕು. 16) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವವರಿಗೆ ಹೊಸ ಕಾರ್ಡುಗಳನ್ನು ಕೊಡಲಾಗುವುದು. ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ಎರಡು ಭಾವಚಿತ್ರಗಳನ್ನು ನೀಡಬೇಕು. ಕಛೇರಿ ಪ್ರತಿ ಮತ್ತು ಸದಸ್ಯರ ಪ್ರತಿಯ ಹಿಂಭಾಗದಲ್ಲಿ ಅರ್ಜಿ ಫಾರಂನಲ್ಲಿ ಕ್ರಮ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ ಅನುಗುಣವಾಗಿ ಪೋಟೋಗಳನ್ನು ಅಂಟಿಸಿ ಭಾವಚಿತ್ರದ ಕೆಳಗೆ ಅವರ ಹೆಸರನ್ನು ಬರೆಯಬೇಕು.

17) ಈಗಾಗಲೇ ಕಾರ್ಡ್ ಹೊಂದಿರುವವರು ನವೀಕರಣ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿ ವಂತಿಗೆ ತುಂಬಿ ಹೆಚ್ಚುವರಿಯಾಗಿ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ಸೇರಿಸಲು ಬಯಸಿದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ, ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರಿಗೆ ನೀಡಿರುವ ಕಾರ್ಡಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸ ವ್ಯಕ್ತಿಯ ಮಾಹಿತಿಯನ್ನು ಮುಖಪುಟದಲ್ಲಿ ಬರೆದು ಹಿಂಬದಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಪೋಟೋ ಅಂಟಿಸಬೇಕು ಹಾಗೂ ಆ್ಯಡ್-ಆನ್ ಕಾರ್ಡ್‌ನಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ಸೇರ್ಪಡೆಗೊಂಡ ವ್ಯಕ್ತಿಯ ಮಾಹಿತಿಯನ್ನು ಮುಖಪುಟದಲ್ಲಿ ಬರೆದು ಹಿಂಬದಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಪೋಟೋ ಅಂಟಿಸಬೇಕು ಮತ್ತು ಆ ಆ್ಯಡ್-ಆನ್ ಕಾರ್ಡ್‌ನ್ನು ಡಾಟಾ ಎಂಟ್ರಿಗೆ ಸಲ್ಲಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

18) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾವಣೆ/ನವೀಕರಣಗೊಂಡ/ ಸೇರ್ಪಡೆಯಾದ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳಿಗೆ ಸಂಘವು ವಾರ್ಷಿಕ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣ ಪಡೆದು ನೀಡಿರುವ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿ ರಶೀದಿಯನ್ನು ಮತ್ತು ಹೊಸ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಫಾರಂ (ಐ.ಡಿ. ಕಾರ್ಡ್) ಅನ್ನು ಸದಸ್ಯರು 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನ ಅಂತ್ಯದವರೆಗೆ ಸುರಕ್ಷಿತವಾಗಿ ಇಟ್ಟುಕೊಳ್ಳಬೇಕು ಮತ್ತು ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯವನ್ನು ಪಡೆಯುವ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿ ರಶೀದಿಯನ್ನು ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್‌ನಿಂದ ಅಂಗೀಕರಿಸಲ್ಪಟ್ಟ ಆಸ್ಪತ್ರೆಗಳಿಗೆ ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿ ಹಾಜರುಪಡಿಸಬೇಕು ಎಂಬ ತಿಳುವಳಿಕೆಯನ್ನು ಸಂಘವು ನೊಂದಾಯಿತ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ ತಿಳಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

19) ಹಿಂದಿನ ವರ್ಷಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿದ್ದ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೂ ಯೂನಿಕ್ ಐಡಿ ನೀಡಿ ಮಾಹಿತಿಯನ್ನು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ವೆಬ್‌ಸೈಟ್ www.yeshasvini.kar.nic.in ನಲ್ಲಿ ಅಳವಡಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ. ಯಾವುದೇ ಕಾರಣದಿಂದ ಹಿಂದಿನ ವರ್ಷಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ನೊಂದಾಯಿಸಿಕೊಂಡ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ನವೀಕರಿಸಿಕೊಳ್ಳದಿದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ ಅಂತಹವರು ಈ ವರ್ಷ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ಕಾರ್ಡ್ ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು.

20) ಪ್ರಾಥಮಿಕ ಕೃಷಿ ಪತ್ತಿನ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳು, ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಕೇಂದ್ರ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕುಗಳು, ಗ್ರಾಮೀಣ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳು ಮತ್ತು PCARD ಬ್ಯಾಂಕುಗಳು ತಮ್ಮ ಸಾಲಗಾರರ ಮನವೊಲಿಸಿ ಸಾಲಗಾರರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಇತರೆ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ಈ ಯೋಜನೆೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಕ್ರಮ ಕೈಗೊಳ್ಳಲು ತಿಳಿಸಿದೆ.

21) ಹಾಲು ಉತ್ಪಾದಕರ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳು, ಸಹಕಾರಿ ಸಕ್ಕರೆ ಕಾರ್ಖಾನೆಗಳು, ಸಹಕಾರಿ ನೂಲಿನ ಗಿರಣಿಗಳು ಇತ್ಯಾದಿ ಸಹಕಾರಿ ಸಂಘಗಳು ಅವರ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ ಹಣ ಪಾವತಿ ಮಾಡುವಾಗ ಅಂತಹ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಅರ್ಹ ವ್ಯಕ್ತಿಗಳನ್ನು ಮನವೊಲಿಸಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಮಾಡಬೇಕು. ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಯಾವುದೇ ಸದಸ್ಯನು ಸರ್ಕಾರಿ ನೌಕರನಾಗಿ ಅಥವಾ ಖಾಸಗಿ ಕಂಪನಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಕಾರ್ಯನಿರ್ವಹಿಸುತ್ತಿದ್ದು, ಬೇರೆ ಯಾವುದೇ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ವಿಮಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯಕ್ಕೆ ಅರ್ಹನಾಗಿದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ, ಅಂತಹವರನ್ನು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಫಲಾನುಭವಿಯಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಬಾರದು. ಆದಾಗ್ಯೂ ಯಾವುದೇ ಕಾರಣಕ್ಕಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿದರೂ ಅವರು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಾಗುವುದಿಲ್ಲ.

22) ರಾಜ್ಯದಲ್ಲಿ ಕೆಲವು ಹಾಲು ಉತ್ಪಾದಕರ ಒಕ್ಕೂಟಗಳು ಮತ್ತು ಕೆಲವು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘ/ಸಂಸ್ಥೆಗಳು ಅವುಗಳ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ವಂತಿಗೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಭಾಗಶಃ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘದ ಸ್ವಂತ ಬಂಡವಾಳದಿಂದ ಭರಿಸುತ್ತಿವೆ. ಈ ಪದ್ಧತಿಯನ್ನು ರಾಜ್ಯದ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘ ಸಂಸ್ಥೆಗಳೂ ಕೂಡ ಅನುಸರಿಸುವಂತೆ ಪ್ರೋತ್ಸಾಹಿಸಲು ಸೂಚಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ.

23) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ/ನವೀಕರಣ ಮಾಡಿಕೊಳ್ಳುವ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳು ಸುಳ್ಳು ಮಾಹಿತಿ ಮತ್ತು ಅಕ್ರಮವಾಗಿ, ಸದಸ್ಯರ ಅಥವಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ತಪ್ಪಿನಿಂದಾಗಿ ಆಗಿದ್ದರೆ, ಗೊತ್ತಿದ್ದು ಅಥವಾ ಗೊತ್ತಿಲ್ಲದೆಯೋ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಹೊಂದಿದ್ದರೆ ಅಂತಹ ವ್ಯಕ್ತಿಗಳು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯವನ್ನು ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅನರ್ಹರು ಹಾಗೂ ಪಾವತಿಸಿದ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಮುಟ್ಟುಗೋಲು ಹಾಕಿಕೊಳ್ಳಲಾಗುವುದು. ಹಾಗೆಯೇ ಅಂತಹ ಫಲಾನುಭವಿಗಳ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸದಸ್ಯತ್ವ ತಂತಾನೇ ರದ್ದುಗೊಳ್ಳುತ್ತದೆ, ಪ್ರತ್ಯೇಕ ರದ್ದತಿ ಆದೇಶದ ಅವಶ್ಯಕತೆ ಇರುವುದಿಲ್ಲ.

24) ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿನ ಮಾಹಿತಿಯನ್ನೊಳಗೊಂಡ ಬ್ರೋಚರ್‌ಗಳನ್ನು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳು 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವ/ನವೀಕರಣಗೊಳ್ಳುವ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಕಾರ್ಡ್ ಹೊಂದಿರುವ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರಿಗೆ ಕೊಡತಕ್ಕದ್ದು ಮತ್ತು ಬ್ರೋಚರನ್ನು ನೀಡಿರುವ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿಯನ್ನು ಪಡೆದು ಸಂಘದವರು ಇಟ್ಟುಕೊಳ್ಳತಕ್ಕದ್ದು. ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಬ್ರೋಚರನ್ನು ಕೇಳಿ ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿ ಪಡೆಯತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

25) ಈ ಕೆಳಕಂಡಂತೆ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯಗಳನ್ನು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ ಒದಗಿಸಲಾಗುವುದು.

A. ವಾರ್ಡ್‌ಗಳ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ : ಜನರಲ್ ವಾರ್ಡ್‌ನ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯದಲ್ಲಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನೆಟ್‌ವರ್ಕ್ ಆಸ್ಪತ್ರೆಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಅನುಮತಿಸಿದ 823 ಶಸ್ತ್ರ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆಗಳನ್ನು ಒದಗಿಸಲಾಗುವುದು. ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಸ್ಪೆಷಲ್ ವಾರ್ಡ್‌ನಲ್ಲಿ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಇಚ್ಚಿಸಿದರೆ ಅಂತಹ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಆಯಾ ಆಸ್ಪತ್ರೆಗಳು ಸ್ಪೆಷಲ್ ವಾರ್ಡ್‌ನಲ್ಲಿ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆಗೆ ನಿಗಧಿಪಡಿಸುವ ವೆಚ್ಚವನ್ನು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಿಂದ ಆಸ್ಪತ್ರೆಗೆ ದೊರಕುವ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸಾ ವೆಚ್ಚವನ್ನು ಕಳೆದು ಉಳಿದ ಮೊತ್ತವನ್ನು ಪಾವತಿಸಬೇಕು.

B. ರಿಯಾಯಿತಿ ದರದ ಹೊರರೋಗಿ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆ : 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿಯೂ ರಿಯಾಯಿತಿ ದರದಲ್ಲಿ ಅಂದರೆ `. 100/- ಸಾಮಾನ್ಯ ಹೊರರೋಗಿ ತಪಾಸಣೆಗೆ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಪಾವತಿಸಬೇಕು. ವಿಶೇಷ ಹೊರರೋಗಿ ತಪಾಸಣೆಗೆ `. 200/- ಪಾವತಿಸಬೇಕು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರು ತಪಾಸಣೆಗಾಗಿ ಪಾವತಿಸಿದ ರಶೀತಿಯ ಮೇಲೆ 3 ತಿಂಗಳವರೆಗೆ ಮೇಲೆ ಹೇಳಿದ ಹೊರರೋಗಿ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆಗಳನ್ನು ಉಚಿತವಾಗಿ ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು.

C. ಕ್ಲೀನಿಕಲ್ ಇನ್ವೆಸ್ಟಿಗೇಷನ್: 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿಯೂ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಶೇ 25 ರಿಯಾಯಿತಿ ದರದಲ್ಲಿ ನೆಟ್‌ವರ್ಕ್ ಆಸ್ಪತ್ರೆಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಕ್ಲಿನಿಕಲ್ ಮತ್ತು ಇತರೆ ತಪಾಸಣೆಗಳನ್ನು (Clinical & other Investigation) ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು.

D. ಗರಿಷ್ಟ ಮೊತ್ತದ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆ : ಆಯಾ ವರ್ಷದಲ್ಲಿ ಒಂದು ಬಾರಿ ದಾಖಲಾದರೆ `. 1.25 ಲಕ್ಷಗಳು ಮತ್ತು ಅದೇ ವರ್ಷ ಅನೇಕ ಸಾರಿ ಆಸ್ಪತ್ರೆಗೆ ದಾಖಲಾದರೆ `. 2.00 ಲಕ್ಷಗಳು

26) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಕೆಲವು ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಕ್ಕೆ ಪಾವತಿ ಮಾಡಿ, ಪೋಟೋ ಇತ್ಯಾದಿ ಅವಶ್ಯಕ ದಾಖಲೆಗಳನ್ನು ಒದಗಿಸದೆ ಇದ್ದರೆ, ಈ ಕಾರಣದಿಂದ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘದಲ್ಲಿ ಬಾಕಿ ಉಳಿದ ವಂತಿಗೆಯ ಮೊತ್ತವನ್ನು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘವು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್‌ಗೆ ನೀಡಿದ ದೇಣಿಗೆಯೆಂದು ಪರಿಗಣಿಸಿ, ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್‌ನ ಖಾತೆಗೆ ಜಮಾಮಾಡತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

27) ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವ ಅವಧಿಯು ಮುಗಿದ ಕೂಡಲೇ, ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಉಪ ನಿಬಂಧಕರುಗಳು ಆಯಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳಿಗೆ ವಿತರಿಸಿರುವ ಆದರೆ ಬಳಕೆ ಆಗದೇ ಇರುವ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಫಾರಂಗಳು ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿ 7 ದಿನಗಳೊಳಗಾಗಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳಿಂದ ವಾಪಸ್ಸು ಪಡೆದುಕೊಳ್ಳತಕ್ಕದ್ದು. ಮುಂದುವರೆದು ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಂದ ಸಂಗ್ರಹಿಸಿರುವ ವಂತಿಗೆಯ ಮೊತ್ತವನ್ನು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿಗಳು ಆಯಾ ಡಿಸಿಸಿ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕಿನಲ್ಲಿರುವ ಖಾತೆಗೆ ಜಮಾ ಮಾಡಿರುವ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ಖಾತರಿಪಡಿಸಿಕೊಳ್ಳತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

28) 2016-17ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಅವಧಿಯು ದಿನಾಂಕ: 01-06-2016 ರಿಂದ ಪ್ರಾರಂಭವಾಗಿ 31-05-2017ಕ್ಕೆ ಮುಗಿಯುತ್ತದೆ. ಈ ಸುತ್ತೋಲೆ ಅನ್ವಯ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾವಣೆಯಾಗುವ/ ಸೇರ್ಪಡೆಯಾಗುವ ಫಲಾನುಭವಿಗಳು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯವನ್ನು ದಿನಾಂಕ: 01-06-2017 ರಿಂದ ಜಾರಿಗೆ ಬರುವಂತೆ ಮಾತ್ರ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಾಗುತ್ತಾರೆ. ಆದ್ದರಿಂದ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳು ನೀಡುವ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿ ರಶೀದಿ/ಫಲಾನುಭವಿಗೆ ನೀಡುವ ನೋಂದಣಿ ನಮೂನೆ ಭಾಗದ ಪ್ರತಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಈ ಮೇಲಿನ ಅಂಶವನ್ನು ಸ್ವಷ್ಟವಾಗಿ ಬರೆಯಬೇಕು ಮತ್ತು ತಿಳುವಳಿಕೆಯನ್ನು ಸಹ ಫಲಾನುಭವಿಗೆ ನೀಡಬೇಕು.

ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಮಾರ್ಗಸೂಚಿಗಳ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ತಿಳುವಳಿಕೆ ನೀಡಲು ಆಯಾ ಪ್ರಾಂತದ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಜಂಟಿ ನಿಬಂಧಕರು ಅವರ ವ್ಯಾಪ್ತಿಯ ಇಲಾಖಾಧಿಕಾರಿಗಳ, ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕ್‌ಗಳ, ಹಾಲು ಉತ್ಪಾದಕರ ಒಕ್ಕೂಟಗಳ ಮತ್ತು ಇತರೆ ಪ್ರಮುಖ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘ/ಸಂಸ್ಥೆಗಳ ಮುಖ್ಯ ಕಾರ್ಯನಿರ್ವಾಹಣಾಧಿಕಾರಿಗಳ ಸಭೆಯನ್ನು ಪ್ರಾಂತೀಯ ಮಟ್ಟದಲ್ಲಿ ನಿರ್ವಹಿಸಲು ಸೂಚಿಸಿದೆ. ನಂತರ ದಿನಾಂಕ 30-04-2017ರೊಳಗೆ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಉಪನಿಬಂಧಕರುಗಳು ಅವರ ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಯ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಗ್ರಾಮೀಣ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಅಧ್ಯಕ್ಷರ ಮತ್ತು ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿಯವರ, ಸ್ವಸಹಾಯ ಗುಂಪು ಮತ್ತು ಸಂಬಂಧಿಸಿದ ಇಲಾಖೆಗಳ ಅಧಿಕಾರಿಗಳ ಸಭೆ ಕರೆದು ಕಾರ್ಯಾಗಾರ ಏರ್ಪಡಿಸಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಮಾರ್ಗಸೂಚಿ ನಿಯಮಗಳು, ಇತಿಮಿತಿಗಳು ಮತ್ತು ಯೋಜನೆಯಿಂದ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ ಪಡೆಯುವವರ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ಮಾಹಿತಿಯನ್ನು ನೀಡಿ, ತೆಗೆದುಕೊಂಡ ಕ್ರಮದ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ವರದಿಯನ್ನು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ನಿಬಂಧಕರಿಗೆ ಮತ್ತು ಸರ್ಕಾರಕ್ಕೆ ಸಲ್ಲಿಸಲು ಸೂಚಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ.

ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪಾಲರ ಆಜ್ಞಾನುಸಾರ ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಹೆಸರಿನಲ್ಲಿ,

ಎಂ ವೆಂಕಟಸ್ವಾಮಿ

PR - 138

ವಿಶೇಷ ಕರ್ತವ್ಯಾಧಿಕಾರಿ ಮತ್ತು ಪದನಿಮಿತ್ತ SC - 25

ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಉಪ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿ.

ಸಹಕಾರ ಇಲಾಖೆ

ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಚಿವಾಲಯ

ವಿಷಯ : 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯನ್ನು ಮುಂದುವರೆಸಲು ಹಾಗೂ ಹೊಸ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಆದೇಶ ಹೊರಡಿಸುವ ಬಗ್ಗೆ.

ಓದಲಾಗಿದೆ : ಸರ್ಕಾರಿ ಆದೇಶ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ: ಸಿಒ/163/ಸಿಎಲ್ಎಸ್/2015, ಬೆಂಗಳೂರು ದಿನಾಂಕ:15-04-2016

ಪ್ರಸ್ತಾವನೆ :

ಓದಲಾದ ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಆದೇಶದಲ್ಲಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಅನ್ವಯ 2016-17ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಆದೇಶ ಹೊರಡಿಸಲಾಗಿತ್ತು. 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ಈ ಯೋಜನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ನೋಂದಣಿ/ನವೀಕರಿಸಲು ಆದೇಶ ಹೊರಡಿಸಬೇಕಾಗುತ್ತದೆ.

ಸರ್ಕಾರಿ ಆದೇಶ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ: ಸಿಒ/695/ಸಿಎಲ್ಎಸ್/2016, ಬೆಂಗಳೂರು ದಿನಾಂಕ: 20-04-2017

ಪ್ರಸ್ತಾವನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ವಿವರಿಸಲಾದ ಅಂಶಗಳ ಹಿನ್ನಲೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘದ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬ ವರ್ಗದವರು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿಕೊಳ್ಳಲು ಅನುವಾಗುವಂತೆ ಮುಂದಿನ ಆದೇಶದವರೆವಿಗೆ ಈ ಕೆಳಕಂಡ ಆದೇಶವನ್ನು ಮಾರ್ಗಸೂಚಿಗಳೊಂದಿಗೆ ಹೊರಡಿಸಿದೆ.

ಮಾರ್ಗಸೂಚಿಗಳು :

1) ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಕಾಯ್ದೆ, 1959ರ ಅಡಿ ಅಥವಾ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ಸೌಹಾರ್ದ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಕಾಯ್ದೆ, 1997ರ ಅಡಿ ಅಥವಾ ಬಹು ರಾಜ್ಯ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಕಾಯ್ದೆ, 2002ರ ಅಡಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿರುವ ಹಾಗೂ ನಗರ, ಪಟ್ಟಣ ಪ್ರದೇಶ ಮತ್ತು ಪುರಸಭೆ ವ್ಯಾಪ್ತಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಕಾರ್ಯನಿರತವಾಗಿರುವ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳಲ್ಲಿರುವ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬವರ್ಗದವರಿಗೆ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯು ಅನ್ವಯಿಸುತ್ತದೆ. ಯೋಜನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ನೊಂದಾಯಿಸಿಕೊಳ್ಳಲು ಇಚ್ಛಿಸುವವರು ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್ ನಿಗಧಿಪಡಿಸಿದ ವಾರ್ಷಿಕ ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಪಾವತಿಸಿ ಸದಸ್ಯತ್ವ ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು. ಸಮಾಪನೆಗೊಂಡಿರುವ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ, ನಿಷ್ಕ್ರೀಯವಾದ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ, ನೌಕರರ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಸದ್ಯಸರಿಗೆ ಈ ಯೋಜನೆಯು ಅನ್ವಯವಾಗುವುದಿಲ್ಲ.

2) ಸಂಗ್ರಹವಾದ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಆಯ ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಕೇಂದ್ರ ಸಹಕಾರ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕಿನಲ್ಲಿ ತೆರೆದಿರುವ ನಗರ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಖಾತೆಗೆ ಜಮಾ ಮಾಡಬೇಕು. ಈ ಕಾರಣಕ್ಕಾಗಿ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಕೇಂದ್ರ ಸಹಕಾರ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕುಗಳು ತಮ್ಮ ತಮ್ಮ ತಾಲ್ಲೂಕು ಬ್ರಾಂಚುಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಗಾಗಿ ಪ್ರತ್ಯೇಕ ಖಾತೆ ತೆರೆಯಬೇಕು. ಆಯಾ ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಯ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಉಪನಿಬಂಧಕರು ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಕೇಂದ್ರ ಸಹಕಾರ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕುಗಳೊಡನೆ ವ್ಯವಹರಿಸಿ ನಗರ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಗಾಗಿ ಪ್ರತ್ಯೇಕ ಖಾತೆ ತೆರೆಯುವಂತೆ ಕ್ರಮವಹಿಸಬೇಕು.

3) ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಕೇಂದ್ರ ಸಹಕಾರ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕುಗಳ ವತಿಯಿಂದ ಸಂಘಟಿಸಲ್ಪಟ್ಟಿರುವ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ನಗರ ಪ್ರದೇಶದಲ್ಲಿರುವ ಸ್ವ-ಸಹಾಯ ಗುಂಪುಗಳ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬ ವರ್ಗದವರೂ ಸಹ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿಕೊಳ್ಳಲು ಅರ್ಹರಿರುತ್ತಾರೆ, ಆದರೆ ಅಂತಹ ಸ್ವಸಹಾಯ ಗುಂಪುಗಳ ರಚನೆಯಾಗಿ 3 ತಿಂಗಳು ಗತಿಸಿರಬೇಕು.

4) ಈ ಹಿಂದಿನ ಪದ್ದತಿಯಂತೆ ಪಟ್ಟಣ ಸಹಕಾರ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕುಗಳು, ಪಹಣಿಯ ಆಧಾರದ ಮೇಲೆ ನಗರವಾಸಿಗಳಿಗೆ ಗ್ರಾಮೀಣ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವುದನ್ನು ನಿಲ್ಲಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ.

5) ಅವಿಭಕ್ತ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಯಾವುದೇ ಒಬ್ಬ ಸದಸ್ಯನು/ಸದಸ್ಯಳು ಮೇಲೆ ತಿಳಿಸಿರುವ ಅರ್ಹ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘದ ಸದಸ್ಯರಾಗಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವ ದಿನಾಂಕಕ್ಕೆ 3 ತಿಂಗಳು ಕಳೆದಿರಬೇಕು ಸ್ವ-ಸಹಾಯ ಗುಂಪಿನ ಸದಸ್ಯರಾದರೆ ಅಂತಹ ಸ್ವ-ಸಹಾಯ ಗುಂಪನ್ನು ಸ್ಥಾಪಿಸಿ 3 ತಿಂಗಳು ಕಳೆದಿರಬೇಕು, ಆ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಪ್ರತಿಯೊಬ್ಬ ಸದಸ್ಯನೂ ನಿಗಧಿತ ಅವಧಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ವಾರ್ಷಿಕ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಪಾವತಿಸುವ ಮೂಲಕ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು. ಅವಿಭಕ್ತ ಕುಟುಂಬ ಅಂದರೆ ತಂದೆ, ತಾಯಿ, ಗಂಡ/ ಹೆಂಡತಿ, ಗಂಡು ಮಕ್ಕಳು/ಮದುವೆಯಾಗದ ಹೆಣ್ಣು ಮಕ್ಕಳು, ಸೊಸೆ, ಮೊಮ್ಮಕ್ಕಳೂ ಸೇರಿ ಎಂದು ಅರ್ಥೈಯಿಸುವುದು.

6) ಮದುವೆಯಾಗಿರುವ ಹೆಣ್ಣು ಮಗಳು ಹಾಗೂ ಅವಳ ಮಕ್ಕಳು ತಂದೆ/ತಾಯಿ/ಅಣ್ಣ/ತಮ್ಮ ಇವರ ಕುಟುಂಬದಲ್ಲಿಯೇ ಅಂದರೆ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರ ಕುಟುಂಬದಲ್ಲಿಯೇ ವಾಸವಾಗಿದ್ದರೆ, ಅವರ ಪಾಲಿನ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣ ಪಾವತಿಸಿದರೆ ನವೀಕರಣ/ನೋಂದಣಿಗೆ ಹಾಗೂ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಾಗಿರುತ್ತಾರೆ. ಆದಾಗ್ಯೂ, 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಅವಧಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಮದುವೆಯಾದ ಹೆಣ್ಣು ಮಗಳು ತಂದೆ/ತಾಯಿ/ಅಣ್ಣ/ತಮ್ಮ ಇವರ ಜೊತೆ ವಾಸವಾಗಿರದೆ ಸಂಘದ ಕಾರ್ಯವ್ಯಾಪ್ತಿಯ ಹೊರಗೆ ವಾಸವಿದ್ದರೆ ಅಂತಹ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿ ಮೇಲೆ ವಿವರಿಸಿದಂತೆ ಅವಿಭಕ್ತ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಸದಸ್ಯೆಯಾಗಿರದೇ ಇರುವುದರಿಂದ ಈ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯವನ್ನು ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಾಗುವುದಿಲ್ಲ.

ಆದರೆ, ಅವಳೇ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘದ ಸದಸ್ಯೆಯಾಗಿ 3 ತಿಂಗಳು ಕಳೆದಿದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ, ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದಾಗಿದೆ. ಹಾಗೂ ಮೇಲೆ ತಿಳಿಸಿರುವ ಈ ನಿರ್ಬಂಧ ಅಂಥವಳಿಗೆ ಅನ್ವಯಿಸುವುದಿಲ್ಲ. ಮದುವೆಯಾಗಿ ಗಂಡನ ಮನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ವಾಸ ಮಾಡುತ್ತಿರುವ ಹಾಗೂ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರ ಜೊತೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ವಾಸ ಮಾಡದೇ ಇರುವ ಹೆಣ್ಣು ಮಕ್ಕಳಿಂದ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳು ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಸ್ವೀಕರಿಸತಕ್ಕದಲ್ಲ.

7) 2017-18 ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಮದುವೆಯಾಗದ ಹೆಣ್ಣುಮಕ್ಕಳಿಗೆ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರು ವಂತಿಗೆ ಪಾವತಿಸಿದ್ದು, ಆನಂತರ ಮದುವೆಯಾಗಿದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ ಅಂತಹ ಮದುವೆಯಾದ ಹೆಣ್ಣು ಮಕ್ಕಳು ಪ್ರಸಕ್ತ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ 31-5-2018ರವರೆಗೆ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯವನ್ನು ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದಾಗಿದೆ.

8) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ವಾರ್ಷಿಕ ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಪ್ರತಿಯೊಬ್ಬರಿಗೆ ರೂ.710/-ಕ್ಕೆ ನಿಗಧಿಗೊಳಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ. ಈ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಪ್ರಯೋಜನ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಉದ್ದೇಶಿಸುವ ಪ್ರತಿಯೊಬ್ಬರು `. 710/- ರಂತೆ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಪ್ರತಿಯೊಬ್ಬ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿ ಪಾವತಿ ಮಾಡಬೇಕು. ಈ ಪೈಕಿ `. 10/-ನ್ನು ಸಂಘದ ಸಾದಿಲ್ವಾರು ವೆಚ್ಚಕ್ಕೆ ಮತ್ತು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಶ್ರಮಿಸಿದವರಿಗೆ ಪ್ರೋತ್ಸಾಹ ಧನವಾಗಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘ/ ಸಂಸ್ಥೆಯು ಇಟ್ಟುಕೊಂಡು, ಉಳಿದ `. 700/-ಗಳನ್ನು ಹಣ ಸ್ವೀಕರಿಸಿದ 15 ದಿನಗಳೊಳಗಾಗಿ ಸಂಬಂಧಿಸಿದ ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕುಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್ ಹೊಂದಿರುವ ನಗರ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಖಾತೆಗೆ ಜಮಾ ಮಾಡತಕ್ಕದ್ದು/ವರ್ಗಾಯಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು. ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಸಹಕಾರಿ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕುಗಳು ಜಮಾ ಆಗುವ ವಂತಿಗೆಯ ಮೊತ್ತವನ್ನು ಸ್ವೀಕರಿಸಿದ 7 ದಿನಗಳೊಳಗಾಗಿ ಅಪೆಕ್ಸ್ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕಿನಲ್ಲಿರುವ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್ ಖಾತೆಗೆ ಜಮಾ ಮಾಡತಕ್ಕದ್ದು/ವರ್ಗಾಯಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು. ವಿಳಂಬವಾದಲ್ಲಿ ಆ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಇಟ್ಟುಕೊಂಡ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘ/ಸಂಸ್ಥೆಯವರು ಬ್ಯಾಂಕಿನ ನಿಯಮಗಳ ಪ್ರಕಾರ ವಿಳಂಬದ ಅವಧಿಗೆ ಬಡ್ಡಿ ಪಾವತಿ ಮಾಡಲು ಬದ್ಧರಾಗುತ್ತಾರೆ. ಪರಿಶಿಷ್ಟ ಜಾತಿ / ಪರಿಶಿಷ್ಟ ಪಂಗಡದ ಸದಸ್ಯರು `. 110/- ಮಾತ್ರ ಪಾವತಿಸಬೇಕು ಉಳಿದ `. 600/-ಗಳನ್ನು ಸರ್ಕಾರದಿಂದ ಸಹಾಯಧನವಾಗಿ ಪಾವತಿಸಲಾಗುವುದು.

9) ಒಂದೇ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಐವರು ಅಥವಾ ಅದಕ್ಕಿಂತ ಹೆಚ್ಚಿಗೆ ಕುಟುಂಬ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿದಲ್ಲಿ/ನವೀಕರಿಸಿದಲ್ಲಿ ಅವರು ಪಾವತಿಸಬೇಕಾದ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣದಲ್ಲಿ ಅಂದರೆ ಪ್ರತಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ ರೂ.700/-ರಲ್ಲಿ ಶೇ.15 ರಿಯಾಯಿತಿ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಿರುತ್ತಾರೆ ಹಾಗೂ ಪರಿಶಿಷ್ಟ ಜಾತಿ / ಪರಿಶಿಷ್ಟ ಪಂಗಡದ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ `. 110/-ರಲ್ಲಿ ಶೇ.15 ರಿಯಾಯಿತಿ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಿರುತ್ತಾರೆ.

10) ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ನೋಂದಣಿಯನ್ನು ನವೀಕರಿಸುವ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿ ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರು ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಪಾವತಿಸಿ ನವೀಕರಿಸಿದ ನಂತರವೇ ಉಳಿದ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಪಡೆದು ನವೀಕರಿಸಬೇಕು. ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರು ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಪಾವತಿಸದೇ ಅವರ ಕುಟಂಬ ವರ್ಗದ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಂದ ವಂತಿಗೆಯನ್ನು ಪಡೆದು ಅವರ ಸದಸ್ಯತ್ವನ್ನು ನವೀಕರಿಸದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ ಅಂತಹ ಪ್ರಕರಣಗಳು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆಯನ್ನು ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹತೆ ಹೊಂದುವುದಿಲ್ಲ.

11) ನಗರ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸದಸ್ಯರಾಗಲು ವಯೋಮಿತಿಯ ನಿರ್ಬಂಧವಿರುವುದಿಲ್ಲ. 12) ನವಜಾತ ಶಿಶುವಿನ ತಾಯಿಯ ಹೆಸರು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಕಾರ್ಡ್‌ನಲ್ಲಿದ್ದರೆ 30 ದಿನಗಳವರೆಗೆ ತಾಯಿ ಹೆಸರು ಇರುವ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಕಾರ್ಡಿನ ಆಧಾರದ ಮೇಲೆ ಈ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಬರುವ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯವನ್ನು ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು. 30 ದಿನಗಳ ನಂತರದಲ್ಲಿ ಮಗುವಿನ ಹೆಸರಿನೊಂದಿಗೆ ಆ ವರ್ಷದಲ್ಲಿ ಯಾವ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿಯೂ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿಕೊಂಡು ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸವಲತ್ತು ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು.

13) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಕನಿಷ್ಠ 20.00 ಲಕ್ಷ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವ ಗುರಿ ನಿಗಧಿಪಡಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ. ಪ್ರತಿ ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಯ ಪರಿಸ್ಥಿತಿಯನ್ನು ಗಮನದಲ್ಲಿಟ್ಟು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ನಿಬಂಧಕರು ಪ್ರತಿ ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಗೆ ಪ್ರತ್ಯೇಕ ಗುರಿ ನಿಗಧಿಗೊಳಿಸುವಂತೆ ಸೂಚಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ. 2016-17ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ 2.25 ಲಕ್ಷ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿದವರೆಲ್ಲರನ್ನೂ 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನವೀಕರಿಸುವಂತೆ ಕ್ರಮ ಕೈಗೊಳ್ಳತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

14) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ನಗರ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು/ನವೀಕರಣಕ್ಕೆ ಪ್ರಾರಂಭದ ದಿನಾಂಕ: 01-05-2017 ಮತ್ತು ಕೊನೆಯ

ದಿನಾಂಕ: 30-06-2017 ಆಗಿರುತ್ತದೆ.

15) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳನ್ನು ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ನೊಂದಾವಣೆ ಫಾರಂ ಒದಗಿಸುವ ತನಕ 2016-17ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಸರಬರಾಜು ಮಾಡಿರುವ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಮಾತ್ರ ಉಪಯೋಗಿಸಬೇಕು ಮತ್ತು ಗುರುತಿನ ಚೀಟಿ ಒದಗಿಸಬೇಕು. ಬೇರೆ ಯಾವುದೇ ವರ್ಷಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ನೀಡಿರುವ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಉಪಯೋಗಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದಲ್ಲ. ಮೊದಲು 2016-17ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನ ಸರಬರಾಜಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಉಳಿದ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಉಪಯೋಗಿಸಬೇಕು, ಆನಂತರ ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್ಟ್‌ನಿಂದ 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ಸರಬರಾಜು ಮಾಡಿದ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಉಪಯೋಗಿಸಬೇಕು.

ಈ ವರ್ಷದ ನೋಂದಣಿಗೆ ಬೇಕಾದ ಅವಶ್ಯಕ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆಯ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಗಳ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಉಪನಿಬಂಧಕರುಗಳು ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್ ಕಛೇರಿಯಿಂದ ಪಡೆದು ಅವರ ವ್ಯಾಪ್ತಿಯ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿಗಳಿಗೆ ಫಾರಂ/ಪುಸ್ತಕಗಳನ್ನು ಹಂತಹಂತವಾಗಿ ಪೂರೈಸಿ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿ ಪಡೆಯಬೇಕು. ಒಮ್ಮೆ ಪೂರೈಸಿದ ಫಾರಂಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘದವರು ಮಾಹಿತಿಯನ್ನು ಪೂರ್ತಿಯಾಗಿ ನಮೂದಿಸಿ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಬ್ಯಾಂಕಿಗೆ ಪಾವತಿ ಮಾಡಿದ ನಂತರವೇ ಪುನಃ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಒದಗಿಸಬೇಕು. ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳಿಗೆ ಫಾರಂ ಪೂರೈಸುವಾಗ ಪುಸ್ತಕದ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ ಮತ್ತು ಯುನಿಕ್ ಐ.ಡಿ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆಯನ್ನು ನಮೂದಿಸಿ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿಯಿಂದ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿ ಪಡೆದುಕೊಳ್ಳಬೇಕು. ಈ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ಪರಿಶೀಲನೆಗಾಗಿ ಪ್ರತ್ಯೇಕ ಪುಸ್ತಕದಲ್ಲಿ ಬರೆದಿಟ್ಟಿರಬೇಕು. ನವೀಕರಿಸಿದವರಿಗೆ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ಐಡಿಕಾರ್ಡ್ ಕೊಡತಕ್ಕದಲ್ಲ, ಅವರಿಗೆ ಹಣಪಾವಿತಿಸಿದ್ದಕ್ಕೆ ರಶೀತಿ ಕೊಟ್ಟು, ರಶೀತಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಈಗಾಗಲೇ ಕೊಟ್ಟಿರುವ ಕಾರ್ಡ್‌ನ ಯುನಿಕ್ ಐಡಿ ನಂಬರನ್ನು ನಮೂದಿಸಬೇಕು. ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿಗಳು ನವೀಕರಣಕ್ಕಾಗಿ ಭರ್ತಿ ಮಾಡಿದ ಮತ್ತು ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಲು ಭರ್ತಿ ಮಾಡಿದ ಫಾರಂಗಳ ಕಛೇರಿ ಪ್ರತಿಯನ್ನು ಡಾಟಾ ಎಂಟ್ರಿಗೆ ಕಳುಹಿಸಬೇಕು.

16) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ನವೀಕರಣ ಮಾಡುತ್ತಿರುವ/ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರ ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬ ವರ್ಗದವರ

ಆಧಾರ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆಯನ್ನು ಪ್ರತ್ಯೇಕವಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಫಾರಂ/ ನವೀಕರಣ ರಸೀದಿಯ ಮೇಲೆ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿಯವರು

ನಮೂದಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು. 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಿಂದ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಗೆ ಆಧಾರ್ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆಯನ್ನು ನಮೂದಿಸುವುದು ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿರುತ್ತದೆ. 2016-17ನೇ

ಸಾಲಿನ ಫಾರಂಗಳನ್ನು ಉಪಯೋಗಿಸುವ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿಯೂ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ಆಧಾರ್ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆಯನ್ನು ಅವರ ಹೆಸರಿನ ಮುಂದೆ ನಮೂದಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

17) ಅರ್ಹ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳು ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳಿಂದ ನಿಗಧಿತ ವಾರ್ಷಿಕ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣ ಪಡೆದು ಸಂಘದ ಹಣ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿ ರಶೀದಿಯನ್ನು ಕೊಡಬೇಕು. ಫಾರಂನಲ್ಲಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿದ ದಿನಾಂಕವನ್ನು ತಪ್ಪದೆ ನಮೂದಿಸಬೇಕು. ನೋಂದಣಿ ಫಾರಂನ ಕೆಳಭಾಗವನ್ನು ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ ಕೊಡಬೇಕು. ಮೇಲ್ಭಾಗವನ್ನು ಡಾಟಾ ಎಂಟ್ರಿ ಮಾಡಲು ಸಂಬಂಧಿಸಿದ ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಯ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಉಪನಿಬಂಧಕರಿಗೆ ಪ್ರತಿ ತಿಂಗಳ ಕೊನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಸಂಗ್ರಹಿಸಿದ ವಂತಿಗೆಯ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಬ್ಯಾಂಕಿಗೆ ಜಮೆ ಮಾಡಿ ರಶೀದಿಯೊಂದಿಗೆ ಕಳುಹಿಸಬೇಕು ಮತ್ತು ಆಗಿಂದಾಗ್ಗೆ ಡಾಟಾ ಎಂಟ್ರಿ ಮಾಡಲು ಅನುಕೂಲವಾಗುವಂತೆ ಪ್ರತಿತಿಂಗಳ ಕೊನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಅರ್ಜಿ/ನವೀಕರಣದ ವಿವರಗಳನ್ನು ಅಂದರೆ ಹೊಸ ಅರ್ಜಿಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳ ಪೋಟೋ ಅಂಟಿಸಿ, ಎಲ್ಲಾ ವಿವರಗಳೊಂದಿಗೆ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿದ ಮತ್ತು ನವೀಕರಣವಾದ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳ ತಃಖ್ತೆಯೊಂದಿಗೆ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಉಪನಿಬಂಧಕರ ಕಛೇರಿಗೆ ನೀಡಿ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿ ಪಡೆಯಬೇಕು.

18) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವವರಿಗೆ ಹೊಸ ಕಾರ್ಡುಗಳನ್ನು ಕೊಡಲಾಗುವುದು. ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ಎರಡು ಭಾವಚಿತ್ರಗಳನ್ನು ನೀಡಬೇಕು. ಕಛೇರಿ ಪ್ರತಿ ಮತ್ತು ಸದಸ್ಯರ ಪ್ರತಿಯ ಹಿಂಭಾಗದಲ್ಲಿ ಅರ್ಜಿ ಫಾರಂನಲ್ಲಿ ಕ್ರಮ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ ಅನುಗುಣವಾಗಿ ಪೋಟೋಗಳನ್ನು ಅಂಟಿಸಿ ಭಾವಚಿತ್ರದ ಕೆಳಗೆ ಅವರ ಹೆಸರನ್ನು ಬರೆಯಬೇಕು.

19) ಈಗಾಗಲೇ ಕಾರ್ಡ್ ಹೊಂದಿರುವವರು ನವೀಕರಣ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿ ವಂತಿಗೆ ತುಂಬಿ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ಸೇರಿಸಲು ಬಯಸಿದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ, ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರಿಗೆ ನೀಡಿರುವ ಕಾರ್ಡಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸ ವ್ಯಕ್ತಿಯ ಮಾಹತಿಯನ್ನು ಮುಖಪುಟದಲ್ಲಿ ಬರೆದು ಹಿಂಬದಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಪೋಟೋ ಅಂಟಿಸಬೇಕು ಹಾಗೂ ಆ್ಯಡ್-ಆನ್ ಕಾರ್ಡ್‌ನಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ಸೇರ್ಪಡೆಗೊಂಡ ವ್ಯಕ್ತಿಯ ಮಾಹಿತಿಯನ್ನು ಮುಖಪುಟದಲ್ಲಿ ಬರೆದು ಹಿಂಬದಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಪೋಟೋ ಅಂಟಿಸಬೇಕು ಮತ್ತು ಆ ಆ್ಯಡ್-ಆನ್ ಕಾರ್ಡ್‌ನ್ನು ಡಾಟಾ ಎಂಟ್ರಿಗೆ ಸಲ್ಲಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

20) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಣಿ/ನವೀಕರಣಗೊಂಡ/ಸೇರ್ಪಡೆಯಾದ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳಿಗೆ ಸಂಘವು ವಾರ್ಷಿಕ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣ ಪಡೆದು ನೀಡಿರುವ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿ ರಶೀದಿಯನ್ನು ಮತ್ತು ಹೊಸ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಫಾರಂ (ಐ.ಡಿ. ಕಾರ್ಡ್) ಅನ್ನು ಸದಸ್ಯರು 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನ ಅಂತ್ಯದವರೆಗೆ ಸುರಕ್ಷಿತವಾಗಿ ಇಟ್ಟುಕೊಳ್ಳಬೇಕು ಮತ್ತು ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯವನ್ನು ಪಡೆಯುವ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿ ರಶೀದಿಯನ್ನು ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್‌ನಿಂದ ಅಂಗೀಕರಿಸಲ್ಪಟ್ಟ ಆಸ್ಪತ್ರೆಗಳಿಗೆ ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿ ಹಾಜರುಪಡಿಸಬೇಕು ಎಂಬ ತಿಳಿವಳಿಕೆಯನ್ನು ಸಂಘವು ನೊಂದಾಯಿತ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ ತಿಳಿಸತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

21) ಹಿಂದಿನ ವರ್ಷಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿದ್ದ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೂ ಯೂನಿಕ್ ಐಡಿ ನೀಡಿ ಮಾಹಿತಿಯನ್ನು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ವೆಬ್‌ಸೈಟ್ www.yeshasvini.kar.nic.in ನಲ್ಲಿ ಅಳವಡಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ. ಯಾವುದೇ ಕಾರಣದಿಂದ ಹಿಂದಿನ ವರ್ಷಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ನೊಂದಾಯಿಸಿಕೊಂಡ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ನವೀಕರಿಸಿಕೊಳ್ಳದಿದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ, ಅಂತಹವರು ಈ ವರ್ಷ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ಕಾರ್ಡ್ ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು.

22) ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳು ಅವರ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ ಸಾಲ ವಿತರಿಸುವ ಮತ್ತು ಇತರೆ ಸಂದರ್ಭದಲ್ಲಿ ಹಣ ಪಾವತಿ ಮಾಡುವಾಗ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ಮನವೊಲಿಸಿ ಅವರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಮಾಡಬೇಕು. ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಕುಟುಂಬದ ಯಾವುದೇ ಸದಸ್ಯನು ಸರ್ಕಾರಿ ನೌಕರನಾಗಿ ಅಥವಾ ಖಾಸಗಿ ಕಂಪನಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಕಾರ್ಯನಿರ್ವಹಿಸುತ್ತಿದ್ದು ಅಥವಾ ಬೇರೆ ಯಾವುದೇ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ವಿಮಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯಕ್ಕೆ ಅರ್ಹನಾಗಿದ್ದಲ್ಲಿ, ಅಂತಹವರನ್ನು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಫಲಾನುಭವಿಯಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಬಾರದು. ಆದಾಗ್ಯೂ ಯಾವುದೇ ಕಾರಣಕ್ಕಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸಿದರೂ ಅವರು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಾಗುವುದಿಲ್ಲ.

23) ರಾಜ್ಯದಲ್ಲಿ ಕೆಲವು ಹಾಲು ಉತ್ಪಾದಕರ ಒಕ್ಕೂಟಗಳು ಮತ್ತು ಕೆಲವು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘ/ಸಂಸ್ಥೆಗಳು ಅವುಗಳ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ವಂತಿಗೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಭಾಗಶಃ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘದ ಸ್ವಂತ ಬಂಡವಾಳದಿಂದ ಭರಿಸುತ್ತಿವೆ. ಈ ಪದ್ಧತಿಯನ್ನು ರಾಜ್ಯದ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘ ಸಂಸ್ಥೆಗಳೂ ಕೂಡ ಅನುಸರಿಸುವಂತೆ ಪ್ರೋತ್ಸಾಹಿಸಲು ಸೂಚಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ.

24) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ/ನವೀಕರಣ ಮಾಡಿಕೊಳ್ಳುವ ಸದಸ್ಯರುಗಳು ಸುಳ್ಳು ಮಾಹಿತಿ ಮತ್ತು ಅಕ್ರಮವಾಗಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರ ಅಥವಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ತಪ್ಪಿನಿಂದಾಗಿ ಆಗಿದ್ದರೆ ಗೊತ್ತಿದ್ದೋ ಅಥವಾ ಗೊತ್ತಿಲ್ಲದೆಯೋ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಹೊಂದಿದ್ದರೆ ಅಂತಹ ವ್ಯಕ್ತಿಗಳು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯವನ್ನು ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅನರ್ಹರು ಹಾಗೂ ಪಾವತಿಸಿದ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಮುಟ್ಟುಗೋಲು ಹಾಕಿಕೊಳ್ಳಲಾಗುವುದು ಹಾಗೆಯೇ ಅಂತಹ ಫಲಾನುಭವಿಗಳ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸದಸ್ಯತ್ವ ತಂತಾನೇ ರದ್ದುಗೊಳ್ಳುತ್ತದೆ, ಪ್ರತ್ಯೇಕ ರದ್ದತಿ ಆದೇಶದ ಅವಶ್ಯಕತೆ ಇರುವುದಿಲ್ಲ.

25) ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರಿಗಳ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿನ ಮಾಹಿತಿಯನ್ನೊಳಗೊಂಡ ಬ್ರೋಚರ್‌ಗಳನ್ನು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳು 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿಗೆ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವ/ನವೀಕರಣಗೊಳ್ಳುವ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಕಾರ್ಡ್ ಹೊಂದಿರುವ ಪ್ರಧಾನ ಅರ್ಜಿದಾರರಿಗೆ ಕೊಡತಕ್ಕದ್ದು ಮತ್ತು ಬ್ರೋಚರನ್ನು ನೀಡಿರುವ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿಯನ್ನು ಪಡೆದು ಸಂಘದವರು ಇಟ್ಟುಕೊಳ್ಳತಕ್ಕದ್ದು. ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಬ್ರೋಚರನ್ನು ಕೇಳಿ ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿ ಪಡೆಯತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

26) ಈ ಕೆಳಕಂಡಂತೆ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯಗಳನ್ನು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಗೆ ಒದಗಿಸಲಾಗುವುದು.

A. ವಾರ್ಡ್‌ಗಳ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ : ಜನರಲ್ ವಾರ್ಡ್‌ನ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯದಲ್ಲಿ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ನೆಟ್‌ವರ್ಕ್ ಆಸ್ಪತ್ರೆಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಅನುಮತಿಸಿದ 823 ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆಗಳನ್ನು ಒದಗಿಸಲಾಗುವುದು. ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಸ್ಪೆಷಲ್ ವಾರ್ಡ್‌ನಲ್ಲಿ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಇಚ್ಚಿಸಿದರೆ ಅಂತಹ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಆಯಾ ಆಸ್ಪತ್ರೆಗಳು ಸ್ಪೆಷಲ್ ವಾರ್ಡ್‌ನಲ್ಲಿ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆಗೆ ನಿಗಧಿಪಡಿಸುವ ವೆಚ್ಚವನ್ನು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ರೈತರ ಆರೋಗ್ಯ ರಕ್ಷಣಾ ಯೋಜನೆಯಿಂದ ಆಸ್ಪತ್ರೆಗೆ ದೊರಕುವ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸಾ ವೆಚ್ಚವನ್ನು ಕಳೆದು ಉಳಿದ ಮೊತ್ತವನ್ನು ಪಾವತಿಸಬೇಕು.

B. ರಿಯಾಯಿತಿ ದರದ ಹೊರರೋಗಿ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆ : 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿಯೂ ರಿಯಾಯಿತಿ ದರದಲ್ಲಿ ಅಂದರೆ `. 100/- ಸಾಮಾನ್ಯ ಹೊರರೋಗಿ ತಪಾಸಣೆಗೆ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಪಾವತಿಸಬೇಕು. ವಿಶೇಷ ಹೊರರೋಗಿ ತಪಾಸಣೆಗೆ `. 200/- ಪಾವತಿಸಬೇಕು ಮತ್ತು ಅವರು ತಪಾಸಣೆಗಾಗಿ ಪಾವತಿಸಿದ ರಶೀತಿಯ ಮೇಲೆ 3 ತಿಂಗಳವರೆಗೆ ಮೇಲೆ ಹೇಳಿದ ಹೊರರೋಗಿ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆಗಳನ್ನು ಉಚಿತವಾಗಿ ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು.

C. ಕ್ಲೀನಿಕಲ್ ಇನ್ವೆಸ್ಟಿಗೇಷನ್ : 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿಯೂ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಶೇ 25 ರಿಯಾಯಿತಿ ದರದಲ್ಲಿ ನೆಟ್‌ವರ್ಕ್ ಆಸ್ಪತ್ರೆಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಕ್ಲಿನಿಕಲ್ ಮತ್ತು ಇತರೆ ತಪಾಸಣೆಗಳನ್ನು (Clinical & other Investigation) ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು.

D. ಗರಿಷ್ಟ ಮೊತ್ತದ ಚಿಕಿತ್ಸೆ : ಆಯಾ ವರ್ಷದಲ್ಲಿ ಒಂದು ಬಾರಿ ದಾಖಲಾದರೆ `.1.75 ಲಕ್ಷಗಳು ಮತ್ತು ಅದೇ ವರ್ಷ ಅನೇಕ ಸಾರಿ ಆಸ್ಪತ್ರೆಗೆ ದಾಖಲಾದರೆ ರೂ. 2.50 ಲಕ್ಷಗಳು.

27) 2017-18ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನಲ್ಲಿ ಕೆಲವು ಸದಸ್ಯರು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣವನ್ನು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಕ್ಕೆ ಪಾವತಿ ಮಾಡಿ, ಪೋಟೋ ಇತ್ಯಾದಿ ಅವಶ್ಯಕ ದಾಖಲೆಗಳನ್ನು ಒದಗಿಸದೆ ಇದ್ದರೆ, ಈ ಕಾರಣದಿಂದ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘದಲ್ಲಿ ಬಾಕಿ ಉಳಿದ ವಂತಿಗೆಯ ಮೊತ್ತವನ್ನು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘವು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್‌ಗೆ ನೀಡಿದ ದೇಣಿಗೆಯೆಂದು ಪರಿಗಣಿಸಿ, ಟ್ರಸ್ಟ್‌ನ ಖಾತೆಗೆ ಜಮಾಮಾಡತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

28) ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯಡಿ ಸದಸ್ಯರನ್ನು ನೋಂದಾಯಿಸುವ ಅವಧಿಯು ಮುಗಿದ ಕೂಡಲೇ, ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಉಪ ನಿಬಂಧಕರುಗಳು ಆಯಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳಿಗೆ ವಿತರಿಸಿರುವ ಆದರೆ ಬಳಕೆ ಆಗದೇ ಇರುವ ನೋಂದಣಿ ಫಾರಂಗಳು ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿ 7 ದಿನಗಳೊಳಗಾಗಿ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳಿಂದ ವಾಪಸ್ಸು ಪಡೆದುಕೊಳ್ಳತಕ್ಕದ್ದು. ಮುಂದುವರೆದು ಸದಸ್ಯರಿಂದ ಸಂಗ್ರಹಿಸಿರುವ ವಂತಿಗೆಯ ಮೊತ್ತವನ್ನು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿಗಳು ಆಯಾ ಡಿಸಿಸಿ ಬ್ಯಾಂಕಿನಲ್ಲಿರುವ ಖಾತೆಗೆ ಜಮಾ ಮಾಡಿರುವ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ಖಾತರಿಪಡಿಸಿಕೊಳ್ಳತಕ್ಕದ್ದು.

29) 2016-17ನೇ ಸಾಲಿನ ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಅವಧಿಯು ದಿನಾಂಕ: 01-06-2016 ರಿಂದ ಪ್ರಾರಂಭವಾಗಿ 31-05-2017ಕ್ಕೆ ಮುಗಿಯುತ್ತದೆ.

ಆದ ಕಾರಣ ಈ ಆದೇಶದನ್ವಯ ಹೊಸದಾಗಿ ನೋಂದಣಿಯಾಗುವ/ಸೇರ್ಪಡೆಯಾಗುವ ಫಲಾನುಭವಿಗಳು ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯವನ್ನು ದಿನಾಂಕ:01-06-2017 ರಿಂದ ಜಾರಿಗೆ ಬರುವಂತೆ ಮಾತ್ರ ಪಡೆಯಲು ಅರ್ಹರಾಗುತ್ತಾರೆ. ಆದ್ದರಿಂದ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳು ನೀಡುವ ವಂತಿಗೆ ಹಣ ಸ್ವೀಕೃತಿ ರಶೀದಿ/ಫಲಾನುಭವಿಗೆ ನೀಡುವ ನೋಂದಣಿ ನಮೂನೆ ಭಾಗದ ಪ್ರತಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಈ ಮೇಲಿನ ಅಂಶವನ್ನು ಸ್ವಷ್ಟವಾಗಿ ಬರೆಯಬೇಕು ಮತ್ತು ತಿಳುವಳಿಕೆಯನ್ನು ಕೂಡ ಫಲಾನುಭವಿಗೆ ನೀಡಬೇಕು.

ಯಶಸ್ವಿನಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಮಾರ್ಗಸೂಚಿಗಳ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ತಿಳುವಳಿಕೆ ನೀಡಲು ಆಯಾ ಪ್ರಾಂತದ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಜಂಟಿ ನಿಬಂಧಕರು ಅವರ ವ್ಯಾಪ್ತಿಯ ಇಲಾಖಾಧಿಕಾರಿಗಳ, ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಪಟ್ಟಣ ಸಹಕಾರ ಮತ್ತು ಇತರೆ ಪ್ರಮುಖ ಪಟ್ಟಣ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘ/ಸಂಸ್ಥೆಗಳ ಮುಖ್ಯ ಕಾರ್ಯನಿರ್ವಾಹಣಾಧಿಕಾರಿಗಳ ಸಭೆಯನ್ನು ಪ್ರಾಂತ, ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಹಾಗೂ ತಾಲ್ಲೂಕು ಮಟ್ಟದಲ್ಲಿ ನಿರ್ವಹಿಸಲು ಸೂಚಿಸಿದೆ. ನಂತರ ದಿನಾಂಕ:30-04-2017 ರೊಳಗೆ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ಜಿಲ್ಲಾ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಉಪನಿಬಂಧಕರುಗಳು ಅವರ ಜಿಲ್ಲೆಯ ಎಲ್ಲಾ ನಗರ ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ಅಧ್ಯಕ್ಷರ ಮತ್ತು ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿಯವರ, ಸ್ವಸಹಾಯ ಗುಂಪು ಮತ್ತು ಸಂಬಂಧಿಸಿದ ಇಲಾಖೆಗಳ ಅಧಿಕಾರಿಗಳ ಸಭೆ ಕರೆದು ಕಾರ್ಯಾಗಾರ ಏರ್ಪಡಿಸಿ ಯೋಜನೆಯ ಮಾರ್ಗಸೂಚಿ ನಿಯಮಗಳು, ಇತಿಮಿತಿಗಳು ಮತ್ತು ಯೋಜನೆಯಿಂದ ಸೌಲಭ್ಯ ಪಡೆಯುವವರ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ಮಾಹಿತಿಯನ್ನು ನೀಡಿ, ತೆಗೆದುಕೊಂಡ ಕ್ರಮದ ಬಗ್ಗೆ ವರದಿಯನ್ನು ಸಹಕಾರ ಸಂಘಗಳ ನಿಬಂಧಕರಿಗೆ ಮತ್ತು ಸರ್ಕಾರಕ್ಕೆ ಸಲ್ಲಿಸಲು ಸೂಚಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ.

ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪಾಲರ ಆಜ್ಞಾನುಸಾರ ಮತ್ತು ಅವರ ಹೆಸರಿನಲ್ಲಿ, PR - 139

ಎಂ ವೆಂಕಟಸ್ವಾಮಿ

SC - 25

ವಿಶೇಷ ಕರ್ತವ್ಯಾಧಿಕಾರಿ ಮತ್ತು ಪದನಿಮಿತ್ತ ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಉಪ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿ.

ಸಹಕಾರ ಇಲಾಖೆಭಾಗ ೧ ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೦೫ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೧, ೨೦೧೭ ೧

ಶಿಕ್ಷಣ ಸಚಿವಾಲಯ

ವಿಷಯ : ಅಂಗೀಕೃತ ವಾಣಿಜ್ಯ ಮತ್ತು ಗಣಕ ಯಂತ್ರ ಶಾಲೆಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಬೋಧಿಸುತ್ತಿರುವ ಗಣಕಯಂತ್ರ ಶಿಕ್ಷಣದ ಪರಿಷ್ಕøತ ಪಠ್ಯಕ್ರಮ ಮತ್ತು ಪಠ್ಯಪುಸ್ತಕಗಳ ಅನುಮೋದನೆ ಕುರಿತು.

ಓದಲಾಗಿದೆ: 1. ನಿರ್ದೇಶಕರು(ಪ್ರೌಡಶಿಕ್ಷಣ), ಆಯುಕ್ತರ ಕಛೇರಿ, ಸಾರ್ವಜನಿಕ ಶಿಕ್ಷಣ ಇಲಾಖೆ, ಬೆಂಗಳೂರು ಇವರ ಪ್ರಸ್ತಾವನೆ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ:ವಾಶಿ/ಇತರೆ 43/ 2015-16 ದಿನಾಂಕ:18.01.2017.

2. ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಆದೇಶ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ:ಇಡಿ 02 ಎಲ್‌ಸಿಇ 2006 ದಿನಾಂಕ:30.12.2006.

3. ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಆದೇಶ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ:ಇಡಿ 38 ಎಲ್‌ಸಿಇ 2008 ದಿನಾಂಕ:10.02.2009.

ಪ್ರಸ್ತಾವನೆ : -

ಮೇಲೆ ಓದಲಾದ ಕ್ರಮಾಂಕ[2]ರ ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಆದೇಶದಲ್ಲಿ ಬೆರಳಚ್ಚು/ಶೀಘ್ರಲಿಪಿ ವಿಷಯದ ಜೊತೆಗೆ ಗಣಕ ಯಂತ್ರ ಶಿಕ್ಷಣವನ್ನು ಷರತ್ತುಗಳನ್ವಯ ಅಳವಡಿಸಿಕೊಳ್ಳಲು ಹಾಗೂ ಗಣಕ ಯಂತ್ರ ಪರೀಕ್ಷೆಯನ್ನು ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ಪ್ರೌಡಶಿಕ್ಷಣ ಪರೀಕ್ಷಾ ಮಂಡಳಿಯು ನಡೆಸಲು ಅನುಮತಿ ನೀಡಲಾಗಿರುತ್ತದೆ, ಕ್ರಮಾಂಕ[3]ರ ಸರ್ಕರದ ಆದೇಶದಲ್ಲಿ ಪಠ್ಯಾವಳಿ ಸಮಿತಿಯು ತಯಾರಿಸಿರುವ ಗಣಕ ಯಂತ್ರ ಶಿಕ್ಷಣದ ಪಠ್ಯವನ್ನು ಮತ್ತು ಪಠ್ಯಕ್ರಮವನ್ನು ಅನುಮೋದಿಸಲಾಗಿರುತ್ತದೆ, ಹಾಲಿ ಜಾರಿಯಲ್ಲಿರುವ ಗಣಕ ಯಂತ್ರ ಶಿಕ್ಷಣದ ಪಠ್ಯಕ್ರಮದಿಂದ ಪ್ರಸ್ತುತ ಪರಿಸ್ಥಿತಿಗೆ ವಿದ್ಯಾರ್ಥಿಗಳಿಗೆ ಹೆಚ್ಚು ಉಪಯುಕ್ತವಾಗುತ್ತಿಲ್ಲವೆಂದು ತಿಳಿಸಿ ನಿರ್ದೇಶಕರು(ಪ್ರೌಡಶಿಕ್ಷಣ), ಆಯುಕ್ತರ ಕಛೇರಿ, ಸಾರ್ವಜನಿಕ ಶಿಕ್ಷಣ ಇಲಾಖೆ, ಬೆಂಗಳೂರು ರವರು ಕ್ರಮಾಂಕ[1]ರ ಅಂಗೀಕೃತ ವಾಣಿಜ್ಯ ಮತ್ತು ಗಣಕ ಯಂತ್ರ ಶಾಲೆಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಬೋಧಿಸುತ್ತಿರುವ ಗಣಕಯಂತ್ರ ಶಿಕ್ಷಣದ ಪರಿಷ್ಕøತ ಪಠ್ಯಕ್ರಮ ಮತ್ತು ಪಠ್ಯಪುಸ್ತಕಗಳ ಕರಡನ್ನು ಅನುಮೋದನೆಗೆ ಕೋರಿರುತ್ತಾರೆ, ನಿರ್ದೇಶಕರ ಪ್ರಸ್ತಾವನೆಯನ್ನು ಪರಿಶೀಲಿಸಿ, ಅದರಂತೆ ಈ ಕೆಳಕಂಡ ಆದೇಶ.

ಸರ್ಕಾರಿ ಆದೇಶ ಸಂಖ್ಯೆ:ಇಡಿ 34 ಎಸ್ಓಹೆಚ್ 2017, ಬೆಂಗಳೂರು, ದಿನಾಂಕ: 18ನೇ ಮಾರ್ಚ್ 2017

ಪ್ರಸ್ತಾವನೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ವಿವರಿಸಿರುವ ಅಂಶಗಳ ಹಿನ್ನೆಲೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ರಾಜ್ಯದ ಅಂಗೀಕೃತ ವಾಣಿಜ್ಯ ಮತ್ತು ಗಣಕ ಯಂತ್ರ ಶಾಲೆಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಬೋಧಿಸುತ್ತಿರುವ ಗಣಕಯಂತ್ರ ಶಿಕ್ಷಣದ ವಿಷಯಗಳಾದ ಕಂಪ್ಯೂಟರ್ ಗ್ರಾಫಿಕ್ಸ್ ಮತ್ತು ಕಂಪ್ಯೂಟರ್ ಆಟೋಮೇಷನ್ ಪಠ್ಯಕ್ರಮ ಮತ್ತು ಪಠ್ಯಪುಸ್ತಕದ ಕರಡನ್ನು ಸರ್ಕಾರವು ಅನುಮೋದಿಸಿದೆ.

ವಿ.ಟಿ.ರಾಜ್ಯಶ್ರೀ

ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಅಧೀನ ಕಾರ್ಯದರ್ಶಿ,

ಶಿಕ್ಷಣ ಇಲಾಖೆ. [ಪ್ರೌಡಶಿಕ್ಷಣ].

ಪರಿಷ್ಕøತ ಪಠ್ಯವಸ್ತುವಿನಂತೆ

ಸಿದ್ದಪಡಿಸಿರುವ ಗಣಕಯಂತ್ರ

ಶಿಕ್ಷಣ ಪಠ್ಯಪುಸ್ತಕ

ಆಫೀಸ್ ಆಟೋಮೇಶನ್

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER- 1 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS 2

Introduction

2 Computer - applications

Advantages of computer

Disadvantages of computer

2 3 3 Parts of computer

Hardware and software

Programming languages

Generations of computer.

History of computer

Classification of computer

Setting up and working of a computer

3 9 10 11 11 12 14 CHAPTER – 2 OPERATING SYSTEM

17 Introduction

Introduction to windows 7

Features of windows 7

The desktop

Computer screen

Quick search

Disk management

Burning data to a cd

17 18 19 22 25 25 26 27 Internet security

Windows sidebar

Gadgets

Different buttons used in windows

27 28 29 29 CHAPTER -3 FREE SOFTWARE

31 Calculator

Notepad

31 31 Paint brush

The ribbon

How to save a cutout

33 34 37 Word pad

38 CHAPTER - 4 WORD 2007

41 The office button

Parts of ms word 2007 window

The ribbon

Quick access & status bar

41 42 42 44 Home tab

44ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೦೭

Insert tab

Page layout tab

Reference tab

Create a table of contents

Insert table of figures

Mailings tab

Review tab

View tab

46 50 51 52 53 53 55 57 CHAPTER - 5 EXCEL 2007

62 Introduction

Ms excel window

Office button options:

Home tab

Insert tab

Page layout tab

62 63 63 64 68 71 Formulas tab

Text functions:

Data tab

72 72 79 Review tab

View tab

88 88 CHAPTER - 6 POWERPOINT 2007

91 Introduction

The office logo

The home tab

91 92 93 Insert tab

Design tab

Animations tab

94 94 94 Slide show tab

Review tab

View tab

95 96 96 Applying theme:

Layout

Slide transitions

97 98 98 Formatting slide design

Master slides

Animation schemes

99 100 102 Layout

Rehearse timing

103 103 CHAPTER – 7 INTERNET

106 Introduction

106 Application of internet

106ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೦೮ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭

Advantages of internet

Network:

Browsing software:

Modem (modulator and demodulator):

Isp's (internet service providers):

What is an e-mail ?

What is a website?

Web page:

106 108 108 108 108 109 109 109 Networking

Expansions

E-mail (electronic mail ) :

110 110 110 Surfing or browsing

Download

Search for relevant information

111 111 111 Book tickets

Shop online

Make friends

111 112 112 8. E banking

10. Online freelancer

Disadvantages of the internet

112 112 113 CHAPTER – 8 NUDI

116 CHAPTER -9 ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE 122 Introduction to tally erp.9

Tally user classification

122 122 Accounting

Basic accounting terms

Double entry systems of accounting :

Get started with tally:

Accounts group

Voucher:-

123 125 126 127 128 133 Reports in tally

Financial statements :

Budgets

145 146 149 Shortcut Keys

151ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೦೯ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS

COMPUTER

FUNDAMENTALS1 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೧೦ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS

CHAPTER- 1 COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS

INTRODUCTION

Are you new to computers? Do you wonder what they do and why you would want to use one?

This article gives an overview of computers: what they are, the different types, and what you can do with them.

What are Computers?

Computers are machines that perform tasks or calculations according to a set of instructions, or programs. The first fully electronic computers, introduced in the 1940s, were huge machines that required teams of people to operate. Compared to those early machines, today's computers are amazing.

Not only they are thousands times faster, they can fit on your desk, in on your lap, or even in your pocket.

Computers work through an interaction of Hardware and Software. Hardware refers to the physical parts of a computer that you can see and touch, including the case and everything inside it. The most important piece of hardware is a tiny rectangular chip inside your computer called the Central Processing Unit (CPU), or microprocessor. It is called as "brain of computer"—the part that translates instructions and performs calculations. Hardware items such as your monitor, keyboard, mouse, printer, and other items are often called hardware devices. The set of programs or instructions given to the computer to carry out a task is called program. The software is classified into System software and Application software. The System software acts as a bridge between user and computer hardware. The Word Processing program that you can use to write letters on your computer is a type of Application Software. The Operating System (OS) is a System software that manages your computer and the devices connected to it. Two well-known operating systems are Windows and Macintosh operating system. Your computer uses the Windows operating system.

COMPUTER - APPLICATIONS

Following list demonstrates the various applications of Computers.

• Business: The computer's characteristics such as high speed of calculation, diligence, accuracy, reliability, or versatility has made it an integrated part in all business organizations.

• Banking: Today Banking is totally dependent on computer for online transactions and other calculations.

• Insurance: Insurance companies are keeping all records up to date with the help of computer. The Insurance Companies, Finance houses and Stock broking firms are widely using computers for their concerns. Even these companies are transacting online.

• Education The computer has provided a lot of facilities in the Education System. • Marketing With computers, advertising professionals create art and graphics, write and revise copy, and print and disseminate ads with the goal of selling more products. • Health Care: Computers have become important part in all medical fields. • Engineering Design: Computers are widely used in engineering purposes. • Military Computers are largely used in defense. Modern tanks, missiles, weapons etc. employ computerized control systems.

• Communication: Communication means to convey a message, an idea, a picture or speech that is received and understood clearly and correctly by the person for whom it is meant.

• Government Applications: Computers play an important role in government applications like sales tax department, income tax department and computerization of voters list, etc.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS ADVANTAGES OF COMPUTER

1. Speed: It performs all the calculation within nano-seconds. (1/billionth part of a second.) 2. Accuracy: Computer can do all calculations without any error and gives 100% correct results. 3. Large Storage Capacity: It stores huge quantity of data in its memory.

4. Diligence: Computer will not get tired even if it works for 24 hours continuously. 5. Communication & Security: We can communicate & protect our documents from other user by storing it in more secured way..

DISADVANTAGES OF COMPUTER

1. It creates unemployment.

2. If we work for 24 Hrs with the computer we may get headache, eye strain etc. 3. Needs electricity to work with computers.

4. The data stored on a computer can be accessed by unauthorized persons through networks. It has created serious problems for the data security. Data security has to be provided.

5. The computer manufacturing processes and computer waste are polluting the environment. The wasted parts of computer can release dangerous toxic materials. Green computer is a method to reduce the electricity consumed and environmental waste generated when using a computer. It includes recycling and regulating manufacturing processes. The used computers must be donated or disposed of properly.

PARTS OF COMPUTER

If you use a desktop computer, you might already know that there isn't any single part called the "Computer." A computer is really a system of many parts working together.

The illustration below shows the most common hardware in a desktop computer system. Your system may look a little different, but it probably has most of these parts. A laptop computer has similar parts but combines them into a single notebook-sized package.

Desktop computer system

To work with computer we should have two important equipments: Hardware and Software.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS Block diagram of a computer

C.P.U

a. Input Unit: Input devices are those devices that can be used to insert data, instructions or information into a computer. A few input devices are Mouse, Keyboard, Microphone, Joystick and Scanner.

b. Central Processing Unit. (C.P.U) : It processes the information received from the user.

C.P.U. Central Processing Unit. (Brain of Computer)

M.U Memory Unit.

A.L.U Arithmetic and Logical Unit.

C.U Control Unit.

c. Output Unit: it sends the processed data to user.

INPUT DEVICES

Keyboard

We give data or instructions to a computer using

input devices. A Keyboard is used to enter data into a

computer. There are different types of keys and their functions: • Typing keys: They include letters, numbers,

symbols, punctuations and space bar.

• Control keys: Control key, alt key, the windows logo key and the escape key are the control keys. These keys are used alone or in combination with the other

keys to perform certain actions.

• Function keys: These are labeled as f1, f2, f3, f4 and so on up to f12. The functionality of these keys differs from program to program and is used to perform specific actions.

• Navigation Keys: It means locating position. It helps you to move around in documents, data sheets, presentations or WebPages and edit text. These include the arrow keys, home, end page up, page down, delete and insert.

• The Numeric keypad is designed like a conventional calculator used to input numbers.

Mouse ( Manually Operating User Symbolic Encoder)

A mouse is used as a pointing device to point to and interact with

items on the computer screen. When you move the mouse, you can see a small moving arrow - this is called the 'pointer'. The pointer's

appearance might change depending on where it is positioned on your screen. The pointer can provide data or instructions to the computer for processing. A mouse has two buttons - left and right. It also includes a scroll wheel between the two buttons that helps you to move between documents and Web- pages more easily4 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೧೩ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS .

Joystick

Joystick is a device which is used to move cursor position on a

monitor screen. It is a stick having a spherical ball at its both lower and

upper ends. The lower spherical ball moves in a socket. The Joystick can be

moved in all four directions. The function of joystick is similar to that of a mouse. It is mainly used for playing computer games.

Light Pen

Light pen is a pointing device which is similar to a pen. It is used to select a displayed menu item or draw pictures on the monitor screen. It consists of a photocell and an optical system placed in a small tube. When light pen's tip is moved over the monitor screen and pen button is pressed, its photocell sensing element detects the screen location and sends the corresponding signal to the CPU.

Track Ball

Track ball is an input device that is mostly used in notebook or

laptop instead of a mouse. This is a ball which is half inserted and by

moving fingers on ball, pointer can be moved. Since the whole device is not

moved, a track ball requires less space than a mouse. A track ball comes in

various shapes like a ball, a button or a square.

Scanner

Scanner is an input device which works more like a photocopy machine. It is used when some information is available on a paper and it has to store in computer for further manipulation. Scanner captures images from the source which are then converted into the digital form that can be stored on the disc. These images can be edited before they are printed.

Scanners are classified into

• Flat-Bed Scanner: Flat-bed scanners are some of the most commonly used scanners as it has both home and office functions. The way they scan

documents is that a mechanism rolls under the document to obtain the image.

For businesses that have a need for high processing abilities, the flat-bed

scanner can scan any number of documents with a click of a button.

• Sheet-Fed Scanner: Here the image is fed through the scanner and moves

along the beam to be read rather than the beam moving. This type is not useful for books, but only for single sheets.

• Drum Scanner: These types of scanners are used mainly for capturing a picture and producing at a very high resolution rate. There are only a few companies that make these scanners, considering the high cost of producing a scanner such as this. It is considered a tremendous upgrade to a regular flat-bed scanner

• Portable Scanner: Portable scanner are designed to capture text and other data while you are on the go. The scanner is powered by batteries and once you scan the text, the content is stored on the portable scanner. Once you get home, you can transfer the content to a computer. Transferring to your computer is done by using a cable or a wireless connection.

• Integrated Scanner: Integrated scanners are becoming one of the most modern types of scanners when it comes to obtaining images. ATMs feature this type of built-in scanner for check-processing and approval.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS Magnetic Ink Card Reader (MICR)

MICR input device is generally used in banks as there are a

large number of cheques to be processed every day. The bank's code

number and cheque number are printed on the cheques with a special

type of ink that contains particles of magnetic material that are

machine readable. This reading process is called Magnetic Ink

Character Recognition (MICR). The main advantage of MICR is that it is fast and less error prone.

Optical Character Reader (OCR)

OCR is an input device used to read a printed text. OCR scans text optically character by character, converts them into a machine readable code and stores the text on the system memory.

Optical Mark Reader (OMR)

OMR is a special type of optical scanner used to recognize the type of

mark made by pen or pencil. It is used where one out of a few alternatives is to be

selected and marked. It is specially used for checking the answer sheets of examinations having multiple choice questions.

Bar Code Readers

Bar Code Reader is a device used for reading bar

coded data (data in form of light and dark lines). Bar coded

data is generally used in labeling goods, numbering the

books etc. It may be a hand held scanner or may be embedded in a stationary scanner. Bar Code Reader scans a bar code image, converts it into an alphanumeric value which is then fed to the computer.

CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (C.P.U) / SYSTEM UNIT

The system unit is the core of a Computer System.

Usually it is a rectangular box placed on your desk. Inside

this box are many electronic components that process

information. The most important of these components is the central processing unit (CPU), or Microprocessor,

which is also called as "brain of computer". Another

component is Random Access Memory (RAM), which

temporarily stores information that the CPU uses while the computer is on. The information stored in RAM will be

erased when the computer is turned off.

Almost every other part of your computer connects

to the System unit using cables. The cables plug into specific ports (openings), typically on the back of the system unit. Hardware that is not part of the system unit is sometimes called a peripheral device or device.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS Arithmetic And Logic Unit (ALU)

An arithmetic and logic unit (ALU) is a digital circuit that performs integer arithmetic and logical calculations. The ALU is a fundamental building block of the central processing unit of a computer. The processors found inside modern CPUs and graphics processing units (GPUs) accommodate very powerful and very complex ALUs.

Control Unit

The control unit of the CPU contains circuit that uses electrical signals to direct the entire computer system to carry out stored program instructions. The control unit does not execute program instructions; rather, it directs other parts of the system to do so. The control unit must communicate with both the arithmetic/logic unit and memory. It acts as a nervous system in our body.

Micro Processor

It is a multipurpose, programmable device that accepts digital data as input,

processes it according to instructions stored in its memory, and provides results as

output. A microprocessor incorporates the functions of a computer's central

processing unit (CPU) on a single integrated circuit (IC), or at most a few integrated

circuits.

A microprocessor -- also known as a CPU or central processing unit -- is a

complete computation engine that is fabricated on a single chip. The first microprocessor was the Intel 4004, introduced in 1971. The 4004 was not very powerful -- all it could do was add and subtract, and it could only do that 4 bits at a time. But it was amazing that everything was on one chip. Prior to the 4004, engineers built computers either from collections of chips or from discrete components (transistors wired one at a time). The 4004 powered one of the first portable electronic calculators.

MEMORY / STORAGE UNIT

When you know something, it is stored in your memory. In the same way, the place where computer stores data and programs is called Computer Memory. Computer has 2 types of Memory - Primary/ Main Memory and Secondary Memory. The main memory is very fast. It is called Random Access Memory or RAM. Data and instructions are stored in the main memory from where it can be retrieved from CPU for processing results. RAM is the memory in which all the programs are stored during execution. The speed of the computer depends on the RAM. Cache memory is a memory that is a part of RAM and is very close to the processor. It is used to improve processing speed. The primary memory is limited in size as it is expensive. so to store unlimited data we use secondary memory. Any data or program that is kept in secondary memory has to be copied by RAM because the computer cannot process data directly on secondary memory. The examples of Secondary Memory are – Pen Drives, Hard Disk, Floppy Disk, Magnetic Tapes, Magnetic Bubble Memories and Optical Memories.

How does a computer store data in its memory?

Computer stores all information in 0's and 1's (i.e., using binary number system). A single binary digit, i.e., a 1 or a 0 is called a bit. A group of eight bits is called a byte.

Unit Description

Bit

1 bit = 1 or 0

Byte

1 B = 8 bits

Kilobyte (KB) 1 KB = 1024 Bytes

Megabyte (MB) 1 MB = 1024 KB

Gigabyte (GB) 1 GB = 1024 MB

Terabyte (TB 1 TB = 1024 GB

PetaByte (PB) 1 PB = 1024 TB7 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೧೬ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS

Floppy disk drive

Floppy disk was developed in 1970's they are cheap and faster storage

media. It stores less information and it is portable. The disk is made up of Ferro

Magnetic Oxide and covered with Mylar plastic cover to prevent from dust and

finger prints. To store the information the internal disk is divided into number of concentric circles called as Tracks. And sub divided into segments called as Sectors.

A disk can store information on both sides. Now a days floppy disks are not used.

Hard Disk Drive

Your computer's hard disk drive

stores information on a hard disk, a rigid platter or stack of platters with a magnetic

surface. Because hard disks can hold

massive amounts of information, they

usually serve as your computer's primary means of storage, holding almost all of your

programs and files. The hard disk drive is

normally located inside the system unit. We

can find different capacity of Hard disks like 10 GB, 20 GB, 40 GB, 80 GB, 160 GB,

500GB, 1000 GB,1TB etc.,

CD and DVD drives

Nearly all computers today come equipped with a CD or DVD drive,

usually located on the front panel of the system unit. CD drives use lasers to

read (retrieve) data from a CD, and many CD drives can also write (record)

data onto CDs. If you have a recordable disk drive, you can store copies of your

files on blank CDs. You can also use a CD drive to play music CDs on your computer. It can store 640MB To 720MB; DVD drives can do everything that

CD drives can, plus read DVDs. If you have a DVD drive, you can watch movies on your computer.

Many DVD drives can record data onto blank DVDs. DVD can store up to 16 G.B

Pen drive It is an external storage device, in which we can store the information

from 256 M.B to 1 TB, which can be connected to USB ports in the CPU.

OUTPUT DEVICES

Output devices are used to display the result to the user. The main output devices are Monitor, Printer, Speaker, Headphones and Projector. Following are few of the important output devices which are used in Computer Systems

Monitor

A monitor displays information in visual

form, using text and graphics. The portion of the

monitor that displays the information is called the

screen. Like a television screen, a computer screen can show still or moving pictures, text.

There are three basic types of monitors: • CRT (cathode ray tube) Monitors, • LCD (liquid crystal display) Monitors and LCD monitor (left); CRT monitor8 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS • LED (Light Emitting Device) Monitors.

CRT monitors, however, are generally more affordable but occupies more space and power.

LCD and LED monitors have the advantage of being much thinner and lighter and they consume less power.

Printer

A printer transfers data from a computer onto paper. You don't need a printer to use your computer, but having one allows you to print e‑mail, cards,

invitations, announcements, and other materials. Many people also like being

able to print their own photos at home.

A. Impact Printer: These printers are made up of electro mechanical mechanism. In this printer needles or hammers were used to get the printout.

These printers are slow printers. There are two types in Impact Printer.

• Character Printer: Character Printer prints character by character at a time. It is also known as Serial Printer. Ex: Dot Matrix, Daisy Wheel.

• Line Printer: This printer prints line by line. Ex: Drum printer, Chain printer.

B. Non Impact Printer: These are the printers made up of Electronic Mechanism in which Thermal Rays are used to get the printout. These printers are fast printers.

• Page Printer: This Printer prints page by page. Ex: Laser Printer, Inkjet Printer

The two main types of printers are Inkjet printers and Laser printers. Inkjet printers are the most popular printers for use at home. They can print in black and white or in full color and can produce high-quality photographs when used with special paper. Laser printers are faster and generally better able to handle heavy use.

Speakers

Speakers are used to play sound. They may be built into the system unit or

connected with cables. Speakers allows you to listen to music.

Headphones

Headphones give sound output from the computer. They are similar to speakers except that they are worn on the ears, so that only one person can hear the output at a time.

Projectors

Projector is an output device with which a text or an image is projected onto a flat screen. A projector is often used in meetings or to make presentations. It allows the display to be visible to many people.

HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE

All physical components of a computer that can be touched or felt are called Hardware. The electronic circuits and mechanical components such as Hard Disk, Printer, CPU, Keyboard and Mouse are Hardware. Hardware devices are very important but they are useless without the instructions that control them. The Instructions that are used to control hardware and accomplish tasks are called Software. Software is a general term used for computer programs. These programs are planned step- by--step set of instructions that direct the computer what to do and how to do. There are two types of software : Application Software and System Software.

Application Software: An application is a job or a task that a user wants to accomplish through a computer. Application Software is a program that helps the user to perform a specific job. It enables a9 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೧೮ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS user to write a letter or create a drawing. Microsoft Word and Microsoft Paint are examples of Application Software.

System Software: The programs that are directly related to the computer hardware are called System Software. For example, to run a computer you need an operating system, which is a System Software.

Translators are system software, which converts program from one level language to another level language. Eg., Assembler, Compiler, Interpreter.

• Assemblers: This is a translator that converts assembly level coding to machine level coding. • Compiler: This is a translator which converts a high level language program into its equivalent machine level language and creates an object file.

• Interpreter: This is a translator that reads high level code line by line, converts it into machine level code and executes the commands. An object file is not created.

PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES

Language is a means of communication. The language which is used to communicate with the computer is called as Programming Language.

There are two types

1. Low Level Language

2. High Level Language.

1. Low Level Language: Low Level Language is classified into two types.

a. Machine Level Language: It is used by first generation computer technicians who designed the computer; it consists of 0's and 1's (Binary Codes).

Advantages:

1. Programs run very faster and saves time.

Disadvantages:

1. It is machine dependent language.

2. Difficult to write the programs and difficult to check the errors and modify.

b. Assembly Level Language: In this language the instructions are given in mnemonic codes (Add, Sub, Mul, Div) and Binary codes.

Advantages:

1. Easy to understand when compared with Machine Level Language.

2. Easy to check and modify the errors when compared with Machine Level Language.

Disadvantages: 1. It is machine dependent.

2. It needs translators to convert codes.

2. High Level Language: It uses the structured English coding to give instructions. It is used to write the programs in computer.

Ex: C, C++, VB, Oracle, Java.

Advantages:

1. It is machine independent. 2. Easy to learn.

3. Easy to check errors and modify.

Disadvantages:

It needs translators to convert high level language into machine level language.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS GENERATIONS OF COMPUTER.

1st Generation (Vacuum Tubes) Year - 1945 - 1955

Size - Room size (1500 Sq.ft)

Components - Vacuum Tubes (1800)

Generating Heat - More Heat

Processing Speed - Very Slow

Example - ENIAC, UNIVAC, EDSAC 2nd Generation (Transistors) Year - 1955 - 1964

Size - Almara Size

Components - Transistors Generating Heat - Less than 1st generation. Processing Speed - Faster than1st generation. Example - IBM1401 3rd Generation (Integrated Circuits) Year - 1964 - 1975

Size - Office Table Size.

Components - IC'S (Integrated Circuits) Generating Heat - Less than 2nd generation. Processing Speed - Faster than 2nd generation. Example - IBM 360. 4th Generation (Microprocessor) Year - 1975 - 2000

Size - T.V. Size.

Components - Micro Processor.

Generation Heat - No heat (Fan in CPU) Processing Speed - Faster than 3rd generation. Example - Personal Computer 5th Generation (Artificial Intelligence) Year - 2000 - Till now

Size - Long Note Book

Components - Bio's Cell (Basic Input Output System)

Generating Heat - No heat

Processing Speed - Very Fast

Example - Laptop

HISTORY OF COMPUTER

1. ABACUS

It was the first mechanical device, developed in 2000B.C. This was performing calculations like Addition, Subtraction. Abacus was introduced by China and Japan country people. Today, abacus are often constructed as a bamboo frame with beads sliding on wires, but originally they were beads or stones moved in grooves on sand or on tablets of wood, stone, or metal.

2. PASCAL ADDING MACHINE

This was the mechanical device, which was operated by Metal wheel dials. This was Performing all the arithmetic operations like +,-, *, /. It was introduced in the year 1642 by French Mathematician called Blaise Pascal.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS 3. JACQUARDS CARD OR PUNCHED CARD (1804)

This device designed as weaving patterns in the fabrics using cards with punched holes. This was the beginning of the concept of punched cards. It was introduced by world's largest company i.e., IBM (International Business Machine Corporation).

4. CHARLES BABBAGE (ANALYTICAL ENGINE)

He is the father of computer. He proposed a machine which has the ability to

perform all the arithmetic operations for any mathematical problem on date read

from punched cards. It consists of memory to store the result, input & output devices.

It was developed in the year 1833. He is known as the Father of Computer because the device analytical engine has all the necessary parts of today's computer. He is the

first person to give the necessary computer for components and also the shape of the computer. He was a mathematician, philosopher, inventor and mechanical engineer, who is best, remembered now for originating the concept of a programmable computer.

5. ENIAC (Electronic Numerical Integrator and Calculator)

It was the first electronic computer, it was the largest machine consists of 1800 vacuum tubes & occupies 1500 sq.ft of space, It performs calculation in a day which normally requires 300 days. It had the capacity to do 360 multiplications & 5000 additions per second.

6.UNIVAC (Universal Automatic Computer)

It was the world's first commercial data processing machine. It is faster when compare to ENIAC. In the year 1833 the Analytical engine was invented by "Charles Babbage".

CLASSIFICATION OF COMPUTER

On the basis of DATA computer are classified into 3 types.

1. Analog Computer: This computer is used for measuring the physical quantities. They process the information physical and continuous in nature and the result is displayed on the monitor. Ex:

Computers used in measurement of Temperature, Pressure, Speedometer etc. 2. Digital Computer: These computers are operates by counting the numbers and letters. This data is called discrete data. Ex: These computers are used in cricket score board.

3. Hybrid Computer: These computers are the combination of Analog and Digital computers are integrated. ex: These Computers are used in Hospitals (ICU).

Types of Computers (According to SIZE and CAPACITY)

Computers range in size and capability. At one end of the

scale are supercomputers, very large computers with thousands of

linked microprocessors that perform extremely complex

calculations. At the other end are tiny computers embedded in

cars, TVs, stereo systems, calculators, and appliances. These computers are built to perform a limited number of tasks.

The personal computer, or PC, is designed to be used

by one person at a time. This section describes the various kinds

of personal computers: desktops, laptops, handheld computers, and Tablet PCs.

Desktop Computers

Desktop computers are designed for use at a desk or table. Desktop computers are made up of separate components. The main component, called the system unit, is usually a rectangular case that sitson a desk. Other components, such as the monitor, mouse, and keyboard, connect to the system unit. 12 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೨೧ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS

Laptop Computers

Laptop computers are lightweight mobile PCs with a thin screen. They are often called notebook computers because of their small size. Laptops can operate on batteries, so you can take them anywhere. Unlike desktops, laptops combine the CPU, screen, and keyboard in a single case. The screen folds down onto the keyboard when not in use.

Handheld Computers

Handheld computers, also called personal digital assistants (PDAs), are battery-

powered computers small enough to carry almost anywhere. Although not as powerful as

desktops or laptops, handhelds are useful for scheduling appointments, storing addresses

and phone numbers, and playing games. Some have more advanced capabilities, such as

making telephone calls or accessing the Internet. Instead of keyboards, handhelds have

touch screens(Virtual keyboard) that you use with your finger or a stylus (a pen-shaped pointing tool).

Tablet PCs

Tablet PCs are mobile PCs that combine features of laptops and

handhelds. Like laptops, they're powerful and have a built-in screen. Like handhelds, they allow you to write notes or draw pictures on the screen, usually

with a tablet pen instead of a stylus. They can also convert your handwriting into typed text. Some Tablet PCs are "convertibles" with a screen that swivels and unfolds to

reveal a keyboard underneath.

Types of Computers (According to their SPEED and COMPUTING POWER)

Computer can be broadly classified by their speed and computing power.

1. PC (Personal Computer): Single user computer system. Moderately powerful microprocessor.

2. WorkStation: Single user computer system. Similar to

Personal Computer but have more powerful microprocessor.

3. Mini Computer: Multi-user computer system. Capable of supporting hundreds of users simultaneously.

4. Main Frame: Multi-user computer system. Capable of supporting hundreds of users simultaneously. Software technology is different from minicomputer.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS

5. Super Computer: An extremely fast computer which can perform hundreds of millions of instructions per second.

SETTING UP AND WORKING OF A COMPUTER

HOW DO YOU USE A COMPUTER?

A computer or a computer system mainly consists of a system unit or case and other devices such as Monitor, Keyboard, Mouse, Speakers and Microphone. In order to use a computer we need to connect all the devices to the system unit.

HOW DO YOU CONNECT A COMPUTER?

You need to follow the following steps in order to connect a computer: • Place the computer on a desk or table. • Set the system unit next to the Monitor. Be sure of the place where the system unit is to be kept. The place should be well ventilated and should have sufficient airflow which will prevent the system unit from overheating.

• The rear portion of the system unit has all the various connection slots or ports for connecting various devices. First, connect the monitor to the system unit.

• The video port of the system unit is called the VGA port. The color of the video port and the connectors of the VGA cable are blue to make them easier to identify. Connect one end of the VGA cable to the video port in the system unit and the other end to the monitor.

• Now you need to connect the keyboard into the system unit. A keyboard has 2 types of connectors – PS/2 connector and USB Connector. You can connect the keyboard to any of the 2 ports depending on its type. Desktop computer keyboard often comes with a PS/2 connector. Connect the keyboard to the keyboard port of the system unit.

• A mouse has three models of connectors: (i) Mouse with PS/2 Connector; (ii) Mouse with USB Connector; and (iii) Mouse with Serial Connector. You need to connect the mouse in the appropriate port in the system unit. For example, if it has a serial connector, connect it to the serial port in system unit.

• Now, you need to connect the printer to the system unit. A printer has two models of connectors - Parallel Port Connector and USB Port Connector. You can connect the printer to any one of the two ports in the system unit depending on the type of connector in the printer.

• Now that all the main components like the monitor, printer mouse and keyboard are connected to the system unit, all you have to do is to provide power supply to the system unit and the monitor using two power supply cables that come with the computer. Plug one power supply cable into the power supply plug in the system unit; plug another power supply cable into the monitor. Now plug both these power supply cables to the power plugs (outlets) in a switch board. The computer system is now ready to be used.

STEPS TO START A COMPUTER

• Switch on the power supply of both the system unit and the monitor. • Press the power button of the system unit. It is usually located in the front side of the system unit.

Ensure that the LED of the unit is switched on.

• Now, switch on the monitor. Press the power button on the front bottom side of the monitor. Ensure that the LED of the monitor is turned on.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS • In few seconds, the display appears on the monitor. The boot screen could be seen as soon as the monitor starts. Wait until everything is loaded and Windows desktop screen is displayed on the monitor. Now your computer is ready to use.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM OPERATING

SYSTEM16 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೨೫ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM CHAPTER – 2 OPERATING SYSTEM

INTRODUCTION

Operating System is a collection of program that helps us to interact with other computer programs and manages the resource of the computer system. The computer is useless without an operating system. There are various types of operating systems available today. Computers use a different language than us; this language is made up of digits. Computer can understand only machine level language. The operating system acts as an interpreter. It helps us talk to the compute i.e., operating system is an interface between user and computer. The Operating System also enables you to effectively use the system resources and access other programs. All other programs need operating system to start them, but the operating system starts by itself. This is why when we switch on a computer we see the respective operating system's screen. The Operating system starts the computer automatically when power is turned on.

What are the functions of an Operating System?

The major functions of the Operating System are: • It controls and coordinates the operation of a computer • It eases the interaction between you and the computer • It controls input and output devices • It controls execution of computer programs • It manages the use of the main memory of Computer • It helps you to manage and manipulate files.

Classification of Operating System: Operating system can be user friendly with many icons and images or it can be just text or character based. The Operating System can be classified into 2 types:

Character User Interface(CUI) and Graphical User Interface (GUI).

Character User Interface: Each and every task is performed by giving commands. Ex: DOS (Disk Operating System).

Graphical User Interface: Here the task is performed either by clicking mouse or by giving commands.

It is more user friendly compared to CUI operating systems. Examples of GUI are Windows XP, Windows NT, Windows 7, Ubuntu, etc.

OPERATING SYSTEM

There are quite a few operating systems that are totally free. Linux is popular with tinkerers and there are hundreds of popular versions available for free. Ubuntu is probably the most popular and well- known — it's probably the easiest to use, the easiest to learn (if you're coming from Windows) and there is a lot of support & a lot of discussion forums to browse through if you need help. Other popular OS include LinuxMint (which includes many 'mint' tools), Debian (known to be the most stable and compatible), Mageia, Fedora, OpenSuse, FreeBSD, BOSS( Bharath Operating System Solution) and others.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM WINDOWS OPERATING SYSTEM

Microsoft Windows is a series of graphical interface operating systems developed, marketed, and sold by Microsoft. Most of the computers that we use come with preinstalled operating system of Microsoft Windows. In case you have a computer system without the Windows operating system you can buy licensed software from an authentic seller of the software. An alternative method of obtaining the software could be through online websites such as Microsoft's website.

Here in this book, we are concentrating on Microsoft Windows 7 Operating System. So Let us know more about Windows 7 Operating system in the following sections.

INTRODUCTION TO WINDOWS 7

Welcome to Windows 7. Among the new features available in Windows 7, there are new security tools that can use to keep your computer more secure, and new technologies that run in the background, making your computer run more efficiently and reliably. A Windows 7 Operating System (OS) dictates how all18 | P a g e ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೨೭ ಭಾಗ ೧ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM the parts (software and hardware resources) of your computer work together and how specific tasks (i.e., displaying and saving information) are to be performed.

Windows 7 is built primarily on Windows Vista technology which includes the best attributes of previous Windows versions. People who already know and have used previous versions of Windows should have no problems using Windows 7. Windows 7 offers several benefits over other versions, namely, its built-in file encryption and password control capabilities provide basic data and access security, increased reliability and performance ability, friendly graphical user interface (GUI), and The new look to Taskbar, System Tray, its Web communication features. Mainly Windows 7 has advancements in touch, speech, and handwriting recognition, support for virtual hard disks, support for additional file formats, improved performance on multi-core processors, improved boot performance, and kernel improvements. Windows 7 retains the Windows Aero graphical user interface and visual style introduced in the operating system's predecessor, Windows Vista, but many areas have seen enhancements.

Windows 7's desktop is graphical which allows the user to click on icons to launch applications, open files and folders, connect to a network, and perform many other functions.

Users should find that Windows 7 is more efficient and customizable than previous versions and other platforms. The Start button on the bottom left corner of the screen allows easy access to just about everything in the system. The Start button is used to initiate applications, opens or search for documents, adjusts settings, activates the Help Support system, manages files, and maintains the entire system to meet your specific needs.

FEATURES OF WINDOWS 7

1. It has a 32/64 bit of Operating System. 2. It provides G.U.I (Graphical User Interface) that allows communicating visually.

3. It is having better memory management. 4. It controls file, folder & documents.

5. It is very easy to manage & control the windows.

6. It is a Multi User & Multi Task. 7. It has new windows Themes, Quick view for recently used computer applications, Quick Search, Quick Disk Management, Internet Security, and Gadgets and so on.

MULTI USER OS: The Operating system that supports more than one person at a time is called multiuser operating system.

MULTI TASK OS: The Operating system that supports to process of more than one task at a time is called multi tasking operating system.

When your computer starts for the first time, what you see is called the Desktop. The desktop has a background, which is called Wallpaper. The small pictures on the desktop are called Desktop Icons. These icons represent shortcut for files, programs and folders which could be quickly and easily accessed.

The Desktop is split into two

areas. The Main area or a Desktop and a19 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೨೮ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM taskbar.

The narrow strip at the bottom, with the clock to the right and the round Start button to the left, is called the Taskbar. You can also pin the various programs to the task bar as icons to be used as quick access to the programs. The Taskbar above is from Windows 7. You'll have the clock on the right hand side. It is split into a number of different areas: a round Start button, Quick Launch icons, a notification area, and a clock. All other areas are the Taskbar itself. The image below shows where the different areas are:

The task bar displays all the running applications and programs as icons. It also helps you access many applications and programs in the computer through these icons. The task bar provides an easy way to switch between multiple programs running on the computer. If a number of applications are running and there is not enough space available on the task bar to keep all the icons, then similar types of icons can also be grouped together.

Start Button

Through the Start button, you can access programs

and other system utilities. When you click on the start button,

the start menu appears listing various programs installed the

computer. You can use Control Panel in the start menu to

change various hardware and software settings in your

computer. You can also use Help and Support menu item in

the start menu to get any help you need while working with

Windows.

The left hand column is a list of recently used

programs and will change as you use your computer.

Below the left hand column is a search box. In this box you can type a file name, folder name, program, or extension and search for the location on the computer. If you do not press enter after your search your list of matching items will appear above the search box in the start menu. By clicking the magnifying glass or pressing enter, a window will open with a list of the matching items.

With the help of start menu you can shut down your computer with a click only. You can also log off from the computer, switch between users, restart the computer and lock the computer using the start menu and hibernate the system.

• The first option is to switch users. This will keep the current user logged into the computer and bring you back to

the sign in window to log into another account.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM • Log off will log the user off closing all programs and return you to the sign in menu. • Lock will lock the computer so a password will have to be entered before being able to log back on. Any open programs will remain open untilit is closed by the user or the computer is shut down.

• Restart will log off all users shut down the computer and reboot it to the log in menu. • Sleep will keep all programs running but shut down the monitor and non essential components of the computer. It will keep any programs open but will only use minimum resources to keep the computer running.

• Hibernate is used primarily for laptops. It uses even less power than sleep mode by placing your open work on your hard drive and turning your computer off with the ability to recover any open work when the computer is turned back on.

There is one more area on the Taskbar, and it's easily overlooked - the Show

Desktop button. In the images above, you can just see a narrow rectangle to the right of

the clock: Click this button to minimize all open programmers and reveal the desktop.

Here are some common items you'll use on the Start Menu.

Account Name – The account name for our test computer is Guest. The user will find access to all of their personal files and information stored in a single location.

Computer – Formerly known as "My Computer" this start menu item provides access to all storage drives (hard drives, flash drives, network drives, CDs, etc) currently accessible through your computer.

Documents – Many users will remember this item as "My Documents". From this menu item, users can access all of their files stored in the location.

Pictures – From here, users can find all of their pictures stored in this location.

Music – Users will find their music files stored in this location.

All Programs Menu – Stores most of your options, such as the programs you have installed on your computer including Microsoft Office.

Search programs and files– Allows you to quickly search for files, folder and programs on your entire system.

Recently Used Programs – Provides quick access to programs that you use frequently by placing them just above the Start button.

Help and Support – Takes you to the Windows 7 Help Center.

Devices and Printers – Allows you to view printers and devices currently installed on your system.

Control Panel –Allows you quick access to programs that do everything from removing your programs to adjusting your mouse settings and setting up a firewall.

Shut Down – Powers down the system. You can access more power options by clicking the arrow to the right.

Run Command – The Run command gives you quick access to programs, websites, etc. Just type in the name of the file or website and click OK. You can access the Run command by typing "Run" (without quotations) into the Search programs and files box. The search field can also be used as the old Run dialog box. Simply type in the program name and press the Enter key on your keyboard.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM Notification Area

The Notification area, formally called the System Tray, is the area of the Taskbar where you can view programs and tasks that are running in the background, as well as view important messages about updating your computer. (Although the clock is considered part of the Notification area, we'll look at this separately.)

In the image below, the Notification area shows three icons: The first one, the white arrow, is for hidden icons. Click the white arrow to see which icons have been hidden:

The second of the three icons in the Notification area is a white flag. This flag alerts you to issues that need to be taken care of. Click the flag icon to see if there are any problems:

As you can see, Windows 7 is telling us that there is 1

message, and that it's to do with Windows Defender. You can click on

the "1 message" heading at the top, or on the message itself. You can

also open the "Action Center" from here.

The third icon that appears in the Notification area (on our computer, anyway) is a Network icon. This tells us that we have an

internet connection, and there are no problems. If the internet access is down, there will be a

red X through this icon: The red X will disappear when the problem with the internet is

solved.

THE DESKTOP

The Desktop is the main Windows 7 screen (see image below). It is the work area where dialog boxes, windows, icons, and menus appear. Like an office desk, the Windows 7 desktop contains items you can use to do your job. For instance, from your desktop, you can perform file-management tasks and run software applications. You can customize the appearance of the desktop to suit your preferences.

Desktop Icons

The Desktop is where

you'll find icons (It is a symbolic

or graphical or small pictures

which we can see on the desktop)

for many of your most frequently

used programs. You'll most likely see icons for Computer,

Documents, Recycle Bin, and

Internet Explorer.

• Computer – Allows you to see what drives are attached to your computer (for example,

your local hard disk drive, your CD/DVD drives, any networked shared drives, and external drives, such as a USB flash drive). You can also view the files that are located on these drives.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM • Documents – Supplies a 'catch-all' place for your personal files. Within here you can see your files, any shared files from other computer users and any music or pictures you may have stored. The Documents folder will sometimes be identified by your name instead of the word "Documents." • Recycle Bin – Stores any files you delete until you empty it. • Internet Explorer – Contains Windows' built in web browser that integrates with other Windows components (such as your folders and Documents).

On the other hand, you can also create and edit icons for your own use.

WORKING WITH ICONS

Creating Icons – To create an icon, right-click anywhere on the Desktop and choose New Shortcut.

Browse for the file or program you want to create the icon for, click next, name your icon, then click Finish.

Deleting Icons – To delete an icon, either right-click on the icon and select Delete, or click once on the icon and press the Delete key on your keyboard.

Renaming Icons – To rename an icon, right-click on the icon and choose rename. You can then type in the new name. Also, try clicking once on the icon, wait half a second, then click it a second time. The text area will be visible and you can type a new name or select an icon press F2, the text area will be visible and you can type a new name and press enter key.

Arranging Icons – To arrange the icons on your desktop, right-click in an open area of the desktop, click Sort By, and choose the appropriate option from the list below.

o Name – Sort the icons alphabetically from top to bottom, left to right. o Size – Sort the icons by file size (the amount of space the file takes up on your local computer).

o Type – Sorts the icons by the type of file, such as Word Documents, programs, etc. o Date Modified – Arranges the icons with the most recent items on the top left hand corner.

Moving & Dragging – To move (drag) an icon, click on it once, holding down the click, and drag it to another location. You can also arrange the items wherever you would like. Simply right-click on the open area of the Desktop, select View, and choose Align icons to Grid.

Changing Desktop Properties

The Personalization (Display Properties) window allows you to change your wallpaper, screen saver, and even your desktop theme. To access the window, right-click anywhere on an open space of your desktop and click Personalize. Here's a rundown of what each area is.

Change desktop icons – Allows you to select which items will appear on your desktop.

Change mouse pointers – Allows you to pick a different mouse pointer. You can also change how the mouse pointer looks during such activities as clicking and selecting.

Desktop – Allows you to set the Desktop background picture.

Display – Allows you to set your screen resolution and other advanced monitor and video settings.

Screen Saver – Allows you to set a screen saver and its time interval. A screen saver is a picture or animation that covers your screen and appears when your computer is idle for a set period of time.

Sounds – Changes which sounds are heard when you do everything from receiving e-mail to emptying your Recycle Bin.

Window: The rectangle portion of a screen Known as window. It is classified into two types:

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM A. Application Window: It is a window, which is used for user's application. It is also known as parent window.

Ex: Notepad, Point Brush, word pad etc.,

B. Document Window: In this we can open more than one document at a time it is also called as child window.

Ex: Excel book, Word documents etc.

Window Themes – Allows you to set a theme for Windows which includes changing visual or auditory elements associated with menus, icons, backgrounds, screen savers, mouse pointers and some computer sounds. Users can set some aspects of Windows 7 to visually look like Windows XP.

Changing System Date and Time

To change the system date and time, click on the date and time present on the right side of the task bar. After this, a clock and a calendar appear. Following are the steps to change the system date and time:

1: Click on the date and time on the taskbar

2: Click on the change date and time settings link

3: Click on the change date and time button

4: Set date and time

5: Click OK to save changes and return to the date and time dialog box

6: Click OK on the date and time dialog box to save changes and close the dialog box.

Desktop and its Display Settings

Desktop is the display area that you see when you log onto your computer. You can change the appearance and personalization or the way the desktop behaves. Just like you decorate your room and desk with pictures, you can decorate your desktop too by changing the Wallpaper or desktop background.

When you keep the computer idle for some time or if you do not work for a while on the computer, an animation of pictures or text appears on the screen. This is called a Screen Saver. You can set a screen saver of your choice or can even set a password and assign timing for the screen saver. Once you set the timing, the screen saver starts by itself when the computer is left idle. Assigning a password to your screen saver locks your screen, therefore, no one can access your desktop if you are away from your computer for a long time. You can also change the theme of your Windows appearance and can customize it as 'My theme'. You can also change the color of Windows by using the Windows color icon.

Steps to Change the Desktop Background

1: Right click on the empty space on the desktop

2: Click on the personalize option from the menu

3: Click on the desktop background link

4: Choose a picture and set it as your desktop background

5: Click on the save changes button to save the changes.

Setting a Screen Saver

1: Right click on the empty space on the desktop

2: Click on the personalize option

3: Click on the screen saver link

4: Click on the screensaver dropdown menu and select a screen saver from the list

5: Set the time for the screen saver to start by selecting number of minutes from wait combo boxಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೩೩ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM 6: Click on the preview button preview the screen saver

7: Click on the apply button to apply the screen saver

8: Click on the OK button to save the changes

COMPUTER SCREEN

The computer screen

(formerly known as My

Computer) has changed slightly

in Windows 7. Along with

showing all of the various drives

attached to your computer, you

also have an "Explorer" type

view on the left side that will

allow you easy access to the

contents of those drives.

Hard Disk Drives – This area

lists all of the physical hard

drives you have installed in your

computer. This does not include

any external hard drives or flash drives.

Devices with Removable Storage – This area lists any external hard drives, flash drives, or CD/DVD drives connected to computer.

Network Locations – This area lists any network drives you may be connected to. On-campus computers will have access to the Home (H:\) drive, which is your personal network space, the Shared (K:\) drive, which is shared among users in your department, and the Apps (I :\) drive, which stores applications that user provides

Steps to Transfer files onto a USB flash drive/ Pen drive

1. Plug the USB flash drive directly into an available USB port. (Note: A message indicating that a new device has been detected is displayed at the lower right hand of your taskbar. It may take few seconds to be detected)

2. If the USB flash drive does not open, then goto Start menu → Computer→ Double click on the Removable disk associated with the USB flash drive.

3. Navigate to the folders in your computer containing files you want to transfer

4. Right click on the file you want to copy, then select copy 5. Return to the Removable disk window, right click within the window, then select paste 6. Or just select the file → right click →Send to →Select removable drive name associated with the USB flash drive.

QUICK SEARCH

Have you ever opened a window, such as the Control Panel, and have trouble finding what you are looking for? Windows 7 allows users to search individual windows through Quick Search. In our25 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೩೪ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM example, the user was able to find Windows Update by typing the word "update" (without quotations) in the search filed located in the top right corner of the window.

DISK MANAGEMENT

To keep your system humming along, it's a good idea to always keep a check on how your system is running and where your files are located. Below are some things you should keep tabs on to help your system run better.

• Recycle Bin – It's a good idea to empty your Recycle Bin occasionally. Files can build up in here and take up valuable space. To do so, right-click on the Recycle Bin's icon and select Empty Recycle Bin.

• Disk Cleanup – Allows you to clean up temporary files, etc. that are collecting dust on your system. To use it, click on Start-> All Programs-> Accessories-> System Tools-> Disk Cleanup. You'll see a checklist of items that you can mark and remove.

• Disk Defragmenter – Sometimes, Windows will throw bits and pieces of your files across your hard drive, thus making the computer slower when trying to access these files. To remedy this, you need to run Disk Defragmenter. To use it, click on Start-> All Programs-> Accessories-> System Tools-> Disk Defragmenter and follow the directions.

Tip: Run your virus and spyware scanners at least once a week and set them up to run automatic updates.

You can download free spyware and virus scanning software for your computer from the Connect Wright website, located at https://www.wright.edu.cats/cw/. Users will be asked to authenticate with their username and password to access the website.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM BURNING DATA TO A CD

Burning a CD or DVD is great for backing up data, transferring it to another computer, mailing it to someone, or archiving older files to free up hard drive space. To burn a CD follow the steps below:

• Insert a blank disc into your PC. • The Auto play dialog box appears, asking whether you intend for this CD or DVD to hold computer files or music.

• Click the "Burn files to disc" link. • Type the name for the disc, but before clicking next, review the following options:

o Like a USB Flash Drive: Live File System is a new format that allows you to drag files and folders onto it in real time. You can think of it as a thumb drive.

• With a CD/DVD player: Mastered format is the most widely used and allows you to drag the files/folders into its window. The PC duplicates the items, placing it in an invisible, temporary holding area until you're ready to burn. You burn all files and folders at once.

• Choose one of the options, and then click "Next." • Add files and folders into the disc's window with one of the following options:

o Drag the items into the open CD/DVD window or onto the disc burner's icon in the Computer window.

o Highlight the files you want burned onto the CD. Choose Organize -> Copy. Click in the CD/DVD window, and then choose Organize -> Paste to copy the material there.

o Explore your hard drive and whenever you find a file/folder you'd like to be backed up, right-click it.

• Click the "Burn to disc" button near the top of the window. • Follow the prompts to finish burning your disc.

INTERNET SECURITY

The Internet can let hackers access your computer, unleash their viruses, set up remote hacking tools, feed us spyware and try to trick us into giving them our credit card numbers. Windows 7 does include added security behind the scenes, but we will focus on the following security measures that you can see and change.

• Security Center – Shows you at a glance where you're safe and where you're not. Click the buttons or arrows on the right side of the screen to get more details about your security in any category. But if you want to change those settings, click Control Panel → Security → Security Center.

• Windows Firewall – Acts as a gatekeeper between you and the Internet. It examines all traffic, and lets through only communications that it knows are safe; all other traffic is turned away at the door.

Protects both inbound and outbound traffic.

• Windows Defender – Protects you against spyware in two ways. First, it's a kind of silent sentinel that sits in the background, watching your system. When it detects a piece of spyware trying to install itself, Defender zaps it. Second, it scans your hard drive for infections every day, and removes what it finds. Access it by going to Control Panel→ Security → Windows Defender.

• Phishing Filter – A phishing attack involves receiving an email that appears to be legitimate from a bank, eBay, PayPal, or some other financial Web site. The message tells you that the site needs to confirm account information, or warns that your account has been hacked, and needs you to help keep it safe. Access it by going to Internet Explorer → Tools → Phishing Filter.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM • Privacy and Cookies – Deposits preference files on your hard drive. Some cookies can be helpful, such as ones that let your PC log into a site automatically or let you customize what the site looks like and how to use it. On the other hand, some cookies can record which pages you visit on a site, how long you spend on a site, what kind of information you like to find out, and so on. To check cookie settings, open Internet Explorer and go to Tools → Internet Options → Privacy tab. Two types of cookies are described below:

o First-party cookies: created by the site you are currently visiting and generally aren't privacy invaders.

o Third-party cookies: deposited by sites other than the one you're on, normally via advertisements.

• Erasing Your Tracks – Internet Explorer logs every web site you visit, storing cookies and possibly your passwords. In addition it can store graphic/text files to speed up the page when you visit those sites again. To delete cookies and browsing history go to Tools → Internet Options → General. • Pop-up blocker – Pop-ups are more than annoying; they're potentially dangerous. They're tricks hackers use to deposit spyware on your PC.

WINDOWS SIDEBAR

Windows also includes some other programs that make your life easier. These programs include Internet Explorer, Windows Contacts, Windows DVD Maker and Windows Defender. To access go to Start →All Programs.

Internet Explorer – Provides you with a way to view websites on the Internet. This is a full featured program and has many advanced options and security to make your web browsing safe and fun.

Windows Contacts – Provides a central directory for phone numbers, email addresses and mailing addresses. Windows DVD Maker – Debuts with Windows 7 and only with the Premium or Ultimate Editions. It allows you to turn your digital photos or camcorder movies into DVD's that work on any DVD player, complete with menus, slideshow controls, and other navigation features.

Windows Defender – As discussed in Internet Security topic.

Tip: Windows DVD maker requires Windows Movie Maker. You can download Windows Movie

Maker, free of charge, from Microsoft by navigating to http://download.live.com/moviemaker in your

favorite web browser.

Windows Live Essentials

Windows Live Essentials can be downloaded, free of charge, through Windows Update. The programs provided additional software designed to increase user productivity and enjoyment.

• Messenger – Instant Messaging program similar to IChat or AOL Instant Messenger (AIM). • Windows Mail – Outlook Express has been replaced by Windows Mail, an improved e-mail program with enhancements such as junk e-mail filtering and protection against phishing messages. To check these settings go to Tools -> Junk E-mail Options. It allows you to create multiple accounts to check, create filters, and add signatures to your e-mail.

• Windows Photo Gallery – Digital photo management that allows you to import photos, organize, tag, rate, edit and share pictures.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE OPERATING SYSTEM • Windows Movie Maker – Allows you to edit your video from a camcorder or digital camera, trimming out the boring parts, and dress it up with credits, music, and so on.

• Windows Toolbar – Allows Windows Live and Hotmail users to quick access their email, calendar, photos and more.

• Writer –Allows users to create professional looking blogs. Even allows users to publish directly to more blog services.

• Family Safety –Provides additional parental controls to limit user accessibility to websites. • Microsoft Outlook Connector – Allows users to access their Windows Live & Hotmail accounts via Outlook.

• Microsoft Office Live Add-in – Allows Windows Live and Hotmail users to save and open documents from their SkyDrive.

• Silverlight – Enhances the user experience when they access websites that utilize Silverlight.

GADGETS

Gadgets are easy to use mini-programs that give you information at a glance

and provide easy access to frequently used tools. To access Gadgets, right-click

anywhere on an open space of your desktop, and click Gadgets. As you use your

computer to access information, perform tasks, and interact with software, you may at

times feel like you're facing information overload. You have to open a web browser

just to check the weather, open an application to view your calendar, and open a

calculator program just to add up a few numbers. Now, with Windows Gadgets the

specific information you need is at your fingertips.

DIFFERENT BUTTONS USED IN WINDOWS

1. Text box :

2. Check box:

3. List box:

4. Radio button:

5. Drop down list box :

6. Spinners :

7. Slider :

8. Command or push button:

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE FREE SOFTWARES

FREE

SOFTWARES

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE FREE SOFTWARES CHAPTER -3 FREE SOFTWARE Windows includes a wide array of simple programs that makes it easier to finish your day to day tasks. Below you'll find information on these. To access them, click on Start->All Programs- >Accessories-> and then the appropriate icon.

Calculator – Contains both a simple and scientific calculator.

Command Prompt – Gives you access to the old DOS style command window.

Notepad – This is a simple text editor, mainly used to type a few notes.

Paint – A simple image editing and creation program.

WordPad – A word processing program with more options than Notepad, but not as advanced as Microsoft Word.

CALCULATOR

Calculator is used to calculate arithmetic & Logical Calculations, there are 4 types in calculator 1. Standard Calculator. Alt+1 2. Scientific Calculator. Alt+2

3. Programmer Calculator Alt+3 4. Stastistics Calculator Alt+4

MC - Memory Cancel

MR - Memory Recall

MS - Memory Save

M+ - Memory Plus

Note : You can also do Unit conversion and Date calculations.

Unit Conversion

When you select the Unit Conversion mode, the Calculator will expand with a form on the left side. This conversions pane has 3 drop-down menus.

From the top one, select the type of unit you want to convert.

In the next two menus, select which values you wish to convert to and from.

For instance, here we selected Temperature in the first menu, Degrees Fahrenheit in the second menu, and Degrees Celsius in the third menu. Enter the value you wish to convert in the From box, and the conversion will automatically appear in the bottom box.

The Calculator contains dozens of conversion values, including more uncommon ones. So if you've ever wanted to know how many US gallons are in a UK gallon, or how many knots a supersonic jet travels in an hour, this is a great tool for you!

You can also do Date calculations by using Calculator application of Windows 7. You can also specify how many days, months, or even years are to be added or subtracted from the specified date. Once you've entered the information, click Calculate and you'll be presented with the resulting day and date.

NOTEPAD

Parts of a Window

1. Title bar: The top most bars in every window are title bar. It displays name or title of active window. At the right corner it consists of controls menu box.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE FREE SOFTWARES 2. Control Box: It controls the screen activities like minimize, maximize or restore and close move etc.

a. Minimize: It is used to shrink the window as an icon & places on the taskbar.

b. Maximize/Restore: It is used to enlarge the window to full screen.

c. Close: It is used to close the active window.

6. Menu Bar: Below the title bar is the menu it displays menus for the active window. 7. Scroll bar: It is used to see the hidden text of an active window. There are two types of scroll bar namely.

a. Horizontal scroll bar.

b. Vertical scroll bar.

8. Working Area: It is a place where user can edit the text or draw the pictures. 9. Status Bar: The bottom most bar in every window is the status bar. 10. Mouse Pointer: The various shapes and meaning of mouse pointers: o Arrow shape - We can select the options o I shape - We can edit the text o Hourglass shape - Processing is going on in the system.

Notepad is a Windows tool used to edit the text. It is also called as "Handy Text Editor". In Notepad we can edit the text & we can apply formatting like font, size or font style. The files of Notepad application have the extension .TXT. It is purely text editor software, in

other words, we cannot insert pictures or we can't apply colors for font.

FILE MENU 1. New (Ctrl+N): It is used to open new or blank file.

2. Open (Ctrl+O): It opens an existing file. 3. Save (Ctrl+S): It saves the active file under a given name.

4. Save As: It create a duplicate copy of an active file. 5. Page set up: It is used to set the paper size, margins, header & footer for the

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE FREE SOFTWARES 3. Copy (Ctrl+C): It is used to copy the selected contents into the buffer.

4. Paste (Ctrl+V): It is used to insert cut or copied contents from the buffer to the active file. 5. Delete (Del): It is used to delete the selected contents permanently.

6. Find (Ctrl+F): It is used to search the word or character. 7. Find Next (F3): It is used to repeat the last search.

8. Replace (Ctrl+H): It is used to change the existing text with the new text.

9. Select All (Ctrl+A): It is used to select all the contents present in the active file. 10. Time & Date (F5): It is used to insert system date and time.

FORMAT MENU 1. Word wrap: It is used to set the text contents with the left and right margins.

2. Font: It is used to change the fonts, font size, and font style in the Notepad.

VIEW MENU

Status Bar: This option is used to show/ hide the status bar.

HELP MENU

Help Topic: This option is used to get the help about any topic from the Notepad application.

PAINT BRUSH

It is a Windows tool used to draw the pictures. Microsoft Paint, which has also been known as Paintbrush or Windows Paint, is a very simple and widely recognized image creating and editing software. The version of paint in Windows 7 makes use of the Ribbon GUI. It also features "artistic" brushes composed of varying shades of gray and some degree of transparency that give a more realistic result. The paint files are stored with the extension .PNG, the default tool is Pencil.

Ribbon: In computer interface design, a ribbon is a graphical control element in the form of a set of toolbars placed on several tabs. In 2007 Microsoft products began to introduce a form of modular ribbon as their main interface where large, tabbed toolbars, filled with graphical buttons and other graphical control elements, are grouped by functionality. Such ribbons use tabs to expose different sets of controls, eliminating the need for numerous parallel toolbars. Contextual tabs are tabs that appear only when the user needs them

The Paint Window

This is a typical view of the top of the Paint window.

At the very top is the Title Bar, just as in all programs, below it is a very simple Menu Bar and below that is the Ribbon.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE FREE SOFTWARES The Title Bar At the left end of the Title Bar the first item shows a little

paint palette. If clicked, this button opens a standard window menu,

offering Restore, Move, Size, Minimize, Maximize and Close. The

next 4 items make up the Quick Access Bar, Offering buttons for

Save, Undo, Redo, Customize. You'll also see other commands that

you can add if you wish. I've chosen to add New—for a new Paint

page, Open—to open a previously saved and closed picture, and Print Preview.

You can click any of these items a second time to undo changes you've made to the Quick Access Toolbar.

Adding Ribbon items to the Quick Access Toolbar

Many other items can be added to the Quick Access Toolbar. On the Ribbon, right click on

anything you'd like to add to the Quick Access Toolbar and a menu will appear. This includes things offered in sub-menus. I've added the Pencil tool and Paste Transparent. To remove items you've added from the Ribbon, right click the unwanted icon and then click the Remove option.

Other things on the Title Bar

After the Quick Access items, you'll see the title of your picture followed by the name of the program—

Paint, of course. If you haven't yet saved your picture, the name will be shown as "Untitled".

THE RIBBON

All the tools, the color palette, and most commands are grouped together in the ribbon. The exceptions are Save, Undo and Redo, which are shown at the left end of the title bar, in the Quick Access Toolbar.

If you choose to use a very small window, the ribbon will appear like this. Drop-down arrows below each item will give you access to everything in their menus. If, however, you use a very large window, you will have many more menu items on display.

There is also an option to minimize the ribbon. If you choose this, the ribbon disappears entirely, but pops into view if you click on the Home tab.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE FREE SOFTWARES The Menu Bar At the right-hand end of the Title Bar are the three usual window buttons, Minimise, Maximise and Close. If your Paint Window is already maximized—taking up all of your screen—the middle button will be Restore, which makes the window the size you usually have it.

The Menu bar has three items on the left and a Help button at the far right.

Comprehensive Menu

1. New (Ctrl+N): It is used to open a new blank file. 2. Open (Ctrl+O): It is used to open an existing file.

3. Save (Ctrl+S): It is used to save an active file. 4. Save as: It is used to create a duplicate copy. 5. Print: It is a view, which appears before taking the printout. 6. Page Setup: It is used to set the paper size, margins, header, and footer for the

documents.

7. Print : It has three sub options 8. Print: (Ctrl+P): It is used to get the printout of the active file. 9. Page Setup: To change layout of picture. 10. Print Preview : It is used to preview the picture before printing 11. Send in email: It is used to send the contents of the active file to mail. 12. Set as desktop background: It is used to set the image on the desktop. It has three sub options a. Fill: Fill the entire screen with the picture. b. Tile: It displays the file contents side by side. c. Center: Center the picture to the middle of the screen d. Properties: Change the properties of the picture The Properties dialogue, for instance, will give you information about the picture on which you're currently working, and let you nominate whether you want to work in centimeters, inches or pixels.

13. About Paint: Displays about paint 14. Exit (Alt+F4): It is used to quit the paintbrush application.

Home Tab

For nearly everything you do, you'll want the Home tab to be at the front.

The Home tab contains the Ribbon, from

which tools and colors are selected.

When you're making use of the View tab, you can flick back and forth between Home and View as often as you

need to.

View Tab

Zooming in and out is one of the features that can be used alone or in conjunction with the Zoom Tool on the Ribbon or the slider on the Status Bar. Zoom in and Zoom out tools can be clicked repeatedly to get a closer or more distant view.

The 100% option is handy when you've finished working in a very zoomed in

view. One click and you're back to normal.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE FREE SOFTWARES On the Show or Hide part of this tab, you have the option of hiding the status bar. I wouldn't advise you to do that. The status bar can be useful.

Gridlines are convenient if you want to align shapes accurately.

Rulers If you like. Turn them on and see what you think. Two measuring scales appear: horizontal (one on top) and one on left side (vertical), which will be help full while creating/editing an image.

On the Display section, you can click for Full Screen View. You can also get a Full Screen View by hitting F11. In either case, come back to a Normal view by pressing the Esc key.

Thumbnail is only available when you are zoomed in. It lets you see how changes you make are affecting your picture in normal view.

The Clipboard Menu

The clipboard menu offers three options—Cut, Copy and Paste. Only when a

selection is active will the Cut and Copy icons show as being ready.

Paste is always active, because you may wish to Paste from a picture on your

computer. Say you've previously drawn and saved a small flower and now wish to add it to your present drawing. You'd click the down arrow under Paste,

click Paste from and navigate to the saved picture, click its name and click Open.

You'd be returned to your work space and see the added picture inside a selection rectangle, ready for you to drag to its permanent position.

The Image Menu—Select

Rectangular Select: It is used to select the objects in rectangle form

Freeform Select: It is used to select irregular part of picture

Select All: To select whole image

Invert Selection: To select everything in the picture except for the

currently selected area

Delete: To delete a selected object.

Transparent Selection: Used to make the background color in the

selection as transparent or opaque.

Crop: Used to crop a picture so only the part you selected appears in your

picture. Cropping lets you change the picture so only the selected object or

person is visible.

Resize: Used to resize or skew the picture.

Rotate or flip

This menu lets you make mirror images of selections, either use Rotate to rotate the whole picture or a selected part of it.

Tools Menu

1. Pencil : It is used to draw free hand drawings.

2. Eraser : It is used to erase the unwanted drawings.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE FREE SOFTWARES 3. Fill With Color : It is used to fill the colors for closed object.

4. Pick Color : It is used to fill the colors for closed objects.

5. Magnifier : It is used to see the objects in large size.

Brushes : It is used to color the pictures. Brushes

let you paint in various widths and textures. We have 9 different types of brushes 6. Text : It is used to edit the text. 7. Shapes Menu : Contains basic shapes of drawing. 8. Outline: To apply outline for a shape 9. Fill: To fill a color to a shape.

10. Size : It is used to draw the straight lines of various thicknesses

HOW TO SAVE A CUTOUT

1. Save the picture you're working on.

2. Select the part you want to save as a cutout.

3. Click the Crop button.

4. Go to the Paint button and open the menu.

5. Click Save as

6. Be very sure that you do click Save as and not save.

7. Type a name for the cutout and click Save.

8. You'll be returned to the Paint window with the cutout displayed in it. You'll see that the name on the Title bar is the name you used when saving the cutout.

9. Click the Open icon on your Quick Access Toolbar or from the Paint Button menu.

10. Open the picture with which you wish to continue working.

Line Thickness, the Size Tool

This tool becomes active only after you have chosen either a Brush or a Shape, so choose your Brush or Shape and you'll then find you can click the down arrow under Size and choose a line thickness. The line thicknesses offered vary according to the brush you've chosen.

Colors

The Color section of the ribbon has three parts: Boxes showing the active colors—Color 1 and Color2, the Color Palette and the Edit Colors button.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE FREE SOFTWARES The Color Boxes :

Color 1 is the Foreground Color, and is always black when you open Paint or open a

different Paint page.

Color 2 is the Background Color, and is always white when you open Paint or open a different Paint page.

The Color Palette

The two top lines of the Color Palette show all the colors

available whenever you are making a picture. The line of blank squares at the bottom will show any colors you have edited during this session.

Once Paint is closed, those colors will vanish away.

Edit Colors

The Edit Colors button takes you into the Edit Colors dialogue. There you can click any color on an extended palette and click the Add to Custom Colors button.

The Status Bar

The Status Bar sits at the very bottom of the Paint Window, where it offers information and can be used to help as you work. We'll look at its features from left to right.

Cursor Position : Gives your Cursor Position, which is helpful when you want to position something precisely.

Selection Size : Shows the size of a selection you're making, or of an object you're drawing.

Image Size: Shows the size of your entire picture, even if it is very large and so not all visible in the window. If you haven't changed the units in the Properties dialogue this

measurement will be in pixels.

Disk Size: Once you've saved a picture, this will show its Size on Disk. In a very small window, this figure may not be shown.

Zoom Slider: The Zoom Slider is convenient if you're working in a zoomed-in view and want to zoom out. However, you can't zoom in on

a particular spot, as you can with the Magnifier.

WORD PAD

It is a simple text documents or documents with complex formatting and graphics. You can link or embed information from other documents into a WordPad document. You can save your WordPad file as a rich text file and the extension name for word pad is .RTF. In the Word Pad we can format text & also we can insert the pictures.

WordPad are a bit more friendly due to the ribbon bar, which was first introduced in Microsoft Office 2007. WordPad first received its ribbon menu with the release of Windows 7.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE FREE SOFTWARES The Windows Fax and Scan utility enables you to scan documents and pictures. Before you can scan documents and pictures, you must have a scanner installed on your computer. Your scanner must be listed in the Devices section of the Devices and Printers Control Panel window.

To check to see if your scanner is properly installed, open the Device Stage. Choose Start→Devices and Printers. If Windows doesn't automatically find your scanner, you can manually add it in the Devices and Printers window by clicking the Add a Device button in the toolbar and following the wizard's commands.

How to scan a document or picture?

Choose Start→All Programs→Windows Fax and Scan.

Click the Scan button in the Navigation pane, then click the New Scan button on the toolbar.

1. Use the settings on the right to describe your scan.

By letting the computer know what you're scanning, its color profile, and the type of file you plan to create, you enable Windows Fax and Scan to create the highest quality scan.

2. Click the Preview button to see what your document will look like.

Make any last minute changes.

3. If you're happy with the preview, click the Scan button.

Windows scans the document and presents you with an image of your document.

4. Click the Save As button and complete the necessary information.

Enter the filename, the type of graphics file you want saved, and then click the Save button.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE FREE SOFTWARES WINWORD40 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೪೯ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007

CHAPTER - 4 WORD 2007

Microsoft Word 2007 helps you produce professional-looking documents by providing a comprehensive set of tools for creating and formatting your document in a new interface. Rich review, commenting, and comparison capabilities help you quickly gather and manage feedback from colleagues. Advanced data integration ensures that documents stay connected to important sources of business information. Word 2007 provides editing and reviewing tools for creating polished documents more easily than ever before. Word 2007 supports exporting your file to PDF (Portable Document Format) & XPS (XML Paper Specification) formats. The extension name for word Documents is .DOCX and word Template is .DOTX.

The first conspicuously new feature you'll encounter when you start Word will undoubtedly be the Ribbon, which is part of the new interface called Microsoft Office Fluent user interface. On the Ribbon are all the commands, styles, and resources you need, arranged on task-oriented tabs. The one remaining toolbar is the Quick Access toolbar, where you can place your most frequently used commands and resources for easy access, regardless of which tab of the Ribbon is active.

THE OFFICE BUTTON

Office Button

The colorful icon in the top left hand corner of the Word window is the Office button. When you point to the Office button with the mouse pointer it will turn orange. When you click the left mouse button while pointing to the Office button, a menu will open that contains some of the most commonly used commands which were found in the File drop-down menu in earlier versions of Word. Recent documents are listed in the Recent Documents pane on the right side of the menu.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 PARTS OF MS WORD 2007 WINDOW THE RIBBON

The 'Ribbon User Interface' is a task-oriented Graphical User Interface (GUI). The Ribbon is designed to help you quickly find the commands that you need to complete a task. Commands are organized in logical groups, which are collected together under tabs. Each tab relates to a type of activity, such as writing or laying out a page. To reduce clutter, some tabs are shown only when needed.

For example, the Picture Tools tab is shown only when a picture is selected. The new ribbon in Word 2007 looks like this:

The ribbon is divided into Tabs, Groups, and Commands. Each tab opens a different ribbon with groups of commands inside

it. Microsoft has tried to make the

placement of the commands

within both groups and tabs as

intuitive as possible to make them easy to find. By using the Ribbon

system the user has many less mouse clicks to execute the desired command.

In the lower right hand corner of some groups is a small down pointing arrow. These are referred to as Dialog Expanders or Launchers. Clicking on the arrow will open a Dialog window or a Command pane. The dialog box may provide additional options that may not be contained on the active tab. Most of the dialog boxes that appear should be familiar; many are taken directly from earlier versions of the program.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 The Ribbon has three types of Commands.

1. Simple Buttons

2. Drop-down menus Buttons

3. Launchers (or Dialog Expanders) Buttons

Simple Buttons work as Toggles or on/off switches. When the command is off it will be surrounded by blue and look like all other commands. When a command button is on, it will be surrounded by orange. A command will only work when it is on. Bold is an example of a button.

If you aren't sure what a command is or what a command does,

place the mouse pointer over the command and hold it there. A text

box will open up. The text box contains the command name, the

keyboard shortcuts for the command, along with an explanation of the

command.

Drop-down menu buttons will have a down arrow to the right

of the command. Just like buttons, the drop-down menu command will

be surrounded by orange and the drop-down list will open

up. Change case control is an example of a drop-down menu.

Some commands are a combination

of a simple button and a drop-down menu

button.

There are two buttons for

these commands. The left button is a simple button and the

right buttons is drop-down menu arrow button. If one

clicks on the simple button the default value will be used, if

one click on the drop-down menu arrow there will be a

number of options available from which to choose. The default value is the last used value for the command.

Underline is an example of a combination command.

Launcher (or Dialog Expanders) buttons are

usually displayed in the bottom right corner of some groups.

Clicking the launcher button will open up a series of options

either in a Task pane (such as the Clipboard) or a Dialog window such as the Font group.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 QUICK ACCESS & STATUS BAR

The Quick Access toolbar is one of the

new features in MS Word 2007. This toolbar is

located at the top of the workspace on the far left

next to the Office Button. Users can click on the

down arrow to see a dialog box that contains the

commands that can be added to the Quick Access

toolbar. This allows the user to choose to click

on one of these commands (shown as icons in the

toolbar) rather than having to click on the Office

Button and selecting the same command. Users

can also choose to show the Quick Access

toolbar below the Ribbon if that works better and

you can minimize the Ribbon from the range of options as well. If you use certain commands more

often than others, for example Insert Hyperlink, you can choose this from the More Commands option at the bottom of the dialog box.

The Status Bar is a thin toolbar that runs along the bottom of the Word workspace. This bar can display information about the document being worked on, such as page number, word count, language, and there are viewing options in the form of icons at the right hand side of the Status Bar. You can also right click on the Status Bar and a dialog box will open with many more options that can be displayed.

Options include Line Number, Selection Mode, Column, and more. Each item that is selected in the dialog box will be shown in the Status Bar.

Each document created in Word can be viewed in many different ways, depending upon the user's preference. The default view option is set to Print Layout, but this can be changed by using the various icons located at the lower right hand corner of the Word workspace. There are five different views that can quickly be changed by clicking on the icons.

It will take some practice to get back to some views because you may need to close out of a certain view to get back to Print Layout view. It's a good idea to try out each of the views and learn how to navigate through them quickly. The 5 different views are Print Layout, Full Screen Reading, Web Layout, Outline, and Draft.

HOME TAB

Clipboard Group

The Home ribbon is made up of the most used commands in Word. The first group on the Home ribbon is the Clipboard. Copy, Cut, Paste and Format Painter are the commands within the Clipboard group. The Clipboard commands are on the Home ribbon of Word and all other Office 2007 applications that use the ribbon. The dialog expander arrow of the Clipboard group will open up the Clipboard pane, showing all items that can be pasted. You can now have up to 24 items in the Clipboard pane.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 Font Group

The second group of commands on the Home ribbon is the Font

group. The font group commands are format enhancing tool that

includes font typefaces, font size, font styles (bold, italics, underline, etc.), colors and more. Remember that you can preview how the new

font will look by highlighting the text, and hovering over the new font typeface. The expander arrow in the Font group will open up the Font dialog window.

The default font is Calibri, Font Size 11 in a NORMAL Template

Paragraph Group

The third group on the Home ribbon is the Paragraph

group. The paragraph group allows you to change Paragraph

Alignment (left, right, centered, or justified), adjust Line

Spacing within a paragraph, (1, 1.15, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3,) adjust

Spacing before and After paragraphs, working with paragraph Indentation. This is also the area where you can add bullet

lists, number lists, or outlines form to a documents. We can also Increase and decrease indents, we can apply Paragraph Marks, Apply Border for paragraph and color for paragraph. The Dialog expander arrow will open the Paragraph dialog window.

Style Group

The fourth group on the Home ribbon is the

Style group. Styles are a collection of formatting

options that you can apply to text. When you use

styles to format your document, you can quickly and easily apply a set of formatting choices

consistently throughout your document.

A style is a set of formatting characteristics, such as font name, size, color, paragraph alignment and spacing. Some styles even include borders and shading. For example, instead of taking three separate steps to format your heading as 16-point, bold, Cambria, you can achieve the same result in one step by applying the built-in Heading 1 style. You do not need to remember the characteristics of the Heading 1 style. For each heading in your document, you just click in the heading (you don't even need to select all the text), and then click Heading 1 in the gallery of styles. We can even edit Styles if required using Change styles.

Editing Group

The Fifth and final group on the Home ribbon is the Editing Group. The

commands in the Editing group are Find, Replace, and Select. When you create a

document in Microsoft Word, you may decide to change a certain word or phrase that is

repeated throughout the document. Let the computer do the hard work with the Find and Replace feature in Word and you can be sure you didn't miss one.

Under the Find command there is the Go to command. The Go to command can be used to immediate directly go to a page, a section or any marked location within your document.

The Select command can be used for different purposes:

• To select all of the text in the document, click Select All.

• To select shapes that are hidden, stacked, or behind text, click Select Objects, and then draw a box over the shapes.

• To select text with similar formatting, click Select Text with Similar Formatting.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 INSERT TAB

Pages Group

1. Cover Page: It is used to create cover page to the

document.

2. Blank Page: It is used to insert a blank page to the document.

3. Page Break (Ctrl+ Enter): It is used to break the page. Page break are 2 types Automatic

Page break and Manual

page break(Ctrl Enter) A. Tables Group: It is used to insert number of columns and number of rows in fixed width and

height. We can insert columns to left, columns to right, above rows, below

rows, cell etc., We can also convert existing text to tables in word

1. Insert Table: It is used to insert number of columns and number of rows in fixed width and height. We can insert columns to left, columns to right,

above rows, below rows, cell etc.,

a. Auto Fit to contents: Initially the columns are very narrow. Columns

are expanded as you enter text.

b. Auto Fit to window: The entire table will get adjusted to both left &

right margins.

c. Fixed column width: Initially columns are of fixed

width.

The width of the columns can be adjusted as

required.

2. Draw Table: This option is used to create a table by drawing lines. We can select line style, line colors, line

width, Sort its contents (Ascending OR Descending) we

can set Text Direction.

3. Convert: It is used to convert existing table to text &

existing text to table.

4. Excel Spread sheet: It allows inserting excel sheet into a document. 5. Quick Tables: Quick Tables are the tables that are stored in galleries as building blocks. You can access and reuse these Quick Tables anytime. If you frequently use a table with specific formatting, then the table can be stored in Quick Tables gallery, so that

you need not recreate each time you need it.

Illustrations Group

A. Picture: This option is used to insert the pictures from file.

1. Go to insert tab, click on Picture in Illustrations group.

2. Select any image then click on OK button.

B. Clipart: This option is used to insert the pictures installed with office 2007. We can insert Drawings, movies, sounds, or stock photography toillustrate a specific concept. 46 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೫೫ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 Steps:

1. Go to insert tab, Click on Clip Art in Illustrations group. 2. Type the keywords in a search, and then click on go button.

3. Click on any clip to add into a document.

C. Shapes: This option is used to insert readymade shapes such as

rectangle, flowcharts, callouts, etc.

Steps:

1. Go to insert tab, click on Shapes in Illustrations group. 2. Select any shape, draw in a document.

D. Smart Art: This option is used to insert the Smart art

graphic to visually communicate information. Smart Art

graphics range from graphical lists and process diagrams to

more complex graphics such as cycle diagram, radial diagram, Venn diagram, target diagram, pyramid diagram and

organization chart.

Steps: 1. Goto insert tab, click on Smart Art in Illustrations

group.

2. Select any Smart Art & then click on OK button.

E. Charts: It is used to insert the charts, there are 11

different types of charts like Column chart, Line, Pie, Bar,

Area, XY (scatter), Stock, Surface, Doughnut, Bubble and

Radar Steps:

• Goto insert tab, click on chart in Illustrations group. • Select the required chart, and then click on OK button.

Links Group

1. Hyperlink (Ctrl+K): It is used to place a link to a program or a

webpage or an image or a document.

Steps:

1. Go to links group from insert tab. 2. Click on Hyperlink, select any file or document 3. Finally click on OK button.

2. Bookmark: It is used to mark a specific location of a document. It helps to identify & skip from one location to

another location. We can also make a hyperlink that directly jumps to

bookmark.

Steps:

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 1. Type a text as Chapter 1 2. Place the pointer at chapter 1, Go to links group from insert tab. 3. Click on Bookmark, give the name as chapter 1as shown in above picture 4. Click on Add button.

3. Cross-Reference: Cross reference is a reference to an item that appears in another location in a document. We can create cross reference to headings, footnotes, bookmark, numbered paragraphs and so on. Cross references are automatically updated if the content is moved to another location.

By default cross references are inserted as hyperlinks.

Header & Footer Group

1. Header: It is to apply the text or image that repeats at top and of every page. We apply page number, total number of pages, odd page, even page, line numbers,

etc.

2. Footer: Footer is a text that repeats at bottom of the document every page. We apply page number, total number of pages, odd page, even page, line numbers, etc.

3. Page number: It automatically inserts page numbers, either at the header position or at the footer position. We can change the format of page numbers, alignment and the starting number.

Header area Text Group

1. Text Box: It is used to insert the text box, in which we can

type the text.

Steps:

i. Go to text group in insert tab, click on Text box.

ii. Select the different styles of text box. iii. Draw into a document.

2. Quick Parts: It is used to insert reusable pieces of contents, including fields, document properties

CLICK HERE

such as author, title, or any pre defined snippets you create.

3. Word Art: It is used to insert the decorative text into the document.

We can insert text horizontally or vertically.

Steps:

i. Go to text group in insert tab, click on WordArt. ii. Click on any 1 pattern of Word art iii. Type the required text then click on Ok48 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೫೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 4. Dropcap: The first character of paragraph appears as a large capital letter. By default drop cap is applied to 3 lines. We can drop up to 10 lines, with different

methods like dropped and in margins.

Steps:

1. Type a paragraph of text; Place the cursor near first letter of a

paragraph.

2. Go to insert tab, click on Drop Cap from Text group. 3. Select the dropped styles as Dropped or in margin.

5. Signature Line: It is used to insert the signature line. 6. Date & Time: It is used to insert the date & time. Steps:

1. Go to insert tab, click on Date & Time from Text group. 2. Select the date or time format, click on Ok button.

7. Object: It allows to the user to insert & make changes to the selected

object like applying the brightness, contrast, size etc.,

Steps:

1. Go to text group, click on object, select object 2. Select the object type from a list then click on OK button as shown in the below window.

8. Text from file: Used to insert text from other application. Steps:

1. To add the text from other application click on object, select text

from file

2. Select the file or document, click on insert button.

Symbols Group

1. Equation: Used to insert formulas into the document.

2. Symbol: It is used to insert the symbols into the document that are not present in keyboard. We can also

assign short cut keys to it.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 PAGE LAYOUT TAB

Themes Group

This option is used to apply different themes to the cover page; we can

also set different font, styles & text color.

Steps:

1. To work with the themes, first insert the cover page.

2. Click on themes & change the themes styles.

Page Setup Group:

It is Used to set the margins, Orientations like Portrait & Landscape , sizes like A3, A4, A5, letter, Legal etc., insert columns, Breaks like page break, column break

etc., to set line numbers, & Hyphenation(used to break line between

syllables of words) and settings. The default page is Letter, Margin is Left :1.25 , Right :1.25 , Top:1 , Bottom: 1,Orientation is Portrait,

Column is 1,

Hyphenation:

Page background Group:

A. Watermark This option is used to apply water mark to the document; also we can

change the page color & add page borders.

Watermark Page color Page border

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 Paragraph Group

1. Indent: used to set the left and right indent to the margins. The indents are classified into 2 types they are Normal indent and

Hanging indent.

2. Spacing: It is used to set the spacing for the paragraph (before &

after)

Arrange Group

Using this option we can set the position of the picture or

object in the page, it also allows us to move the objects to forward,

front, backward, back etc., using text wrapping option we can fit the picture or object to the text in different form. We can also align the objects, Group, ungroup & rotate the objects.

REFERENCE TAB

Table of Contents Group

Table of Contents

You create a table of contents by choosing the heading

styles — for example, Heading 1, Heading 2, and Heading 3 or even

you can give the same headings to all — that you want to include in

the table of contents. Microsoft Office Word searches for headings

that match the style that you choose formats and indents the entry

text according to the heading style, and then inserts the table of

contents into the document.

Mark entries by using built-in heading styles

1. Select the heading to which you want to apply a heading style.

2. On the Home tab, in the Styles group, select the heading that you want.

For example, if you selected text that you want to style as a main heading, click the style called Heading 1 in the Quick Style gallery.

Mark individual text entries

If you want the table of contents to include text that is not formatted as a heading, you can use this procedure to mark individual text entries. 1. Select the text that you want to include in your table of contents.

2. On the References tab, in the Table of Contents group, click Add Text.

3. Click the level that you want to label your selection, such as Level 1 for a main level display in the table of contents.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until you have labeled all of the text that you want to appear in the table of contents.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 CREATE A TABLE OF CONTENTS

After you mark the entries for your table of contents, you are ready to build it.

Create a table of contents from built-in heading styles Use this procedure if you created a document by using heading styles.

1. Click where you want to insert the table of contents, usually at the

beginning of a document.

2. On the References tab, in the Table of Contents group, click Table of Contents, and then click the table of contents style that

you want.

Update the table of contents

If you added or removed headings or other table of contents

entries in your document, you can quickly update the table of contents.

1) On the References tab, in the Table of Contents group, click Update

Table.

2) Click Update page numbers only or Update entire table.

Footnotes Group

Insert Footnote: It is used to give a note at the end of the document. It is

available only if document contains footnote or end note. It shows the footnote

text inserted in the page.

Caption and Bibliography Group

1. Insert Caption: Using this option we can give a name to the image or object.

Steps:

1. Go to Insert Tab, Click on Picture from Illustrator Group. 2. Click on image, go to Reference Tab, and click on Insert Caption from Caption Group.

3. Click on New label & give a new name to the picture, finally click on OK button.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 INSERT TABLE OF FIGURES Using this option we can create a list of table of figures which we have created caption.

Steps:

• On the reference tab, click on insert table of figures from caption group.

• Change the different tab leader styles & format, finally click on ok button.

Cross-reference: This option is used to insert the given name to the image. (ex: "refer page no. 6 → cross reference)

Steps: On the reference tab, click on cross-reference

option from caption group. Select the caption name from the referenced type list, then click on

insert button.

Index Group

An index lists the terms and topics that are discussed in a

document, along with the pages that they appear on. To create an

index, you mark the index entries by providing the name of the main

entry and the cross-reference in your document, and then you build

the index. 1. Mark Entry: This option is used to mark the text. 2. Insert Index: After marking all the text, it is used to create an Index table.

3. Update Index: Used to update the changes done in the index text.

Steps: 1. Type a text as apple & select, go to reference Tab, click on Mark Entry. 2. Similar to all the text. 3. Click the pointer in the first page, go to reference Tab, click on Insert Index. 4. To update the changes in a table, use Update Index.

MAILINGS TAB

Create Group

1. Envelopes: It supports to stores the receiver's address for

further use (to print envelopes).

Steps:

• Go to Mailings Tab, click on Envelopes from Create group. • Type the Delivery address & return address, then click on

OK button.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 2. Labels: Used to create labels.

Steps:

• Go to Mailings Tab, click on Labels from Create group. • Type the field names and then click on options to choose

the label size.

• Select the size from the list, click on OK button. • Finally click on new document.

A. Start Mail Merge Group

1. Start Mail Merge: This option used to start to create mail merge by

using Step By Step Mail Merge Wizard option.

2. Select Recipients: In this option type the new recipient's details or to select from the document to add in the letter.

3. Edit Recipient List: It is used to update the changes if

anything done in the recipients list.

B. Write & Insert Fields

1. Insert Merge Fields: To add the field names into the created letter.

C. Preview Results

1. Preview Results: This option is used to see the preview of the letter

& also we can be find the required recipient.

D. Finish

1. Finish & Merge: Used to finally to add all the receiver's addresses to the created letter.

Steps To create Mail Merge using Direct Method:

➢ Create a letter without receiver's address. ➢ Go to Mailings, select Start Mail Merge. ➢ Select Step by step Mail merge wizard. ➢ In step 1 click on next ➢ In step 2 click on next ➢ In step 3 select Type a new list option & click on next ➢ Click on Customized columns ➢ Delete all the field names or you can enter the details in required field names. ➢ If you have deleted all the field names then click on Add, type the new field names like Name, Address line 1, Address_line 2, Place, Pin code, Date & Time etc.,

➢ Click on OK button. ➢ Add the required records. ➢ Save the documents & click on OK button ➢ Again click on OK button. ➢ Keep the cursor point below the "To" ➢ Click on insert merge fields option from Write & insert fields group ➢ Add the field names one by one, click on insert button. ➢ Go to Finish group, click on Finish & merge option. ➢ Select edit individual documents. ➢ Finally click on OK button.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 Steps To create Mail Merge using Table Method:

➢ Take a new document. ➢ Insert table, give field name in column as address. ➢ Add "To" Addresses ➢ Save & close the document. ➢ Take a new document, create a letter without "To" address ➢ Go to Mailings, select Start Mail Merge. ➢ Select Step by Step Mail Merge Wizard. ➢ In step 1 click on next ➢ In step 2 click on next ➢ In step 3 select use an existing list & click on Browse. ➢ Select the document, click on open. ➢ Click on insert fields, select the field name like address, ➢ Click on insert & close the window. ➢ Go to Finish group, click on Finish & merge option. ➢ Select edit individual documents. ➢ Finally click on OK button.

REVIEW TAB

Proofing Group

1. Spelling & Grammar (F7): It is used to check the spelling and grammatical mistakes Red wavy line indicates spelling mistake and Green wavy line

indicates grammar mistakes.

Steps:

1. Type a wrong word, go to Spelling &

Grammar.

2. Select ed the correct spelling word from the suggestions list,

3. Click on change button.

2. Research (Alt+click): It is used to open the research task pane to search through reference materials such as

dictionary, encyclopedia and translation services.

3. Thesaurus (Shift+F7): It is used to show nearest meaning of the selected word.

Steps:

I. Type a word & select, goto Thesaurus option,

II. It lists out the meaning of the selected word.

4. Word Count: It display the total number of characters,

words, lines, paragraphs, pages etc.,55 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೬೪ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007

Comments Group

1. New Comment: It is an extra note attached to the document for reference; it is non

printable item; it is an external reference included to a selected text.

2. Delete: This option used to delete the selected

comment.

3. Previous: This option used to see the previous

comment.

4. Next: This option used to see the next comment. 5.

Tracking Group

1. Track Changes: In this we can change inserted text colors,

formatted text colors and changed

lines.

You can easily make and view tracked changes and comments

while you work in a document. By default, Microsoft Office Word 2007

uses balloons to display deletions, comments, formatting changes, and

content that has moved. If you want to see all of your changes in line, you can change settings so that tracked changes and comments display

the way you want.

2. Balloons: This option is used to show all the comments.

Changes Group

1. Accepts: This option is used to accept the changes done in the document. 2. Reject: This option is used to reject the changes done in the document. 3. Previous: It lets you to take to the previous track change text. 4. Next: It lets you to take to the next track change text.

Compare Group

Compare: This option is used to compare multiple versions of the

documents.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 Protect Group

Protect Document: This option is used to protect the document by

giving the password.

Steps:

1. Go to Review tab, Click on Protect Document.

2. Select Restrict Formatting & Editing option. 3. Select 1st & 2nd options, then select Yes start Enforce Protection. 4. Type the password, again type the same password. 5. Click on OK. 6. To Unprotect the Document. 7. Click on Stop Protection. 8. Type the same password.

VIEW TAB

Document Views Group

Word gives you several ways to view your document as you work on it, and

you'll find that your efficiency increases and your work become easier when you use the optimal view for the task at hand. You can use either the View

tab on the Ribbon or any of the five view buttons at the bottom-right of the window to change your view. 1. Print Layout View is the standard working view for print documents and it shows you how your document will look

when it's printed—the placement of pictures, the

arrangement of columns, the distance of the text from the

edge of the page, and so on.

2. Full Screen Reading View makes it easy to read documents on your screen. The text is laid out in long

vertical pages (or screens), just like those you see in most

books. If you increase the size of the text for better

readability, the content simply flows from one screen to the

next. To maximize the area of the screen that's available for

the document's content, the elements you normally see in

the other views—the tabs, the Ribbon, and the status bar, for example—are no longer visible.

3. Web Layout View is exclusively for working with online documents as if they were Web pages. That is, all the

elements are displayed, but font size, line length, and page

length all adjust to fit the window, just as they do on many

Web pages.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007

4. Outline View displays your document as an outline, with the paragraph formatting defining the levels of the outline. By default,

Word's standard heading styles have corresponding outline levels—

Heading 1 is level one, Heading 2 is level two, and so on—and other

paragraph styles, such as Normal, are treated as regular text. You can

use Outline view to organize your topics before you start writing, or

you can use it to reorganize an existing document.

5. Draft View is designed for speed of entry and editing. It's based on the commercial publishing technique of creating galleys. You

place the text and other elements in one long, continuous column

that flows from one page to the next, and you deal with the

placement of elements after you've ironed out any content

problems. Draft view was called Normal view in earlier versions of Word.

6. Print Preview shows you just how your document will look when you print it. You can see a close-up view, one page at a time, or two or more

pages at once. Use Print Preview to make sure your document's layout is

exactly the way you want before you go ahead and print it.

Note: The default view is Print Layout.

Show/Hide Group

1. Ruler: This option is used to show or hide the ruler. 2. Gridlines: This option is used to show or hide the gridlines. 3. Document Map: This option is used to show or hide the document map. 4. Thumbnails: This option is used to show or hide the thumbnails.

Zoom Group

Zoom: It allows us to see the document in different zooms (Compression or Expansion of document view). The default size is 100% & maximum we can set 500%. The minimum zoom size is 10%.

Window Group

1. New window: It is used to create duplicate of active

document window.

2. Arrange all: It is used to arrange all opened windows one by one. All opened documents are shown on the screen.

3. Spilt: It is used to divide the window into two parts to view different parts of the document at the same time. Windows are displayed one below the other.

4. View Side by Side: In this view two windows are displayed side by side. This view can be used to compare two opened documents.

5. Synchronous Scrolling: Used to scroll the pages of all the opened documents simultaneously.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 6. Switch Windows: This option used to switch between the documents.

Macros Group (Alt+F8)

1. View Macro: Displays the list of macros. 2. Record Macros: Used to store the action done in the document as a macro for later use. 3. Pause / Stop Recording: Using this option we can pause / stop the recording.

In the next step give a macro name, then click on OK button as shown in the below figure.

Picture Tools: If you want to work with this picture tools

1. First insert image,

2. Then click on image

3. Goto format in picture tools.

Drawing Tools: If you want to work with a drawing tools, first insert an object, select & goto Drawing tools.

Position : We can re order the objects using Bring to Front

& Send to back option in arrange Group as shown in the

below

figure

.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE DOCUMENT EDITING SOFTWARE – WORD 2007 Text Wrapping

Using this option we can set the object in Inline text, Square, Tight, Behind text etc., as shown in the below picture.

In MS Word we can arrange the

objects to the left,, right, center, top,

bottom etc., as shown in the below

picture.

Steps:

A. Draw the multiple object using Illustration group in insert tab.

B. Select all the objects using shift key.

C. Goto Drawing tools, click on align button.

Group We can group the multiple objects to make a single

object.

Steps:

1. Insert Multiple objects. 2. Select by holding shift key. 3. Goto format group in drawing tab 4. Click on group. 5. To ungroup click on ungroup option.

Size Using size group we can resize (increase or

decrease) the size of the image or object.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 SPREADSHEETS61 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೭೦ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007

CHAPTER - 5 EXCEL 2007

INTRODUCTION

Excel 2007 is the spreadsheet application, which is used majorly for calculation & other tasks.

The Excel 2007 grids has 1,048,576 rows by 16,384 columns, which provides you with 1,500% more rows and 6,300% more columns than you had available in Microsoft Excel 2003. For those of you who are curious, columns now end at XFD instead of IV. In Excel 2007, you can quickly format the data in your worksheet by applying a theme and by using a specific style. Themes can be shared across other 2007 Office release programs, such as Microsoft Word and PowerPoint, while styles are designed to change the format of Excel-specific items, such as Excel tables, charts, PivotTables, shapes, or diagrams.

In Office Excel 2007, you can quickly arrange your worksheet data to find the answers that you need by using enhanced filtering and sorting. In Office Excel 2007, the default format for an Excel WorkBook is the Excel 2007 XML-based file format (.XLSX). The first cell address is A1 and last cell address us XFD 1,048,576. Each cell or active cell is surrounded by grid line (non-

printable line).

Fill Handle: At the right corner fill handle box is located which is used to fill the

contents for selected cell. We can select column by clicking on a column heading. we can select a row by clicking on a Row heading. We can select any cell by the key

FILL HANDLE

combination Ctrl + Mouse click. In each cell we can enter up to 255 characters.

Shortcut key for selecting a row is Shift+SpcBar. Shortcut key for selecting a column is Crtl+SpcBar

By default we have 3 sheets in a WorkBook and we can insert as much as we require in a WorkBook. The default WorkBook name is "BOOK 1"

Excel window consists of two types windows such as Application window and Document window.

NAME BOX FORMULA BAR

• Application window: It consists of title bar, Menu bar, Standard tool bar, Formatting toolbar and Status bar.

• Name Box : It displays the active cell addresss. • Formula Bar: In formula bar we can see the contents typed in a cell. The information that can be entered or edited through the formula bar includes formulas, which are combinations of letters, numbers and symbols that can help users perform calculations, such as tabulating the values of an entire column.

• Document Window: It consists of 16,384 columns and 1,048,576 rows with its heading and also which displays sheet tab by default,. We are having 3 sheet and we can insert as much as we required in a WorkBookಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೭೧ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007

MS EXCEL WINDOW

Office Button : The Microsoft Office Button replaces the File menu and is located in the upper- left corner of these Microsoft Office programs. When you click the Microsoft Office Button, you see the same basic commands available in earlier releases of Microsoft Office to open, save, and print your file.

OFFICE BUTTON OPTIONS:

1. New (Ctrl+N): It is used to create a new blank WorkBook or template based WorkBook like invoice, letter etc.,

2. Open (Ctrl+O): It is used to open the existing WorkBook. 3. Save (Ctrl+S): It is used to save the active WorkBook. The default extension of a excel WorkBook is ".XLSX"

4. Save As (F12): It is used to create a duplicate copy of the active document.

Note: We can assign password to a document while saving to give protection to the document.

Steps to Set Password to a Workbook.

a. Go to office button

b. Click on save option c. Select tools button

d. Select general option

e. Type the password to open again. Retype the same password. f. Give the document name, finally click on save button. 5. Print (Ctrl+P): It is used to get Printout of the Workbook.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 6. Print Preview (Ctrl+F2): Displays the worksheet as it appears on the paper when printed. It shows all printable

information. It allows to shrink the document size and to

change the ruler settings.

7. Send: It allows sending the copy of a document in a mail

as an attachment through Internet.

8. Close (Ctrl+W): It is used to close the active document. 9. Recent documents: It list out the recently used

documents.

Excel Options:

Using this option we can set the color scheme, Auto Correct, Save settings & Customize the Quick access toolbar

using Popular, Display, Proofing, Save, Advanced & Customize options.

HOME TAB

Clipboard Group

1. Cut (Ctrl+X): It cuts the selected portion text and places it on Clip board 2. Copy (Ctrl+C): This option is used to copy the selected word on to clipboard.

3. Paste: This option is used to paste in different ways : paste formulas, paste values, no border, transpose, paste link, paste special, paste as hyperlink & paste as a

picture.

4. Paste Special: By using this option we can paste only the required values, text, comments or formats

etc.

5. Office Clipboard: It stores the cut or copied text;

it stores up to 24 contents.

6. Format Painter: It copies the format styles of the current cell/selected cells. We can apply the same styles to other cells.

Font Group

This group provides various icons to apply formatting to the text

such as:

• Selecting font name, size, color, etc (default font is "Calibri" and size is "11".

• Choosing the appearance of text in bold, italic or underlined • Selecting effects like superscript, subscript. • Choosing whether cell border is needed or not. • We can increase or decrease the font size. • A cell or a group of cells can be highlighted by filling them with any selected color.

Alignment Group

This group provides icons to provide different alignments for the contents of cells.

• Vertical alignment: Top, Middle or Bottom • Horizontal alignment: Left, Center, or Right.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 • Text Direction: Contents of a cell can be displayed in any angle. • Icons for increasing and decreasing indent. • Two or more cells can be merged to form a single cell • The contents of a cell can be wrapped to fit in the selected column width.

By default text are left aligned and numbers are right aligned.

In Excel, you can also apply specific formatting to a cell. To apply formatting to a cell or group of cells:

• Select the cell to be formatted. • Click the Dialog Box arrow on the Alignment group of the

Home tab

There are several tabs on this dialog box that allow you to

modify properties of the cells.

• Number tab: It displays the specific number format for the cells. We can set the different number format like, general,

percentage, and dollar etc., & also to increase or decrease the

decimal point.

• Alignment tab: Allows for the horizontal and vertical alignment of text, wrap text, shrink text, merge cells and the direction of the

text.

• Font tab: Allows for control of font face, font style, size, color, and

additional features.

• Border tab: Applies Border styles and colors to a table which is selected. • Fill tab: fill colors and styles for the selected cell or table.

Styles Group

Conditional Formatting: Used to set different conditional formatting to the

cells by selecting different conditions. You might use conditional formatting to

locate dates that meet a certain criteria (such as falling on a Saturday or Sunday), to call out highest or lowest value in a range, or to indicate values that fall under

or over a specified amount.

Steps:

• Select the cell(s) to which you want to apply conditional formatting. • Click the Conditional Formatting button in the Styles group on the

Home tab.

• Point to Highlight Cells Rules and then select the criteria you want

to use.

• Enter the values you want to reference in the text box.

2. Format as Table: Used to apply quick formatting to the selected table.

Steps:

I. Create a table as in above figure

II. Select & goto format as table.

III. Select any one format.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 Cell Styles: By using this option we can set different heading levels to the cell text.

Cells Group

1. Insert: This option is used for inserting the cells, rows & columns.

To insert new cells, rows, or columns in an Excel worksheet, follow these steps:

1. Select the cells, rows, or columns where you want the new, blank cells to appear. 2. Click the drop-down button attached to the Insert command button in the Cells group of the Home tab.

3. Click Insert Cells on the drop-down menu.

The Insert dialog box opens with the following option

buttons:  Shift Cells Right: Select this option to shift existing cells to the right to make room for the blank cells you

want to insert.

 Shift Cells Down: Use this default option to shift existing cells down.

 Entire Row: Select this option to insert complete rows in the cell range. You can also select the row number on the frame

before you choose the Insert command.

 Entire Column: Select this option to insert complete columns in the cell range. You can also select the column letter on the

frame before you choose the Insert command.

Delete: This option is used for deleting the cells, rows &

columns. To delete the actual cell selection rather than just clear out

the contents, follow these steps: 1. Select the cells, rows, or columns you want to delete.

2. Click the drop-down button attached to the Delete command

button in the Cells group of the Home tab.

3. Click Delete Cells on the drop-down menu.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 The Delete dialog box opens, showing these options for filling in the gaps:

 Shift Cells Left: This default option moves entries from neighboring columns on the right to the left to fill in gaps created when you delete the

cell selection.

 Shift Cells Up: Select this to move entries up from neighboring rows

below.

 Entire Row: Select this to remove all the rows in the current cell

selection.

 Entire Column: Select this to delete all the columns in the current cell

selection.

2. Format: Used to format cell sizes. We can set row height, the default row height is 15, and we can also set to Auto fit row height. Similarly we can

set column width; the default column width is 8.43. In this we can show or hide the rows & columns, also we can rename the sheet and copy &

move the sheet from one worksheet to another worksheet. We can also change tab color. Using protect sheet option we can protect the sheet by giving the password.

To Modify Column Width

 Click the Format command in the Cells group on the Home tab. A menu will appear.  Select Column Width to enter a specific column measurement.  Select AutoFit Column Width to adjust the column width to fit its contents.

To Modify the Row Height

1. Click the Format command in the Cells group on the Home tab. A menu will appear.

2. Select Row Height to enter a specific row measurement. 3. Select AutoFit Row Height to adjust the row height to fit its contents.

Editing Group:

In editing group we can perform calculations using Autosum (Alt+=)(Sum,

Avg, count, max, min) option & the data pattern can be continued to adjacent cells in

any direction i.e., down, left, up, right, across worksheet, series (1,2,3, or Jan, Feb., march..) & Justify. Using Clear option we can be used to clear only the contents,

only the formats or only the comments of the selected cells. Clear option can also be used to clear formats, comments and contents of the selected cells. The sort & filter option will be used to arrange the data in ascending & descending order. The Find & Select option can be used to find the text or number and we can also replace the text or number. We can move to specified cell using Go to option.

We can also work with objects.

In the Editing group, click FILL " select the appropriate option:

• Down: Repeats the contents of the first cell throughout the selected cells below it. • Right: Repeats the contents of the first cell throughout the selected cells to the right of it. • Up: Repeats the contents of the first cell throughout the selected cells above it. • Left: Repeats the contents of the first cell throughout the selected cells to the left of it. • Across Worksheets: Repeats the contents of the selected cells in another selected worksheet.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 • Series... fills in data that is part of a pattern, rather than simply repeating the data across selected cells. This option brings up the Series dialog box, which allows you to select the type of pattern you would like to use. Ex: If the first cell contains the day Sunday, Excel will fill the following cells with Monday, Tuesday, etc.

• Justify: Distributes text in the first selected cell throughout several selected rows.

NOTE: This option changes the contents of these cells by moving the data to fit within the new rows.

INSERT TAB

Tables Group

Pivot Table: A PivotTable report is an interactive way to quickly summarize

large amounts of data. Use a PivotTable report to analyze numerical data in depth and

to answer unanticipated questions about your data.

Steps to create a Pivot Table

1. Create a data as shown in the below picture. 2. Click any one cell that where you need the Pivot table result, here we have select A1 in sheet 2 3. Goto Insert tab & select Pivot table, a Create Pivot Table window will open 4. Click on Sheet 1 & select the table range as shown in the below picture & click on OK button 5. Drag & Drop the field names in their areas as show in the below picture. 6. Finally you can create a Pivot Table.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 Pivot Chart: A PivotChart report provides a graphical representation of the data in a PivotTable report (PivotTable report: An interactive, cross tabulated Excel report that summarizes and analyzes data, such as database records, from various sources, including ones that are external to Excel). You can change the layout and data that are displayed in a PivotChart report just as you can in a PivotTable report. A PivotChart report always has an associated PivotTable report: The PivotTable report that supplies the source data to the PivotChart report. It is created automatically when you create a new PivotChart report. When you change the layout of either report, the other also changes.) That uses a corresponding layout. Both reports have fields that correspond to each other. When you change the position of a field in one report, the corresponding field in the other report also moves.

Illustrations Group

• Picture: This option is used to insert the pictures. • Clipart: This option is used to insert the default clip arts. • Shapes: This option is used to insert the different Shapes. • SmartArt: This option is used to insert the Smart art objects.

A. Charts: Chart is a representation of the selected data, which can be used to create the graphical representation, it is easy to create professional looking charts. Simply by

choosing a chart type, a chart layout, and a chart style. There are 11 different types of charts are present like as follows:

Column charts Line charts Pie charts Bar charts

Area charts XY (scatter) charts Stock charts Surface charts Doughnut charts Bubble charts Radar charts

The default chart is column chart, you can apply special effects, such as shadow, reflection, glow, soft edges, bevel, and 3-D rotation to chart element shapes, which gives your chart a finished look.

Following are the steps to create a Chart:

1. On the worksheet, arrange the data that you want to plot in a chart. 2. Select the cells that contain the data that you want to use for the chart. 3. On the Insert tab, in the Charts group, select the chart type. 4. Then click a chart subtype that you want to use.

Chart Tools: The Chart Tools appear on the Ribbon when you click on the chart. The tools are located on three tabs: Design, Layout, and Format. Within the Design tab you can control the chart type, layout, styles, and location.

Within the Layout tab you can control inserting pictures, shapes and text boxes, labels, axis, background, and analysis.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 Within the Format tab you can modify shape styles, word styles and size of the chart.

Links Group

Hyperlink (Ctrl+K): It is used to place a link to another document in the existing file.

Text Group

1. Text Box: It is used to insert the text box, in which we can enter

the text.

2. Header & Footer: This option is used to add header & footer to

the sheet.

Steps: • Click the Header & Footer button on the Insert tab • This will display the Header & Footer Design Tools Tab

• To switch between the Header and Footer, click the Go to Header or Go to Footer button • To insert text: enter the text in the header or footer

• To enter preprogrammed data such as page numbers, date, time, file name or sheet name, click the appropriate button

• To change the location of data, click the desired cell 3. Word Art: It is used to insert the decorative text into the document. 4. Signature Line: It is used to insert the signature line. 5. Object: It allows to the user to insert & make the changes of the selected object like applying the brightness, contrast, size etc.,

6. Symbol: It is used to insert the symbols into the document that are not present in keyboard. We canalso assign short cut keys to it. 70 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೭೯ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007

PAGE LAYOUT TAB

Themes Group:

This option is used to apply different themes to the cover page, we can also set

different font, styles & text color.

Page Setup Group

1. Margins: To set different margins to the document. 2. Orientation: We can set orientation like portrait or

landscape.

3. Size: This option is used to set the page size like A3,

A4, letter, legal etc.,

Here the default paper is Letter(8.5 X 11), Orientation : Portrait, Margins : left : 0.7", Right :0.7" , Top:0.75" , Bottom:0.75" and Header : 0.3", Footer :0.3" respectively.

4. Print Area: This option used to set / remove the printing area. 5. Break: Used to break the page in the different points. 6. Background: We can set/reset different background to the sheet. 7. Print Titles: In this option we can select or remove the titles like headings, gridlines and Page order like Over then down & down then over as shown in the below picture Scale to fit Group

1. Width: used to shrink the width of printed output fit to maximum number of

pages.

2. Height: used to shrink the height of printed output fit to maximum number of pages.

3. Scale: This option lets you to adjust the height and width of the pages.

Sheet Option Group

1. Gridlines: Gridlines are the faint lines that appear around cells in Excel 2007. They are used to distinguish cells on the worksheet. They are non printable lines.

This option is used to show/hide the Gridlines on the worksheet & to get printout on the paper or not.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 2. Headings: This option is used to show or hide the headings like A, B, C etc., & to get printout on the paper or not.

Arrange Group:

Using this option we can set the position of the picture or object in the

page, it also allows arranging the objects to forward, front, backward, back etc.,

Using text wrapping option we can fit the picture or object to the text in different form. We can also align the objects, Group & ungroup & rotate the

objects.

FORMULAS TAB

Function Library Group

Operator: It is symbol used to perform calculations. There are three types of operators. 1. Arithmetical Operator: It is used to perform only arithmetic operations like addition, subtraction, multiplication, divisions etc., Ex: +, -, *, /.

2. Reference Operators: It is used to compare two or more numbers. Ex: > or =, < or =. 3. Logical Operators: It is used to combine two or more conditions Ex: and, or, not. a. Constants: Constants is a fixed value we cannot change the value of constants.

Ex: 10, 20, 30 etc.

b. Variable: It is a floating value we can change the value of variable.

Ex: A=10 or A=15, B=8 or B=13.

c. Formula: It is a combination of operators, (operands) constants, and variable to perform some calculations.

Ex: C= a+b. here + is an operator, a and b are operands or variables.

d. Function: The readymade formula is called as functions.

There are different categories of functions like

Text Functions. Date and Time Functions.

Statistical Functions. Logical Functions.

Financial Functions Mathematical and Trignometric Functions.

Lookup and references Engineering Functions

Cube functions Information functions

TEXT FUNCTIONS:

If you want to combine text and a number, like a date, into a readable format use the TEXT function. For example, if you have the following information in separate cells, you can use TEXT to create a meaningful sentence.

a. Character: This function returns or converts number into character.

Syntax: =Char(number) Ex: =Char(65) Result: A.

b. Code: This function returns or converts character into number.

Syntax: =Code("Character") Ex: =Code ("A") Result: 65.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 c. Concatenate: This function combines or merges the given string. We can merge upto 30 strings.

Syntax: =Concatenate("string 1", "string 2", "string 3")

Ex: =concatenate ("com","put","er") Result: computer.

d. Exact: This function returns a boolean value. If the strings are equal, it displays true and if the strings are not equal it display false.

Syntax: =Exact("string 1", "string 2") Ex: =Exact("john", "john") Result: True.

e. Find: This function finds the position of given character with in string.

Syntax: =Find("find text","string") Ex: =Find("p","computer") Result: 4

f. Right: This function displays specified number of characters from the right side.

Syntax: =Right("string", "number of characters")

Ex: =Right("computer",4) Result: uter.

g. Left: This function displays specified number of characters from the left side.

Syntax: =Left("string", "number of characters")

Ex: =Left("computer",4) Result: comp.

h. Length: This function returns length of the given string.

Syntax: =Length("string") Ex: =Length("Kolar") Result: 5 i. Lower: This function converts the given string to lower case letters.

Syntax: =Lower("capital string")

Ex: =Lower("NEWTON")

Result: newton j. Upper: This function converts the given string to upper case letters.

Syntax: =Upper("small string") Ex: =Upper("india") Result: INDIA k. Mid: This function returns a substring of the given string. The sub string starts from the position specified in the second field and the length of the substring is given in the third field.

Syntax: =Mid("string", starting number, number of characters)

Ex: =Mid("Cococola",3,4)

Result: Coco l. Proper: This function returns the capitalized of first character in a given string.

Syntax: =Proper("string") Ex: =Proper("sAcHIn") Result: Sachin m. Replace: This function replace old string with a new string using starting number and number of characters.

Syntax:=Replace("String", starting no.,no. of characters, "new string") Ex: =Replace("Maharani",5,4, "Raja")

Result: MahaRaja.

n. Repeat: This function repeats the given string into number of times.

Syntax: =Rept("string","number of times")

Ex: =Rept("Mysore",4) Result: MysoreMysoreMysoreMysore.

o. Substitute: This function replaces or substitutes the part of the given string as specified by the second and third fields.

Syntax: =Substitute("String","old string","new string")

Ex: =Substitute("Cococola","cola"," maza")

Result: Cocomaza.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 p. Trim: This function removes spaces from both ends (left and right) of the given string.

Syntax: =Trim("String") Ex: =Trim("India") Result: India 2. Statistical Functions:

a. Average: This function finds out percentage of given numbers or range of numbers.

Syntax: =Average(number 1, number 2,number 3)

Ex: =Average(89,88,65,87,97,87) Result: 85.5

b. Count: This function counts the cells having numbers within the range of cells.

Syntax: =Count(Range) Ex: =Count(A1:A6) Result: 3 c. Counta: This function counts the cells having numbers and text within that range of

cells.

Syntax: =Counta(Range) Ex: =Count(A1:A6) Result: 5 d. Countblank: This function counts the number of blank cells within that range of cells.

Syntax: =Countblank(Range) Ex: =Countblank(A1:A6) Result: 1 e. Countif: This function counts the cells having numbers using condition.

Syntax: =Countif(Range,"Condition")

Ex: =Countif(A1:A6,">35") Result: 2 3. Logical Functions

a. And: This function returns true if all the conditions are satisfied. It returns false if any one condition is not satisfied..

Syntax: =And(condition1, condition2)

Ex: =And(6>4,4<8) Result: True.

b. Or: This function returns true if any of the condition is satisfied and returns false if all the conditions are not satisfied.

Syntax: =Or(condition1,condition2)

Ex: =Or(6>4,4>6) Result: True.

c. NOT: This function returns complement of the result. If the condition is true, not(condition) is false and vice versa.

Syntax: =Not(condition) Ex: =Not(6>9) Result: True.

d. If: This function returns one of the two values depending on some condition. If the condition evaluates to true, then the first value is returned; else the second value is returned. .

Syntax: =If(condition, "true block", "false block")

Ex: =If(D2>14, "Major", "Minor") Result: Major.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 4. Date and Time Functions:

a. Date: This function returns date in system date format given using year, month and day.

Syntax: =Date(year,month,day)

Ex: =Date(2010,5,25) Result: 25-05-2010

b. Date value: This function returns serial number of the given date-text.

Syntax: =Datevalue("Date")

Ex: =Datevalue("25-05-2010") Result: 40323.

c. Day: This function returns day of the given serial number.

Syntax: =Day("serial number")

Ex: =Day("40323") Result: 25.

d. Month: This function returns the month of the given serial number.

Syntax: =Month("serial number")

Ex: =Month("40323") Result: 5.

e. Year: This function returns year of the given serial number.

Syntax: =Year("serial number")

Ex: =Year("40323") Result: 2010.

f. Days360: This function returns the number of days between given starting date and ending date. This function assumes there are twelve 30-day months in an year.

Syntax: =Days360("starting date","ending date")

Ex: =Days360("5/23/2010","6/23/2010") Result: 30

g. Today: This function returns system date.

Syntax: =Today( ) Ex: =Today( ) Result: 5/23/2010.

h. Now: This function returns system date and time.

Syntax: =Now( ) Ex: =Now( ) Result:7/28/2014 1:05:30 PM i. Time: This function returns system time format.

Syntax: =Time(Hour,Minutes,Seconds)

Ex: =Time(1,25,45) Result: 1:25 PM

j. Time value: This function returns serial number of given time.

Syntax: =Timevalue("Hr:Min:Sec")

Ex: =Timevalue("8:20:50") Result: 0.347800926. k. Hour: This function returns the hour of the given serial number.

Syntax: =Hour("serial number")

Ex: =Hour("0.347800926") Result: 8

l. Minute: This function returns the minute of the given serial number.

Syntax: =Minute("serial number")

Ex: =Minute("0.347800926") Result: 20

m. Second: This function returns the second of the given serial number.

Syntax: =Second ("serial number")

Ex: =Second ("0.347800926") Result: 5075 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೮೪ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 n. WeekDay: This function returns the weekday of the given serial number.

Syntax: =Weekday("serial number")

Ex: =WeekDay("0.347800926") Result: 5

5. Mathematical and Trigonometric functions.

a. Absolute: This option returns absolute value of a given number. Absolute value means the value without its sign. positive value of given negative value.

Syntax: =Abs(negative value) Ex: =Abs(-90) Result: 90

=abs(75) Result: 75

b. Factorial: This function returns factorial of given number.

Syntax: =Fact(number) Ex: =Fact(5) Result: 120.

c. Even: This function rounds a positive number up and negative number down to the nearest even integer. (returns next even number of given odd number.)

Syntax: =Even(odd number) Ex: =Even(7) Result: 8

=even(-5) Result: -6

d. Odd: This function rounds a positive number up and negative number down to the nearest odd integer. (returns next odd number of given even number)

Syntax: =Odd(even number) Ex: =Odd(8) Result: 9.

=odd(-6) Result: -7

e. Integer: This function returns only integer value.

Syntax: =Int(number with decimal) Ex: =Int(10.50) Result: 10

f. Ln(natural logarithm): This function returns natural logarithm of given number.

Syntax: =Ln(number) Ex: =Ln(1000) Result: 6.907755279 g. Log: This function returns logarithm of given number using base.

Syntax: =Log(number, base number)

Ex: =Log(100,2) Result: .698970004 h. Log 10: This function returns logarithm of given number using base 10.

Syntax: = Log(number) Ex: =Log(100,2) Result: 6.643856 i. Square Root: This function returns square root of given number.

Syntax: =Sqrt(number) Ex: =Sqrt(144) Result: 12

j. Mod: This function finds out modulus of given number using and divisor. This function returns the remainder after dividing the given number by the divisor.

Syntax: =Mod(number,divisor) Ex: =Mod(5,2) Result: 1

k. Power: This function returns result of the given number raised to given power. .

Syntax: =Power(number,power) Ex:=Power(2,3) Result: 8

l. Pi: This function returns default value of pi.

Syntax: =Pi() Ex: =Pi() Result: 3.141576 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೮೫ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 m. Sum: This function returns sum of all numbers in the given range.finds out total of given numbers.

Syntax: =Sum(number1,number2,number3) or sum(A1:A5)

Ex: =Sum(10,20,30) Result: 60

Sum(h1:h4) Result:

n. Sumif: This function finds the sum of those numbers in the range that satisfy the given condition.

Syntax: =Sumif(range,"condition")

Ex: =Sumif(A1:A5,">50") Result: 2

o. Product: This function finds out product of all numbers in the given range. multiplication of given number.

Syntax: =Product(Range) Ex: =Product(A1:A2) Result: 6

p. Maximum: This function returns maximum value within a range.

Syntax: =Max(range) Ex: =Max(A1:A5) Result: 17

q. Minimum: This function returns minimum value within range.

Syntax: =Min(range) Ex: =Min(A1:A5) Result: 1

Defined Names Group

1. Define Name: We can give a name to the selected cells as shown in the below

picture.

2. Use in formula: The name given to the cell can be used in formulas instead

of their addresses. This option lists available names in the workbook and you are allowed to select any one to use in the formula.

3. Create from selection: It allows us to automatically generate

names from the selected cells. The names may be listed in the

top/bottom/right/left side of the cells.

Formula Auditing Group

1. Trace precedents: It shows arrow to indicate what cells affect

the value of the currently selected cell.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 2. Trace dependents: It shows arrow to indicate which are the cells affected by the currently selected cell.

3. Trace Error: It shows arrow to the cells which leads to error along with the explanation for the error.

4. Remove arrows: It removes all the arrows.(Precedent and dependent arrows)78 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೮೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 5. Remove precedents arrows: It removes only precedent arrows.

6. Remove dependents arrows: It removes only dependent arrows.

7. Watch Window: This option used to open the watch window, in this we can monitor the values of certain cells as changes are made to the sheet.

Calculation Group

1. Calculation Option: Using this option we can specify when calculations are

performed. Calculations can be performed automatically or manually. Usually all

calculations are performed as soon as changes are made to the related cell.

2. Calculate now (F9): Used to update the calculation now in entire workbook. This is required only if automatic calculation has been turned off.

3. Calculate Sheet (Shift+F9): Used to update the calculation now in the entire sheet.

DATA TAB

Get External Data Group

1. From Access: This option is used to import the table from

MS Access database.

2. From Web: Import the data from the web. 3. From Text: Using this option we can import the text from

Notepad, WordPad applications etc.,79 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೮೮ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007

Sort & Filter Group

1. Sort: This option is used to arrange the contents in ascending or

descending order.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 2. Filter: Used to apply or remove the filters to the selected fields.

3. Clear: It lets you to clear the filter and display all the records.

4. Advanced filter: We can specify complex criteria for filters. The filtered list can be in

place or can be copied to another location.

Steps:

1. First select all the data, go to filter.

2. Click in criteria range box, select place

& madras cell.

3. Click in copy to box & click in any 1

cell from a sheet.

Data Tools Group

1. Text to Columns: It is used to divide column contents into

multiple columns.

Steps:

1. Type the field names in a single cell as show in the below picture 2. Click on " text to columns" ; Wizard window appears on the screen. Choose the appropriate option (delimited or fixed width) . click on next81 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೯೦ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 3. In step 2 click on next button 4. In step 3 click on finish button 2. Remove Duplicates: Using this option we can remove the duplicate records present in the selected range of cell. In this you can find number 1 is repeated, to remove the duplicate: Select the data range, click on remove duplicates and click on OK button.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 3. Data validation: It is used to ensure that a valid data is entered in the selected range of cells. Set the condition for selected cell or cells. We can also give the input message and error messages.

Steps: 1. Go to data validation change the allow condition from any value to whole number.

2. In data select between & give the numbers as minimum 1 & maximum 5, then click on ok button 3. Type the Error Alert message in the Error message box, finally click on ok button 4. Consolidate: This option is used to consolidate values from one sheet to another sheet using functions like sum, average, count etc.

5. What if Analysis Group

a. Scenarios: This option changes references cell values then automatically changes the target values.

Steps:

1. Type the values & get total. 2. Select the data except total. 3. Go to scenario manager from what if analysis option83 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೯೨ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 4. Click on Add button 5. Type the Scenario name as show in the below, then click on OK button.

6. Change the values if required then click on OK button.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 7. Click on Summary button.

8. Finally click on OK button 9. Summary sheet will be ready85 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೫೯೪ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 b. Goal seek: This option is used to change the target value; the difference value will be added to reference cell.

Steps:

1. Type the values & get the total

of it.

2. Click on the total cell, Goto goal

seek.

3. Enter the required value in the

"To value" field.

4. Click on the "By changing cell" box & then click on any cell on

the worksheet.

5. Finally click on OK button c. Data Table: A data table is a range of cells that shows how changing certain values in your worksheet affect the results of

the formulas. Data tables provide a shortcut for calculating

multiple versions in one operation and a way to view and

compare the results of all of the different variations together

on your worksheet.

Steps:

1. Create a table by giving per day value & enter the

number of total days in a month.

2. Create a product of 185 x 30, we get 5550

3. Type the working days of the employees, & select

as above picture.

4. Go to Data Table & click on Column input cell. 5. Select the number B2 cell (30). 6. Finally click on OK button86 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೯೫ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007

Outline Group

1. Group: It is used to group the selected rows and columns. 2. Ungroup: This option used to remove the grouping and we can also

show and hide grouping rows and columns.

3. Subtotal: This option is used to find different functions like sum, average, count etc.

Steps:

1. Create a table as shown in the below picture. 2. Select the data & goto Subtotal.

3. Change the slno to course in "At each change in ".

4. Finally click on OK button.

4. Show Detail: Used to expand the grouped cells. 5. Hide Detail: Used to group the selected cells.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 REVIEW TAB

Proofing Group

• Spelling (F7): This option checks the spelling mistakes. • Research(Alt+Click): It is used to search nearest meaning of the

selected word.

• Thesaurus (Shft+F7): It is used to search nearest meaning of the

selected word, also can be replaced with the selected text.

• Translate: Used to translate the selected text into different language.

Comments Group

1. New Comment: Used to create new comment. 2. Delete: Used to delete the comment. 3. Previous: To go to previous comment. 4. Next: To go to next comment. 5. Show / Hide Comment: Used to show or hide the comments at a time. 6. Show all comments: Used to show or hide all the comments at a time.

Changes Group

1. Protect Sheet: Used to protect the active sheet by giving

a password.

2. Protect WorkBook: Used to protect the active entire

WorkBook by giving a password.

3. Share WorkBook: It allows to share the WorkBook, so

that the other user can use the WorkBook.

4. Protect & Share WorkBook: Used to protect & share the WorkBook. 5. Allow users to edit ranges: Used to allow to the user to make changes in the sheet. 6. Track Changes

a. Highlight Changes: Used to highlights the changes done by the user. b. Accept / Reject Changes: Used to accept or reject the changes done by the user.

c.

VIEW TAB

WorkBook Views Group:

We can see the document in 5 different views like print 1. Normal. 2. Page layout. 3. Page break Preview. 4. Custom Views. 5. Full Screen.

Show/ Hide Group

1. Ruler: This option is used to show or hide the ruler. 2. Gridlines: This option is used to show or hide the gridlines.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE SPREAD SHEET SOFTWARE : EXCEL 2007 3. Message Bar: This option is used to show or hide the message bar. 4. Formula Bar: This option is used to show or hide the Formula bar. 5. Headings: This option is used to show or hide the headings of the sheet

Zoom Group

1. Zoom: Used to increase or decrease the zoom level. The minimum zoom

is 10 %, by default it will be 100 % & the maximum zoom level is 400 %.

2. 100%: It apply to 100 % zoom size, this is the default zoom size. 3. Zoom to Selection: Used to zoom only the selected range of cells.

Window Group

1. New Window: Used to create a new duplicate window of

the active sheet.

2. Arrange All : This option used to arrange all the open

window.

3. Freeze Panes: Used to freeze or unfreeze the sheet. 4. Split: Using this option we can split the sheet. 5. Hide: We can hide the active sheet. 6. Unhide: We can unhide the active sheet. 7. Save workspace: Used to save all the open WorkBook with a single name.

Note: All the 3 workbooks will be save with a single name.

8. Switch windows: Used to switch between open windows.

Macro's (Alt+F8) Group

1. View Macro: It lists out the created macros.

2. Record Macro: Used to record the set of action done by the user in a document,

which can be used later to repeat the same actions.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007 PRESENTATION SOFTWARE90 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೫೯೯ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007

CHAPTER - 6 POWERPOINT 2007

INTRODUCTION

PowerPoint is a powerful presentation graphics program that provides everything you need to produce an effective presentation in the form of on-screen slides, a slide presentation on a Web site, or black-and-white or color overheads. The extension name for Ms PowerPoint Presentation is .PPTX.

The default slide orientation is Landscape. Power point 2007 used to help you produce professional presentations, PowerPoint 2007 provides a comprehensive set of features that you can use to create and format your information. You can create and add designer-quality SmartArt graphics with only a few clicks of your mouse.

PowerPoint 2007 comes with new themes that offer you a wide range of options when you are formatting your presentations. In the past, formatting a presentation took more time because you had to choose the color and style options individually for your tables, charts, and graphics and make sure that they matched one another. Themes simplify the process of creating professional presentations. Just select the theme that you want, and PowerPoint 2007 does the rest. With one click, the background, text, graphics, charts, and tables all change to reflect the theme that you select, ensuring that all elements in your presentation complement one another. And best of all, you can apply the same theme to a Word 2007 document or Excel 2007 worksheet that you apply to your presentation. The extension of a Powerpoint file is *.pptx

We can work with different layout views like:

1. Normal View (Default view): Normal view is the main editing view, where you write and design your presentation

2. Slide Sorter View: Slide Sorter view is a view that shows all the slides in a file at a time in thumbnail form.

3. Notes Page View: You can type your notes in the Notes pane, which is located just below the Slide pane in Normal view. Notes are not visible during the slide show.

4. Slide Show View(F5): Slide Show view takes up the full computer screen, like an actual presentation. In this view, you see your presentation the way your audience will. You can see how your graphics, timings, movies, animated effects (Animate: To add a special visual or sound effect to text or an object. For example, you can have your text bullet points fly in from the left, one word at a time, or hear the sound of applause when a picture is uncovered.) and transition effects will effect during the actual presentation.

Using PowerPoint, you can prepare each component of a presentation: individual slides, speaker notes, an outline, and audience handouts

Turn on/off Ruler: View Tab → Show/Hide Group → Ruler. Turn on/off visual gridlines: View Tab →Show/Hide Group → Gridlines Gridlines and rulers are used to measure and line up objects on a slide.

Basic Tips

• It is best to outline your entire presentation before working too much on the style and layout of your presentation. At the end concentrate on style and format of your slides as it consumes less time.

Keep in mind the content of your presentation is the most important part of it!

• Keep your points short and straightforward. Points should be complimentary to your oral presentation.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007 • PowerPoint allows you to add a lot of distracting sounds and excessive animations to your presentation. It is best to keep all animation as simple as possible and only use sounds if absolutely necessary.

• Stay away from unusual fonts. If you are presenting on an unfamiliar computer, the font you have chosen may not work. Arial and Times New Roman are common fonts.

• Think of contrast. If you use a dark background, use light-colored text and vice versa. Refrain from using backgrounds that will obscure your text color.

THE OFFICE LOGO

The first thing most people will need to relearn is where to go to open a document, create a new one,

save your document and print.

Clicking the Office logo at the top

left of the screen will provide most

of the items formerly found under

the file menu including those listed

above. Beside the logo you also

will find a disk icon to save your document as well as the undo

and redo buttons. More buttons can be added to this "Quick

Access Toolbar" through the word options mentioned in the

next section.

As you can see here the Office logo opens up listing

your options for new, open etc. and also contains a list of your

recent documents for quick opening. Any of the items listed92 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೦೧ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007 with an arrow beside them will replace the recent documents on the right with the options associated with the menu item. You should also see at the bottom right of this menu a button for exiting PowerPoint and changing PowerPoint's options.

Save as

The save as option will provide you with the most common file formats to save your document in. The common ones are PowerPoint Presentation, PowerPoint Show, and PowerPoint 97-2003 Presentation. The last one is the option most people should be using currently, especially if they wish to share documents with others who do not have the new version of Office.

Print

Here you can choose from Print, Quick Print and Print Preview. Print brings up the standard print dialog box, quick print will print one copy without any dialog box coming up and print preview will bring up the print preview screen.

Prepare

The prepare menu's most common options are Properties, Inspect Document, Mark as Final and Run Compatibility Checker. The properties option allows you to setup metadata for the document like Author, Title, keywords, comments and others. Inspect Document will scan the document for any hidden data like comments and annotations, and any hidden collaboration data. This is very useful when making a previously private document public. It will help you find any comments or changes made previously that should not be made public. Mark as Final will mark the document as a final copy and make it read only so changes cannot be made. The last common item, Run Compatibility Checker will scan the document for new features that were used and show you these.

THE HOME TAB

The home tab the basic formatting tools found in PowerPoint 2007. You will find five sections, Clipboard, Slides, Font, Paragraph and Editing. The options are similar to other office packages.

Slides

The slides section has tools to add new slides, change the layout of a slide, also

reset or delete a slide. Both the New Slide and Layout sections offer drop down menus

with predefined slide layouts to use.

Drawing

The main part of the drawing section

gives you a large number of shapes, lines

arrows and flowchart pictures. The arrange

icon is used to bring an item forward or backwards on the screen or group and ungroup

objects. The quick styles icon gives a drop down with predefined shape style options or you can use the shape fill, shape outline, or shape effects icons to create your own styles.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007 INSERT TAB The insert tab has five sections for inserting most types of objects. The sections are tables, illustrations, links, text and media clips.

Media Clips

Sounds or movies can be added through this section. A large number file types can be added here including, mp3, midi, wav , wma, wmv, avi and many others.

DESIGN TAB

The design tab has three sections, Page Setup, Themes and Background.

Page Setup

Page setup provides you with the tools to slide size and orientation. The slide size option allow for some predefined sizes like letter, legal, overhead, and tv aspect

ratios like 4:3 standard resolution and 16:9 widescreen.

Themes

The themes section gives predefined colour, fonts and effects or you can choose your own.

Background

The background section lets you choose a background style or hide the

background on the selected slide..

ANIMATIONS TAB

The animations tab contains three sections, preview, animations and transitions to this slide.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007 Preview

The preview section will show you're the current slides animation to allow you to check it is the way you want it.

Animations

Here you can create your own animations for use in the slide.

Transition to This Slide

The remainder of the Animations tab is taken up by the Transition to This Slide section. Here you can apply different transitions to be used between slides like fades, slides and many more. You can set options for speed, sounds, and timing.

SLIDE SHOW TAB

The Slide Show tab contains three sections, start slide show, set up and monitors.

Start Slide Show

The start slide show section is used to start your slide show

either from the beginning or the current slide. You can also use this

section to create a custom slide show. Custom slide shows can be

used to create one thirty minute presentation and one sixty minute presentation using the same set of slides but omitting some for the

shorter show.

Set Up

The main features of this section are setup a slide show, record

narration and rehearse timings.

Monitors

This section provides the tools to change the resolution

of the slide show choose which monitor to display it on if you

have multiple monitors and use presenter view if you have

multiple monitors.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007 REVIEW TAB The review tab offers three sections which include proofing, comments, and protect.

Proofing

The proofing section provides the standard spelling check, a

thesaurus, research tools that include MSN search and Microsoft

Encarta encyclopedia. You will also find translation tools to help with single words or the whole document. The translation of the entire

document is done by an online service called Wordlingo.

Comments

The comments section allows you to add comments to a

document for easier collaboration. You can cycle through the

comments to find out what notes you left for yourself or others and you can delete a comment that was made when it is no longer

relevant.

Protect

The protect section gives you options to add a password and protect the document.

You can restrict changes to formatting and editing or the whole document. If you use

Windows Live you can also manage permissions for specific users who also have Windows Live.

VIEW TAB

The view tab offers six sections which include presentation views, show/hide, zoom, Color/Greyscale, window and macros.

Presentation Views

The presentation views section switches you between normal,

slide sorter, notes page, slide show, slide master, handout master and

notes master. Normal shows you one slide in the centre with thumbnails of all slides to the left of the screen. Slide sorter fills the

centre with thumbnails of all slides which you can drag around to sort them. The notes page view shows the slide on the top section and notes you add in a bottom section. Slide show will start the slide show from the beginning. The Slide master, handout master and notes master views allow you to change what the presentations themes will follow by working with a master setup. Each of these master views also provide another tab to the ribbon.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007 Show/Hide

The show/hide section will toggle certain tools on or off the screen including

rulers, gridlinesand message bar. The rulers will show along the top and left side of the

screen. Gridlines will cover your entire document inside the margins. They will be

visible on screen but don't print. The message bar can only be displayed when there is a message to be displayed. One common reason for the message bar to display is when

macros have been enabled or disabled.

Zoom

The zoom section provides tools to zoom into or out of the document. You can

choose your own zoom factor or use one of the predefined zoom factors.

Color/Greyscale

This section allows you to switch between color, grayscale or pure black

and white. This will allow you to see how slides will look when printed on a black

and white printer.

Window

The new window button will open your current document in a new

window. The arrange all button will take your currently open windows and

stack them one on top of the other. This is also where you can easily switch between windows.

Macros

The macros section provides the tools required to work with and create basic macros.

You can view existing macros or record your own. Choose record macro from the drop down and then perform the functions you do often, like change the page layout, and style of the document. Once you have done those tasks then stop recording. You will be able to use that macro over again to shorten the steps you need to take every time you need to perform that set of tasks.

APPLYING THEME:

A theme can make your presentation look more professional. The default theme uses black text on a white background. This is somewhat boring and simple, but good for accessibility. To see the different themes:

1. Click on the Design tab – the ribbon changes to show a number of different themes: 2. Move the mouse pointer over any of the themes – the current slide will display the chosen theme.

3. For more schemes, click on the [More] button at the foot of the scroll bar on the right of the themes.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007 4. Click on your preferred theme - both slides should now display the new theme

The theme will then be applied to all the slides in your presentation

1. Colors -- Changes the color scheme of the current theme

2. Fonts -- Changes the font of the current theme 3. Effects -- Changes the effects of the current theme

LAYOUT

PowerPoint 2007 provides 9 standard layouts, People creating presentations in your organization can then use either the built-in or your custom layouts to create their presentations.

• On the View Tab → goto Presentation views group →click Normal • In Normal view, in the pane that contains the outline and slide tabs, click the slide tabs • Click the slide that you want to apply a layout to: • On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout and then select the layout you want.

The different Slide layouts are : Title Slide, Title with content, Section Header, Two Content, Comparison, Title Only, Blank, Content with caption and Picture with caption.

SLIDE TRANSITIONS

Instead of simply moving abruptly from one slide to another during a presentation, slide transitions allow slides to dissolve into each other, using a variety of different special effects. These can make your on-screen presentation look even better and more professional.

1. Check you are in Normal view and

that the first slide is selected

2. Move to the Animations tab at the top to show the following ribbon:

Across the middle of the ribbon, you'll see certain transition effects. As you move over each one, you'll see the transition effect on the slide. Just to the right of these is a vertical scroll bar – use the up and down arrows on the scroll bar to change the set of transition effects that are showing (there is also a More arrow underneath that will show you all the different transition effects in one window).

3. Choose one of the transition effects for the first slide

Note that a small star symbol appears to the left of the first slide miniature - this indicates that a transition has been setup on this slide. Next, explore the options in the Transition to This Slide group on the ribbon:

4. Set the Transition Speed: of the transition effect to medium or slow to see the effect more clearly.

You can also set up a Transition Sound::

5. Under Advance Slide, set the next slide to appear Automatically After a set number of seconds by this you can move slide automatically without having to click the mouse button.

6. Move to the next slide and repeat steps 3 to 5, choosing different effects98 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೦೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007 7. Finally save your presentation (press ) then run it () to see the effects - press when you've seen enough

Having different transition effects between slides may add interest but it isn't good practice. It distracts from the talk and isn't good for accessibility. It's best to stick to one transition throughout (and only use a different one for effect, if you need to). To standardize the transition:

8. Remove the current effects by choosing [No Transition] (the first one in the list of available effects) then click on the [Apply to All] button

9. Next, choose your preferred transition (repeat steps 3 and 4) then click on [Apply to All]

10. Finally, repeat step 7 to see the effects FORMATTING SLIDE DESIGN

1. Change the Background

Design Tabs → Background → Background Styles Click on the Format Background button at the bottom. The Format Background dialog box will appear.

• You can set the color, solid or gradient, transparency or choose picture/texture fill • Click the Close button to apply changes only to the current slide • Click on Apply to all to apply changes to all the slides.

Formatting Presentation Using the Slide Master

The Slide Master acts as a template for your entire presentation. Altering anything on the Slide Master will change the formatting of all the slides in your presentation.  To open the Slide Master :View Tab >> Presentation Views >> Slide Master The Slide Master Tab appears on the left-hand side of Home Tab

 To Edit the Slide Master : Clicking on the Slide Master Tab provides a set of Slide Master Formatting Groups:  Edit Master  Master Layout  Edit Theme  Background - set the background for all the slides o Page Setup  Close -- Click on Close button to go back to Normal View.

 Choose the top Slide Master Slide in the left panel  You can edit the Background, Bullet styles, Slide Titles, and Title animations here.

MASTER SLIDES

The Master Slide is the design template or design theme used for the slides within your presentation.

There are 4 different master slides -- title master, notes master, handout master and the most common, the slide master.

• Slide Master: Dictates the format of your slides

• Handout Master: Controls the look of printed handouts

• Notes Master: Determines the characteristics of printed speaker notes

The default design template when you first start a Power Point presentation is a plain, white slide. This plain, white slide and the font choices used on it were created in the slide master. All slides in a presentation are created using the fonts, colors and graphics in the slide master, with the exception of the Title slide (which uses the title master). Each new slide that you create takes on these aspects.

Many colorful, preset design templates are included with PowerPoint to make your presentations more interesting. To make global changes to your slides, edit the master slide rather than each individual slide.

Also Known As: The term master slide is often used incorrectly when referring to the slide master, which is only one of the master slides.

a. A Slide Master is the top slide in a hierarchy of slides that stores information about the theme and slide layouts of a presentation, including the background, color, fonts, effects, placeholder sizes, and positioning. Every presentation contains at least one slide master. The key benefit to using slide masters is that you can make universal style changes to every slide in your presentation, including ones added later to the presentation. When you use a slide master, you save time because you don't have to type the same information on more than one slide. The slide master especially comes in handy when you have extremely long presentations with lots of slides. Because slide masters affect the look of your entire presentation, when you create and edit a slide master or corresponding layouts, you work in Slide Master view.

1. A slide master in Slide Master view

2. Slide layouts associated with the slide master

Note : When you want your presentation to contain two

or more different styles or themes (such as backgrounds,

colors, fonts, and effects), you need to insert a slide

master for each different theme.

b. Title Master: Title Master option is not available until you create a new Slide Master for that presentation.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007 Note Finish working on the slide master before you create or change the title master, because the title master inherits some styles, such as font type and size, from the slide master. Also note that if you make changes directly to the title master, those changes are preserved and are not affected by changes to the slide master.

How to Create a Title Master

To create a title master, follow these steps:

1. On the View menu, point to Master, and then click Slide Master. 2. On the Insert menu, click New Title Master.

3. Make the changes that you want.

For example, you can insert text, change the fonts, change the color or size of the text, and add a picture or text box. Make sure that you do not delete or add characters in the placeholder text. On the Master Toolbar, click Close.

c. Handout Master : You can use the Handout Master in PowerPoint to set the appearance of all printed handouts for a presentation. To access this view,  Goto View→Presentation Views→ Click on Handout Master tab in the Ribbon. This will then display the handout master for the presentation in the main window.

 Doing this will display the handout master for the presentation in the main window. You will also see the "Handout Master" tab appear in the Ribbon.

 Select which handout layout to modify by selecting the desired layout from the "Slides Per Page" drop-down in the "Page Setup" button group on the "Handout Master" tab in the Ribbon.

 You can modify the placeholder information in the main window, if desired.  You can check or uncheck the placeholders shown in the "Placeholders" button group to add or remove those items from the layout.

 When finished, click the "Close Master View" button in the Close" button group on the "Handout Master" tab to close the view.

d. Notes Master : You can make changes to the notes master in PowerPoint to alter the appearance of the "Notes Page" view of presentation slides. You can modify the content of the notes master in PowerPoint to impact the layout of the notes page view of your presentation.

 To alter the appearance of the "Notes Page" view of a presentation's slides, click the "Notes Master" button in the "Master Views" button group ("Presentation Views" button group in 2007) on the "View" tab in the Ribbon.

 The notes master for the current presentation will be displayed in the main window and you will also see the "Notes Master" tab appear in the Ribbon.

 Modify the content of the notes master to change the layout of the notes page view within your current presentation.

 You can check or uncheck the placeholders shown in the "Placeholders" button group to add or remove those items from the layout.

 After changing your notes master, you can click the "Close Master View" button in the Close" button group on the "Notes Master" tab to close the view.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007 ANIMATION SCHEMES

PowerPoint allows information on your slides to appear one item at a time. This stops your audience from reading ahead of you, making them concentrate on each point individually. Try the following to animate your bullet points: 1. Click on a slide with a bulleted list on it (eg slide 2) and make sure that the Animations tab is still showing on the Ribbon

2. Click within the bullet point area on the slide and then click on the list

arrow next to No Animation in the Animations group :

3. Only a few animation schemes are listed. Some bring in all the bullet points together, eg Fade All At Once, while others bring them in one by

one, eg Fade By 1st Level Paragraphs. As you move the mouse over the

list, you are shown what each animation looks like on the slide. Try

setting up various animations for your slides:

4. From the list of animations choose one of them, Ex: Fly In By 1st Level

Paragraphs

5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for another slide with bullet points, choosing a

different animation Tip: As with slide transition, it isn't a good idea to use too many different animations as they can distract the viewer. Always bear accessibility in mind and avoid some of the more 'exciting' animations.

To see more of the available animation schemes and to get to further animation options:

5. Choose one of the slides with bullet points that you've already animated and click on the slide title (or a picture if there's one on the slide)

On the right-hand side of your PowerPoint window, the Custom

Animation Task Pane should be showing (this can always be

displayed by clicking on the [Custom Animation] button in the Animations group):

6. Click on the [Add Effect] button followed by Entrance

from the submenu and then More Effects...

7. Choose an entrance effect (they range from Basic to Subtle

to Moderate to Exciting!) then click [OK] 8. Click the [Play] button to check that the changes you have made look correct

To change the animation order: 9. Click on the object you want to change then use the [Re-Order] buttons to move it up or down the list - click on [Play] again to check the animation is now correct

10. Finally, save your presentation (press ) then run it from the first slide (press )

Tip: You can also set up Emphasis and Exit effects and Motion Paths - for example, after bringing a

picture into the slide, you may want to emphasize it by making it grow in size. When the slide is

finished, you can get the picture to exit along a particular motion path. This is all done via the [Add

Effect] button (as step 6, above).

11. End by closing the

Custom Animation Task

Pane102 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೧೧ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007

Tip: If you right click on a slide you can choose whether to Apply to All Slides or Apply to Selected

Slides.

Usually, all the slides in a presentation will have the same theme but, if your presentation is split into different sections, then you could consider using a different theme for each section.

Most of the themes use contrasting text and background colours to maximize accessibility, ie light text on a dark background or dark text on a light background. This helps to make the text clearer and easier to read. Note that some themes contain pictures or patterns that could cause viewing problems for certain people. You can always apply a different theme later if you decide the current one is unsuitable.

5. Press to [Save] your presentation again

LAYOUT

Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2007 includes five built-in,

standard layouts, or you can create custom layouts that meet your specific organizational needs. There are totally 9 layout are there in

MS PowerPoint. People creating presentations in your organization

can then use either the built-in or your custom layouts to create their presentations.

Presenting the presentation

a. Manual Presentation:

View Tab >> Presentation Views >> Slide Show To move to

the next slide in your presentation do one of the following:

• Click the left mouse button • Hit the spacebar • Use the arrow keys on the keyboard: Up or Left keys to go to previous slide (Move backward), Right or Down keys to go to next slide (Move forward). Click on the Esc key on keyboard to go back to Normal view.

b. Automatic Presentation: Animations Tab>> Transition to this Slide >> Advance Slide Click on the check box for "Automatically After."

• Set the time to automatically change to the next slide after a certain duration of time. This feature is useful ifs you are under a time constraint or if you want to present in a more movie-like style.

REHEARSE TIMING

You can rehearse your presentation to make sure that it fits within a certain time frame. While you rehearse, use the Slide Timing feature to record the time that you need to present each slide, and then use the recorded times to advance the slides automatically when you give your presentation to your actual audience. The Slide Timing feature is ideal for creating a self-running presentation.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE PRESENTATION SOFTWARE : POWERPOINT 2007 Rehearse and time the delivery of a presentation

NOTE: Be prepared to start delivering your presentation immediately after you complete step 1 below.

1. On the Slide Show tab, in the Set Up group, click Rehearse Timings. The Rehearsal toolbar appears, and the Slide Time box begins timing the presentation.

The Rehearsal toolbar :

Next (advance to next slide) Pause Slide Time

Repeat Total time for presentation

2. While you time your presentation, do one or more of the following on the Rehearsal toolbar:

• To move to the next slide, click Next. • To temporarily stop recording the time, click Pause. • To restart recording the time after pausing, click Pause. • To restart recording the time for the current slide, click Repeat.

3. After you set the time for the last slide, a message box displays the total time for the presentation and prompts you to do one of the following:

• To keep the recorded slide timings, click Yes. • To discard the recorded slide timings, click No.

Slide Sorter view appears and displays the time of each slide in your presentation.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE

INTERNET INTERNET105 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೧೪ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE

INTERNET CHAPTER – 7 INTERNET

INTRODUCTION

The Internet is a global system of interconnected computer networks that use the standard Internet protocol suite (TCP/IP) to serve several billion users worldwide. It is a network of networks that consists of millions of private, public, academic, business, and government networks, of local to global scope, that are linked by a broad array of electronic, wireless and optical networking technologies. The Internet carries an extensive range of information resources and services, such as the inter-linked hypertext documents of the World Wide Web (WWW) and the infrastructure to support email.

Email is an important communications service available on the Internet. The concept of sending electronic text messages between parties in a way analogous to mailing letters or memos predates the creation of the Internet. Pictures, documents and other files are sent as email attachments.

It is a global collection of computer networks, which are connected through cables, satellites and telephone lines. Through internet we can access the information from websites present all round the world.

The Internet can be explained as a network of computers, designed to receive and send data in the form of e-mails, blogs, webcasts, etc. To put it in simple words, it can be treated as a super-massive server, armed with a plethora of information which is used by billions of people simultaneously. The Internet is basically a network that connects other, smaller networks. All modern technologies are connected by the Internet, thereby leaving no stone unturned. This digital world can be a playground for some and a battlefield for others.

The Internet has become an indispensable business tool, which has helped bring the world closer.

Receiving news from across the world, accessing knowledge resources, and shopping online are simply a click away. The Internet has tremendous potential and a lot to offer in terms of services. However, like every other innovation in science and technology, the Internet comes with its own advantages and disadvantages.

APPLICATION OF INTERNET

1. Education. 2. Communication. 3. Business. 4. Banking. 5. Hospitals. 6. Industries. 7. Transportation. 8. Scientific fields etc.,

ADVANTAGES OF INTERNET

1. Faster Communication.

The Internet has been mankind's greatest means of communication yet. Newer innovations are only making it faster and more reliable. Today, we can initiate real-time communication with someone who is in another part of the world.

For more personal and interactive communication, it is possible to avail the facilities of video106 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೧೫ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE

INTERNET conferencing, chat and messenger services. With the help of these services, the geographically fragmented countries have come together to form a community that is able to share its thoughts on global issues, that affect each and every one of us. The Internet has given us a common platform and medium through which we are able to explore other cultures and ideologies.

2. Abundant Information Resources

The Internet is a treasure trove of information; which offers knowledge on any given topic under the sun. Search engines make information accessible on various subject matters such as, government law and services, trade fairs and conferences, market information, new innovations and technical support, and even dispense advice on love and relationships matters.

It has become common practice to seek assistance from the web in order to research and gather resources for homework, office presentations, and supplement one's own research. The web also updates news about the latest breakthroughs in the field of medicine, technology, and other domains of science. Numerous websites such as America's Doctor, have made it possible to seek online advice from specialist doctors without having to actually fix an appointment.

3. Inexhaustible Education

The Internet has become an essential propagator of knowledge, both through free as well as paid services. The credibility of this form of education and whether it is safe, secure, and trustworthy, is usually proven through the quality and authenticity of content presented by each website. The World Wide Web has become a remarkable avenue for the academically unprivileged, to amass greater knowledge and know-how on subjects.

The entire scope of homeschooling has expanded because of increased accessibility to videos of teachers giving lectures, showing diagrams and explaining concepts, much like a real classroom.

Nonprofit organizations too have opened websites that seek volunteers and donations in order to help the ones in need. There are also sites like Wikipedia, Coursera, Babbel, Archive, and Teachertube, among others, that have dedicated themselves to the art of imparting knowledge to people of all age groups.

4. Entertainment for Everyone

Entertainment is one of the foremost reasons why people prefer surfing the Web. In fact, the Internet has gained much success by marketing for several multifaceted entertainment industries.

Finding the latest updates about celebrities and exploring lifestyle websites have become day-to-day activities of many Internet consumers. On the other hand, even celebrities are using the Internet effectively for promoting their cause and for keeping their fans happy.

There are innumerable games that can be download, either for a price or for free. Indeed, online gaming has tasted dramatic and phenomenal success because of its ever-increasing demand throughout the world.

5. Social Networking and Staying Connected

One cannot imagine a social life without Facebook or Twitter. These portals have become our means to stay connected with friends and family, and stay in touch with the latest happenings in the world. Social networking has also evolved as a great medium to connect with like-minded individuals and become a part of interesting groups and communities.

Apart from finding long-lost friends, the Internet also makes it easier to search and apply for jobs and business opportunities on forums and communities. There are public chat rooms where users107 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೧೬ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE

INTERNET can meet new people. For those who are single, the Internet also provides the option to select a suitable dating partner through secure online profiles, that can be filtered as per personal preferences.

6. Online Services and E-Commerce

Thanks to numerous monetary services, we can perform all our financial transactions online.

We can book tickets for a movie, transfer funds, pay utility bills and taxes without having to leave our homes or offices. Travel websites for instance, offer quick booking schemes and plan itineraries as per the preferences of their clients.

E-commerce is used for all type of business dealing that involves the transfer of money through the Internet. Online transaction of money has become the norm with almost all kinds of business. E- commerce, with its vast reach over a variety of products and services, makes it possible to have the client's orders delivered at their doorsteps. Websites such as eBay allow customers to bid, buy, sell, and even auction products online.

NETWORK:

A computer network is a telecommunications network that allows computers to exchange data.

The physical connection between networked computing devices is established using either cable media or wireless media.

It is Internet TCP/IP network, which is confined to a particular organization or company, where it resides.

Requirements to Get Internet Connection:

1. Personal Computer

2. Telephone Line Connection / Cell phone.

3. Modem. 4. Internet Account.

5. Browsing Software.

BROWSING SOFTWARE:

It is client software, known as browser and is used to access web information.

Ex: Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, Internet Explorer, Opera, Safari,Maxthon, Rockmelt, Seamonkey-project.org, deepnetexplorer, avanthbrowser, etc.,

MODEM (MODULATOR AND DEMODULATOR):

To connect your computer to the Internet, you need a modem. A modem is a device that sends and receives computer information over a telephone line or high-speed cable. Modems are sometimes built into the system unit, but higher-speed modems are usually separate components.

ISP'S (INTERNET SERVICE PROVIDERS):

ISP's are one who provides internet account to the user. BSNL, VSNL. Reliance, Aircel, Docomo etc., are all service providers.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE

INTERNET WHAT IS AN E-MAIL ?

A hundred years ago a message took 7 days to travel from Coast to coast and even longer to cross the ocean. With the advent of airmail, that time was cut to 3 or 4 days. Today, overnight may Delivery is available in certain areas, for a hefty surcharge. But faxing And electronic mail provide faster and less expensive delivery of messages. So it is electronic creation of mails, which is transferred from one computer to another computer.

The way electronic mail works on the internet is similar to the way the postal system works.

The address is the most important part of both standard letters and Email messages. If the address is incorrect, the Intended recipients will never see the message. When you send electronic mail, your local post office reads the E-mail address and either delivers the message to another local mail Account or sends it to the internet. The postal service collects mail and Takes it to the local post office for processing and routing.

WHAT IS A WEBSITE?

A website is a collection of web pages (documents that are accessed through the Internet). A web page is what you see on the screen when you type in a web address, click on a link, or put a query in a search engine. A web page can contain any type of information, and can include text, color, graphics, animation and sound.

When someone gives you their web address, it generally takes you to their website's home page, which should introduce you to what that site offers in terms of information or other services.

From the home page, you can click on links to reach other sections of the site. A website can consist of one page, or tens of thousands of pages, depending on what the site owner is trying to accomplish.

Why Do People Visit Websites?

Generally, people look at websites for two primary reasons:

1. To find information they need. This could be anything from a student looking for pictures of frogs for a school project, to finding the latest stock quotes, to getting the address of the nearest Thai restaurant.

2. To complete a task. Visitors may want to buy the latest best-seller, download a software program, or participate in an online discussion about a favorite hobby.

The main thing to remember in creating a website is that you're not creating the website for you; you already know about the information or service you have to offer. You're creating the site for your visitors, so it should contain the content they want, and be organized in a way that makes sense, even to an outsider.

A website is a means of communication, and it is only successful when its message is received by the intended user.

WEB PAGE:

Web pages make up the World Wide Web. These documents are written in HTML (hypertext markup language) and are translated by your Web browser. Web pages can either be static or dynamic.

Static pages show the same content each time they are viewed. Dynamic pages have content that can change each time they are accessed. These pages are typically written in scripting languages such as PHP, Perl, ASP, or JSP. The scripts in the pages run functions on the server that return things like the date and time, and database information. All the information is returned as HTML code, so when the page gets to your browser, all the browser has to do is translate the HTML.

Please note that a Web page is not the same thing as a Web site.

INTERNET OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE A Web site is a collection of pages. A Web page is an individual HTML document. This is a good distinction to know, as most techies have little tolerance for people who mix up the two terms.

Eg: www.rediffmail.com, www.google.com, www.yahoo.com etc.,

WWW means World Wide Web.

NETWORKING

It is interconnection between two or more computers and it is a telecommunications network that allows computers to exchange data. The physical connection between networked computing devices is established using either cable media or wireless media

Types of Network

1. LAN (Local Area Network): It is a connection between computers within a building or an area with the range of 10 Kms.

2. MAN (Metropolitan Area Network): It is a connection between computers within 10 to 100Kms or from place to place.

3. WAN (Wide Area Network): World Wide Connection between computers from one country to another country.

EXPANSIONS

Internet Protocol

WWW World Wide Web. HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol. HTML Hyper Text Markup Language. TCP Transmission Control Protocol IP DNS Domain Name Servers FTP File Transfer Protocol URL Uniform Resource Locator MAC Media Access Control address

E-MAIL (ELECTRONIC MAIL ) :

It is reported that the first thing that 90 % of Internet users do when they connected to the net is to check if they have received any emails. Internet has drastically changed the mail pattern and has made it incredibly fast.

Free Email services have become the main way of communication on this modern web.

Today most of us owns a free email services like Gmail, Outlook, Yahoo, AOL,Mail.com, Yandex, Inbox.com, icloud,etc.,

 Gmail : It is the most used and best free email service around the globe. It has a very simple user interface. It provides a storage space of 15GB free to its users, it has a better security(https) and it has best anti-spam shield, and malware and phishing protection. Gmail also includes other features like Google drive(we can send email attachments up to 10 GB.

 Outlook : It is a free email service from Microsoft. Previously it was known as Hotmail. Like Gmail, Outlook provides a cleaner user interface, better privacy than Gmail. It provides practically unlimited storage. Skype is integrated right in Outlook.com, Social Media integration let you to chat with your Face book Friends.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE

INTERNET  Yahoo Mail : Yahoo Mail is another popular web based free email service provided by Yahoo. It will provide 1 TB of free email storage. Yahoo messenger is already integrated in Yahoo mail.

Its anti-spam features are best in class. Its interface is similar to Outlook.com

 AOL Mail : AOL is the short name of America Online. AOL mail is also a popular and free email service. It features unlimited email storage, spam and virus protection, spell checker, etc.,  Zoho Mail : It has a cleaner looking user interface. It has best privacy features. Other feature includes Zoho docs, best security upto 99.9% up time. IOS and Android apps

 Mail.com : It is another free email service operated by United Internet which is an internet company based in Germany. It provides unlimited email storage, great spam and virus protection.

You can access mail from mobile devices also. We can send attachment up to 50MB SURFING OR BROWSING

Surfing the Internet is a term typically used to describe an undirected type of web of browsing where users whimsically follow one interesting link to another without a planned search strategy or definite objective. Surfing the net has become a popular pastime, for many Internet users.

DOWNLOAD

It is hard to find an Internet user, who has not used it to download music and movies. Apart from it, there are lots of other things that can be downloaded using internet as well. Internet is a best place to download top songs, music tunes, mp3 musics, videos and much more.

Some of the websites which offer free download to music are

www.Youtube.com, www.clickmaza.com, www.indiamp3.com,

www.archive.org, www.seekasong.com, www.airmp3.me,

www.get-music.net, www.song.pk,etc.,

Some of the websites which offer free download to music are

www.freebookspot.com, http://www.free-ebooks.net/ http://www.free-ebooks.net/ http://manybooks.net/, http://freecomputerbooks.com/ https://www.scribd.com/

SEARCH FOR RELEVANT INFORMATION

If you are not sure about something, then one of the easiest way to know more about it is by searching it on internet. Internet has got a huge database of information on almost every subject and one can easily find out lots of information on any topic using internet.

Some of the search engines are :

www.google.com, www.yahoo.com, www.aol.com, www.msn.com, www.lycos.com, www.AltaVista.com. www.Ask.com, www.answers.com, www.search.com.

BOOK TICKETS

Online booking has made things really easy. Be it a movie ticket or flight ticket, you can book just about anything using Internet. The process is very easy, convenient and super fast.

www.bookmyshow.com, www.yathra.com, www.makemytrip.com, www.goibibo.com, www.busindia.com, www.travelguru.com, https://www.irctc.co.in/ www.ticketplease.com111 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೨೦ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE

INTERNET SHOP ONLINE

The use of internet is not limited merely to booking tickets. With help of net, you can do a full-fledged online shopping. On popular e-stores like EBay, Amazon etc., one can find almost anything that he needs to buy. These e-stores are reliable and you can find quality products at most competitive rates on them; and all this can be done without even stepping out of your home! Some of the online shopping websites are:

www.flipkart.com, www.snapdeal.com, www.amazon.in, www.lenskart.com, www.caratlane.com , www.myntra.com, www.ebay.in, www.bigbasket.com, www.yepme.com

MAKE FRIENDS

One of the best things about internet is that is has made communication very easy and convenient. World is a small place now and one can get connected to just about any part of the world without any problem. There are many sites and forums on net, where you can find likeminded people and make friends with them. All this is possible only due to internet.

Socialize

Social networks have got really big since last decade. Face book and Twitter are the new online hangouts of net users and who likes to share all the latest happening of their life on these social networks and keep their profile duly updated. Now it is possible to be in touch with all of your friends and relatives, however big they may count in numbers and all this is possible due to social networks, which acts as a very convenient and effective platform for online socialization.

www.facebook.com, www.twitter.com, www.youtube.com,

https://plus.google.com, www.tagged.com, www.linkedin.com, etc.,

8. E BANKING

Banking was never so easy and convenient before! Right from opening an account to operating it, E- Banking has really been a big boon for everyone. Not only can one view his account activities but he can also execute online transactions from the comfort of the home.

Axis bank, ICICI bank, Karnataka bank, State bank, Canara, etc., offer e banking facilities

9. DATA SHARING

Data sharing was never so easy and quick before! It doesn't matter, if you have to send a file or song, a picture or a eBook,; with help of internet, you can send just about anything at anywhere and that too, in no time!

Some of the data sharing sites are : Drop box, Media fire, 4shared, Google Drive, I cloud, Box, Mega, Zippy share, etc.,

10. ONLINE FREELANCER

Internet has also created great opportunities for people who are interested in working online as freelancers. Be it writing or web designing, e-commerce or entrepreneurship, now it is possible for everyone to show off his talent online and make a living out of it. Millions of freelancers make their living online and this number is increasing substantially every year.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE

INTERNET Toptal, Elance, Freelancer, Craigslist, Guru, 99designs, Peopleperhour, etc.,

DISADVANTAGES OF THE INTERNET

1. Theft of Personal Information

The use of Internet for banking, social networking, or other services, often makes our personal information vulnerable to theft. There are no fail-proof ways to securing names, account numbers, addresses, photos, and credit card numbers from being stolen or misused by thieving websites and individuals.

Unscrupulous hackers can access our sensitive information through unsecured connections by planting phishing software. Needless to say, the damage caused by having our identities misused and our accounts broken into, is often irreparable and most of all, embarrassing.

2. Spamming

Spamming refers to sending unwanted e-mails, which serve no purpose and needlessly obstruct the computer system. Such illegal activities can be very frustrating as it makes it slower to access our email accounts and makes the entire service unreliable for consumers.

Spammers usually use bots that bombard the receiver with an endless line of advertisements. This can prove to be increasingly perplexing, as it keeps getting mixed with our more important emails.

Fortunately, email service providers often have security systems in place to guard against spamming. Fortunately, it is possible to report an email as spam, so that all emails from the same email id or IP address, are blocked.

3. Malware Threats

One of the most annoying problems with the Internet is the ease with which any malware can infect our computers. Internet users are often plagued by virus attacks that harm their computers and important files. Virus programs are inconspicuous and may get activated simply by clicking a seemingly harmless link. Computers connected to the Internet are extremely prone to IP targeted virus attacks that may end up crashing the system completely.

Internet virus can be of three types. The first type of virus affects files and goes directly for a particular file or file type. The second type harms system and executable boot files. These can be particularly nasty, as they can effectively stop the computer from starting again. Lastly, there's the macro virus, which is the most common as well as the most harmless of them all. The macro virus simply keep changing things like symbols on word files. The type of virus that can replicate and spread itself is known as worms. When a virus is disguised as something else, it's known as a Trojan.

Some of the anti – malware softwares are : Hitman Pro, Malwarebytes, Zemana, Emsisoft, MSRT, NPE.

4. Social Isolation, Obesity, and Depression

The biggest problem with having the Internet is, its ability to create rifts between the real and virtual world. The virtual world can often seem so alluring that once hooked, going back to real life seems daunting. There is an addiction for everything that pertains to the web and that includes excessive surfing, online gambling, social networking, and gaming addiction. There are now psychiatric clinics and doctors that specifically cater to resolving the problems created by theInternet. These addictions create both physical as well as mental issues that can lead to health 113 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೨೨ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE

INTERNET complications if left unattended. It is ironic that, while it is easy to find plenty of online support for agoraphobia, the Internet itself can be a big cause or trigger for it.

The link between obesity and the Internet is rather easy to understand. The more one sits in front of the computer, the lesser one exercises. At the end of the longish list of physical and emotional maladies, is depression. Since all problems are so deeply linked with one another and with the Internet, it isn't uncommon for people to be afflicted with multiple issues. Recent studies and research have gone deep enough to actually differentiate between compulsive Internet use and excessive Internet use.

Furthermore, thanks to smartphones, holding a simple face-to-face conversation seems out of the ordinary as compared to chatting online.

Thus, even though the Internet has the potential to make our lives simple and convenient, it also holds the power to wreak havoc. Its influence on us is mostly dictated by the choices we make while being online. With prudent use, we can manage to harness its unlimited potential and steer clear of its adverse effects.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE NUDI

NUDI115 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೨೪ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE NUDI

CHAPTER – 8 NUDI

ನುಡಿ (ಕನ್ನಡ)

ಕನ್ನಡ ಲಿಪಿ ತಂತ್ರಾಂಶಗಳ ಶಿಷ್ಟತೆ ಮತ್ತು ಏಕರೂಪತೆ

ಹಿನ್ನೆಲೆ

ಕನ್ನಡ ಲಿಪಿ ತಂತ್ರಾಂಶಗಳು ಇದುವರೆಗೆ ಮುಖ್ಯವಾಗಿ ಪದ ಸಂಸ್ಕರಣೆಗೆ

ಮಾತ್ರ ಬಳಕೆಯಾಗುತ್ತಿವೆ. ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ಸರ್ಕಾರವು ತನ್ನ ಎಲ್ಲ ವ್ಯವಹಾರಗಳನ್ನೂ ಗಣಕೀಕರಿಸಿ ವಿದ್ಯುನ್ಮಾನ ಆಡಳಿತ ವ್ಯವಸ್ಥೆಯನ್ನು ಜಾರಿಗೆ

(Word processing, DTP) ತರಲು ನಿರ್ಧರಿಸಿದೆ. ಕರ್ನಾಟಕದ ಅಧಿಕೃತ ಆಡಳಿತ ಭಾಷೆಯು ಕನ್ನಡ. ಎಲ್ಲ ಗಣಕೀಕೃತ ವ್ಯವಹಾರಗಳು ಕನ್ನಡದಲ್ಲೇ ಇರುತ್ತವೆ.

ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ಸರ್ಕಾರದ ಮಾನ್ಯ ಮಾಜಿ ಮುಖ್ಯಮಂತ್ರಿ ಶ್ರೀ ಎಸ್ ಎಂ ಕೃಷ್ಣ ಅವರು ಮಾರ್ಚ್ 18, 2000ರಂದು ಪ್ರಕಟಿಸಿದ ಸರಕಾರದ ಮಾಹಿತಿ ತಂತ್ರಜ್ಞಾನ ನೀತಿಯಲ್ಲಿ ಇದನ್ನು ಸ್ಪಷ್ಟವಾಗಿ ನಮೂದಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ. ಆದ್ದರಿಂದ ಕನ್ನಡ ಲಿಪಿ ತಂತ್ರಾಂಶಗಳನ್ನು ದತ್ತಸಂಸ್ಕರಣೆಗೂ ಬಳಸಬೇಕಾಗಿದೆ.

ಈ ಹಿನ್ನೆಲೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಲಿಪಿ ತಂತ್ರಾಂಶಗಳಿಗೆ ಶಿಷ್ಟತೆ

ಏಕರೂಪತೆಗಳು

) ಅತ್ಯಗತ್ಯ.

(standard),

(uniformity

ಕೀಲಿಮಣೆ ವಿನ್ಯಾಸ

ಗಣಕಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಕನ್ನಡದ ಬಳಕೆಗೆ ಹಲವಾರು ಕೀಲಿಮಣೆ ವಿನ್ಯಾಸಗಳು ಲಭ್ಯವಿದ್ದುದರಿಂದ ಬಳಕೆದಾರರಲ್ಲಿ ಗೊಂದಲವಿತ್ತು.

ಆದ್ದರಿಂದ ಗಣಕ ಪರಿಣತರು ಹಾಗೂ ಕನ್ನಡ ಭಾಷಾ ತಜ್ಞರ ಸಹಕಾರದೊಂದಿಗೆ ಕನ್ನಡ ಗಣಕ ಪರಿಷತ್ತು ವ್ಯಾಪಕವಾಗಿ ಅಧ್ಯಯನ ನಡೆಸಿ ರೂಪಿಸಿದ ಕೀಲಿಮಣೆ ವಿನ್ಯಾಸವನ್ನು ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ಸರ್ಕಾರವು ಅಧಿಕೃತ ವಿನ್ಯಾಸವೆಂದು ಮಾನ್ಯಮಾಡಿದೆ. ಎಲ್ಲಾ ತಂತ್ರಾಂಶ ತಯಾರಕರೂ ಈ ವಿನ್ಯಾಸವನ್ನೇ ಕಡ್ಡಾಯವಾಗಿ ನೀಡಬೇಕೆಂದು ಅಧಿಸೂಚನೆ ಹೊರಡಿಸಲಾಗಿದೆ.

ಕನ್ನಡಕ್ಕೂ 26 ಕೀಲಿಗಳು

• ಗಣಕ ಯಂತ್ರಗಳ ಜೊತೆ ಇರುವ ಇಂಗ್ಲಿಷ್ ಅಕ್ಷರಗಳ ಕೀಲಿಮಣೆಗಳಲ್ಲಿ ಇರುವ 26 ಕೀಲಿಗಳನ್ನು ಮಾತ್ರವೇ ಕನ್ನಡಕ್ಕೂ ಬಳಸಿಕೊಳ್ಳಬೇಕು.

• ಮೊದಲಿಗೆ ಗಣಕಯಂತ್ರದ ಕೀಲಿಮಣೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಇಂಗ್ಲಿಷ್ ಅಕ್ಷರಗಳಿಗಾಗಿ ನಿಗದಿಯಾಗಿರುವ ಕೀಲಿಗಳ ಪೈಕಿ ಯಾವ ಕೀಲಿಯು ಯಾವ ಕನ್ನಡ ಅಕ್ಷರಕ್ಕೆ ಎಂಬುದನ್ನು ಗೊತ್ತುಪಡಿಸಬೇಕು.

• ಹೀಗೆ ನಿರ್ಧರಿಸಿದ ನಂತರ ಕೀಲಿಗಳ ಮೇಲೆ ಕನ್ನಡ ಅಕ್ಷರಗಳನ್ನು ಇಂಗ್ಲಿಷ್ ಅಕ್ಷರಗಳ ಪಕ್ಕದಲ್ಲಿ ಬರೆಯಬಹುದು ಅಥವಾ ಕನ್ನಡ ಅಕ್ಷರಗಳನ್ನು ಮುದ್ರಿಸಿದ ಅಂಟುಚೀಟಿಗಳನ್ನು ಕೀಲಿಗಳ ಮೇಲೆ ಅಂಟಿಸಬಹುದು.

• ಕನ್ನಡ ಭಾಷೆಯಲ್ಲಿ ಕೆಳಕಂಡ 51 ಅಕ್ಷರಗಳು/ಚಿಹ್ನೆಗಳು ಈಗ ಬಳಕೆಯಲ್ಲಿವೆ.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE NUDI • 13 ಸ್ವರಗಳು (ಅ, ಆ, ಇ, ಈ, ಉ, ಊ, ಋು, ಎ, ಏ, ಐ, ಒ, ಓ, ಔ) • `ಅ' ಸ್ವರ ಸಹಿತವಾದ 25 ವರ್ಗೀಯ ವ್ಯಂಜನಗಳು (ಕ, ಖ, ಗ, ಘ, ಙ, ಚ, ಛ, ಜ, ರhು, k, ಟ, ಠ, ಡ, ಡ, ಣ, ತ, ಥ, ದ, ಧ, ನ, ಪ, ಫ, ಬ, ಭ, ಮ)

• `ಅ' ಸ್ವರ ಸಹಿತವಾದ 9 ಅವರ್ಗೀಯ ವ್ಯಂಜನಗಳು (ಯ, ರ, ಲ, ವ, ಶ, ಷ, ಸ, ಹ, ಳ) • ಅನುಸ್ವಾರ(ಂ), ವಿಸರ್ಗ(ಃ), ಅರ್ಕಾವೊತ್ತು ರ್() ಮತ್ತು ಮೂಲವ್ಯಂಜನವನ್ನು ಮೂಡಿಸಲು ಬಳಸುವ ಅರ್ಧಾಕ್ಷರ ಚಿಹ್ನೆ (್, ಹಲಂತ್) - ಒಟ್ಟು 4 ಚಿಹ್ನೆಗಳು.

• ಇವೆಲ್ಲವೂ ಸೇರಿ 51 ಅಕ್ಷರ/ಚಿಹ್ನೆಗಳಾಗುತ್ತವೆ. • ಆದ್ದರಿಂದ ಇಂಗ್ಲಿಷ್‌ಗಾಗಿ ಬಳಸುವ 26 ಕೀಲಿಗಳು [ಸಹಜ(ನಾರ್ಮಲ್) ಮತ್ತು ಶಿಫ್ಟ್(ಒತ್ತು) ಒಡನೆ 52 ಸಾಧ್ಯತೆಗಳು] ಮಾತ್ರವೇ ಕನ್ನಡಕ್ಕೂ ಸಾಕಾಗುತ್ತದೆ.

• ಮೂಲವ್ಯಂಜನ ಬೇಕಾದಾಗ ತೆರೆಯ ಮೇಲೆ ಅಕಾರಾಂತ ವ್ಯಂಜನ ಮೂಡಿದ ನಂತರ '್' ಚಿನ್ಹೆಯ ಕೀಲಿಯನ್ನು ಒತ್ತಿ ಅದನ್ನು ಮೂಲ ವ್ಯಂಜನವನ್ನಾಗಿ ಪರಿವರ್ತಿಸಬಹುದು.

• ಗುಣಿತಾಕ್ಷರಗಳು ಮತ್ತು ಸಂಯಕ್ತಾಕ್ಷರಗಳನ್ನೂ ಈ ವಿನ್ಯಾಸದಿಂದಲೇ ಪಡೆಯಬಹುದು.

ತಂತ್ರಾಂಶದ ಆರಂಭ

• `ನುಡಿ'ಯ ಅನುಸ್ಥಾಪನೆ ಆದ ಕೂಡಲೆ ಪ್ರದರ್ಶಕತೆರೆ (ಮಾನಿಟರ್) ಮೇಲೆ 4.0/5.0 ಎಂಬ ಒಂದು ಲಾಂಛನ ಮೂಡಿರುತ್ತದೆ.

Nudi

(Icon) • ನುಡಿಯನ್ನು ಬಳಸಲು ಈ ಲಾಂಛನವನ್ನು ಎರಡು ಬಾರಿ ಕ್ಲಿಕ್ಕಿಸಿ. • ಕೀಲಿಮಣಿಯ ಮೇಲಿನ

ಸಂಕೇತ ದೀಪ ಹೊತ್ತಿರುತ್ತದೆ. ಕೀಲಿಮಣಿಯ ಕೀಲಿಗಳನ್ನು ಒತ್ತಿದಾಗ ಕನ್ನಡ ಅಕ್ಷರಗಳು ಮೂಡಬೇಕಾದರೆ ಇದು ಹೊತ್ತಿರಬೇಕು. ಇದನ್ನು ಹೊತ್ತಿಸಲು/ಆರಿಸಲು

ಕೀಲಿಯನ್ನು ಒತ್ತಿರಿ.

SCROLL LOCK

• ಈ ಗ ನುಡಿ ತಂತ್ರಾಂಶ

SCROLL LOCK117 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೨೬ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE NUDI118 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೨೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE NUDI119 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೨೮ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE NUDI

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE121 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೩೦ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9

CHAPTER -9 ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE

INTRODUCTION TO TALLY ERP.9

Tally is the world's fastest and most powerful concurrent Multi-lingual business Accounting and Inventory Management software. Tally is comprehensive ERP software that goes far beyond the basic functionalities of finance and accounts. It encompasses every critical aspect of an organization, including payroll, inventory, manufacturing and banking to name a few. Tally is the perfect fit for every organization right from a promising new start up to a high-flying business giant. Tally is primarily designed exclusively to meet the needs of small and medium business. It is fully integrated, affordable and highly reliable software.

Tally Software business was set up in 1986 by late S.S. Goenka, who was the founder of the company Peutronics Private Limited, Bangalore. He mentored his son Bharat Goenka in creating accounting software that would handle all financial accounts for his business. Bharat Goenka spent a lot of months to develop path breaking technology. Tally is user friendly software used to solve all the complicated accounting problems.

VERSIONS OF TALLY

Tally 4.5 Tally Ees 5.4 Tally Ees 6.3 Tally Ies 7.2 Tally Ies 8.1 Tally Ies 9.0 Tally.Erp 9

Advanced Features of Tally ERP.9

 Tally 9 allows creation and maintenance of multiple companies concurrently up to 99,999 companies.

 Tally 9 has an advanced features in complete Book-Keeping, Single and Double entry method, Integrated ledgers, Receivables and Payables, Final statement etc.

 It is flexible to use Multi-Currency accounting, Multiple Companies, Group consolidation etc.  It enables grouping of companies and provides consolidated reports. Change done in any constituent or Branch Company is automatically updated in the grouped information.

 To overcome difficulties, you have always On-line Help interactive in Tally 9 and also provide user-definable security for the users.

 You can also import or export data through XML and also E-mail reports of Financial statement.  Inventory control is flexible to use in Tally. You can maintain stock items, stock groups, godowns, ordering, cancellation of materials, stock summary etc. can be done. Also Pure Inventory vouchers are maintained in tally.

 It has flexible Units of Measure, Multi-location Warehouse management, Multi price levels and Drill down facility.

 VAT, TDS, Service Tax, Excise of Traders, CST, FBT are the winning features in Tally 9.

TALLY USER CLASSIFICATION

Tally ERP 9, (integrated enterprise solution) latest version of tally, provides with two specific classification Licensing. They are

 Tally Silver for Single-User  Tally Gold for Multi-User122 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೩೧ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9

Tally Silver For Single-User

The Single-user licensing allows the consumption of tally on only one computer with an option of activating it online or offline. However, we can use the same tally license on another computer by granting the license activated on the first and deactivating it on the other. If we are an Offline user, we can take a request file to a computer, which has Internet connectivity and activate our copy of Tally license easily.

Tally Gold For Multi-User

The multi-user licensing feature facilities the use of tally on any number of computers connected to a local area network (LAN) with a provision of activating the license online or offline.

However, the method of activation is not different from the one followed in Single User licensing system. After the successful installation of multi-user license on the license serve, we will have tally icon, when windows starts and windows runs tally as a service in the background. The licensing clients may install and use tally later on.

ACCOUNTING

Accounting is an art of business communications. It communicates the results of business operations to various parties like proprietor, partnership concern, creditors, investors, private company, public limited company, a joint venture companies, government, agencies etc.

Earlier days, Accounting was considered simply as a process of reloading business transactions.

Nowadays, Accounting is considered to be a tool of management providing vital information concerning the organization's future. So, Accounting today is thus more of an information system rather than a mere recording system.

• The American Institute of Certified Public Accounting (AICPA) give definitions for "Accounts" as follows:

"Accounting is the art of recording, classifying and summarizing in significant manner and in terms of money, transactions and events which are, in part, in part, at least of a financial character and interpreting the results there of"

• The American Accounting Association (AAA) defined as follows:

"Accounting is the process of identifying, measuring and communicating economic information to permit informed judgments and decision by users of the information"

• The Accounting Principles Board (APB) defined as follows:

"The function of accounting is to provide quantitative information, primarly as financial nature, about economic entities, that is needed to be useful in making economic decision".

As per the definition of many Accounts committee, Accounts involves the following nature:

1. Recording (Book-keeping) 2. Classifying (Ledger making)

3. Summarizing (Trial Balance, ,Balance Sheet)

Two Branches of Accounting

There are two branches of accounting namely: Financial Accounting, Management Accounting123 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೩೨ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 (a)FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING: It is mainly confined to the preparation of financial statements like Profit and Loss A/C, Balance Sheet, Financial reports, Graphs, Ratios etc. for the use of outsiders like Shareholders, Creditors, Debenture holders, Companies, Banks, Financial Companies etc. (b)MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING: Here the accounting is based on Management. The accounts which provides important information to the management. The Management Accounting is the application of professional information in such a way as to assist the management in the information of policies and in the planning and control of the operations of the undertaking. It covers various accounting areas such as Cost accounting, Budgetory control, Inventory control, Statistical methods, Internal auditing etc.

Transaction:

A transaction is a business activity that involves the transfer of money or money's worth between two accounts

A transaction can be of two types

a. Cash Transaction: A cash transaction is one where money is immediately received or paid in the form of cash.

b. Credit Transaction: A credit transaction is one where money is paid later, but the benefits are enjoyed immediately.

TYPES OF TRANSACTIONS

a. Transactions including individuals/business entitites

b. Transactions including assets, goods, cash c. Transaction including incomes, expenses, losses and gains.

RULES OF ACCOUNTING

The transaction in the journal are recorded on the basic of the rules of debit and credit. The nature of accounts are classified in three categories (i) Personal account (ii)Real account (iii)Nominal account.

(I)Personal Account: It includes the accounts of persons with whom the business deals. The account deals with an individual person or corporate bodies or institutions. E.g. Kannan A/c Sujatha A/c, new India Insurance A/c, Canara Bank A/c, BSNL A/c, St.John's college A/c,etc.

The rule of Personal Account follows:

"Debit the Receiver"

Credit the Giver"

FOR EXAMPLE: Mr. Kannan received Rs. 100 as interest from Canara Bank. Here Mr.Kannan is debited. Here the Money receiver is Mr kannan so, Mr.Kannan is dedited. here the money giver is Canara bank. So, Canara bank is credited.

By the rule,

"Mr. Kannan A/c is the receiver

Canara bank the giver "

(II) Real Account: It includes the account which relate to such things which can be touched, untouched, felt, measured etc. e.g. Land, Cash A/c, Building< Machinery A/c, Furniture A/c, Stock A/c, Land A/c etc. Untouched A/c like Patents, Goodwill etc.

The rule of Real Account follows:

"Debit- What comes in?

Credit-What goes out?"

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 For example, A Machinery has been purchased for business by cash. Here machinery comes into the business. So, Machinery is debited. Here cash goes out (or) cash for the purchase of machinery.

So, Cash is credited. Ex: salary accounts, discount allowed, discount received, etc.,

By the rule,

"Debit- Machinery A/c (Comes in)

Credit-Cash A/c (Goes Out)"

(III)Nominal Account: The nature of nominal accounts relates to incomes and gains in the business and also expenses and loses in the business e.g. Interest Received A/c, Interest Given A/c, Rent Received A/c, Rent given A/c, Salary A/c, Commission paid A/c, Travelling Expenses A/c, Loss A/c, Profit A/c, Income Earned A/c.

The rule of Nominal Account follows:

"Debit-All expenses and Loses

Credit-All gains and Incomes"

For Example, A Fruit stall merchant earned Rs.5000?-by selling fruits and he gives Rs.1000/- as a rent for the fruit stall.

By the rule,

"Debit-Rent given A/c

Credit-Cash A/c"

A Table for easy understanding the nature of Accounting Rules follows:

Nature of Accounts Debit Credit

Personal A/c The Receiver The Giver

Real A/c What comes in? What goes out?

Nominal A/c All Expenses and Loses All Income and Gaines BASIC ACCOUNTING TERMS

To help you understand accountancy better, we have explained commonly used accounting terms below.

a. Assets : Assets refer to the properties that belong to the business (What we own), it will give economic benefit in future.

Ex: Car → by renting a car, we can benefit (money)

If we do a job, then we will have laptop → Laptop is an asset of a company

b. Liability: Liabilities are what the business is obligated to pay to others (What we owe) which we want to give to someone to something.

Ex: If we do jobs at a company, then we will get a salary from that company, the salary is paid for me by that company, so salary is a liability for that company.

Note: Every asset has a liability attached to it.

Ex: Mobile Phone → Asset Mobile Bill → Liability

Car → Asset Car Maintenance → Liability. We have to pay liability to use Asset.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 c. Income : It is different from asset. Income is one for which we can economically benefit which you drive from asset in other words It is a revenue earned by a business minus the expense incurred in order to earn such revenue.

Ex: Car → asset Rent received → income

d. Expense : It is different from liability. It is what we have to pay at present. Or in other words it is the amount spent by a business to conduct its activities.

Ex : Car → Asset Rent paid → Income

When we buy a car, we will be knowing that we have to pay for petrol, diesel, maintenance cost, etc., so then it will be a liability. But when we pay for petrol, diesel, and maintenance charges, it will become expense.

e. Revenue: The earnings of a business through its activities and operations. f. Capital : It is the amount invested by a proprietor on his business

g. Debit (+): What comes in. It means addition in business

h. Credit (-): What goes out. It means substraction in business. i. Debtor : A debtor is a person who receives benefits from the business immediately, but is obligated to pay for the same in future.

Ex: A buyer, who purchases goods from the business on credit, becomes a debtor to the business.

j. Creditor: A person who provides benefit without receiving immediate payment for the same, and who will claim the payment in future.

Ex: When the business purchases goods on credit from a supplier, the supplier becomes a creditor to the business.

k. Stock : Unsold goods, raw materials, scrap, etc, that lie with the business

l. Sales: Sales refer to the amount of goods sold by a business.

• Sales made against immediate payment of cash are called cash sales • Sales on credit are called credit sales.

m. Sales Return : Goods that have been sold but are returned by the buyer before consumption, due to reasons like poor quality, damage of goods, etc.,

n. Purchase: Purchase is the amount of goods bought by a business for further use or for reselling.

• Purchase made against immediate payment of cash are called cash purchases • Purchase on credit are called credit purchases.

o. Purchase Return : Goods that have been purchased but are returned to the seller before consumption due to reasons like poor quality, damage of goods, goods expired, etc.,

p. Proprietor : The Proprietor is the owner of the business.

q. Ledgers : Names of account which we created in tally when we write account. Whatever transactions we do we have to create a ledger for that transaction.

r. Vouchers : Entries created when we do some transactions. When we pass a voucher, we create entries.

DOUBLE ENTRY SYSTEMS OF ACCOUNTING :

Every financial transaction has two aspects, one where the business receives a benefit and the other where it provides benefit. Therefore every transaction should be recorded in a such a way that its effect is reflected in two places in a business. I.e., one will be debited, whereas the other will be credited. The receiving aspect is termed the Debit aspect. The giving aspect is termed as Credit aspect.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 GET STARTED WITH TALLY:

Steps to Create a Company

1. Double click on tally icon from the desktop. We will have a "Company info" menu on the right side of the screen as shown below.

2. Select the option Create

Company By bringing down arrow

key and press enter. Company

Creation screen will be displaying

as show below.

Let us Explain each

section separately:

 Directory: Directory means the data storage location.

This is the place where tally store

all data we enter in tally. By default

the data storage will be inside the

installation folder. Data will be stored in D:/, if we install tally in D drive. But we can change it to different location by typing it manually.

 Name:-Type the name of the Company in this field, for example say 'Anubhav Traders'.  Address:-This is the place where we can enter the address of the company.  Statutory compliance for:-Select the country in which our business/ company is located.  Auto Backup Details : Set to Yes if you want Tally to create a backup of data of the company automatically.  Company Details

Company Symbol : Enter according to country selected for the company. Maintain : Accounts only → To maintain only the financial a/c of company Accounts with inventory → To combine financial ac/c and inventory books for the company Financial Year From → This refers to the 12 month accounting period of the company. Ex :

For Anubhav Traders Financial year begins from 1-4-2016.

Books beginning from → The date provided in the aforesaid field will be automatically displayed here. If you have started with maintaining your books of accounts with mid-year, In Tally 9, we can set the required date accordingly.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 ACCOUNTS GROUP

A Group is the accounting group under which ledgers of the same nature can be classified.

Accounts group of tally provides a set of 28 pre-defined groups, of these 15 are primary groups and 13 are sub-groups.

Among the 15 primary groups, 9 groups are Balance Sheet items and the remaining 6 groups are Profit and Loss a/c items.

1. Capital Account

a. Reserves & Surplus

2. Current Assets

a. Bank Account

b. Cash-in –hand

c. Deposits d. Loans And Advances

e. Stock-in –hand f. Sundry Debtors (Credit Sales)

3. Current Liabilities

a. Duties and Taxes b. Provisions

c. Sundry creditors (Credit Purchase)

4. Fixed Assets 5. Investments

6. Loans

a. Bank OD (Over Draft)

b. Secured Loans

c. Unsecured Loans

7. Suspense Account

8. Miscellaneous Account 9. Sales Account

10. Purchase Account

11. Direct Income128 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೩೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 12. Indirect Income

13. Direct Expenses 14. Indirect Expenses

15. Branch/Divisions

1. Capital Account: This is a primary group to hold the capital and reserves & surplus of the company. Accounts like Partners capital, share capital, Drawings etc belongs to this group.

a. Reserves and surplus:This is a sub group of capital account.Accounts like Capital reserve, investment allowance reserve, share premium account, general reserve. This group is also called as Retained Earnings.

2. Fixed Assets: The assets which cannot be easily converted into cash. Ex:: Land & Building, Plant & machinery, Furniture etc.

3. Current assets: This is a primary group to keep the assets of the company.

a. Bank account: All bank saving or current accounts are created under this group. e.g SB A\c, Current A\c can be placed under this group.

b. Cash-in hand: This will hold cash account only. Cash account is automatically created (default group) when a company is created. Ex: Petty cash, cash at branch a/c, etc., c. Deposits: Accounts related to deposits like security deposits, fixed deposits, Recurring Deposits and rental deposits can be created under this group

d. Loans and Advances: Accounts related to advances and loans of non-trading nature of accounts like Advances against salaries, work contracts, Advances to purchase of fixed assets, advance received from customers, etc. can be created in this group.

e. Stock in hand: This is used to hold the opening and closing stock figures of certain accountants like Raw material, working progress, finished product etc

f. Sundry Debtor: This group is used to create the accounts of our customers (all parties to whom credit sales are made)

4. Current Liabilities : This is a primary group to hold the outstanding and statutory liabilities of company such as ESI, PF, TDS etc. deducted from salary of employees should be placed under this group. It has three sub groups.

a. Duties & Taxes: Accounts of trade duties and taxes like excise, Local sales tax, Central sales tax, excise, etc., can be open under this group.

b. Provisions: It is used to hold tax provisions in this group Ex: Provisions for depreciation, Provision of taxation, provision for bad debts, provision for dividend, etc., c. Sundry Creditors : This group is used to create accounts for our suppliers (all parties to whom credit purchase are made).

5. Investments: It holds the accounts of over all investments like shares, bonds, debenture, government securities(NSC, reserve bank bonds, IDBI bonds) and invested in other companies are placed under this group.

6. Loans: Accounts of loans taken by the company are created in this group . it has three groups .

a Bank over draft(Bank OCC A/c) : Over draft account of a bank like hypothecation account , bills discount account etc. can be opened under this group.

B Secured loan: Accounts of loans taken by the company from financial corporation upon furnishing security must be placed here. Debentures issued by the company can also be placed here.

Eg: Sundaram finance, Ashok Leyland finance ,Banks etc.

C Unsecured loan : Accounts of loans taken by the company unconditionally from outside parties. Without providing security. Deposits received by the company from others can also be placed under this group.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 7. Suspense account : Accounts of money received or paid by the company in suspense . If an advance amount like Travelling advances is paid to marketing executives. It is used to record amount paid or received temporarily or whose transactions is not yet known.

8. Miscellaneous Account: But there are so many expenses for which no account heads can be created because of very few transactions for certain expenses. If an accountant creates individual account heads for such type of transactions, then it will be very difficult to control. Therefore, all these expense are booked under miscellaneous expenses account or general expenses account. For example:- very small amount paid for donations or charities, membership fees for local organizations , short and excess amount written off, festival celebration expenses and other expenses for which no account head is available.

9. Sales account: A company sales comes under this group like sales account like company sales, cement sales, tire sales, car sales, bricks sales etc.

10. Purchase account: A company purchased comes under this group like purchase account like machinery purchased, furniture purchased etc.

11. Direct income : All income which do not have regular period to receive you money also use this group for accounts like servicing , contract charges that follows sales of equipments. Eg professional charges, received wages, received service charges etc.

12. Indirect income: The account of indirect income like rent received ,interest received, commission received etc.

13. Direct expenses: The expenses which do not have any regular fixed period to pay there are manufacturing or direct expenses. Ex: Wages , auto fair, freight charges, delivery charges etc. 14. Indirect expenses: which have limited or fixed period to pay and which are regular in nature. Eg salary expenses, rent expenses, telephone expenses ,electricity expenses etc

15. Branches/ Divisions: All company branches are bank branches comes under this group. Eg Mysore Branch, Vijayanagar Branch, etc.

List of Commonly used ledger in tally

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 Excersise 1: From the following information prepare a balance sheet to A M industrial company.

VOUCHER:-

A Voucher is a basic recording document. Daily business transactions are entered in Tally through Vouchers. It is a key to all business information. Entering the business transactions through Voucher called Voucher Entry. Tally has pre-defined voucher like Contra Voucher, Journal Voucher, Sales Voucher, Purchase Voucher, Receipt Voucher, Payment Voucher and Memo Vouchers. Daily Business transactions are entered on the basis of Voucher types. Follow the below steps for voucher entry.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 • In the Gateway of Tally, Select Voucher Entry option. The Accounting Voucher Creation screen display as

follows

By using the functional keys, you can choose the

voucher types like Receipt, payment, Contra, Journal etc.

VOUCHER TYPES FUNCTIONAL

KEYS

Receipt Voucher F6

Payment Voucher F5

Contra Voucher F4 Journal Voucher F7

Sales Voucher F8

Credit Note Ctrl + F8

Purchase Voucher F9

Debit Note Ctrl + F9

Memo Voucher F10

Press F2 Functional key to change the Voucher date. Button panel of the Voucher Creation screen contains all the Voucher types and functions.

Receipt Voucher

Receipt Voucher is used to enter all receipts of cash and bank (Receipt by cash or Receipt by cheque or Receipt by demand draft). Even the amount received for the sale of Fixed assets e.g. Furniture, Machinery etc. (not being the regular course of business) must be treated as Receipt Voucher. Press F6 Function key to enter the Receipt Voucher.

Rules for Receipt Voucher:

Activity 1: From the following transactions, prepare a Receipt Voucher entries for the Barathwaj & Company

i. i)Rs.5,000/-the amount received from Mr. Kumar

ii. ii)Rs.2,000/-cheque and Rs.500/-cash given by Star & Company

iii. iii)Rs.1,500/-commission received by cash. iv. iv)Rs.1,000/-cash sales on Waste machinery.

v. v)Rs.2,500/-received for Interest by cheque.

Now 5 transactions are entered in the Receipt Voucher by following steps:

*In the Gateway of Tally, choose Voucher Entry option. The Voucher Creation Screen displays fig (T.17), in which Receipt Voucher is selected by using the Function key F6. Also pres F2 Function key to enter the date. One by one five transactions are entered in the Voucher.

Transaction (i)

Transaction (ii)

Transaction (iii)

Transaction (iv)

Transaction (v)

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 Payment Voucher

Payment Voucher records all the payments made through Bank and Cash. Even the amount paid for the purchase of Fixed Assets like purchase of Machinery, Land, Furniture etc.(not being the regular course of business)must be treated as payments. Cheque Printing is done only through Payment voucher entry.

From the following transactions, prepare Payment Voucher entries for the Barathwaj and Company i)Rs.4500/-paid for Bonus.

ii)Rs.2000/-cheque paid for Salaries.

iii)Rs.450/-paid for Electric charges.

iv)Rs.1150/-paid for Telephone bill by KVB Bank Cheque.

v)Rs.3000/-purchase on Furniture. Here Rs.2000/- Canara bank cheque paid and rs.1000/-paid by cash.

vi)Rs.1000/-paid to M/s. Chitra * Company

*Press F5 Function key in the Voucher Creation screen to enter the Payment voucher.

Transaction (i)

Transaction (ii)

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9

Transaction (iii)

Transaction (iv)

Transaction (v)

Transaction (vi)

Contra Voucher

A contra entry is an entry in a business books of accounts, indicating transfer of funds from Cash account to bank account, Bank account to cash account, One bank account to another bank account, CASH A/c Vs BANK A/c.

If the cash amount is deposited into the Bank, then Bank A/c will be debited and Cash A/c will be credited. If the cash amount is withdrawn from the Bank, then Cash A/c will be debited and Bank A/c will be credited. If 'A' Bank cheque is deposited into 'B' Bank, then the 'B' Bank, then the 'B' Bank A/c will be debited and 'A' Bank will be credited.

From the following transaction, prepare a Contra voucher entries for the Barathwaj & Company.

(i) Rs.2500/-cash deposited into Canara Bank. (ii) Rs.500/-cash withdraw from Canara Bank.

(iii) Rs.5000/-Demand draft of State Bank of Mysore deposited to Canara Bank (iv) Rs.1000/-Canara Bank cheque and Rs.750/-cash deposited to Karnataka Bank.

(v) Rs.1000/-of Canara Bank cheque given to Karnataka Bank for fund transfer.

(vi) Rs.250/-cash withdraw from Karnataka Bank for local expenses.

Transaction (i)

Transaction (ii)

Transaction (iii)

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9

Transaction (iv)

Transaction (v)

Transaction (vi)

Journal Voucher

A Journal Voucher is used to pass adjustment Voucher entries. To adjust the debit and credit amounts without involving cash or bank accounts. The amount adjusted between two Ledger accounts are entered in the Journal Voucher. You can also make any credit purchases or sales any fixed assets entry through this voucher. Depreciation on Fixed assets like machinery, furniture, motorcars etc. are involved in this journal voucher.

Credit note Voucher (Sales Return):In business, due to certain reasons like delay in delivery, goods damaged, overcharging etc. in which goods are return (Sales Return) from Sundry debtors (customers).

It is generally issued by the seller to the buyer

For Ex: On 1st April 2016, ABC Co., returned goods worth Rs. 5000.

Debit note Voucher (purchase Return):In business, due to certain reasons like delay in delivery, goods damaged, overcharging, poor quality, etc. in which goods are return (purchase Return)to Sundry creditors(owners). Used for purchase returns.

For Sales Return and Purchase return for the following transactions, prepare a journal voucher, credit note voucher & debit note voucher.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 (i) Depreciation Rs.2000/-on Machinery and Rs.500/-on Building is to be entered.

(ii) M/s. Gokul Company returns the goods worth Rs.500/- as a damaged goods. (iii) Rs.1200/-worth goods Purchase return to M/s. Arasan & Company due to late in delivery.

(iv) Returned goods of Rs. 5000/- to India Cement (v) Jain and Co returned goods of Rs.760/- as the goods quality was poor.

(vi) A fund transferring is made for adjustment in business by barrowing Rs.3000/-from M/s. John Agency and given to M/s. Jain & Company.

Transactions (i)

Transactions (ii)

*Click Credit Note in the Button panel.

Transactions (iii)

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 Transactions (iv) Transactions (v) Transactions (vi) Sales Voucher

Sales voucher is used when the company sells some goods to the customers either by cash, cheque or on credit basis. Sales made in the regular course of business (sales of fixed assets i cannot be entered in sales voucher, we have to enter it in receipt voucher.)

Here Ledger A/c of the Buyer or Customer or Sundry debtors are debited and Sales A/c are credited. Also, Discount given to customers is debited and duties of taxes, packaging & forwarding charges of the Sales A/c are credited.

Rules for Sales voucher:

(i) Rs. 50,000/-worth Cement sales to M/s. Gokul and Company on cash with the following additional charges. a) Local sales tax 4%

b) Central sales tax 2%

c) Pack and Forwarding charges Rs.750/-

(ii) Rs. 4,050/-worth Bricks sold to M/s. Jain and Company

(iii) Paint sales worth Rs.10,000/-to M/s. John agency and given discount 5%

(iv) Cement sales Rs.7,000/-worth to M/s. Jain and Company and charged 3% for Local sales tax. (v) Cement sales Rs.3,75,000/-and Brick sales 60,000/-to M/s. John Agency.

(vi) Bricks sales worth Rs.7,500/-to M/s. Gokul and Company and allow Rs.500/- discount for cash sales.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9

Press F8 Function key in the Voucher creation screen to enter sales voucher.

Transaction (i)

Transaction (ii)

Transaction (iii)

Transaction (iv)

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9

Transaction (v)

Transaction(vi)

Purchase Voucher

Purchase voucher is used when the company purchases some goods from the suppliers either by cash, cheque or on credit basis. (Purchase of fixed assets will be entered in payment voucher)

i) M/s. Ramco cement supplied Rs.2,00,040/-worth cement and allowed discount 3% for cash purchase. The additional charges are charged for purchase as follows:

a)Local Sales Tax 4%

b)Packing & Forwarding charges Rs.2000/-

ii) M/s. Arasan & Company supplied Rs.75,000/-worth bricks and allowed Rs.1000/-discount for the purchase.

iii) Computer Purchase worth Rs.30,000/-and Printer Purchase worth Rs.5000/-are both purchased from Excel systems. Additional Packaging & Forwarding charges Rs.1000/-are made for purchase.

iv) Accounting software worth Rs.22,000/-purchased from Data systems.

v) M/s. India cement supplied Rs.1,00,020/-worth cement and allowed discount Rs.5,000/-for cash

Transaction (i)

Transaction (ii)

Transaction (iii)

Transaction (iv)

Transaction (v)

Memo Voucher

Memo Voucher is a purely non-accounting voucher, the entries in this voucher does not affect the accounts. The entries in the voucher are not pasted into the ledger. So, they do not affect the final result of the company. Tally stores memo voucher in a separate register called Memo Register.

Suspense Account like Travelling expenses, Post dated accounts like Post dated cheque given or received are come under this Memo Voucher.

For example, A company gives an employee cash for paying travelling expenses before travelling, the exact nature and cost of which are unknown. You could have entered a voucher stating petty cash advance, a voucher to record the actual expenditure details when they are known, and another voucher to record the return of surplus cash. So in simpler way we can use a Memo voucher to enter advance and can be turned to a payment voucher after receiving the details of the expenditureincurred. These transaction is entered in Memo Voucher as follows in next page: 144 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೫೩ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 *Press F10 Function key in the Voucher creation screen to enter the Memo Voucher.

After Travelling is complied, the Memo voucher is transferred to Payment voucher e.g. the actual travelling expenses for the sales executive is Rs.500/-

*Press F5 Function key for Payment Voucher.

Here Memo voucher is transferred to Payment voucher after the suspense account is cleared.

REPORTS IN TALLY

Tally creates the books of accounts and the financial statements based on the vouchers entered till date.

The Gateway of Tally displays a few reports directly, ie., the Balance Sheet, Profit and Loss a/c, Stock Summary and Ratio Analysis as these statements are extremely critical for day to day business analysis.

Display a Voucher

In a day, many transactions of accounts are entered in Tally through in Tally Voucher entry. If you want to see the Voucher entries follow the below step.

Day Book : The day book contains all the transactions made by a business, irrespective of the type of transaction. By default the display is set to the date of the last voucher entry made. But this can be set to list all the transactions made over a certain period. Transactions include all financial vouchers reversing and memorandum journals as well as inventory vouchers.

*In the Gateway of Tally, select Display option. The Display menu displays as follows:

*Choose Day Book option from the Display menu.

*Press Alt+F1 keys to see the voucher entries in details.

Note: To display a Voucher for particular period press Alt+F2 keys.

Alter a Voucher

If you want to change the entries in the Voucher follow the bellow the below steps.

*In the Gateway of Tally select Display option.

* Then choose Day Book option from the Display menu.

*Select the particular Voucher entry account to change and then press ENTER key.

Then, you can alter the entries in that voucher

Gateway of Tally → Display → Day Book → Enter

Delete a Voucher

If you want to delete a Voucher entry follow the bellow steps.

*In the Gateway of Tally, select Display option.

*Then choose Day Book option from the Display menu.

*Select the particular Voucher entry to delete and then press Alt+D keys.

*Are you sure to delete the voucher entry press ENTER key or "Y" to delete otherwise, press "N" in the confirmation small box.

Gateway of Tally → Display → Day Book → Alt +D

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 Insert a Voucher

If you want to insert a Voucher entry follow the below steps:

*In the Gateway of Tally, select Display option.

*Then choose Day Book option from the Display menu.

*Choose the Voucher entry position in between other vouchers and press Alt+I keys.

A Voucher entry screen displays to enter the transactions of the Inserted Voucher.

Gateway of Tally → Display → Day Book → ALT+I

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS :

Financial Statements summarize the individual transactions to show totals, ratios and statistics required by users to analyze the company's financial data in a variety of ways.

• Balance Sheet • Profit and Loss A/c

Balance Sheet :

• Balance Sheet is a financial statement that reports a business financial position as on a specific date. It shows a balance between the assets and liabilities of a business.

Assets = liabilities + owner's equity.

To view balance sheet: Gateway of Tally → Balance Sheet Balance sheet gets updated instantly with every transaction is recorded.

Profit and Loss Account :

Profit and Loss account or Income statement is a periodic statement, which shows the net result of the business operations for a specific period. All the expenses incurred and incomes earned during the reporting period are recorded in the Profit and Loss account or Income and Expenditure account.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9 The profit and loss account in Tally displays the information based on the default primary Groups. It is updated instantly with every transaction/voucher that is entered. No special processing is required to produce a profit and loss account in Tally. Gateway of Tally → Profit &Loss a/c -→ click F1:Detailed → To view the P & L a/c in detailed format.

The P & L a/c is generated and updated immediately from the date of opening of books till the date of last entry.

Trail Balance :

It is a summary report of all ledger balances to check whether the figures are correct and balanced.

Considering that the journal entries are error-free and posted correctly to the general ledger, the total of all debit balances should be equal to the total credit balances. Gateway of Tally →Display → Trial Balance147 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೫೬ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9

RATIO ANALYSIS

The Ratio analysis report provides a critical overview of the company's performance in the form of ratios. Not only does this report provide an instant understanding of the working capital, the operating cost percentage and the nett and gross profit perecentage, but also gives information about the payment performance of debtors. The return on investment percentage and the return on working capital percentage are other crititcal ratios available in this report. Ratio analysis in the final accounts shows the principal groups and principal ratios

The principal groups: like working capital, ,cash in hand, Bank account, Bank o/d account, sundry debtor, sundry creditor.

The principal ratios: shows the current ratio,quick ratio,recover turnover in days.

Formulas: current ratio=current assets C R =2:1

Quick ratio=Current assets-closing stock Q R = 1:1148 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೫೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9

BUDGETS

Budgets is an estimation of future income and expenses. Budgets are used to set targets and compare against actual and get variances149 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೫೮ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE ACCOUNTING SOFTWARE: TALLY 9150 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೫೯ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMMON SHORTCUTS

Commonly Used shortcut keys

Common Short Cut Keys

• Ctrl + A to select all • Ctrl + B to toggle the Bold attribute • Ctrl +C to copy • Ctrl +E to center align • Ctrl + F to find • Ctrl + G goto command • Ctrl + H Replace • Ctrl + I to toggle the Italic attribute • Ctrl +J justify align • Ctrl + L left align • Ctrl +N New file • Ctrl + O open a file • Ctrl + P Print a file • Ctrl +R Right align • Ctrl +S save • Ctrl + U to toggle the Underline attribute • Ctrl + X to cut selected text to the clipboard • Ctrl + V to paste text from clipboard • Ctrl + W to close a file • Ctrl + Z to undo the last action • Ctrl + Y to redo the last action • Ctrl + Shift + < to decrease font size one point • Ctrl + Shift + > to increase font size one point • Ctrl + Spacebar to remove character formatting • Ctrl + Shift + Spacebar to create a non-breaking space • Ctrl + Hyphen to create a non-breaking hyphen • Ctrl + Home to go to the start of the document • Ctrl + End to go to the end of the document • F1 Help • F7 Spell and Grammer Check • F12 Save as • Ctrl + up arrow to paragraph up • Ctrl + down arrow to paragraph down • Ctrl + left arrow to go to the word to the left • Ctrl + right arrow to go to the word to the right • Alt + F4 : Exit package • Alt + F10 Maximize • Ctrl + F6 will switch between multiple files in one office program

Excel

• Enter Enters the contents of the active cell and moves to the cell below (by default) • Shift + Enter Enters the contents of the active cell and moves to the cell above (by default) • Tab Enters the contents of the active cell and moves one cell to the right • Shift + Tab Enters the contents of the active cell and moves one cell to the left151 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೬೦ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMMON SHORTCUTS • Ctrl + ' Enters the contents from the cell directly above into the active cell • Ctrl + ; Enters the current date into the active cell • Ctrl + Shift + ; Enters the current time into the active cell • Shift + Insert Enters the data from the clipboard • Delete Deletes the selection or one character to the right • Backspace Deletes the selection or one character to the left Shift + Delete Cuts the selection to the clipboard

• Ctrl + Shift + Page Down Selects the active worksheet and the one after it • Ctrl + Shift + Page Up Selects the active worksheet and the one before it • Ctrl + Shift + Spacebar Selects all the objects on the worksheet when an object is selected or selects the whole worksheet

• Ctrl + Spacebar Selects the current column • Shift + Arrow keys Selects the active cell and the cell in the given direction • Shift + Backspace Selects the active cell when multiple cells are selected • Shift + Spacebar Selects the current row • Ctrl + Shift + Arrow Key Extends the selection to the next cell adjacent to a blank cell in that direction

• Ctrl + Shift + End Extends the selection to the last used cell on the worksheet • Ctrl + Shift + Home Extends the selection to the beginning of the worksheet • Shift + Arrow Keys Extends the selection by one cell in that direction • Shift + Home Extends the selection to the first column • Shift + Page Down Extends the selection down one screen • Shift + Page Up Extends the selection up one screen • End + Shift + Arrow Keys Extends the selection to the next non-blank cell in that direction • End + Shift + End Extends the selection to the last cell in the current row* • End + Shift + Home Extends the selection to last used cell on the worksheet • Ctrl + Shift + ( ' or ) Applies the Time format "hh:mm" to the selection • Ctrl + Shift + (1 or !) Applies the Comma separated format "#,##0.00" to the selection • Ctrl + Shift + (4 or $) Applies the Currency format "£#,##0.00" to the selection • Ctrl + Shift + (5 or %) Applies the Percentage format "0%" to the selection • Ctrl + Shift + (# or ~) Applies the General format to the selection • Ctrl + (# or ~) Applies the Custom Date format "dd-mmm-yy" to the selection • Ctrl + Shift + (7 or &) Applies the outline border to the selection • Ctrl + Shift + (- or _ ) Removes all the borders from the selection • Arrow Keys Moves to the next cell in that direction • Ctrl + Tab Moves to the next open workbook or window • Alt + Tab Moves to the next application open on your computer • Enter Moves to the cell directly below • Tab Moves to the next cell on the right (or unprotected cell) • Home Moves to the first column in the current row • End + Arrow Keys Moves to the next non empty cell in that direction • End + Enter Moves to the last cell in the current row that is not blank • End + Home Moves to the last used cell on the active worksheet* • End + Home Moves to the last used cell on the active worksheet* • Page Down Moves to the next screen of rows down • Page Up Moves to the previous screen of rows up • Shift + Enter Moves to the cell directly above (opposite direction to Enter) • Shift + Tab Moves to the cell directly to the left (opposite direction to Tab) • Alt + Page Down Moves you one screen of columns to the right • Alt + Page Up Moves you one screen of columns to the left • Ctrl + Home Moves to cell "A1" on the active sheet • Ctrl + End Moves to the last used cell on the active worksheet* • Ctrl + Up Arrow Moves to the first row in the current region • Ctrl + Down Arrow Moves to the last row in the current region152 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೬೧ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMMON SHORTCUTS • Ctrl + Left Arrow Moves to the first column in the current region • Ctrl + Right Arrow Moves to the last column in the current region • Ctrl + Page Up Moves to the previous worksheet in the workbook • Ctrl + Page Down Moves to the next worksheet in the workbook • Ctrl + Shift + Tab Moves to the previous open workbook or window • Scroll Lock + Arrow Keys Moves the workbook or window one cell the corresponding direction

• Scroll Lock + End Moves to the last cell in the current window • Scroll Lock + Home Moves to the first cell in the current window • Scroll Lock + Page Down Moves you down one screen (current selection unchanged • Scroll Lock + Page Up Moves you up one screen (current selection unchanged) • Enter Moves from top to bottom within a selection • Tab Moves from left to right within a selection • Ctrl + . Moves clockwise to the next corner within a selection • Shift + Tab Moves from right to left within a selection (opposite direction to Tab) • Alt + Ctrl + Left Arrow Moves to the left between non adjacent cells in a selection • Alt + Ctrl + Right Arrow Moves to the right between non adjacent cells in a selection • = Starts a Formula • Ctrl + ` Toggles between the value layer and the formula layer • Ctrl + Insert Copies the current selection to the clipboard • Ctrl + Shift + ( Unhides any hidden rows within the selection • Ctrl + Shift + ) Unhides any hidden columns within the selection • Ctrl + Shift + \ Select unequal cells • Alt Toggles the activation of the old Menu Bar • Alt + Shift + Left Arrow Displays the (Data > Group and Outline > UnGroup) dialog box • Alt + Shift + Right Arrow Displays the (Data > Group and Outline > Group) dialog box • Alt + Spacebar Activates the Control Box in the top left hand corner • End Toggles between switching End Mode on or off • Scroll Lock Toggles between switching Scroll Lock on or off • Shift + Insert Pastes the entry from the clipboard • Ctrl + 0 Hides the columns in the current selection

POWERPOINT SHORTCUTS

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMMON SHORTCUTS • Ctrl+Shift+G Object – Regroup • Ctrl+T Open the dialog box for changing the font.

• Shift+F3

Change the case of letters between sentence, lowercase, or uppercase. Insert a new slide.

• Ctrl+M • Ctrl+Shift+D Duplicate of a selected slide. • F5 Start the presentation from the beginning. • Shift+F5 Start the presentation from the current slide. • Ctrl+F1 Show or hide ribbon. • Alt, H, S, L, P Launch the Selection pane. • Ctrl+Shift+F Move a selected item forward. • Ctrl+Shift+B Move a selected item backward. • F1 Open the Help window. • Shift+F4 Repeat the last Find action • Left-Arrow Move one character to the left. • Right-Arrow Move one character to the right. • Up-Arrow Move one line up. • Down-Arrow Move one line down. • Ctrl+Left-Arrow Move one word to the left. • Ctrl+Right-Arrow Move one word to the right. • End Move to the end of a line. • Home Move to the beginning of a line. • Ctrl+Up-Arrow Move up one paragraph. • Ctrl+Down-Arrow Move down one paragraph. • Ctrl+End Move to the end of a text box. • Ctrl+Home Move to the beginning of a text box.

• Ctrl+Enter

In Microsoft Office PowerPoint, move to the next title or body text placeholder. If it is the last placeholder on a slide, this will insert a new slide with the same slide layout as the original slide.

• Shift+Right-Arrow Select one character to the right. • Shift+Left-Arrow Select one character to the left. • Ctrl+Shift+Right-

Select to the end of a word.

Arrow

• Ctrl+Shift+Left-Arrow Select to the beginning of a word. • Shift+Up-Arrow Select one line up. • Shift+Down-Arrow Select one line down. • Ctrl+Backspace Delete one word to the left. • Delete Delete one character to the right. • Ctrl+Delete Delete one word to the right. • Ctrl+D Duplicate of an marked object.

• Ctrl+Spacebar

Remove manual character formatting, such as subscript and superscript.

• Ctrl+N Build a new presentation. • Ctrl+Shift+S Show or hide a focused item.

• Alt+Shift+F10

Display the menu or message for a smart tag. If more than one smart tag is present, switch to the next smart tag and display its menu or message.

TALLY SHORTCUTS

Windows Functionality Availability

F1

To select a company To select Accounts Button and inventory Buttons

At all masters menu screen At the Accounting / Inventory vouchers creation and alteration screen154 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೬೩ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMMON SHORTCUTS F2 To change the menu period To change the menu period

F3 To select the company To change the menu period

F4 To select the Contra voucher F5 To select the Payment voucher F6 To select the Receipt voucher F7 To select the Journal voucher F8 To select the Sales voucher To select the Credit Note voucher F8 (CTRL+F8)

F9 To select the Purchase voucher To select the Debit Note voucher F9 (CTRL + F9)

F10

To select the Reversing Journal voucher

F10 To select the Memorandum voucher F11

To select the Functions and Features screen

At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation and alteration screen

At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation and alteration screen

At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation and alteration screen

At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation and alteration screen

At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation and alteration screen

At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation and alteration screen

At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation and alteration screen

At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation and alteration screen

At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation and alteration screen

At Accounting / Inventory Voucher creation and alteration screen

At almost all screens in TALLY

F12 To select the Configure screen At almost all screens in TALLY

ALT + 2 To Duplicate a voucher

ALT + A To Add a voucher

ALT + C

To create a master at a voucher screen (if it has not been already assigned a different function, as in reports like Balance Sheet, where it adds a new column to the report)

ALT + D

To delete a voucher To delete a master (if it has not been already assigned a different function, as explained above)

ALT + C

To create a master at a voucher screen (if it has not been already assigned a different function, as in reports like Balance Sheet, where it adds a new column to the report)

At List of Vouchers – creates a voucher similar to the one where you positioned the cursor and used this key combination

At List of Vouchers – adds a voucher after the one where you positioned the cursor and used this key combination.

At voucher entry and alteration screens, at a field where you have to select a master from a list. If the necessary account has not been created already, use this key combination to create the master without quitting from the voucher screen.

At Voucher and Master (Single) alteration screens. Masters can be deleted subject to conditions, as explained in the manual.

At voucher entry and alteration screens, at a field where you have to select a master from a list. If the necessary account has not been created already, use this key combination to create the master without quitting from the155 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೬೪ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMMON SHORTCUTS

voucher screen.

ALT + D

At Voucher and Master (Single) alteration screens. Masters can be deleted subject to conditions, as explained in the manual.

To delete a voucher To delete a master (if it has not been already assigned a different function, as explained above)

ALT + E

At all reports screens in TALLY

To export the report in ASCII, SDF, HTML OR XML format

ALT + I To insert a voucher

At List of Vouchers – inserts a voucher before the one where you positioned the cursor and used this key combination.

ALT + R To remove a line in a report At all reports screens in TALLY

At all reports screens in TALLY

ALT + S

To bring back a line you removed using ALT + R

ALT + X

At all voucher screens in TALLY

To cancel a voucher in Day Book/List of Vouchers

CTRL + A

To accept a form – wherever you use this key combination, that screen or report gets accepted as it is.

At almost all screens in TALLY, except where a specific detail has to be given before accepting.

INTERNET SHORTCUTS

• Ctrl+Tab – Switch to the next tab – in other words, the tab on the right. (Ctrl+Page Up also works, but not in Internet Explorer.)

• Ctrl+Shift+Tab – Switch to the previous tab – in other words, the tab on the left.

(Ctrl+Page Down also works, but not in Internet Explorer.)

• Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 – Close the current tab. • Ctrl+Shift+T – Reopen the last closed tab • Ctrl+T – Open a new tab. • Ctrl+N – Open a new browser window. • Alt+F4 – Close the current window. (Works in all applications.) • Mouse Actions for Tabs • Middle Click a Tab – Close the tab. • Ctrl+Left Click, Middle Click – Open a link in a background tab. • Shift+Left Click – Open a link in a new browser window. • Ctrl+Shift+Left Click – Open a link in a foreground tab. • Navigation • Alt+Left Arrow, Backspace – Back. • Alt+Right Arrow, Shift+Backspace – Forward. • F5 – Reload. • Ctrl+F5 – Reload and skip the cache, re-downloading the entire website. • Escape – Stop. • Alt+Home – Open homepage • Ctrl+0 – Default zoom level. • Ctrl+H – Open the browsing history. • Ctrl+J – Open the download history. • Ctrl+D – Bookmark the current website.

OFFICE AUTOMATION COURSE COMMON SHORTCUTS • Ctrl+Shift+Del – Open the Clear Browsing History window • Ctrl+L, Alt+D, F6 – Focus the address bar so you can begin typing. • Ctrl+Enter – Prefix www. and append .com to the text in the address bar, and then load the website. For example, type howtogeek into the address bar and press Ctrl+Enter to open www.howtogeek.com.

• Alt+Enter – Open the location in the address bar in a new tab. • Ctrl+K, Ctrl+E – Focus the browser's built-in search box or focus the address bar if the browser doesn't have a dedicated search box. (Ctrl+K doesn't work in IE, Ctrl+E does.) • Alt+Enter – Perform a search from the search box in a new tab. • Ctrl+F, F3 – Open the in-page search box to search on the current page. • Ctrl+G, F3 – Find the next match of the searched text on the page. • Ctrl+Shift+G, Shift+F3 – Find the previous match of the searched text on the page157 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೬೬ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೧, ೨೦೧೭ ೧

ಪರಿಷ್ಕøತ ಪಠ್ಯವಸ್ತುವಿನಂತೆ

ಸಿದ್ದಪಡಿಸಿರುವ ಗಣಕಯಂತ್ರ

ಶಿಕ್ಷಣ ಪಠ್ಯಪುಸ್ತಕ

ಗ್ರಾಫಿಕ್ ಡಿಸೈನರ್

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1 Starting InDesign

setting up the document

The InDesign interface

2 2 4 CHAPTER – 2 DISCOVERING THE DOCUMENT WINDOW 9 Document and guides

Zero Point

Units of Measurements

Grids

Panels

Workspace

Viewing the Page

The Tool Box

Working with a document

Closing a document

Creating an alternate layout

Inserting / Removing Pages

MASTER PAGES

9 10 10 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 14 15 15 CHAPTER 3 WORKING WITH TOOLS AND OBJECTS 17 Selection tool:

Deleting , moving , resizing elements

Cut, copy and paste an object

Aligning and distributing objects using the align dialog box

17 23 24 26 CHAPTER 4 WORKING WITH TEXT TOOLS 28 Type tool

Applying bullets and numbering

Adding automatic page numbering

28 32 32 The story editor

Spell check

Find and replace

Change case

Select text

36 38 39 39 40 CHAPTER 5 INTRODUCTION TO THREADED TEXT 42 CHAPTER 6 APPLY TRANSFORMATION TOOLS 46ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೬೭

Skewing/ Shearing an object

Flipping/reflecting an Object

46 46 Rotating an Object

Cropping an Object

Resizing an object

46 47 47 Scaling an Object

Moving an object

Repeat Transformations

Combining Effects :

47 48 48 49 CHAPTER 7 IMPORTING GRAPHICS

51 The Place Command

Layers

52 53 CHAPTER 8 WORKING WITH COLORS AND STROKES 54 Defining the Types of Colors

Working with Colors and Strokes

Using Swatches Panel

54 54 55 Creating a Gradient Swatch

Creating a Tint Swatches

56 56 CHAPTER 9 APPLYING EFFECTS

58 Using Effects on an Object

Effects panel overview

Display Effects panel options

Transparency effects

Changing Strokes

58 58 59 60 66 CHAPTER 10 WORKING WITH TABLES 67 Creating tables

67 Convert text to table

Convert a table into text

69 69 CHAPTER 11 PUBLISHING THE DOCUMENT AND BOOK 70 Performing the preflight check in the document

70 Saving a Document as PDF

Previewing and Exporting in grayscale

Printing a document

70 70 71 Print Present

Create a book file

71 71ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೬೮ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 PUBLISHING SOFTWARE INDESIGN CS61 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೬೯ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION Adobe InDesign is a Desktop Publishing Software (DTP) Application produced by Adobe Systems. It can be used to create works such as Posters, Flyers, Brochures, Magazines, Newspapers and Books. InDesign is the successor to Adobe PageMaker, which was acquired with the purchase of Aldus in late 1994. InDesign was introduced by Adobe Systems in 1999 as the first DTP application. The first version, InDesign 1.0 was released on 1999. InDesign CS6 now supports features such as XHTML exporting, professional typographical controls, and long-document support. Using InDesign, you can produce professional-quality, full-color documents on high-volume color printing presses, or print to a range of output devices, such as desktop printers and high- resolution imaging devices, or export to a range of formats including PDF and EPUB.

STARTING INDESIGN

Click Start button →All Programs→Adobe→Adobe InDesign CS6.

Fig 1.1 : InDesign Welcome Screen

The Welcome Screen along with the workspace appears as shown in fig: 1.1

The welcome screen consists of the following section:

• Open Recent Items: It shows the list of recently opened documents. • Create New: used to create New Document/Book/Library. • Community: Used to connect to various online InDesign related communities like Groups, Plug-in and Exchange.

Helps and latest tips

• Getting Started: It shows the getting started tips by opening an official Adobe website. • New Features: It displays the new features in InDesign CS6 compared to older versions by opening its official website.

• Resources: It shows the help topics for InDesign CS6 in an official website • Adobe InDesign CS6: Opens a Facebook link for InDesign with latest tips

SETTING UP THE DOCUMENT

To create a New Document, Click File menu →New→In Create New Section: Select Document (Ctrl + N). A New Document dialog box appears Fig: 1.2 displays the New Document Dialog box, you can set up the2 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೭೦ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 page size, page orientation, bindings, margins, and columns all in one place. You can change these settings at any time.

Options in New Document dialog box are:

Document Preset: Choose a preset if you have saved earlier which includes page size, columns and margins

Intent: If you are creating a document to be output to PDF or SWF for the web, choosing the Web option changes several options in the dialog box, such as turning off Facing Pages, changing the Orientation from Portrait to Landscape, and using a page size based on Monitor Resolution.

Fig 1.2 New Document Dialog Box

Number of Pages: Type a value

for the total number of pages for this document.

Facing Pages: This option is used to make left and right pages face each other in a double-page Spread.

Deselect this option to let each page stand alone.

Starting Page #: Specify which Page number the document starts on.

Primary Text Frame: Select this option to add a Primary Text Frame on the Master page.

Page Size: Choose a Page size from the menu, or type values for Width and Height. There are Presets for common sizes such as letter, legal, and tabloid. Default Page size is A4.

Orientation: Portrait and Landscape. Default orientation is Portrait

Binding: Can be set for Left to Right(used for normal binding of book) or Right to Left( used for Arabic book binding)

Columns: Number of columns in a document can be set here. Default is 1

Gutter: The space between two columns is called as Gutter margin.

Margins::We can set Margins to InDesign document. By default Inside, Outside, Top and Bottom: 12.7mm or 0.5"

Note: You can change column and marginal settings for pages and Spreads. When you change the column and

margin setting on Master page, you change the setting for all pages to which master is applied. Changing the

columns and margins of regular pages affects only those pages which are selected.

Bleed: After clicking More Options Button, Bleed and Slug options appear, the Bleed area is used to align objects that you want to extend all the way to the trim line of your printed document.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Slug: The Slug area is used for instructions to the printer, sign-off forms, or other information related to your document. The Slug area is discarded when the document is trimmed to its final page size.

After selecting the required options click OK button in New Document dialog box. A blank document named Untitled-1.indd is created

NOTE: If you need to adjust any of this information while you are working, you can make changes at any time

by clicking File → Document Setup.

THE INDESIGN INTERFACE

Fig 1.3 : InDesign Interface

The default Workspace in InDesign includes: an Application bar, Menu bar, Control Panel, Tools Panel, Panel group(dock), Document window(pasteboard), Work Area ,Spread controls, Status Bar.

Application Bar:

It is located at the top of the Window. It contains various elements like InDesign icon, Goto Bridge button, Zoom controls, View controls, Screen mode drop down box, Arrange drop down box, Workspace switcher, The search box. At the right end of the Application bar there are three buttons: minimize, maximize and close

InDesign Icon : It allows you to Restore, Size, Move, Minimize, Maximize and Close the InDesign Window.

Goto Bride button : opens Adobe Bride package.

Zoom Controls :Allows to zoom in or zoom out a document.

Screen Mode : Allows to view document in different screen modes like: Normal, Preview, Bleed, Slug and presentation modes.

o Normal: Mode which will show Normally4 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೭೨ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 o Preview: It previews the document which is ready for printing. o Bleed: It previews the printable area of the document with its predefined bleed area that extends beyond the page boundaries.

o Slug: The Slug area is an area outside of the document page that contain printing related instructions. It previews the document with all printalble objects with predefined slug area. o Presentation: It preview the document in full screen size without menus (as shown in Powerpoint slide show)

Arrange documents : It is used to arrange multiple documents if you have opened. It lets you arrange documents as : Consolidate all, Tile all in a Grid, Tile All Horizontal, Tile All Vertically.

Workspace Switcher : InDesign lets you switch between the workspaces. You can customize a workspace as needed. There are workspaces like Advanced, book, Digital publishing, Essentials, Interactive for PDF, New in CS6, Printing and Proofing, Typography. You can also Create new workspace, Replace it, Remove it.

The Search box: It is used to search data from internet.

Close: To close the application.

Restore/Maximize: toggles between Maximize (full screen) and Restore (Normal sized screen).

Minimize: collapsing the window into an icon on the taskbar

Menu bar

The Main Menu organizes commands in individual menus which are grouped according to the task they perform. The different menus are:

• File Menu: Has basic operation commands like creating a new file, opening, printing, importing, exporting, closing a file.

• Edit Menu: Allows you to edit the contents of the file by using cut, copy, paste, find, etc., • Layout Menu: It works with various page layout related options like adding pages, guides, navigating through pages, etc.,

• Type Menu: Has text related options like font style, color, Alignment, inserting symbols, typing on path, track changes, bullets, etc.,

• Object Menu: Has object related options like: aligning object, arranging an object, applying transformations, etc.,

• Table Menu: Has options related to tables like inserting, deleting, merging, splitting tables/cells • View Menu: Has options to change view for a document like zoom, ruler, guides, • Window Menu: It allows you to perform work related to workspace (here we can turn on/off Panels) • Help Menu: Provides help

Control Panel

The Control Panel displays options for the currently selected Tool.

Tools Panel

The Tools Panel contains Tools for creating and editing images, artwork, page elements, and so on.

Related Tools are grouped together. The Toolbox contains Tools for drawing and editing images. Some of the Tools are visible by default, while others are grouped in flyouts. Flyouts open to display a set of related Tools.

You can access the Tools in a flyout by clicking a small arrow in the lower-right corner of a Toolbox. It5 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೭೩ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 contains related Tools. They can be selected by hovering over any of the Toolbox buttons which have flyout arrows.

Tools/ Flyouts of InDesign are listed below:

Panels

Panels help you monitor and modify your work. By using Panels you can add or remove various effects on an object and a document. By default Panel group is located at right side of the workspace. The different Panels are The pages Panel, Layers, Stroke, Color, Swatches, Links, Buttons and Forms Panel, Object States Panel, Layers Panel, etc.,

Scrollbar

Scrollbar helps you to view different portion of your page. There are two types of scroll bar: Vertical scrollbar and Horizontal scrollbar.

Ruler

Rulers: By default when you open any document you'll see the Horizontal and Vertical Rulers on the top and left side. They are very useful for arranging items in your document.

Pasteboard

Pasteboard : The white area that surrounds the page is called the pasteboard. It's a work-space for temporarily storing objects. The pasteboard is not a fixed size and it is not shared between Spreads. Each Spread has its own pasteboard.

INDESIGN CS6 GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE Page

Page: The most important part of the Indesign window is the page. Page is that area of the screen where we type and place objects that we want to print. Anything, whether it is text or object, placed outside a page does not print.

Page/Spread Controls : Page/ Spread controls indicates absolute page numbers in a document that has many pages and makes it easy to jump from page to page in a document. To goto the next or previous page, click the Next Page button or Previous Page button in the Page/Spread control tab. To go to the first or last page, click the First Spread button or Last Spread button .

Pull-down menus: The Pull-down menus contain the commands. Click on a menu title in the menu bar to get the Pull-down menu. Pull-down menus contain five types of commands.

• Command with ellipsis: Clicking a command with an ellipsis displays a dialog box. Command dialog boxes require you to enter more information, or they present you with more choice.

• Commands with arrows: A right pointing arrow means there is a second-level menu (called a submenu)

• Commands with check marks: A check mark by the side of a command means the command is toggled on (turned on). Clicking a command with a check mark removes the mark and toggles the command off.

• Commands that are dimmed: A dimmed command is not currently available. Often you must select or highlight some text or objects before dimmed commands will darken and become available.

• Commands with keyboard shortcuts: Sometimes a keyboard equivalent is displayed to the right of the command. Pressing the keys gives you the same result as selecting the command indicated from the menu. To open Pull –down menus, position the mouse pointer over the pull-down menu name you want to activate, and click the mouse button. The menu drops down to see a submenu or invoke a menu command, drag the mouse pointer over the menu command title (a right-facing arrow points to another level of menus), and submenu will open. To pull the menu back, click outside the menu.

Note: You can customize menus and keyboard shortcuts in InDesign according to the need of the user.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6

CHAPTER – 2

DISCOVERING THE DOCUMENT WINDOW DOCUMENT AND GUIDES

Page: A rectangle area surrounded by black lines, centered on the pasteboard is the Page. Page is the area of the screen where we type text and place objects.

Spreads: A Spread is a set of pages viewed together, such as the two pages visible whenever you open a book or magazine. Spreads appear in case of multiple pages and if facing Page option is selected in the New Document dialog box.

Pasteboard: Working area outside a page where you can store objects that aren't yet positioned on a page. Every Page/Spread includes its own pasteboard.

Note: The pasteboard above and below each page or Spread is an inch deep. The pasteboard at both left and

right of a page or Spread is just as wide as the page. For example, a Spread composed of two 8-inch-wide pages

has 8 inches of pasteboard to the left and 8 inches of pasteboard to the right, plus 1 inch of pasteboard above

and 1 inch below.

Lines of other colors are Ruler

guides.

Column guides appear in front of

margin guides. When a column

guide is exactly in front of a margin

guide, it hides the margin guide.

Fig 2.1 : Document and Guides in Normal View Mode

A. Spread (black lines) B. Page (black lines)

C. Margin guides (magenta lines) D. Column guides (violet lines)

E. Bleed area (red lines) F. Slug area (blue lines)

Margin: A margin is a space separating text or other elements from the edge of the paper. If Facing Pages is selected in the New Document or Document Setup dialog box, the Left and Right margin option names change to Inside and Outside, so that you can specify additional inside margin space to accommodate binding. In the above figure we observe Margin guide is in Magenta color.

Columns: A Column is a vertical area reserved for text. Most newspapers, for example, contain four or more columns per page. You can specify the number of columns your text has to be divided in the New Document or Document Setup dialog box. Column guides are indicated by Violet color.

Bleed Area: The Bleed area allows you to print objects that are arranged at the outer edge of the defined page size. For a page of the required dimensions, if an object is positioned at its edge, some white may appear at the edge of the printed area due to slight misAlignment during printing or trimming. For this reason, you shouldposition an object that is at the edge of the page of the required dimensions a little beyond the edge, and trim 9 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೭೭ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 after printing. Bleed area is shown by a red line on the document. You can set Bleed area settings from Bleed in the Print dialog box.

Slug Area: The Slug area is discarded when the document is trimmed to its final page size. The Slug area holds printing information, customized color bar information, or displays other instructions and descriptions for other information in the document. Objects (including text frames) positioned in the Slug area are printed but will disappear when the document is trimmed to its final page size. It is shown by Blue lines in the document.

Objects outside the Bleed or Slug area (whichever extends farther) do not print.

Rulers: Ruler is a measurement Tool that allows the user to align graphics, text, tables, or other elements on a page. A horizontal ruler appears to the top and vertical ruler appears to the right of the grid. The default units of measure for the Rulers are picas (a pica equals 12 points).

Show/Hide Rulers: Click View Menu → Show Rulers or Hide Rulers. Both actions can be toggled with the same hotkey (Ctrl + R).

Configuring Rulers: To change unit of measurement Click Edit Menu → Preferences→Units & Increments→ click the Horizontal/Vertical drop-down button and select the desired option and Click OK.

ZERO POINT

The point where the Rulers intersect (horizontal and vertical) in the upper-left corner of the page is called the zero point. The zero point is the starting place for all horizontal and vertical measurements. You can move the zero point easily to measure distances from a specific part of your page. If you move the zero point, all the objects on the page display new X: and Y: values even though they haven't actually moved. Objects above or to the left of the zero point will show negative X: and Y: values, and the X: and Y: values of other objects will not relate to their actual position on the page or Spread.

• To reset the zero point: Double-click the zero point window to reset it to the default location. • To move the zero point: Position the Pointer Tool on the crosshair in the Zero Point Window and Drag to the new location. Release the mouse button, the zero point is reset.

• To lock the zero point: To avoid accidental move of Zero point, use the context menu by right Clicking near zero point window and choose Lock Zero Point.

• To unlock zero point: Display the context menu and turn off lock zero point.

UNITS OF MEASUREMENTS

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6  Agates: Typically used in newspapers, an agate is ¹⁄14 of an inch, usually the depth of a line in the small type of classified ads, stock tables, and sports statistics boxes. To enter values in agates, type ag after the value — Ex: 10ag.

 Pixels: Typically used for Web pages and other on-screen documents, a pixel is the dot on a computer monitor that is the smallest element visible; the thousands of pixels on-screen at their various colors make up the image. To enter values in pixels, type px after the value Ex: 10px.

GRIDS

Fig 2.2:Left : Baseline Grid Right: Document Grid

Viewing Grids

Fig : 2.3 : Grids Dialog Box

Ruler Guides

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Creating a Ruler Guides: Select Selection Tool → Click the horizontal ruler in the document window and drag on the page → A horizontal line, representing the horizontal grid is added to a page. Similarly you can also add a Vertical Ruler guide also.

Deleting a Ruler Guides: Select the ruler guide which you want to delete ( horizontal or vertical guide) using Direct Selection Tool →Goto Edit menu →clear (press del key)

Show/Hide Ruler Guides: Click View Menu → Grids & Guides → Show/Hide Guides.

PANELS

Panels help you monitor and modify your work. The different Panels are Page, Stroke, Info etc. By default certain Panels are displayed and are located (docked) along the right edge of the InDesign window, but you can add any Panel by selecting it from the window menu. Many

Panels have menus with Panel specific options. You can separate

group, stack, and dock Panels into your preferred layout.

A Dock is a collection of Panels or Panel groups displayed

together, generally in a vertical orientation. You dock and undock

Panels by moving them into and out of a dock.

• To dock a Panel drag it by its tab into the dock at the top,

Fig : 2.4 : Stroke Panel group

bottom, or in between other Panels.

• To dock a Panel group, drag it by its title bar into the dock • To remove a Panel or Panel group, drag it out of the dock by its tab or title bar. • To move a Panel/ Panel group drag it by tab or title bar.

To control the display of Panels → Click the Window menu and choose the Panel you want to display. When the Panel is displayed, the option changes to hide Panel option

WORKSPACE

You create and manipulate your documents and files using various elements, such as Panels, bars, and windows. Any arrangement of these elements is called a Workspace. The Application bar across the top contains a Workspace switcher and menus. Each preset is optimized to perform some common tasks and designed to user requirements to achieve efficiency.

You can create and customize your own workspace by arranging the Panels, windows, etc., By saving the current size and position of Panels as a named Workspace, you can restore that Workspace even if you move or close a Panel. The names of saved Workspaces appear in the Workspace switcher in the Application bar.

Save a Custom Workspace

With the Workspace in the configuration you want to save, Click Window menu → Workspace → New Workspace, The New Workspace dialog box appears. Then type a name for your Workspace and click OK button.

Display or Switch Workspaces

Select a Workspace name from the Workspace switcher in the Application bar.

Delete a Custom Workspace

Click Window menu → Workspace→ Delete Workspace, from the dialog box, select the Workspace you want to delete and then click Delete button.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 VIEWING THE PAGE

When a new document is created, it is initially displayed in the Fit Spread to Window. InDesign offers a number of views of your document pages. Zoom option is available in Application Bar. You can shrink the images to see the whole page upto 5%, or see varying enlargements of the page upto 4000% of actual size.

Alternatively, you can use the Zoom Tool to specify an area of the page to view, and to increase or decrease its magnification. You can scroll within the window using the scroll bars or use the Hand Tool.

Other Page Views

Use commands on the View menu to display the page or pasteboard at preset views.

• Zoom In : To increase the magnification.

• Zoom Out : To decrease the magnification.

• Fit Page to Window : To check the overall composition of a page

• Fit Spread to Window : To check the overall composition of two-pages Spread

• Actual Size : To see text and graphics as they will appear when printed.

• Entire Pasteboard : To find or view objects on the pasteboard.

• Zoom To : When precision is imperative. (200% to 400%)

THE TOOL BOX

The Toolbox has various sets of Tools used to design a document.

➢ Selection Tools: Used for Selection of objects

➢ Drawing and Type Tools : Used for editing text and drawing simple and complex shapes.

➢ Transform Tools : Used to Resize, Reshape objects

➢ Navigation Tools : Used to Navigate

Some Tools in the Toolbox have

additional Tools linked to them.

These Tools have small black

triangles in the lower right-hand

corner which is called flyouts. To

view the additional Tools click

and hold down on any Tool that

has a black triangle in the corner.

Fig : 2.5 (A): Tool Box Fig : 2.5 (B) :Pen Flyout

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 WORKING WITH A DOCUMENT

A file created in InDesign is called Document and it is saved with the extension .indd. We have already seen how to create a New document and the explanation of New Document dialog box is in our 1st Chapter. Let's see how to work with other file related options like opening an existing file, saving etc.

To Open a document created in Indesign

Click File Menu → (Ctrl+ O), Open a File dialog box appears, in Look in Text box, browse to locate your file location and select the file you want to open and click the Open button.

To Save a New document do this:

Click File menu→Save (Ctrl+S) displays the Save As dialog box, the insertion point is positioned in the File Name: text box. Type a file

name for this document. Click on the Save As Type: InDesign CS6

Document, Click Save to return to your document.

You assign a file name only once to new document. Each subsequent

time you open the document, you in fact open a copy of the

document. Any changes made to the opened document are made to

the copy until it is saved, then the original is updated with the

changes.

Note:- Remember, if you open an existing document and make some

changes you do not like, the simplest thing to do is just close the

document without saving it, then reopen it and start again.

Fig : 2.6 : Save Dialog Box

Saving an Existing Document It is always a good idea to save your work very often but it safeguards you from discarding changes due to power failure. To save your document, click the File menu and choose Save.

Saving a Document as Another Document

Click File menu → Save As or press Shift+Ctrl+S keys together to display the Save As dialog box → the name of the current document is highlighted in the text box. Type a new name for the document. Click OK to save the new document and return to the document window.

CLOSING A DOCUMENT

To close the active document: Click File menu → Close(Ctrl+W). The document is closed without exiting InDesign. To exit from InDesign package goto File Menu →Quit (Ctrl +Q)

CREATING AN ALTERNATE LAYOUT

It helps you to modify the contents based on different types of a layout. It is used when you have a common contents but it should be displayed in various devices such as iPad, iPhone, etc.,

This feature uses Liquid Page Rules, it automatically accommodates the contents to the size or orientation of an alternate layout in InDesign document. The liquid page rules consists of various options such as Re-center, scale, object based and guide based.

Select the type Tool →Drag to create a text frame in work area. →Type a text in text frame → Select the text frame using Selection Tool → Goto Layout menu → Liquid Layout. Then the liquid layout Panel appears14 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೮೨ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 →Select the Liquid page rule (Off/ Scale/ Re-center/ Guide based/ Object based/ Controlled by master. →Select Height, width, top left and right checkboxes under Resize with page options.

Select Layout → Create Alternate layout →Now select the options in the Liquid page rule →click ok. Now we can have an alternate layout along with original layout.

Fig : 2.7 : Liquid layout

Dialog Box

INSERTING / REMOVING PAGES

InDesign gives you complete freedom to add or remove pages. You can specify where you want to add a page or which page/pages you want to delete. The pages you add have the page setup parameters you specified for your existing pages.

To insert a page:

Click Layout menu→ Pages →Add pages ( Shift+Ctrl+P )adds only single page.

To insert multiple Pages

Click Layout menu→ Pages →Insert Pages, we get Insert Page dialog box, there we can specify number of

pages we wish to insert in Pages text box, where to add

pages: before, after, beginning of the document, end of document in Insert: drop down list box and you can also

choose the type of master from Master: drop down list

Fig : 2.8 : Insert Page Dialog Box

box.

Removing a page

Click Layout →pages→Remove Pages. The Remove pages dialog box appears Specify the page number you want to delete.

If you are removing only one page, enter the same page number

in both text boxes (for example, if you want to remove page 27, type 27 in both text boxes). If you want to remove more than Fig : 2.9 : Delete Page Dialog Box one page, type the beginning and ending page numbers inclusive,

in the two text boxes (for example , if you want to remove pages 27 through 34, type those numbers in the two text boxes ). → Click Ok. InDesign displays a dialog warning you that the contents of the pages will be deleted Click OK to confirm the removal and return to your document. Click Cancel to cancel the deletion.

MASTER PAGES

A Master page is a nonprinting page that you can use as the template for the rest of the pages in your document.

Master pages can contain text and graphic elements that will appear on all pages of a publication (i.e. headers, footers, page numbers etc.) By default, every InDesign document you create contains two masters, one for pages on the left and one for those on the right.

Multiple Master pages

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 You can create as many masters as you want or need – for example, you want a colored box down the left margin of just some pages; you could create a master that has this look, and then apply it to only the pages that need it. • To add a New Master, go to the Pages Panel, click on the far right arrow with three lines (circled at right) and choose New Master….

• In the subsequent dialog box, give it a name if you want and then click OK. • Select the appropriate master to change by double-clicking it, and then edit it as you wish. • To apply it to a page, drag the master icon onto the page icon in the Pages Panel, or right-click on the page icon and choose Apply Master to Pages and choose the correct master for the page.

To view the default Master page

• Make sure the Pages Panel is displayed, by going to

the Window menu→ Pages.

• Double-click on A-Master in the Pages Panel to display the Master page.

Remember, there is a left and a right page to the master, so be sure you Fig : 2.10(a) : Pages Panel group are on the page you want to be.

Applying Master to a Page

• Goto Window→Pages. In the Pages Panel, click the desired page icon (Note: Not the Master page icon). • Right-click the page, select Apply Masters to Page then Apply Master dialog box appears. Visible whenever you open a book or

magazine.

• If desired, click the To Pages drop-down menu and select the desired options. Or, type in the page number in the To Pages field.

(Note: A range of page numbers can also be used with a comma or Fig : 2.10(b) : Apply Master Dialog box

hyphen) • Click OK.

Overriding Master pages

On occasion, you may need to change something about the master just on one page – for example, you don't want the page number to display on the first page of a chapter. You can do this without creating a whole new master, but rather just override the one you are currently using.

• In the Pages Panel right-click on the page icon for the page you want to change. • From the options, choose Override All Master page Items. • You can now click on any element on the page and change or delete it.

Deleting a Master

Deleting a master page from a document will not affect the settings of page margin, orientation, character or Paragraph formatting,

Click Pages Panel from Panels group →Select the master page you wish to delete → Click the Panel menu icon in Pages Panel→Select Delete master.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6

CHAPTER 3

WORKING WITH TOOLS AND OBJECTS

SELECTION TOOL:

The Selection Tool is used to select, move, resize, scale, and rotate objects on the page. It is the only Tool that lets you drag objects around screen. To select any object on a document page, click on Selection Tool and just click on the object.

You can even manipulate content within frames by using content grabber. It alone works as a position Tool, rotation Tool. When you double click a text frame with the selection Tool, you will switch to the type Tool. When you double click the contents of an object with the selection Tool, you will switch between selecting contents and the frame.

Direct Selection Tool:

It is used to select objects that are inside other objects. (It is used to work on the contents of a frame, not the frame itself. It is used to select individual handles on objects to reshape them or move within frames.) Click the Direct Selection Tool → Position the Tool over the point you want to move→drag the point to the new position.

You can also move multiple points/object by creating a rectangular marquee around the points you want to select using direct selection Tool or hold the shift key as you click to select the points. The selected point appear solid

To move an object by dragging Select the object using Selection Tool → place the mouse pointer on the object you want to move the mouse pointer changes to an arrowhead. Drag the object to move it.

To resize an object by dragging Select the object using Selection Tool → Press Shift if you want to constrain movement to vertical or horizontal or to constrain the shape of an object as you resize it or to resize an imported graphic proportionally. Drag the object handle to resize it. A two-way arrow (for resizing most objects) or a crossbar (for resizing lines).

Page Tool

Use the page Tool for creating different page sizes within a document. Select Page Tool→layout menu→ page→then use the options in the control page to change the page layout.

Gap Tool

It is used to adjust the spacing between objects. Press U to select the Gap Tool, place the pointer between objects, drag to change the gap between aligned objects. Shift+drag to move the gap between only 2 nearest objects. Alt+drag move a gap and objects in same direction. Ctrl+Drag to resize the gap instead of moving. Crlt+Alt+drag option to resize the gap and move the objects.

Collector Tool

When you select the Content Collector Tool, A pop-up "conveyer" appears at the bottom of the screen, it allows the user to grab multiple pieces of contents (text/ objects) and repurpose throughout the same or separate documents using Content Collector Tool.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Fig : 3.1: Content Conveyer

You can repurpose single or multiple pieces of content simply by dragging the content out of the conveyer whilst choosing to keep or remove them from the conveyer. It is the fast way to replicate pieces of your graphics across multiple layouts and documents.

To copy the contents to content conveyer Select content collector Tool (B) → then the content conveyer should appear at the bottom of the screen → click objects or stories to add them to the content conveyor at the bottom of the screen either by clicking or drag select. The objects or stories will then appear within your content conveyer.

To use the contents in content conveyer Goto new file/spread/page where you wish to place an object/story which you placed in content conveyer →Select Content placer Tool → You can now click/select and drag to place content onto the page.

You can then use the content placer Tool to copy and link these object from the content conveyer into another document. Press B to switch between the Content collector and the Content placer Tools.

Line

Line : This Tool lets you to draw lines at any angle. It also allows you to draw lines

of various thicknesses and at various angles.

Constrained line Tool: This Tool lets you draw horizontal lines; vertical lines or lines at 45o, creating straight horizontal and vertical lines

Fig : 3.2: Lines and

Constrained Lines

Frames and Basic Shape Tools

The Frame and Shape Tools are redundant because both

Frames and Shapes can hold Text or Graphics or be empty.

The frames appear with a big X through them, making them

easier to spot when looking for frames to fill. Frame and Basic

shape Tools are used to draw Rectangle, Square, Ellipse,

Circle, Open or closed shapes, Polygons. It can be simply

inserted as an object or we can add text inside a shape Tool using Frames

➢ Rectangle Frames/Rectangular Shape: Used to create

rectangle or square placeholder

Fig : 3.3: Basic Shape Tool in the above

line. Frames in the second line

➢ Ellipse Frames/Ellipse Shape Tool: Used to create circular

or elliptical place holder

➢ Polygon Frames/Polygon Shape Tool: Used to create multi sided shape placeholder.

Inside Frames you can insert text or image.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Draw basic lines or shapes or frames.

In the Toolbox, do one of the following:

• To draw a line or shape: select the Line Tool , the Ellipse Tool , the Rectangle Tool or the Polygon Tool .

(Click and hold the Rectangle Tool to open flyout and then you

can select either the Ellipse or Polygon Tool.) Drag in the Fig : 3.4 : Dragging to create a basic circle

Document Window.

• To draw a placeholder (empty) graphics/ shape frame, select the Ellipse Frame Tool , the Rectangle Frame Tool , or the Polygon Frame Tool . Drag in the Document Window to

create the path or frame.

• To draw from the center out, hold down Alt.

• To constrain a line to 45° angles, or to constrain the width and

Fig : 3.5: Polygon options

height of a path or frame to the same proportions, hold down Shift

as you drag.

\

• To change the number of sides of a polygon, Select the polygon shape Tool → click anywhere on a drawing window, a dialog box appears: Specify Polygon width, height, number of sides, star inset and press ok polygon will be placed in a page. If you do not specify polygon width and height but if you specify number of sides and star inset and press ok → then begin dragging, until you get a polygon of desired size.

Editing Shapes. To change Width:To edit a shape first select the shape using Selection Tool →Place a mouse pointer on one of the corner handles of the circle shape →Drag the mouse pointer in the horizontal outward direction. The width of the shape increase.

To change Height:To edit a shape first select the shape using Selection Tool →Place a mouse pointer on one of the corner handles of the circle shape →Drag the mouse pointer in the downward direction. The height of the shape increase.

To Round the box Corners do this:

Select a rectangle you want to change the corners. Click Object menu→Corner Options. The Rounded Corner dialog box appears as in Fig:3.4. Select the corner size and shape you want and click

OK. The different shapes are None, Fancy, Bevel, Inset, Inverse rounded, Rounded.

Fig : 3.6(a) : Rounded Corners Dialog

box

Use Live Corners

With Live Corners, you can apply corner effects to rectangular frames by

clicking the yellow box that appears on the frame and dragging. In

addition, you can apply a different corner effect and a different corner

radius to each corner.

Fig : 3.6(b) : Rounded Corners

• Select a rectangular frame →click the yellow box. • Four yellow diamonds appear on the selected frame, indicatingLive Corners mode. 19 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೮೭ INDESIGN CS6 GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE To add corner effects, do any of the following tasks:

• To adjust the radii of all four corners together, drag one of the diamonds towards the center of the frame.

• To adjust a single corner, hold down Shift as you drag a diamond. • To cycle through the various effects, Alt-click a yellow diamond. • To stop editing corners, click anywhere outside the selected frame.

Guidelines for applying corner design:

• If you've obtained plug-in software that adds more effects, the Corner Options command in the Stroke Panel can include additional shapes.

• Corner effects appear on all of a path's corner points, but never on smooth points. The effects change angles automatically when you move a path's corner points.

• If a corner effect significantly changes the path by, for example, creating a bulge inward or outward, it may affect how a frame interacts with its contents or with other parts of the layout. Increasing the size of a corner effect may push an existing text wrap or frame inset farther away from the frame.

• You can't edit a corner effect, but you can change its appearance by changing the corner radius or modifying the stroke.

• If you applied corner effects but can't see them, make sure that the path uses corner points and that a stroke color or gradient has been applied to it. Then increase the Size option in the Corner Options dialog box, or increase the stroke weight in the Stroke Panel.

Fit an object to its frame

Select the frame of the object →Choose Object → Fitting and one of the following options:

➢ Fit Content To Frame: Resizes content to fit a frame and allows the content proportions to be changed. The frame will not change, but the content may appear to be stretched if the content and the frame have different proportions.

➢ Fit Frame To Content: Resizes a frame to fit its content. The frame's proportions are altered to match the content proportions, if necessary. This is useful for resetting a graphics frame that you accidentally altered.

Note: To fit a frame to its content quickly, double-click any corner handle on the frame. The frame resizes away

from the point you click. If you click a side handle, the frame resizes only in that dimension.

➢ Center Content: Centers content within a frame. The proportions of the frame and its content are preserved. The size of the content and frame are unaltered.

➢ Fit Content Proportionally: Resizes content to fit a frame while preserving the content proportions. The frame's dimensions are not changed. If the content and the frame have different proportions, some empty space will result.

➢ Fill Frame Proportionally: Resizes content to fill the entire frame while preserving the content's proportions. The frame's dimensions are not changed. If the content and the frame have different proportions, some of the content will be cropped by the bounding box of the frame.

Note: The Fitting commands fit the outer edges of the content to the center of the frame's stroke. If the frame has

a thick stroke weight, outer edges of the content will be obscured. You can adjust the frame's stroke Alignment

to the center, inside, or outside of a frame edge. To remove undesired fitting settings applied using AutoFit,

choose Object → Fitting → Clear Frame Fitting Options.

INDESIGN CS6 GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE Pen

Pen Tool is used to create paths, which are straight or curved lines that consist of anchor points and line segments. You can create simple or complex paths by clicking the pen Tool pointer on the page. Each time you click the pen Tool pointer on the document, you create an anchor point. Line segments automatically fall into place between every two anchor points. You start off by creating one anchor point, then creating another at a different location. Once the second anchor point is created, a line segment is automatically placed between the 2 anchor points. The number of anchor points and line segments we need depends on the type of objects you create. You can create an open path or closed path using Pen Tool.

➢ Open Path : An open path is a path whose end points are not connected. (Ex: U, [, M,,Z) ➢ Closed path: A closed paths are continuous lines that do not contain end points. i.e., when you create a closed path, you end the drawing at the same point where you started it by clicking the pen Tool on the first anchor point.

Note : For open path, you can apply only stroke. For closed path you can apply fill and stroke.

To Draw Straight line Segments

• Using the Pen Tool, click once and release somewhere on the document(do not drag) • Move over a few inches and click again. A straight path segment should connect the 2 anchor points.

To Draw a Star • Select pen Tool, position the pen Tool where you want the straight segment to begin(do not drag) • Click again where you want the segment to end (Shift+ click to constrain the angle of the segment to a 45 degree multiple)

• Continue clicking to set anchor points for additional

straight segments

• To close the path, position the pen Tool over the first anchor point. Click to close the path. (objects→ paths→ close path.)

Fig : 3.7: Pen Tool to draw line segments

• To leave the path open Ctrl+Click anywhere away from

all objects(press enter key to leave the path open)

To Draw a Curve

Select the Pen Tool. → Position the Pen Tool where you want the curve to begin, and hold down the mouse

button. The first anchor point appears, and the Pen Tool pointer changes to an arrowhead. →

Drag to set the slope of the curve segment you're

creating, and then release the mouse button. In general, extend

the direction line about one third of the distance to the next anchor point you plan to draw. (You can adjust one or both

Fig : 3.8(a): Drawing the first point in a curve

sides of the direction line later.) Hold down the Shift key to

A. Positioning Pen Tool

constrain the Tool to multiples of 45°.

B. Starting to drag (mouse button pressed)

C. Dragging to extend direction lines

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 ➢ To create a C-shaped curve, drag in a direction opposite to the previous direction line. Then release the mouse button.

➢ To create an S-shaped curve, drag in the same direction as the previous direction line. Then release the mouse button.

Continue dragging the Pen Tool from different

Fig : 3.8 (b): Drawing the Second point in a curve

locations to create a series of smooth curves. Note that you

are placing anchor points at the beginning and end of each

curve, not at the tip of the curve.

A. Starting to drag 2nd smooth point

B. Dragging away from previous direction line,

creating a curve

C. Final curve

Note: Alt-drag direction lines to break out the direction

lines of an anchor point.

Complete the path by doing one of the following:

To close the path, position the Pen Tool over the first

(hollow) anchor point. A small circle appears next to the Pen Tool pointer when it is positioned correctly. Click

or drag to close the path.

Reposition anchor points as you draw

Fig : 3.8(C): Drawing an S curve

A. Starting to drag new smooth point

After you click to create an anchor point, keep the

B. Dragging in same direction as previous direction

line, creating an S curve

C. Result after releasing mouse button

mouse button pressed down, hold down the spacebar, and drag to reposition the anchor point. → Complete a path by objects→paths→close path.

Add Anchor Point

Used to add or remove additional anchor points into a drawing

• Position the pen Tool pointer over the path between point 2 and point 3 • Click anywhere on the path between the 2 points, An anchor point is added where you clicked • Click the Direct selection Tool click the new anchor point, then drag it to point 3.

Converting Points

Converting points on a path

• Select the Direct selection Tool →Select one or more points on path to convert • Select the pathfinder Panel by clicking Window Menu →Object and Layout →Pathfinder or Object Menu→ Convert point →Select a Convert command

• Click the button with the convert command you want

o Plain : Changes points to have no direction points or lines o Corner : Changes points to have independent direction lines. o Smooth : Changes points to be a continuous curve with connected direction lines. o Symmetrical : Changes point to smooth points with equal length directional lines.

Converting points on a path using the convert direction point Tool.

• Select the Direct selection Tool →Select a path to convert points • Select the convert direction point Tool on the Tools Panel • Drag a corner point to create a smooth point with no handles22 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೯೦ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ INDESIGN CS6 GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE Scissors

It is used to split or break a path into segments. If we want to separate 1 path into 2 parts ex: 1 circle into 2 halves then we can use this Tool, Use Direct Selection Tool to move one point away from the other. Select the path→ Select scissors Tools→Position the cursor where you want to split the path→click to split the path at that point.

Fig : 3.9 : Left Original Image

Right : Image split using scissors

Note :Path that contains text cannot be split into 2 distinct segments

Selecting Multiple Elements

You can use the selection Tool to select objects. You can select a

single object, or you can select multiple objects and modify them all at

once. When objects overlap, you can select them through the stack of

objects. Use the following techniques to select objects. To select all objects

on the current page or Spread, click Edit menu and choose Select All.

Click an empty part or the page or click Edit menu and choose Deselect

All to deselect.

Fig : 3.10: Selecting many objects

• To select a single object, click the object with the pointer Tool→ To add objects to a selection, hold down Shift as you click other objects.

• To select several objects at once, drag the pointer Tool around multiple objects. Be sure to include each object's bounding box (as indicated by its selection handles) within the selection area, not just the visible portion of the object.

• To select an object underneath another object on the same layer, press Ctrl and click the object you want to select. Each time you click, InDesign selects an object one level deeper in the stack of objects.

DELETING , MOVING , RESIZING ELEMENTS

Deleting an Object

When you delete an object, you break all links between a document and the original object. So, be careful while deleting an object.

To delete an object do this: Select the object. → Click Edit menu and choose Clear, or press, Backspace or Delete key.

Moving and Resizing object

You can move and resize any object by dragging with the mouse or by using the Control Panel. You can also move an object by pressing arrow keys on the keyboard.

Note:- You can move two or more objects simultaneously but you can resize only one object at a time unless

you first group the items you want to resize.

Dragging a side handle changes the width or height only but dragging a corner handle changes the width and height simultaneously.

Object Resized with shift key

Line → Line angled at 45 degree increments Ellipse → Circle Rectangle → Square23 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೯೧ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Regular polygon → Even sided shape with all sides equal Imported → Aspect ratio preserved Group → Aspect ratio of the group is preserved

To Move an object using the Arrow keys do this:

Select the object →To move the object incrementally by .01 inch (.25mm), press an arrow key. To move the object incrementally by 0.1 inch (2.5mm) hold down Shift as you press an arrow key.

CUT, COPY AND PASTE AN OBJECT

➢ Cut (Ctrl+X) option is used to move the selected text or objects from the document to the clipboard, removing them from the page

➢ Copy (Ctrl+C) option is used to copy the selected text or objects to the clipboard. The original objects remain on the page.

➢ Paste (Ctrl +V) Option is used to place the contents of the clipboard (the last thing you cut or copied) into your document. The contents of the clipboard can be pasted repeatedly. Pasting does not affect the contents of the clipboard or original contents.

➢ Duplicate (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+D) option is used to copy and paste the selected text or objects on the page without storing the copy in clipboard. It works faster than copy and paste. If you copy an object, its copy is placed in a container called as clipboard. Then when you press paste, the copy is been placed from the data stored in clipboard. So instead of using copy and paste you can directly use Edit → Duplicate which makes the duplicate copy of the selected object.

➢ Duplicate objects into a Grid: By dragging and using modifier keys, you can create a Grid of object identical to the object being duplicated. Select an object. → Using the Selection Tool, hold down Alt key and begin dragging. → While still dragging, release the Alt key. Press the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys to change the number of columns. Press the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to change the number of rows. Drag a rectangle to specify the size of the Grid. Release the mouse button.

Duplicate a selected object as you transform

You can duplicate an object each time you change its position, orientation, or proportions. For example, you can create a flower by drawing one petal, setting its Reference point at the base of the petal, and repeatedly rotating at incremental angles, simultaneously duplicating to leave behind a new copy of the petal at each angle.

During a transformation, do one of the following:

If you're dragging the Selection Tool , the Rotate Tool , the Scale Tool , or the Shear Tool , start dragging, and then hold down Alt key after you begin dragging. To constrain the duplicate's transformation, Alt+Shift drag If you're specifying a value in the Transform or Control Panel, press Alt+Enter after you've typed the value. If you're pressing arrow keys to move objects, hold down Alt as you press the keys.

➢ Paste without formatting(Ctrl+Shift+V): Imagine you have a 60 pt Bodoni headline and some 12 point Myriad body text. If you select a couple of words of body text, and try to paste it in the middle of the headline, the pasted text will appear with the 12 point Myriad formatting, when the desired result is probably to adopt the formatting of the headline. This where Paste without Formatting comes in. All you have to do is copy the body text normally, then use Edit → Paste without Formatting to paste the text24 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೯೨ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 into the headline. The formatting of the body text will be left behind, and the text will adopt the formatting of the new cursor location. It is mainly used when you need to copy text from other packages.

➢ Paste Into (Ctrl+Alt+V): It is used to paste a text block inside an object. For using Paste Into, first you need to copy text box (not text in text box) then Paste into option will be highlighted. Then select the object into which you need to paste the text box and then go to Edit-→Paste into. Then the text box is placed inside the object.

➢ Place and Link: When you copy text in other packages and paste it in InDesign, you can link a text file, changes made in the original will trigger a request to update the link in InDesign, but it is one-way only.

There is no facility for moving the edits from InDesign back to the text doc other than exporting the story to RTF or text.

➢ Step and Repeat : Use the Step and Repeat command to instantly create rows or columns of duplicates. For example, you can fill a page with evenly spaced duplicates of a single business card design. Select the object or objects you want to duplicate. → Choose Edit → Step and Repeat. → For Repeat Count, specify how many duplicates you want to make, not counting the original. For Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset, specify how far to shift the position of each new duplicate from the previous duplicate along the x and y axes, respectively, and click OK.

Note: To create a page full of duplicates, first use Step and Repeat with Vertical Offset set to 0 (zero); this will

create one row of duplicates. Then select the entire row and use Step and Repeat with Horizontal Offset set to 0;

this will repeat the row down the page.

Moving elements & Resizing using the using Control Panel

To move an object using the Control Panel do this:

Select the object. If the Control Panel is not displayed, click Window menu and choose Show Control Panel. → Select a Reference point in the proxy to specify the part of a selected graphic that moves → if the Reference point is a box, the object will move, if it is an arrow the object will change size as see in Figure 3.8. Click the Reference point to toggle from one mode to the other. → To move the object adjust the values for X and Y

To resize an object using Control Panel do this:

Select the object. → Click or double click to select the Reference point on the Proxy. If you click to select a Reference point, it appear as a small rectangle on the proxy, and the equivalent location on the selected object remains stationary as you resize the object. → To maintain the original aspect ratio of the object. You can then change either the X and W values or the Y and H values, depending on the selected Reference point. The related values changes proportionally.

Specify a size in one of the following way:

1. If the Reference point is a box or a four way arrow, resize the object from the Reference point outward by adjusting W and H or L options (Note that L Appears only if a line is selected.) W - Refers to the width of the object H- refers to the height of the object.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 2. If the Reference point is a two way arrow move the Reference point to stretch or shrink the object by adjusting values for W, H, and L, or for X and Y.

3. If you want to resize an object to a percentage of its original size, change the percentage values next to W and H.

4. Click the Apply button.

ALIGNING AND DISTRIBUTING OBJECTS USING THE ALIGN DIALOG BOX

You can align objects in relation to one another, and then evenly distribute the spaces between the objects.

Align or distribute objects based on a common edge or based on the centers of objects. For example, select the align right icon to move objects horizontally so that their right edges line up with the right edge of the rightmost object.(To align objects to a Grid, use Rulers and guides). When you distribute objects, you can add an even amount of space between their facing edges.

To Align and Distribute objects:

1. Select the objects you want to align and distribute. 2. Click Window→ Objects and Layout sub-menu and choose Align option. 3. If you are distributing objects, select one of the following methods for each

Direction (vertical and horizontal):

Align Panel is displayed at right side. Select one icon for each direction (horizontal or vertical) in which you want to align or one of the axes.

Align Objects : Align Left Edges, Align Horizontal centers, Align right edges, Align top edges, Align Vertical centers, Align bottom edges

Distribute Objects: Distribute Top Edges, Distribute Vertical Centers, Distribute Bottom Edges, Distribute Horizontal Centers, Distribute Right Edges, Distribute Left Edges Distribute Spacing: Distribute Horizontal space, Distribute Vertical space

Use Spacing : Specify the required amount of spacing• Select

Pencil

Pencil Tool lets you draw a freeform path as pen Tool. It lets you draw open and closed paths as if you were drawing with a pencil on paper. It is most useful for fast sketching or creating a hand-drawn look.

Draw freeform paths with the Pencil Tool

Select the Pencil Tool →Select the stroke color and weight and fill None on the Stroke Panel → Position the Tool where you want the path to begin, and drag to draw a path.

Edit paths with the Pencil Tool

You can edit any path using the Pencil Tool and add freeform lines and shapes to any shape.

Add to a path with the Pencil Tool Select an existing path. → Select the Pencil Tool → Position the pencil tip on an endpoint of the path. You can tell you're close enough to the endpoint when the small x next to the pencil tip disappears→ Drag to continue the path.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Set Pencil Tool Options :

Double click on pencil Tool → Enter fidelity value(5-20)→Higher value creates fewer anchor points →Enter smoothness percentage (0-100%) → a higher value creates smoother curves → Click OK.

Eraser

You may want to delete parts of paths. Rather than selecting and deleting

individual points, you can use the Erase Tool to drag to delete parts of a path. Select the path that you want to delete parts of. → Choose the Erase Tool in the Tools Panel → Press and drag the Erase Tool along the path. → Release the mouse to display the new path .

Fig : 3.11: Eraser Tool

Smooth Tool

If you create a path with some jagged edges, you can use the smooth Tool to remove extra anchor points to smooth it out. (The path will be drawn with a fewer points) → Select the Direct Selection Tool →select the path you want to smooth →Select the Smooth Tool →drag along the path to smooth it out. →The path is reshaped with fewer points

You can set Smooth Tool options:

Double click Smooth Tool →Enter the fidelity value(5-20). Fidelity determines how far the mouse must move before an anchor point is added. A higher value creates less anchor points and smoother path. →Enter the smoothness value (0-100). A higher value creates smoother curve. → Select the keep selected check box to keep paths selected after you draw them →Click Ok

Working with Pathfinder.

If you are overlapping objects, you can use buttons on the

pathfinder Panel to create compound shapes, which are editable

and releasable (restoring original attributes.) You can use

pathfinder buttons (add, subtract, intersect, exclude overlap or

minus back) on almost any object, except placed or rasterized

images, mesh objects or a single group.

Select 2 or more overlapping objects -→ Goto Window →object and layout →pathfinder→Select Add/ Subtract/ Intersect/ Extrude overlap/ Minus back.

• Add: Used to join the outer edges of selected objects into

a compound shapes

• Subtract: Use to remove objects in front of other objects

and still preserve paint attributes.

Fig : 3.12: Working with path finder

• Intersect : Use to preserve object areas that intersect. • Exclude Overlap : Use to change overlapping areas to

transparency.

• Minus back : Use to remove objects in the back, leaving only part of the front most objects.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 CHAPTER 4 WORKING WITH TEXT TOOLS

TYPE TOOL

Type Tool lets you create Text frames and select or type text. To create a Rectangular Text frame, click and drag; Hold the shift key to create a perfect Square. To begin typing or editing click in a Text frame or in any empty Frame and type.

Text frames can also be connected to other Text frames so that the text in one Frame can flow into another Frame. Frames that are connected in this way are Threaded. Text that flows through one or more threaded Frames is called Story. When you import a word file in InDesign it comes into your document as a single story, regardless of the number of Frames it may occupy.

Text frames can have multiple columns. A Two column Text frame can sit on a four column page. Text frames can also be placed on Master pages and still receive text on document pages.

If you use the same type of Text frame repeatedly, you can create an object style that includes Text frame formatting such as stroke and fill colors, Text frame options, text wrap and transparency effects. When you place/paste a text we don't need to create a Text frame because InDesign automatically adds Frames based on the page column settings

Creating Type directly

• Select the Type Tool then drag to define the width and height of a new Text frame. An insertion point appears.

• Click to place an insertion point if you haven't defined the width and height of a new Text frame.

• In the Control Panel, click the Character Formatting Control icon or the Paragraph Formatting Control icon .

Fig : 4.1:Control Panel A. Character Formatting controls B. Paragraph formatting controls

• Specify formatting options. Then start typing text.

Creating Type in a Text frame

You can create a Rectangle/ellipse/Polygon text box of any size that you want. Then select Type Tool →Drag to create a Text frame →Start typing → if you type more than what a Text frame can hold, an overflow symbol (a tiny red plus sign in the Square) appears on the edge of the Rectangle box. You can reshape the Text frame object to display the text or create a thread link to another Text frame.

Filling a Text Frame with Placeholder

If you do not have any text at present to enter into the Text frame, then you can have InDesign insert placeholder text. Create a empty Text frame→Select it →right click the Text frame →click fill with placeholder text

Working with Paragraph Text

Paragraph attributes specify how your Paragraphs appear on the page, including Alignments, position of indents and tabs, and the amount of space before and after the Paragraph. In InDesign, a Paragraph is any contiguous text followed by a Paragraph return. You can apply attributes to selected Paragraphs, or you can change the attributes of all Paragraphs of a particular Paragraph style. InDesign provides several ways to apply28 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೬೯೬ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Paragraph attributes, including the Paragraph Panel and Character Panel, which display a list of predefined group of character and Paragraph attributes applied to selected Paragraphs, and the Control palette.

Using the type Tool, click an insertion point in a single Paragraph or select a range of Paragraphs. → Click Type Menu and choose Paragraph option. The Paragraph Specifications dialog box lets you apply formatting not available on the Control palette. Select formatting options.

Type on Path

You can format text to flow along the

edge of an open or closed path of any shape.

Apply options and Effects to type on a path:

Slide it along the path, flip it over to the

other side of the path, or use the shape of

the path to distort the characters. Type on a

path has an in port and an out port just like

other Text frames, so you can thread text to

and from it. You can include only one Line of type on a path, you can't create type on a

path using compound paths, such as those

Fig :4.2: Type on a path. A. Start bracket B. In port C. Center

bracket D. End bracket E. Out port indicating threaded text

that result from using the Create Outlines command.

Create Outlines command.

Select the Type On a Path Tool→Position the pointer on the path until a small plus sign appears next to the pointer , and then follow these steps:

Click the path, an insertion point appears. To

confine the text to a specific portion of the path, click the

path where you would like the text to start, and drag along

the path to where you want the text to end, then release the

mouse. Then Type the text you want. If you clicked to place

the insertion point on the path, type will appear along the entire length of the path. If you dragged, type will appear

Fig :4.3: Changing Location of type on path

only along the length you dragged.

Tighten character spacing around sharp turns and acute Angles

Using the Selection Tool or the Type Tool, select the Type on a path → Choose Type → Type on a Path → Options, or double-click the Type On A Path Tool.

For Spacing, type a value in points. Higher values remove the extra space between characters positioned on sharp Curves or Angles.

Modify Type on a path

Select direct selection Tool →click on the type :Center/ left and right brackets appear around the type→drag the bracket (not the Square to adjust the position of Type on the Path →To change type on path options click the type Menu →type on path→options →Specify the options (Effect, Flip, Align to Path and Spacing) →click Ok

Positions:

• Swap slides: Drag the center bracket to the other side to change inner/outer position of the type along the path29 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೬೯೭ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 • Left : Drag to position the left side or starting point of the type along the path • Center: Drag left or right to position the type along the path. • Right : Drag to position the right side of the type along the path.

If the overflow symbol appears, deselect the Text frame → select Direct Selection Tool →drag a corner to reshape the Text frame

Selecting and Deselect type text

Text : Drag the I beam cursor to select and highlight a word or Line of text.

Text range: Click to place the insertion point at the beginning of the text range, press shift and then click at the end of the text range.

Word : double click a word of text

Paragraph : Triple click a Paragraph of text All text (Ctrl+A): Click to place the insertion point, Go to Edit Menu→Select all To deselect :Go to Edit Menu → Deselect all

Editing Text with Autocorrect

Autocorrect feature automatically corrects common capitalization and spelling errors as you type. You can add words and phrases to the autocorrect dictionary that you tend to Misspell.

Go to Edit Menu →Preferences→Autocorrect→Enable autocorrect check box →Check mark Autocorrect Capitalization errors and language(to select language Dictionary) →click OK

To Add/Edit/Remove words from Autocorrect:

• Add: type a misspelled word or an abbreviation to add it to the list of words that needs to be autocorrected • Edit: Select any word you want to change and make the necessary correction. • Remove: Select any words you want to delete.

Aligning Text

Alignment is the setting of text flow or image placement relative to a page, column (measure), table cell or tab. The type Alignment setting is sometimes referred to as text Alignment, text justification or type justification.

You can align text with the left or right edges of a text block (or with the inset of a Text frame), and you can center or justify it. (Justified text is aligned with both the left and right edges of a text block or with the left and right inset of a Text frame.)

Types of Alignments: Left, Center, Right, Justify with last Line aligned left, Justify with last Line aligned right, Justify with last Line aligned center, Justify all Line, Align towards Spine, Align away from Spine.

When you apply Align towards Spine to a Paragraph, text on a left-hand page is right-aligned, but when the same text flows onto (or if the Frame is moved to) a right-hand page, it becomes left aligned.

Similarly, when you apply Align Away From Spine to a Paragraph, text on a left-hand page is left aligned, while text on a right-hand page is right aligned. In Vertical Frames, Aligning to or Away from the Spine has no effect, since Text Alignment is parallel to the Spine Direction. Do not align to Baseline Grid: Click to keep the Paragraph text from aligning to the Baseline Grid. Align to Baseline Grid: To align the Paragraph text to the Baseli`ne Grid.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 To align a Paragraph:

1. Select one or more Paragraphs, or edit a Paragraph style 2. Click Type Menu → Paragraph and then choose an Alignment option.

Kashida : It is a type of justification used in some cursive scripts related to Arabic. Kashida justification is accomplished by elongating characters at certain chosen points. Kashida justification can be combined with white space justification to various extents.

Indent : Alignment and Indents give Paragraphs their fundamental appearance. Indentation helps readers visually separate Paragraphs — the indent acts as the separator, like the blank Lines used to separate Paragraphs in typewritten documents.

You can set Left Line Indent, Right Line indent, Left indent and right indent for a Paragraph. You can also set the space before and after the Paragraph. You can align / un-align text to Baseline Grid also. Select the Type Tool, select the Paragraph or multiple Paragraph →Go to Type Menu →Paragraph →Enter the Left/Right indent value → To create a First Line or last Line indent, enter a first Line indent or last Line indent value or use the up and down arrows to specify one.

Applying Spacing

You can control the Vertical space between Paragraphs by specifying the amount of space to insert before or after selected Paragraphs or all Paragraphs of a certain style. To apply spacing between Paragraphs, enter a value in Space Before Paragraph or Space After Paragraph and press enter key.

DropCap:

A Dropcap is the first letter of a Paragraph that's of a much bigger size than the rest that follow.

The letter formatting is such that the letter "˜drops down' to cover the few Lines following the first one. This option is found in Type Menu →Paragraph option. In InDesign you can set number of words and number of Lines to which you can apply Dropcap. By default its value is 1

Note: InDesign never inserts space before a Paragraph set to begin at the top of a column or page (using the Page

Break Before or Column Break Before attribute). For those cases you must add the extra space manually by typing one

or more Paragraph returns.

To Increase or Decrease Space before or after a Paragraph:

Select the Paragraph you want to edit, Click Type Menu and choose Paragraph option. → In the Paragraph Space options, specify the values you want in the first Line indent and last Line indent box.

Apply a Paragraph Rule

If you want a Line above or below a Paragraph, you can apply it to a Paragraph, so the Line stays with the Paragraph as you add or delete a text. A Paragraph rule can also be applied as part of a style sheet. In the Paragraph rules dialog box, we can set Style, Type, Weight, Color, Position, Width of the Paragraph Line rule.

Select a Paragraph →go to Options Menu→Paragraph Rules →Preview →select Rule above/ Rule below from the list arrow, and then select rule on check box →select Weight/ Color/ Type/ Tint/ Gap color/ Gap tint/ Overprint gap/ Width/ Offset/ Indent →To keep the rule in the Text frame, select the keep in Frame checkbox →press OK.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 APPLYING BULLETS AND NUMBERING

The best way to draw attention to a list is to format the items with bullets or numbers. You can also customize the list style. If you move, insert or delete items in a numbered list, InDesign sequentially renumbers the list for you. To apply select the text on which you want to apply the bullet or number list using Type Tool →Click Type →Bulleted and Numbered Lists→Apply Bullets/Apply Numbers.

Note : You can convert bullets/numbers to text. Go to type Menu→ point to bulleted & Numbered lists →Click

convert bullets to text or convert numbering to text

ADDING AUTOMATIC PAGE NUMBERING

You can add Automatic Page Numbers to a document. The Master Page of an InDesign document is used to apply automatic page numbering.

Select Master Page (A-Master) →Select Type Tool & draw Frame at a location where you wish to Add Page number (Bottom Left or Top Right) →Go to Type→Insert Special Character→Markers →Current Page Number (Ctrl+Alt+Shift+N).

As you are currently working on A-Master the character A appears in the selected Text frame. If you select a page other than Master page, then InDesign will actually display Page Number. But in Master page it will display master name. In this example it will display as A

Note: The other special characters are: symbols (copyright, trademarks), markers(pg no, section markers),

hyphens and dashes(Em and En Dashes), quotation marks (single/double quotes) and other(includes tabs and

indents)

Setting Text frame options

If you need to make adjustments to all the text in a Text frame, you can use the Text frame options dialog box to make all your changes in one place.

Select the Text frame you want to change→Go to Object Menu → Text frame Options →Select preview check box → click General tab →Select Columns/ Number/ Width/ Gutter/ Maximum/ Balance columns/ Inset values.

Columns: Select to keep a fixed column width or number or allow a flexible width

Number: Specify number of columns

Width: Specify the column width you want.

Gutter: Specify the gutter space between the columns you want.

Maximum: For flexible width, specify the max. size before adding column.

Balance Columns: Select to automatically balance text across columns in a multiple column Text frame

Inset values: top, bottom, left, right

Move a Text frame

Using the Selection Tool, drag the Frame. Using the Type Tool, hold down Ctrl and drag the Frame.

When you release the key, the Type Tool is still selected.

Resize a Text frame

Do any of the following:

To resize using the Type Tool, hold down Ctrl and drag any Frame handle. If you hold down the mouse button for one second before you begin dragging, the text will recompose while you resize the Frame.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Note: If you click the Text frame instead of dragging it, you'll lose your text selection or insertion point location.

To resize using the Selection Tool, drag any of the

Frame handles on the Frame's border. Hold down Ctrl key

to scale the text within the Frame.

To quickly fit the Frame to its content, use the

Selection Tool to select the Text frame, and double-click

any handle. For example, if you double-click the center

bottom handle, the bottom of the Frame snaps to the

bottom of the text. If you double-click the center right

handle, the height is preserved while the width narrows to

fill the Frame.

Note: You can also double-click a handle on an

overset Text frame to expand the height or width to fit all

text in the Frame. If a Text frame includes more overset

text than can reasonably fit on the page, the Text frame

Fig :4.4: Double-click handle to resize Text frame

isn't resized.

To fit the Text frame to the content, select the Frame using the Selection Tool, and choose Object → Fitting → Fit Frame to Content. The bottom of the Text frame fits the contents of the text. If a Text frame includes more overset text than can reasonably fit on the page, the Text frame isn't resized. To resize using the Scale Tool , drag to resize the Frame.

Inserting columns

You can create columns with fixed or flexible width and automatically balance text in the same Textbox. You can Span a Paragraph across multiple columns or split a Paragraph into multiple columns within the same Text frame. When you have a Paragraph Span across multiple columns, you can balance the text before Spanning Paragraph.

Click to place the insertion point in the Paragraph you want to change →Select Paragraph Panel → Go to Options Menu→Span Columns→ click Paragraph layout →Click Span columns →Specify Span/ Space Before or After Span.

To split columns: Go To Paragraph layout →Split columns → specify sub columns/ Space Before

or After Split/ Inside or Outside Gutter →press OK.

Use Text frames on Master pages

Master pages can be used to Add Headers, Footers, Page Numbers, Watermarks, Text frames. When you start a New document, you can select the Master Text frame option so that an empty Text frame is placed on the document's default Master page. This Frame has the column and margin attributes specified in the New Document dialog box. Follow these Guidelines for using Text frames on Master pages: Set master Text frames when you want each page in your document to contain a page-sized Text frame into which you can flow or type your text. If your document requires more variation, such as pages with different numbers of Frames or Frames of different lengths, leave the Master Text frame option deselected, and use the Type Tool to create Text frames on masters.

Whether or not you select the Master Text frame option, you can add Text frames to a Master page to act as Placeholders. You can thread these empty placeholder Frames together to establish a flow. Flow text into master Text frames using the same procedures you would use with Frames created on document pages. If you need to type text in a master Text frame on a document page, hold down Ctrl+Shift as you click the Text frame on the document page. Then click in the Frame using the Type Tool and begin typing. You can use Smart Text Reflow to add or remove pages automatically as you type and edit text. By default, when you type text at the33 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೦೧ INDESIGN CS6 GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE end of a threaded Text frame based on a Master

page, a new page is added, allowing you to continue

typing in the new Text frame. You can edit Smart

Text Reflow settings.

If you change the page margins, Text frames

adjust to the new margins only if the Enable Layout

Adjustment option is selected Selecting the Master

Text frame option does not affect whether new pages

are added when you Autoflow text.

Change Text frame properties

Use Text frame Options to change settings Fig :4.5: Before (left) and after (right) setting inset and creating two columns in a Text frame such as the number of columns in the Frame, the

Vertical Alignment of text within the Frame, or the inset spacing, which is the distance of the margins between the text and the Frame.

Note: If you need to use the same Text frame properties for multiple Text frames, create an object style that you

can apply to your Text frames.

Using the Selection Tool/Type Tool, select a Frame, click inside the Text frame or select text. Click Object → Text frame Options, or hold down Alt and then double-click the Text frame using a selection Tool. Change Text frame options, and then click OK.(Text frame options are available when you're defining an object style for text boxes.) Add columns to a Text frame. (You can create columns within a Text frame by using the Text frame Options dialog box.)

Note: You cannot create columns of unequal width

in a Text frame. To create columns of unequal width

or height, add threaded Text frames side-by-side on

either a document page or a Master page.

Using the Selection Tool, select a Frame, or using

the Type Tool, click inside the Text frame or select text. Choose Object →Text frame Options. → Specify the number of columns, the width of each

column, and the spacing between each column

(Gutter) for the Text frame.

Fig :4.6: Before (left) and after (right) balancing columns

(Optional) Select Fixed Column Width to maintain

column width when you resize the Frame. If this option is selected, resizing the Frame can change the number of columns, but not their width. (Optional) Select Balanced Columns to make text even at the bottom of a multi-column Text frame.

You can also change Text frame inset Spacing (margins) by Choose Object → Text frame Options. In General Tab Type the Offset distances you want for Top, Left, Bottom, and Right. If the Frame you've selected has a non-rectangular shape, the Top, Left, Bottom, and Right options are dimmed, and an Inset option is available instead. First Baseline offset options can be set using Baseline Options tab. The following options appear in the Offset Menu under First Baseline:

Ascent: The height of the "d" character in the font falls below the top inset of the Text frame.

Cap Height: The top of uppercase letters touch the top inset of the Text frame.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Leading: Use the text's leading value as the distance between the Baseline of the first Line of text and the top inset of the Frame.

X Height: The height of the "x" character in the font falls below the top inset of the Frame.

Fixed: Specify the distance between the Baseline of the first Line of text and the top inset of the Frame.

Min: Select a minimum value for the Baseline offset. For example, if Leading is selected and you specify a minimum value of 1p, InDesign uses the leading value only when it's greater than 1 pica. Note: If you want to snap the top of the Text frame to a Grid, choose either Leading or Fixed so that you can control the location of the first Baseline of text in Text frames.

Changing Font Style of the Text

Select text using Type Tool from the Tools Panel → Apply the required font face, size from the drop down list. → Click the color Panel icon in the Panels group→ move the mouse pointer over the CMYK spectrum. (Mouse pointer changes to Eyedropper Tool)→ Select a color from the spectrum. Then the color of the text changes to the selected color. Go to Type Menu→ character→ You can set Font face, Size, Leading, Kerning, Tracking, Scaling, Baseline shift, Skew/Shear, Language, Font style (Underline, Bold, Subscript, etc.,)

Leading : Leading is the amount of space between the Baseline of one row of text to the Baseline of another row of text.

Kerning: Kerning is adding to or taking away space between characters for a more balanced look.

• Optical Kerning: Adjusts the Kerning between letters based on character shapes rather than predefined kerning values • Metrics Kerning: Uses the built-in Kerning of the font. If the font designer took the time to set up kerning pairs, this is a good option.

Scaling: Scaling allows you to make text Wider or Narrower for Horizontal text and taller or shorter for Vertical text. You can adjust the height or width of your text using the preset values in the drop down Menu to the right of the Vertical or Horizontal Scale Fields, type in your own value, or use the up and down arrows to the left of the Vertical or Horizontal Scale Fields to adjust the scale one increment at a time.

Skewing: The Shear Tool or Skew on the Control and Transform palettes slants an object or text along its Horizontal axis. It allows you to distort the text at an Angle to give it perspective. The Shear dialog box can also shear an object along a Vertical or slanted axis. Skewing or Shearing may be used to create a shadow or simulate some types of perspective.

Tracking: Tracking is similar to kerning, instead of adjusting the spacing between two characters, it adjusts the spacing for an entire block of selected text. Typically we will track a Line of text or a few words depending on the length and design application.

Determine Word and Character Counts

Place the insertion point in a Text frame to view counts for the entire thread of Frames (the story), or select text to view counts only for the selected text. Choose Window → Info. The Info Panel displays the number of characters, words, Lines, and Paragraphs in a Text frame. The position of the insertion point within the Text frame also appears.

INDESIGN CS6 GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE Add Header and Footer

You can add Headers and Footers by clicking Window→pages→Master-A. In Master-A or Master page type the text above the margin or below the margin to get header and footer to whole document. When you go to other pages, you can see Headers and Footers applied to all pages

To add content:

• Choose Type → Insert Special Character → Markers → Current Page Number.

• Choose Type →Text Variables → Insert Variable → File Name

Working with Glyphs

A Glyph is a style variation such as ligatures, ordinals, swashes and fractions for a given character in an open type font. You can automatically insert alternate Glyphs with the open type Panel or insert them manually with the Glyphs Panel to extend the font format.

Select the Type Tool →select a character (to Insert/ Replace a Glyph) →Go to Type Menu →Select Glyphs →Select a different font and font style → click the show list arrow, and then select a Glyphs category →Double click a glyph that you want to Insert/Replace.

Text Wrapping

You can wrap text around any object, including Text frames, imported images, and objects you draw in InDesign. When you apply a text wrap to an object, InDesign creates a boundary around the object that repels text. The object that text wraps around is called the Wrap object. Text wrap is also referred to as Runaround Text. Keep in mind that text wrap options apply to the object being wrapped, not the text itself. Any change to the wrap boundary will remain if you move the wrap object near a different Text frame.

To display the Text Wrap Panel, choose Window→ Text Wrap. Select a Text box/object, click the type of Wrap you need to apply for the text box/inserted object. → Specify Offset values → Choose Show Options from the Text Wrap Panel Menu to display additional options. Types of Text wraps:

Wrap Around Bounding Box: : Creates a Rectangular wrap whose width and height are determined by the bounding box of the selected object, including any offset distances you specify.

Wrap Around Object Shape: : Also known as contour wrapping, creates a text wrap boundary that is the same shape as the Frame you've selected (plus or minus any offset distances you specify).

Jump Object: : Keeps text from appearing in any available space to the right or left of the Frame.

Jump To Next Column: :Forces the surrounding Paragraph to the top of the next column or Text frame.

No Text Wrap: No text wrapping applied

Note Tool

You can use note Tool to add non – printing notes to text.

THE STORY EDITOR

If you want to focus solely on text in the document then we should use story editor because it displays text and tables in a separate window with unformatted sequential columns and rows for easy editing. Any Graphics, Shapes, Text formatting or other design elements in the document will not appear in the Story Editor.

The left side of the editor displays the Paragraph style and the right side displays the Editable text. You can edit text in InDesign either on the layout page or in the story editor window. Writing and editing in a story36 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೦೪ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 editor window allows the entire story to appear in the typeface, size, and spacing that you specify in Preferences,

Text frames can also be connected to other Text frames so that the text in one Frame can flow into another Frame. Frames that are connected in this way are Threaded. Text that flows through one or more threaded Frames are called Story. The Story Editor is also where you can view Track changes to text.

Each Story appears in a different Story Editor window. All the text in the story appears in the story editor, including overset text. You can open several story editor windows simultaneously, including multiple instances of the same story. A Vertical Depth Ruler indicates how much text is filling the Frame, and a Line indicates where text is overset. When you edit a story, changes are reflected in the layout window. Open stories are listed in the Window Menu. You cannot create a new story in a story editor window.

You can view and edit tables in Story Editor, where text is displayed in sequential columns and rows for easy editing. Quickly expand or collapse tables, and decide whether to view them by row or column. The Story Editor also displays text that has been added, removed, or edited if you turn on Track Changes.

Open the Story Editor

Select the Text frame, →Choose Edit → Edit In Story Editor (Ctrl+Y).

Return to the layout window

In Story Editor, Choose

Edit → Edit In Layout (Ctrl+Y).

When you use this method,

the layout view displays the same

text selection or insertion-point

location as last appeared in the story

editor, and the story window remains

open but moves behind the layout

window. Click in the layout window.

The story window remains open but

moves behind the layout window.

Close the story editor window.

Choose the document name from the

Fig :4.7: Story Editor Window A. Paragraph styles B. Drag

divider to adjust column width C. Vertical depth

Ruler D. Overset text indicator

bottom of the Window Menu.

Show or hide Story Editor items

You can show or hide the style name column and the depth Ruler, expand or collapse footnotes, and show or hide Paragraph break marks to indicate the start of new Paragraphs. These settings affect all open story editor windows. With the story editor active, choose

View → Story Editor→ Show Style Name Column or Hide Style Name Column. You can also adjust the width of the style name column by dragging the Vertical bar.

With the Story Editor active, choose View → Story Editor → Show Depth Ruler or Hide Depth Ruler/Expand or Collapse All Footnotes/ Show or Hide Paragraph breaks.

Story Editor Preferences

Use Story Editor Display Preferences to change the appearance of the Story Editor. Although the Story Editor suppresses all but the most basic text styling attributes, some objects and attributes are represented, including the following:

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6

Fig :4.8: Most basic text styling attributes

Here are some reasons to use the Story Editor:

1. When text is difficult to view or select: You may be working in a Newsletter Story which jumps from page to page. Editing the Story in the Story Editor lets you work with the entire Story at one time in one continuous stream.

2. When text is overset: If not all the text fits in a Story's Frames, a red + sign appear at the bottom of a Story. (If text or an object doesn't fit in a table cell, it shows as a red dot.) But in the Story Editor, all the text of the Story, even the portion that is overset, is visible. You can easily edit the Story to fit the Frames.

3. To work with footnotes or notes in the context of the Story: When you insert a footnote in a Story, the text of the footnote appears at the bottom of the column or page. In the Story Editor, the footnote appears as a marker in the context of the Story. You can click the marker to expand and view or edit the footnote. (You can also choose View→ Story Editor → Expand All Footnotes.) These notes can also be expanded or collapsed in context in the Story Editor.

4. To easily work with Markers: for anchored objects, Text Variables, Cross References, and so on, InDesign displays Markers in the Story Editor for a large number of the specialized features used in a text flow.

5. To work with overset text or Embedded Graphics in a table: The table text is displayed arranged either by rows or columns. It's much easier to select and work

6. To view Paragraph styles applied or to do a Depth Count on text: By default, the names of Paragraph styles are displayed to the left of the text. A Depth counter is also displayed which shows the total depth of text in the Story in the current Ruler units. You can turn those features on and off in the View → Story Editor Sub-menu.

SPELL CHECK

You can spell-check a selected range of text, in all of the text in a Story, in all stories in a document, or in all stories in all open documents. Misspelled or unknown words, words typed twice in a row (such as "the

the"), and words with possible capitalization errors are

highlighted. In addition to checking the Spelling in a document,

you can also enable Dynamic Spelling so that potentially

misspelled words are Underlined while you type.

When you check Spelling, the dictionary for the

languages you assigned to the text is used. You can quickly add words to the dictionary. Edit →Spelling→Check Spelling. You can check Spelling for entire document or check from the

insertion point or check Spelling of the selected text or check all

text in the currently selected Frame.

Fig :4.9: Spell check dialog box and Menu

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 FIND AND REPLACE

1. Choose Edit → Find/ Change. This opens the Find/Change palette, so you can jump into the text and edit it without closing

the palette.

2. In the Find What area, type the text you want to find. (You can

leave this blank if you simply want to change formatting.) 3. In the Change To area, type the text you want to replace it

with.

4. Choose an option from the Search Menu to specify the scope of your search: All Documents, Document, Story, To End of

Story, and Selection. (If necessary, you can jump into the

document and select a Story, an insertion point, or text to

search.) 5. Check Whole Word if you don't want to find variations of the

Fig :4.10: Find and Replace Dialog Box

Find What text (such as plurals).

6. Check Case Sensitive if you only want to find text with the exact capitalization pattern shown in the Find What field. When this option is checked, the capitalization in the Change To field is used for changes as well.

7. If you want to consider formatting in the search, click the More Options button to expand the Find/Change palette

8. Use the Format buttons in the Find Format Settings and Change Format Settings area to specify the formatting you want to find and replace.

9. Click Find Next to start the search. When you locate the found text, click Change To Replace it with the Change To text and formatting or click Find Next again to skip it.

CHANGE CASE

When formatting an article, sometimes you will need to change the font case in order to emphasize the texts or sentences. Actually it is dreary (boring) to type the text you want to change case one by one, and you don't have to do it manually. The different type of change case are:

• Upper Case : Make all selected characters capital. • Lower Case : Make all selected characters small letters. • Title Case : Capitalizes the first letter of each word to Capital. • Sentence Case: Make all selected text in sentence case format i.e., capitalize each word after punctuations, etc.,

Other Styles:

• Subscript: Reduces and lowers the text below the baseline. • Superscript: Reduces and raises the text above the baseLine. • Underline: Underlines the text. • Strikethrough: Adds a Line through the text.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 SELECT TEXT

Drag the I-bar cursor over a character, word, or an entire text block to select it.

Select text in a Frame that is covered

Using the Selection Tool , hold down Ctrl

and click to select the Text frame. Select the Type

Tool, and then click inside the Text frame or select

text.

View hidden (nonprinting) characters :

Choose Type → Show Hidden Characters. If hidden characters still do not appear, turn off preview mode. Choose View→Screen Mode→Normal and choose View → Overprint Preview to deselect it.

Nonprinting characters such as those for

spaces, tabs, ends of Paragraphs, index markers, and

end of Story appears. These special characters are visible only in a document window and a Story Fig :4.11 (a) : Normal Text (b) : Showing Hidden characters

editor window; they don't print or output to formats

such as PDF and XML. The hidden characters appear in the same color as the layer color.

Add column, Frame, and page breaks

Control column, Frame, and page breaks by inserting special break characters in the text. Using the Type Tool, click to place the insertion point where you want the break to occur. Choose Type → Insert Break Character, and then choose a break option from the Sub-menu.

Note: You can also create breaks by using the Enter key. For a column break, press Enter; for a Frame break,

press Shift+Enter; and for a page break, press Ctrl+Enter.

To remove a break character, choose Type → Show Hidden Characters so that you can see nonprinting characters, and then select and delete the break character.

Break options

The following options appear on the Type → Insert Break Character Menu:

Column break Flows text to the next column in the current Text frame. If the Frame has only one column, the text goes to the next threaded Frame.

Frame break Flows text to the next threaded Text frame, regardless of the current Text frame's column setup.

Page break Flows text to the next page with a Text frame threaded to the current Text frame.

Odd page break Flows text to the next odd-numbered page with a Text frame threaded to the current Text frame.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Even page break Flows text to the next even-numbered page with a Text frame threaded to the current Text frame.

Paragraph Return Inserts a Paragraph return (the same as pressing Enter or Return).

Forced Line Break Forces a Line to break where the character is inserted, starting a new Line without starting a new Paragraph (the same as pressing Shift+Enter). A forced Line break is also called a soft return.

Discretionary Line Break Indicates where a Line of text should break if the Line needs to break. A discretionary Line break is similar to a discretionary hyphen, only no hyphen is added where the Line breaks.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 CHAPTER 5

INTRODUCTION TO THREADED TEXT

If you are working with huge texts then you can directly type the text in InDesign with proper alignments and text flow or you can just directly import a text from other packages like word, notepad, CorelDraw, etc., using File→Place command. Threading text within InDesign can hugely improve the experience of editing and amending copy while working on layouts. The process of threading text is linking two or more Text frames allowing text to flow from one separate Frame to another.

A Text can be placed in InDesign either by selecting a Text frame or it can be placed in any shapes or it can create its own Text frame box. When you Go to File→ Place, You will notice that the first few Lines of your text are displayed as part of the cursor (Fig 5.1). This feature gives you the chance to confirm you've chosen the right text file. The next thing you should pay attention to is the particular look of the cursor, which changes based on where you place it. For example, if you hover the cursor above a blank area (not over an existing Frame), you'll see dotted corner Lines appear at the top left (again, Fig 5.1). This Fig :5.1(a): Loaded cursor thumbnail

dotted-Line cursor indicates that if you click

or drag here, InDesign will place the text inside a new

Frame. It also indicates that if there is more text that can

fit inside that one Frame, the extra text will become

overset (it will appear cut off).

Select the Type Tool from the Tool

box and draw

and dragging a Text frame over 2 columns by clicking over the area you want to cover →Go to Type Menu →select fill with placeholder text option →now reduce the text using the Text frame to one column by selecting

Fig: 5.2 : Inport and outport

Selection Tool and dragging the middle

handle that sits

snaps to 1

notice a red on the Vertical edge of the Frame until it columns →if a text is over-flown you will box containing a + mark at the bottom right Text frame. →Now draw another Text the selection Tool, click once on the red box

side of the frame→Using (out-port) in the first Frame then the cursor will change to thread icon and a small preview Paragraph will appear, the text is next placed to second column by clicking on the Text frame which has been created earlier. This 1st and 2nd column text are called as threaded text. To view text threads go to View Menu →Extras→Show Text Threads. To undo a thread use the selection Tool and double click on the import of the Text frame if you want to unthread text.

Knowing the Symbols

 Flow / Flowing – When content text starts in one Frame and continues to others.  Thread / Threading – Frames which are linked; when they have flowing text among them.  In port – Icon displayed on the upper-left side of the Frame.  Out port – Icon displayed on the lower-right side of the Frame.

Refer to the following graphic; it resumes the meaning of the three symbols featured at In ports and Out ports.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Fig: 5.3 : Symbols Featured At Inport And Outports

Step 1: Create Your Layout

Even thought you can always insert Text frames later it's recommended to

at least have a general idea of the page layout. Create Text frames and

image frame according your needs. For this example, I have created 3

making sure the first Frame isn't big enough to include all the content

(text).

Step 2: Select Text

For illustration purposes, let's use a simple document with 30 Lines of text Fig: 5.4(a) : Creating layout of text and image Frame in it so it will be easy for you to see how the content automatically fits the

Frames with any modification done.

Step 3: Fill the First Text frame

You can copy and paste text to your clipboard or use the "Place" feature to

select a document. Paste the text into the first Frame, you'll notice the red

"+" mark at the out port (lower right side of the Frame), that indicates

content has been left out.

Step 4: Fill the Other Text frames

Click over the red "+" in the out port and you'll notice your mouse pointer

has changed. Move on to the next Text frame and the pointer will display a chain icon, this indicates your text will be threaded, click over the Text

Fig : 5.4(b) Text that need to

placed in Text frame.

frame and see how it has automatically filled up to capacity. If you had

activated the "show text threads" option you'll see a Line between

both boxes. Repeat this step until all the content has been placed to

your document.

After linking the 3 Text frames the document should look similar to

the image below.

Fig : 5.4(c) Overflown text that has been

placed in Text frame.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 What Happens If I Edit the Content?

A really cool feature of working with text threading is that

when you edit the content it will accommodate automatically. For

example let's increase the text size of the first Line, as it would be a

title, you'll notice the content has been distributed among the linked

Text frames. And it doesn't stops there, it also works when you add

content and even between pages.

Using a Primary Text frame

If you are flowing text into a document with a lot of pages,

you may want to specify a primary Text frame when you create the

document. Primary Text frames have special powers that make them

much more versatile than their predecessors when changing the master

applied to a page. In order to get the primary Text frame to automatically create new pages as you flow text, you need to make

Fig : 5.4(d) Threaded text

sure that Smart Text Reflow is turned on in the Type pane of the

Preferences dialog box. It's a good idea to enable the Limit to

Primary Text frames option, so that, for example, a single overset

Line in a threaded Story won't accidentally create new pages.

You might also want to turn on Delete Empty Pages if you expect

your text to flow forward and backward.

Once you've got your primary Text frame on the Master

page, you can simply load your cursor (with the Place command)

and click on top of one of the Frames. The text automatically

flows into that Frame, and InDesign creates as many pages as are

necessary to hold all the text.

You can see the Lines that connect Text frames, it is "Show Text Threads," not text links (View→ Extras →Show Text Threads).

Creating your own Primary Text frames

Fig : 5.5: Document Setup Dialog box

If you didn't turn on the Primary Text frame checkbox

when you started your document, then create your own custom

primary Text frames. Open the Master page and draw as many

Frames as you need. For instance, a Story Book publisher I know

uses 3 linked Frames on the page. Click the out-port on the first

Frame to load the cursor. Click inside the next Frame that you

want to link. Then click on the out port of the second Frame, and

link to the third Frame. Repeat until all the Frames have been linked. (You might want to choose View → Extras → Show Text Threads (Fig:5.6) to keep track of which Frames are linked.)

Fig: 5.6: Text threads show how the

Frames are linked.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Your Frames are now linked, but they don't yet have

the special abilities of primary Text frames. But when you

select any of the linked Frames, you'll see a small icon on the

upper left corner. The icon displays a simple Frame (Fig:5.7).

This indicates that it is an ordinary Text frame. Click that icon. It changes to a Frame with an arrow extending from the

out-port position. That means the Frame has changed to a

Fig: 5.7: Icons indicating ordinary Text

frames (left) and primary Text frames

(right)

primary Text frame. You can have as many linked Frames as

you want in the primary Text frames, but you can have only one primary Text frame Story on each master. That is, just one primary thread per Spread.

Understanding Text Flow

Once you understand how to flow text, you can speed through your long document projects. This Table will help you choose which type of text flow you will want to use.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 CHAPTER 6

APPLY TRANSFORMATION TOOLS

Transforming Objects in InDesign means Positioning or moving objects in a Story to a different place on the screen. InDesign treats both text and Graphics as objects therefore the Transformation that InDesigSkewn offers are applied to both Graphics and text objects. The Transformation can be applied using the manual method that is clicking the corresponding Tool from the Tool box and applying the Transformations. Alternatively, you can use the control palette to apply the Transformations.

In InDesign Moving, Rotating, Skewing/Shearing and reflecting are collectively called as Transformations You can Transform any unlocked object. Fill patterns and PostScript screen Angle are not Transformed.

SKEWING/ SHEARING AN OBJECT

Selected images or text block with any letter Paragraph are Skewed by using the nudge buttons adjacent to the Skew symbol in the Control palette or by entering a Skew Angle in the box. Use the Control palette to Skew an object Horizontally by +85 degrees at .01-degree increments. You can Skew any unlocked object, including a text block or a grouped item.

To Skew on object Click on the object or text with the Selection Tool or highlight text with the Type Tool. → Click a point on the Proxy, the object is Skewed from this point. → Type an Angle measurement in the Skew (object) or Shear X Angle (text) field (same field - different name). Positive values Skew to the right. Negative values Skew to the left. → Press Enter or Choose an Angle from the drop-down Menu. Text is given a false italic with the Skew Tool, use it with caution.

TO CREATE THE SHADOW USING SKEWING:

Select the top copy with the Selection Tool or highlight text with the Type Tool → In the Swatches, select a Tint percentage in the Tint % field. • Send the shadow to the back. Go to Object → Arrange → Send to Back (Ctrl + Shift + [ ) → Reposition the shadow if necessary using the arrow keys.

FLIPPING/REFLECTING AN OBJECT

It creates a mirror image of an object. The object Flips across an invisible axis at the specified reference point. An object can be either Flipped Horizontally or Vertically.

Note : When an object is Flipped, the color of the Flip and Rotate indicator present in control panel changes from black to

white with a black Outline

To Flip an object: Select an image using Selection Tool→ Click Flip Horizontal button from control panel to Flip image in Horizontal direction. If you click to select a reference point, it appears as a small Rectangle on the Proxy, and the equivalent location on the selected object remains stationary as you reflect the object. If you double click to select a reference point it appears as a two or four way arrow and the equivalent location on the selected object moves as you reflect the object.

ROTATING AN OBJECT

The process of moving an object in the clockwise or anti clockwise directions at a fixed reference point is called Rotating. You can Rotate an object by using control panel or Object→Transform →Rotate (CW→ clockwise, CCW → counter clock wise)46 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೧೪ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Select an image→select Rotate Tool from free Transformation Tool in Tools Menu. By default the reference point of an object is located at the center of the object. Place the mouse pointer anywhere on or around the object, hold the mouse button and move it to Rotate an image. The image Rotates around the reference point.

Note : The reference point can be relocated to the new place and the object Rotates around the new location of

the reference point. (After selecting image, select rotation Tool. Then place the center dot to wherever required

so that you can relocate reference point.)

CROPPING AN OBJECT

Cropping trims away unwanted areas of the image. Select the image using selection Tool → Crop an image by dragging one of the eight handles, which are small hollow Squares, located at the Corners, sides, top and bottom of the image Frame. For example, to Crop away a portion of the top, hold the mouse button and drag the handle located top-center of the image's Frame. Crop two edges of the image at once by dragging one of the corner handles. To Crop the top and left edges of the image at the same time, for instance, drag the handle at the upper left corner of the image Frame.

RESIZING AN OBJECT

Resizing is simply changing the Width and Height values of an object. As you resize an object, temporary guides appear, indicating that the object is aligned with an edge or center of the page or is the same height or width as another page item.

To resize a Frame, drag any handle using the Selection Tool. Hold down Ctrl key while dragging, the Frame and the content are Scaled. Adding the Shift key Scales proportionally.

Note: If Auto-Fit is selected, resizing the Frame resizes the image within the Frame.

• To resize the content of a Graphics Frame, use the Selection Tool to click the content grabber or direct-select the graphic, and then drag any of the Graphics Frame handles.

• To resize a Frame or its content to a precise size, select the object and enter the size in the width (W) or height (H) fields on the Control panel.

Note: To maintain the original proportions of the object when using the Control panel, make sure the

Constrain Proportions icon is selected.

• To resize both the Frame and content, use the Scale X Percentage and Scale Y Percentage fields, not the W and H fields. The W and H fields change only the selected Frame or content, not both. Rather than specifying percentages, you can type dimensions by including the unit of measurement, such as "6p."

• To resize a Frame or its content to a percentage of its current size, select the object and enter the percentage in the width or height fields on the Transform panel.

• To create a copy of the selected object with the new size applied to the copy, type a value in the width or height fields on the Transform panel and then hold down Alt key as you press Enter.

Note: After you resize a Frame or object, you can use a fitting option (Object Fitting) to fit the content

to the Frame or the Frame to the content.

SCALING AN OBJECT

It is used to increase or decrease the size on an object. If we maintain the ratio between the dimensions of the object it is called Proportionate scaling. If the size of the object changes along with the ratio between the dimensions of that object then it is called as dis-proportionate scaling. It is always a better idea to Scale an image proportionately.

Select an image you need to Scale using selection Tool →Object Menu→Transform →Scale →Select a percentage in the Scale X percentage or Scale Y percentage from the dialog box→ press OK.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Note: When you select a Scale percentage in either X or Y, then the percentage value of the other box also changes to Scale an image proportionally.

Resizing and scaling are different actions in InDesign. Resizing is simply changing the Width and Height values of an object. Scaling involves using a percentage value related to the original Scale (100%) of the Frame. The difference between resizing and scaling isn't always apparent. A good way to see the difference is to resize and Scale a Text frame that has a stroke applied to it. When you double the size of the Text frame, the text size and stroke weight remain the same. When you double the Scale of the Text frame, the text size and stroke weight also double.

Resizing a Frame: By default, when the Frame (and not the Frame contents) is selected, changing the values of the Width and Height fields changes only the Frame, not its contents, regardless of which selection Tool is active.

Scaling a Frame and its contents: When the Frame is selected with the Selection Tool, changing the values of the Scale X Percentage and Scale Y Percentage fields changes the Frame and its contents. If Auto-Fit is selected, the Frame and its contents are resized together.

Resizing or scaling Frame contents: If you want to change only the content (resize or Scale) of a Frame, click the Content Grabber or use the Direct Selection Tool to select the contents. Once selected, you can use the Width and Height fields or the Scale fields, depending on your preference.

MOVING AN OBJECT

You can move an object just simply by selecting an object using selection Tool and dragging it to the new location where you want to place the image.

REPEAT TRANSFORMATIONS

You can repeat Transformations, such as moving, scaling, Rotating, Resizing, Reflecting, Shearing, and Fitting. You can repeat either a single Transformation or a sequence of Transformations, and you can apply those Transformations to more than one object at a time. InDesign remembers all Transformations until you select a different object or perform a different task.

Note: Not all Transformations are recorded. For example, modifying a path or its points is not recorded

as a Transformation.

Select one or more objects, and perform all the Transformations you want to repeat. Select the object or objects to which you want to apply the same Transformations. Choose Object → Transform Again and then select one of the following options:

Transform Again: Applies the last single Transform operation to the selection.

Transform Again Individually: Applies the last single Transform operation to each selected object individually, rather than as a group.

Transform Sequence Again: Applies the last sequence of Transform operations to the selection.

Transform Sequence Again Individually: Applies the last sequence of Transform operations to each selected object individually.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Clear Transformations: Select the object or objects that have been Transformed. Choose Clear Transformations from the Transform or Control panel Menu. Unless all values are the default values, clearing Transformations results in a change of appearance for the objects.

Note: If the Scale values were reset at 100%, clearing the Transformations will not change the Scale.

COMBINING EFFECTS :

Combining the multiple objects in to a single unit is called as Grouping.

Grouping & Ungrouping

You can combine several objects into a group so that the objects are treated as a unit. This allows you to move or Transform a number of objects together. For example, you might group the objects in a logo design so that you can move and resize the logo as one unit. A group, when selected, appears with four handles at the Corners that define the bounding box of all objects in the group. Individual objects within a group can be selected and modified. For example, you can reformat text within a text object that is grouped with an image.

To group objects: Using the pointer Tool, press Shift and select the objects to be grouped. One or more of the objects you select can be a group, but if you select two or more groups note that all selected objects (including those within groups) form a single, un-nested group.

Choose Object Menu → click Group option (Ctrl +G )

To select text or an individual object within a group:

Select the Selection Tool (to select Graphics or text objects), or the text Tool (to edit text).If selecting an object within the group, press Ctrl and select the object. To select text, click an insertion point in the text.

To ungroup objects do this: Select the group. → Choose Object Menu and click Ungroup (Ctrl+Shift+G) option. The objects retain the changes you made while the objects were grouped.

Rules for grouping objects:

The following rules apply while grouping the objects:

• Text objects can be resized as part of a group, but text maintains its type and Paragraph specifications. For example, type size does not change when the text block is resized.

• Groups cannot be nested-that is, a group can be grouped with other objects (including another group) but if you ungroup, the original group is also ungrouped.

• The aspect ratio of all objects in the group is retained if you press Shift key while resizing a group (or if you use the proportional resizing option in the Control palette).

• A newly created group moves to the front of the stacking order. Objects in a group retain their stacking order in relation to each other until you change their stacking order with commands from the Objects→Arrange sub Menu.

• If the objects were grouped from different layers, the group is assigned to the layer of the topmost object in the selection.

If you prefer to manipulate an object manually, the Control panel can still help you work precisely:

when visible, it provides immediate feedback about the object you are modifying, such as the Exact Position, Size, or Rotation Angle.

INDESIGN CS6 GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE Lock or Unlock Objects

You can use the Lock command to specify that you don't want certain objects to move in your document. Locked objects stay locked when a document is saved, closed, and then reopened. As long as an object is locked, it cannot be moved. However, you can select locked objects if you turn off the Prevent Selection of Locked Objects option in General preferences. When you select a locked object, you can change attributes such as color.

Select the object or objects that you want to lock in place. To lock the objects, choose Object → Lock(Ctrl+L). To unlock an object, click the lock icon. To unlock the objects on the current Spread, choose Object → Unlock All On Spread.(Ctrl+Alt+L)

Note: You can also use the Layers panel to lock or unlock both objects and layers. When you lock a layer, the Positions of

all objects on a layer are locked, and the objects cannot be selected.

Hide Objects

Hidden objects are not printed or exported, and they cannot be selected. To hide an object, select it and choose Object → Hide(Ctrl+3).. To show hidden objects, choose Object → Show All On Spread(Ctrl+Alt+3).

Create Nonprinting Objects

You might want to create objects that appear onscreen, but will not be printed or appear in portable versions of the document. Select the object or Text frame that you don't want to be printed. → Open the Attributes panel (Window→ Output→ Attributes). → In the Attributes panel, select Nonprinting..

Note: You can also use layers to selectively hide or show elements in a document, and you can assign layers a

non-printing status. One or more of the objects you select can be a group, but if you select two or more groups,

then all selected objects (including those within groups) from a single, un-nested group.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6

Chapter 7

IMPORTING GRAPHICS

The Place command is the primary method used to insert Graphics into InDesign because it provides the highest level of support for resolution, file formats, multipage PDF and INDD files, and color. To place Graphics is also referred to as Import images and insert pictures. You can also copy and paste an image to InDesign (Import). Pasting, however, embeds a graphic in a document; the link to the original graphic file is broken and doesn't appear in the Links panel, and you can't update the graphic from the original file. These options appear when you select Show Import Options in the Place dialog box. InDesign applies the default

settings or the last settings used in placing a Graphics file of that

type. The names of Graphics you've placed (Imported) appear in the Links panel (Window →Links) (Shift+Ctrl+D).

Note: If you place or drag a graphic from a removable media, such as

a CD, the link breaks when you remove that media from your system.

Graphic File Formats

Graphic files will store Graphics. There are different types of

graphic file formats. Some formats deal with bitmap pictures only, Fig: 7.1: Links Panel

some formats deal with vector pictures only and other formats deal with both bitmap and vector pictures. The extension used in a filename in indicative of the file format. For example, the .bmp extension is used for graphic files with a particular bitmap format, which is also called BMP format. Likewise, with other files. The various graphic file formats are:

BMP: The term is derived from bitmap. Needless to say , this file format is meant for bitmap Graphics. It is supported by windows and hence by all windows application. This is Perhaps, the commonest among the formats. The filename extension is .bmp. You can open .bmp files in almost every graphic application. .BMP files are bulky and need more memory compared to other formats. Advanced color processing is not possible with this format, since the results are generally far from satisfactory.

DCS: Desktop Color Separations (DCS) is a version of standard EPS format. This are intended to be used in a pre-separated, host based workflow. InDesign can rebuild a composite image from DCS 2.0/1.0 separations files. The DCS 1.0 format supports CMYK files without spot channels.

PCX: The pcx format supports RGB, indexed color, GrayScale and bitmap color modes as well as RLE compression method which is loseless. This is not ideal for commercially printed or online documents. It can provide acceptable quality only when printed on low resolution or non-postscript printers.

PNG: Portable Network Graphics uses adjustable, loseless compression to display photos. It supports transparency in an alpha channel or a designated color. PNG is best used for online documents.

SCT: Scitex format is used for high end image processing on Scitex computers which produce high quality printing. It supports RGB, CMYK, and GrayScale file but does not support alpha channels.

EPS: Encapsulated Post Script is a comprehensive format meant for both vector and bitmap Graphics. We utilize this format if the printer we use is a Post script one. The filename extension is .EPS. EPS is a cousin of Adobe's page description language Post-Script. If used properly, and with a Post Script printer, this format gives the best possible results.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 GIF: Graphics Interchange format is meant for bitmap Graphics. It is developed by CompuServe, a very popular on Line service. It is the most popular format on websites. The filename extension is.gif

JPEG: This is a file format and file compression technique approved by the Joint Photographic Experts' group. The filename extension is .jpg. It is meant for bitmap Graphics. JPEG compression results in file size reduction and loss of quality. Almost every bitmap image editing application supports this format.

TIFF: Tagged Image File Format, developed by Aldus and Microsoft, is meant for bitmap Graphics. The filename extension is .tif. Most bitmap image editing applications support this format.

WMF: Windows Metafile Format, developed by Microsoft, is meant for both bitmap and vector Graphics.

The filename extension is .wmf. It is not friendly with PostScript. Almost all windows- based applications support this format.

EMF: Enhanced Metafile Format is nothing but the 32-bit version of WMF format.

CDR: This is a proprietary file formats of Corel Draw meant for vector Graphics. The filename extension is CDR. You can open these files in almost every vector illustration application. You can also open these files in Corel Photo Paint by converting them into bitmap images.

PSD: This is a proprietary file format of Adobe Photoshop, meant for bitmap Graphics. PSD is derived from Photo Document. The filename extension is .PSD. Apart from Photoshop, a number of other bitmap image editing applications (e.g Corel Photo Paint) can open these files.

THE PLACE COMMAND

To Import a graphic without first creating a Frame, make sure that nothing in the document is selected.

To Import a graphic into an existing Frame, select the Frame. If the new image is larger than the Frame, you can refit the Frame later by choosing Object→ Fitting [fitting command]. To replace an existing image, select its Graphics Frame. Choose File → Place and select one or more Graphics files of any available format. If you select multiple files, you can click or drag in the document to place the selected files one at a time. To replace an object you selected, select Replace Selected Item. To add a caption based on the image metadata, select Create Static Captions. To set format-specific Import options, do one of the following:

Select Show Import Options, and then click Open. Or Hold down Shift as you click Open or Shift- double-click a filename. To Import into a new Frame, drag to create a Frame. Or, click the loaded Graphics icon in the layout at the place where you want the upper-left corner of the graphic to appear.

Note: When you drag to create a Frame, the Frame has the same proportions as the graphic unless you Shift-

drag.

To Import into an existing Frame which is not selected, click the loaded Graphics icon anywhere in that Frame. Replace Selected Item must be selected then image automatically appears in that Frame. To replace an existing graphic, hold down Alt and click the loaded Graphics icon on the graphic you want to replace. To place the next graphic or the next page of a multipage PDF, click the loaded Graphics icon in the layout where desired. If necessary, you can scroll to a different location or change pages without losing the loaded Graphics icon.

Note: The image you place may appear to have a low resolution, depending on your settings. The display setting

of an image does not affect final output of the file.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 LAYERS

Layers are used in digital image editing to separate different elements of an image. A layer can be compared to a transparency on which imaging effects or images are applied and placed over or under an image.

Create layers

You can add layers at any time using the New Layer command on the Layers panel menu or the New Layer button at the bottom of the Layers panel. The number of layers a document can have is limited only by the RAM available to InDesign. Choose Window → Layers. To create a new layer, do any of the following:

• To create a new layer above the selected layer, click the New Layer button. • To create a new layer below the selected layer, hold down Ctrl key as you click the New Layer button. • To create a new layer at the top of the list, hold down Ctrl+Shift key as you click the New Layer button. • To create a new layer and open the New Layer dialog box, hold down Alt key as you click the New Layer button.

InDesign (.indd) Import options

InDesign preserves the layout, Graphics, and typography in a placed INDD file. However, the file is treated as an object, and you can't edit it, although you can control the visibility of layers and choose which pages of a multi-page INDD file to Import. When you place an InDesign file and select Show Import Options in the Place dialog box, you see a dialog box containing the following options:

Show preview: Preview a page before you place it. You can type a page number or click the arrows to preview a page in a multi-page document.

Pages: Specify the pages you want to place: the page displayed in the preview, all pages, or a range of pages.

Crop to: Specify how much of the page or pages to place, the page itself or the Bleed or Slug areas on the pasteboard.

Control layer visibility in Imported images

When you Import Photoshop PSD files, layered PDFs, and INDD files, you can control the visibility of top-level layers. Adjusting layer visibility in InDesign lets you vary an illustration depending on context. You can adjust layer visibility either when you place a file or by using the Object Layer Options dialog box.

Choose File → Place and select a Graphics file. → To replace a selected object, select Replace Selected Item. → Select Show Import Options, and then click Open. → In the Image Import Options or Place dialog box, click the Layers tab → to view a preview of the image, click Show Preview.

• (PDFs only) If you're placing a page from a multipage PDF, click the arrows, or type a page number under the preview image to preview a specific page. (Photoshop PSD files only) If the image contains layer comps, choose the layer comp you want to display from the Layer Comp pop-up Menu.

• Set the When Updating Link option as desired:

Use Photoshop's/PDF's Layer Visibility: Matches the layer visibility settings to those of the linked file when you update the link.

Keep Layer Visibility Overrides: Maintains the layer visibility settings as they were when the file was originally placed.

• Click OK.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6

CHAPTER 8

WORKING WITH COLORS AND STROKES DEFINING THE TYPES OF COLORS

The most widely used Colors are process, spot and RGB. The Process Color is a combination of CMYK. The spot is any Color formed by an ink that requires its own printing plate (pure or mixed). The RGB Color uses a combination of Red, Green, Blue Colors to produce different Colors. The Color modes are available in Window →Color→Color -→click the options Menu:

The Process Color

It uses CMYK Color model. It is used when a printing job requires huge range of Color shades. But CMYK Color model has a smaller range of Colors compared to the Colors of a monitor. Use process Colors when a job requires so many Colors that using individual spot inks would be expensive or impractical, as when printing Color photographs.

The Spot Color

Any Color that originates by an ink, either mixed or pure is known as spot Color. It uses a combination of CMYK to produce all other Colors. It is used to produce accurate Colors and when Color precision is critical.

For creating a company logo, the final appearance of a spot Color is determined by how the ink is mixed and printed on paper.

The RGB Color

It is a combination of 3 primary Colors. This Color can be combined in various proportions to obtain any Color from the spectrum. It is a Screen Color in the sense, used for displaying images on electronic devises. RGB Color is device dependent

WORKING WITH COLORS AND STROKES

You can use Swatches panel, Fill Tool, Color Panel to apply Colors to a document. You can also change the Color model such as RGB, CMYK in the Color Panel as required. Strokes can be applied on Frames of an object, path.

Applying Color to an Object

Select an Object, Fill or Stroke using the Selection Tool →Click the Fill or Stroke Color box on the Tools panel to choose Color → click the Apply Color button on the Tools panel to apply Color or apply none to apply no Color.

You can use any of the methods to change the active fill or Stroke Colors: Select window →Color →Color- →To display Color panel. →Place the mouse pointer on the CMYK spectrum then the shape of the mouse changes to eyedropper Tool then select any Color from CMYK spectrum. Or Select the Swatches panel →click a Color swatch to change the Color. Or click the fill or Stroke Color box on the control panel →then click a Color swatch to change the Color. Or Double click the fill or Stroke Color box to open the Color picker dialog box → select a Color or enter Color values →click ok.

To apply Stroke Color: Window →Stroke → In Stroke panel : Select Weight, Color, Type of Stroke like Dashed, Dotted, etc, To switch the Current Fill and Stroke Color, click on the Swap fill and Stroke icon on the Tools panel.

Note : The default Colors are Black for Stroke and white for fill

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 USING SWATCHES PANEL

The Swatches panel is used to create and name Color,

Gradients, and Tints and to quickly apply them to documents. Swatches

are similar to Paragraph and Character styles, any change you made in

Swatches will affect all objects to which the swatch is applied. It will

make easier to modify Color schemes without having to locate and

adjust each individual object.

Swatch Types

Colors: Icons on the Swatches Panel identify the spot and process Color types, and LAB , RGB , CMYK , and Mixed Ink Color modes. Default Color is CMYK

• Tints: A percentage value next to a swatch in the Swatches panel

indicates a Tint of a Spot or Process Color.

• Gradients: An icon on the Swatches panel indicates whether a Gradient is Radial or Linear .

• None: The None swatch, removes the Stroke or fill from an object.

You can't edit or remove this swatch.

• Paper: Paper is a built-in swatch that simulates the paper Color on which you're printing. Objects behind a paper-Colored object won't

print.

• Black: Black is a built-in, 100% process Color Black defined using the CMYK Color model. You can't edit or remove this swatch. • Registration: Registration is a built-in swatch that causes objects to print on every separation from a PostScript printer. For

example, registration marks use the Registration Color, so that printing plates can be aligned precisely on a press.

Fig: 8.1: Swatches Panel, Gradient

Panel and Color Panel Group.

Creating a Color Swatch

Swatches can include Spot or Process Colors, RGB or Lab Colors, Gradients, or Tints. When you place an image that contains spot Colors, the Colors are automatically added as Swatches to the Swatches panel. You can apply these Swatches to objects in your document, but you cannot Redefine or Delete the Swatches.

Add/Delete a swatch

Click the Swatches panel icon in the panels group. The Swatches panel appears (By default we have Colors (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, None, Registration, Paper, Black) → Select the New Color swatch option from Panel Menu → In the dialog box, uncheck Name and Color value, Type new name for Color swatch in the swatch name box, select Color type from drop down list, select a Color mode →Drag the slides to change the Color mode Colors→Click ok. The new Color swatch is added to the Swatches panel.

To Delete swatch go to Window→Color→Swatches→select the swatch you want to delete→click delete swatch button→If you want to select multiple Swatches hold Shift key/Ctrl key.

Change the Swatches Panel display

Go to Window→Color→Swatches-→Show all Swatches/ Show Color Swatches/ Show Gradient Swatches →To display Swatches by Size, click the Options Menu →choose Name, Small name, Small Swatch or Large Swatch55 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೨೩ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 CREATING A GRADIENT SWATCH

A Gradient is formed as a result of successive blending of 2 or more Colors. We can apply Gradient Swatches on Text, Lines, Frames, Fills and Strokes of an object. Gradients can be created from spot Colors, Process Colors or Mixed Colors using any Color modes. There are 2 types of Gradients like Radial and Linear.

You can adjust the number and blend of Gradient Colors by adding or changing Color stops. After you create a Gradient Colors by apply it to objects just like any other Swatch in the Swatches panel. You can also create a Gradient using Gradient panel. The Gradient is unnamed and not saved unless you store it in a swatch.

Window →Color→Swatches →Click Options →Then click new Gradient swatch →Enter a name for the Gradient swatch → click the type list arrow, and then select a Gradient type : Radial or Linear →click the left Color stop to set Color stop of Gradient ramp →click the stop Color list arrow, select a Color type, and

then use sliders to create the Color you want. →To add Color stops, click below the Gradient spectrum in the blank area. → Drag sliders to change CMYK Colors or type

Fig: 8.2: Gradient Swatch panel and Gradient applied to Polygon

percentages of Colors. To set the Position of

the Color stop type location percentage and press ok Click add to add the Gradient to Swatches panel and continue to add Gradients →click ok

Applying Gradients

Select an object using selection Tool →Double click the Gradient swatch Tool from the Tools

panel→Select Type (Linear/Radial) →The select Gradient type is applied to an object.

Gradient feather Tool

The Gradient feather Tool on the Tools panel allows you to

add an opacity or transparency to a Gradient for an object. The

Gradient feather Tool works just like Gradient Tool. You can

change how Gradients blend, Angle of Gradient, location of radial

Gradient, etc.,

Select the object with a Gradient that you want to change →Click the Gradient feather Tool on the Tools Panel →Double click the Gradient feather Tool to manually apply Gradient feather → In the effects dialog box, specify Type /Angle/Add Color stops/ Remove Color Stops /Reverse Color Stop → To apply or adjust a Gradient feather, drag across the Gradient in the object. The first drag point is the first Color stop and the last drag point is the last Color stop →To save the edited Gradient click the new swatch button on the Swatches panel.

CREATING A TINT SWATCHES

It is used to set the Tint or shade percentage of a base Color. This brings the lighter shade of the required Color on the object. To apply the required Tint effect to the Color, first select the Color swatch from the swatch panel and specify the Tint percentage of that Color..After you create a Tint Color swatch, it appears in the Swatches panel list with the new Tint percentage in the name.

INDESIGN CS6 GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE Saving a swatch

The Swatches which are created are saved in the swatch panel by default. If you want to use the same Color swatch in different applications like Photoshop, illustrator, etc., then the Swatches can be saved in any location of the computer with .ase extension.

Select the swatch from Swatch panel →Click Panel Menu→Select Save Swatches→Select the location to save the swatch from Save in drop down list by specifying a file name →Click Save.

Deleting a Swatch

You can also delete a swatch that is no longer required just by clicking the delete swatch button available at the bottom of the Swatches panel.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 CHAPTER 9 APPLYING EFFECTS You can apply various effects to an Object in InDesign to make it more attractive and appealing. There are several effects such as Drop shadow, Feather, Bevel and Emboss, Transparency, Glow, Emboss, etc., USING EFFECTS ON AN OBJECT

TRANSPARENCY EFFECTS

When you create an Object in Adobe InDesign, by default it appears Solid; that is, it has Opacity of 100%. You can apply effects to Objects using Opacity and Blends. Overlap Objects, add Transparency to Objects, or knock out shapes behind Objects. You can make the items Transparent in a variety of ways. For example, you can vary the Opacity from 100% (completely Opaque) to 0% (completely Transparent). When you decrease Opacity, the underlying artwork becomes visible through the surface of the Object, Stroke, Fill, or Text. You use the Effects panel to specify the Opacity an Object, its Stroke, its Fill, or its Text, You can decide how the Object itself, its Stroke, Fill or Text Blend with Objects beneath.

EFFECTS PANEL OVERVIEW

Use the Effects panel (Window → Effects) to specify the Opacity and Blending mode of Objects and groups, isolate Blending to a

particular group, knock out Objects inside a group, or apply a

Transparency effect.

Opacity: Determines the Opacity of an Object, Stroke, Fill, or

Text.

Level: Tells you the Object, Stroke, Fill, and Text Opacity settings

of the Object, as well as whether Transparency effects have been

applied. Click the triAngle to the left of the word Object (or Group

or Graphic) to hide or display these level settings. The FX icon appears on a level after you apply Transparency settings there, and

you can double-click the FX icon to edit the settings.

Fig: 9.1: Add and edit transparency

effects in the Effects panel A. Blending

mode B. Levels C. FX icon D. Clear

effects E. FX button

Blending Mode: Specifies how Colors in Transparent

Objects interact with the Objects behind them.

Isolate Blending: Applies a Blending mode to a selected

group of Objects.

Knockout Group: Makes the Opacity and Blending

attributes of every Object in a group knock out, or block

out, underlying Objects in the group.

Clear All button: Clears effects—Stroke, Fill, or Text—

from an Object, sets the Blend mode to Normal, and

changes the Opacity setting to 100% throughout the Object.

FX button : Displays a list of Transparency effects.

Fig: 9.1(b): Different Blending Effects

like Multiply, Exclusion, Overlay, Screen,

Normal, Hard light, Luminosity

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 DISPLAY EFFECTS PANEL OPTIONS

Choose Window → Effects and, if necessary, open the Effects panel Menu and choose Show Options. The Effects panel

and

on options are also available in the Effects dialog box (select an Object choose Object → Effects →Transparency) and, in simplified form, the Control panel.

Apply Transparency effects

Fig: 9.2: Effects Panel

Select an Object. To apply effects to a graphic, select the graphic with the Direct Selection Tool. Choose Window → Effects to display the Effects panel → Select a level to designate which parts or part of the Object you want to change: Object: Affects the entire Object—its Stroke, Fill, and Text.

Graphic: Affects only the graphic selected with the Direct Selection Tool. Effects you apply to the graphic remain with it when you paste the graphic in a different Frame.

Group: Affects all Objects and Text in the group. (Use the Direct Selection Tool to apply effects to Objects within a group.)

Stroke: Affects only the Object's Stroke (including its gap Color).

Fill: Affects only the Object's Fill.

Text: Affects only Text inside the Object, not the Text frame. Effects you apply to Text affect all the Text in the Object; you can't apply an effect to individual words or letters. You can also choose a level setting in the Control panel: Click the Apply Effect To Object button and select Object, Stroke, Fill, or Text.

Do any of the following to open the Effects dialog box:

In the Effects panel or Control panel, click the FX button and choose an effect from the Menu. Or Choose Object → Effects, and then choose an effect name → On the Effects panel, click the triangle to display level settings if necessary, and then double-click a level setting—Object, Stroke, Fill, or Text - on the Effects panel. By double-clicking, you both open the Effects dialog box and choose a level setting. → Choose options and settings for the effect. → Click OK.

Edit a Transparency effect

Select the Object or Objects to which the effect has been applied. → Select the level with the effect you want to edit, click the FX button in the Effects panel, and choose the name of an effect. → Edit the effect.

Copy Transparency effects

To copy effects between Objects, select the Object with the effect you want to copy, select the Object's FX icon in the Effects panel, and drag the FX icon to the other Object. You can drag and drop effects between Objects only to and from the same level. Or To copy effects from one level to another in the same Object, Alt-drag FX icon from one level to another (Stroke, Fill, or Text) on the Effects panel.

Note: You can move effects from one level to another in the same Object by dragging the FX icon. Clear Transparency

effects from an Object

Clear Effects

To clear all effects but maintain the Blending and Opacity settings, select a level and choose Clear Effects on the Effects panel Menu or drag the FX icon from the Stroke, Fill, or Text level in the Effectspanel to the Trash icon. To clear multiple levels (Stroke, Fill, or Text) of an effect, select the levels and click 59 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೨೭ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 the Trash icon. To remove an individual effect from an Object, open the Effects dialog box and deselect a Transparency effect.

TRANSPARENCY EFFECTS

InDesign offers nine Transparency effects. Many of the settings and options for creating these effects

are similar.

Fig: 9.3: Effects: A. Drop Shadow B. Inner Shadow C. Outer

Glow D. Inner Glow E. Bevel and Emboss F. Satin G. Basic

Feather H. Directional Feather I. Gradient Feather

Drop Shadow: Adds a shadow that falls behind the Object, Stroke, Fill, or Text.

Inner Shadow: Adds a shadow that falls just inside the edges of the Object, Stroke, Fill, or Text, giving it a recessed appearance.

Select an Object →go to Object Menu →Effects→Drop Shadow/Inner Shadow→Select a Blending mode

and Opacity for shadow effect or specify distance, Angle, offset values to Position the shadow → click

OK.

Note: The Spread and choke options determine the amount of Transparency used for the outer or inner part of

the shadow. The noise option add random shift to the Colors to the drop shadow.

Outer Glow and Inner Glow: Add glows that emanate from the outside or inside edges of the Object, Stroke, Fill, or Text.

Select Object →go to Object Menu→Effects →Select outer glow/inner glow →Set Blending options →

press OK.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Bevel and Emboss: Adds various combinations of highlights and shadows to give Text and images a three- dimensional appearance.

Select Object →go to Object Menu →Effects→Bevel and Emboss →Specify Shading Options/ Structure

Option→click OK.

Satin: Adds interior shading that makes a satiny finish.

Basic Feather, Directional Feather, and Gradient Feather: Soften the edges of an Object by fading them to Transparent.

Select an Object →go to Object Menu→Effects→specify basic feather/directional feather/Gradient

feather → click OK

Many Transparency effect settings and options are the same across different effects. Common Transparency settings and options include the following:

Angle and Altitude: Determine the lighting Angle at which a lighting effect is applied. A setting of 0 is equivalent to ground level; 90 is directly above the Object. Click the Angle radius or enter a degree measurement. Select Use Global Light if you want a uniform lighting Angle for all Objects. Used by the Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, Bevel and Emboss, Satin, and Feather effects.

Blending Mode: Specifies how Colors in Transparent Objects interact with the Objects behind them. Used by the Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, Outer Glow, Inner Glow, and Satin effects.

Choke: Along with the Size setting, determines how much of the shadow or glow is Opaque and how much is Transparent; large settings increase Opacity and small settings increase Transparency. Used by the Inner Shadow, Inner Glow, and Feather effects.

Distance: Specifies the offset distance for the Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, or Satin effect.

Noise: Specifies the amount of random elements in the Opacity of a glow or shadow as you enter a value or drag the slider. Used by the Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, Outer Glow, Inner Glow, and Feather effects.

Opacity: Determines the Opacity of an effect; drag the slider or enter a percentage measurement. Used by the Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, Outer Glow, Inner Glow, Gradient Feather, Bevel and Emboss, and Satin effects.

Size: Specifies the amount of shadow or glow. Used by the Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, Outer Glow, Inner Glow, and Satin effects.

Spread: Determines the Transparency of the blur within the shadow or glow effect as established by the Size setting. A higher percentage makes the blur more Opaque. Used by the Drop Shadow and Outer Glow.

Technique: These settings determine how the edge of a Transparency effect interacts with background Colors.

Softer and Precise are available for the Outer Glow and Inner Glow effects:

Softer: Applies a blur to the edge of the effect. At larger sizes, doesn't preserve detailed features.

Precise: Preserves the edge of the effect, including its Corners and other sharp details. Preserves features better than the Softer technique.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Use Global Light: Applies the global light setting to the shadow, used by the Drop Shadow, Bevel and Emboss, and Inner Shadow effects.

X Offset and Y Offset: Offsets the shadow on the x- or y-axis by the amount you specify, Used by the Drop Shadow and Inner Shadow effects.

Drop Shadow

The Drop Shadow effect creates a 3D shadow. You can offset the drop

shadow along the x or y axis, as well as vary the Blending mode, Color,

Opacity, distance, Angle, and size of the drop shadow. Use these options to

determine how the drop shadow interacts with Objects and Transparency

effects:

Object Knocks Out Shadow: The Object appears in front of the drop

shadow that it casts.

Shadow Honors Other Effects: The drop shadow factors in other Transparency effects. For example, if the Object is Feathered on one side, you

can make the drop-shadow disregard the feathering such that the shadow Fig: 9.4: A. Normal B. Drop Shadow C. Inner Shadow doesn't fade out, or make the shadow look Feathered in the same way as the Object is Feathered. Click the Drop Shadow button on the Control panel to quickly apply a drop shadow to or remove a drop shadow from an Object, a Stroke, a Fill, or Text.

Note: To select a Color for a drop shadow, click the Set Shadow Color button (next to the Blending Mode Menu) and choose a Color.

Inner Shadow

The Inner Shadow effect places the shadow inside the Object,

giving the impression that the Object is recessed. You can offset the

inner shadow along different axes and vary the Blending mode,

Opacity, distance, Angle, size, noise, and choke of the shadow.

Outer Glow

The Outer Glow effect makes the glow emanate from under

the Object. You can set the Blending mode, Opacity, technique,

noise, size, and Spread.

Inner Glow

Fig: 9.5: A. Normal B. Outer Glow

C. Inner Glow

The Inner Glow effect causes an Object to glow from the inside

out. Choose the Blending mode, Opacity, technique, size, noise and choke settings, as well as the Source setting:

Source: Specifies the source for the glow. Choose Center to apply a glow that emanates from the center; choose Edge to apply a glow that emanates from the Object's boundaries.

Bevel and Emboss

Use the Bevel and Emboss effect to give Objects a realistic, three-dimensional look. The Structure settings determine the Object's size and shape:

Style: Specifies the bevel style: Outer Bevel creates the bevel on the outside edges of the Object; Inner Bevel creates the bevel on the inside edges; Emboss simulates the effect of embossing the Object against underlying Objects; Pillow Emboss simulates the effect of stamping the edges of the Object into underlyingObjects. 62 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೩೦ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ INDESIGN CS6 GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE Size: Determines the size of the bevel or emboss effect.

Technique: Determines how the edge of the bevel or emboss effect

interacts with background Colors: Smooth blurs the edges slightly (and

doesn't preserve detailed features at larger sizes); Chisel Soft blurs the

edges, but not as much as the Smooth technique (it preserves detailed

features better than the Smooth technique but not as well as the Chisel Hard

technique); Chisel Hard provides a harder, more conspicuous edge (it

preserves detailed features better than the Smooth or Chisel Soft

techniques).

Soften: In addition to the Technique setting, blurs the effect to Reduce

unwanted artifacts and rough edges.

Direction: Choose Up or Down to make the effect appear pushed up or

down.

Fig: 9.6: A. Outer Bevel B. Inner Bevel

C. Emboss D. Satin

Depth: Specifies the depth of the bevel or emboss effect. The Shading settings determine how light interacts with the Object:

Angle and Altitude: Sets the height of the light source. A setting of 0 is equivalent to ground level; 90 is directly above the Object.

Use Global Light: Applies the global light source as specified for all Transparency effects. Choosing this option overrides any Angle and Altitude settings.

Highlight and Shadow: Specifies the Blending mode for the bevel or emboss highlight and shadow.

Satin

Use the Satin effect to give Objects a smooth, satin-like finish. Choose the Blending mode, Opacity, Angle, distance, and size settings, as well as whether to invert Colors and transparencies:

Invert: Select this option to reverse the Colored and Transparent areas of the Object.

Basic Feather: The Feather effect softens (fades) the edges of an Object over a distance that you specify:

Feather Width: Sets the distance over which the Object fades from Opaque to Transparent.

Choke: Along with the Feather Width setting, determines how much of the softening glow is Opaque and how much is Transparent; a large setting increases Opacity and a small setting increases Transparency.

Corners: Choose Sharp, Rounded, or Diffused:

Sharp: Follows the outer edge of the shape, including sharp Corners. This option is appropriate for star-like Objects and a special effect on a rectangular shape.

Rounded: Rounds the corner by the feather radius; essentially, the shape is first inset, then outset, to form the two contours. This option works well with Rectangles.

Diffused: Uses the Adobe Illustrator method, which makes the edges of the Object fade from Opaque toTransparent. 63 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೩೧ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Noise: Specifies the amount of random elements in the softening glow. Use this option to soften the glow.

Directional Feather

The Directional Feather effect softens the edges of an Object by

fading the edges to Transparent from directions that you specify.

For example, you can apply feathering to the top and bottom of the

Object, not the left or right side.

Feather Widths: Set the distance over which the top, bottom, left

side, and right side of the Object fade to Transparent. Select the

Lock option to fade each side of the Object by the same distance.

Noise: Specifies the amount of random elements in the softening glow. Use this option to create a softer glow.

Fig: 9.7: A. Original B. Basic Feather

C. Directional Feather D. Gradient Feather

Choke: Along with the Width settings, determines how much of

the glow is Opaque and how much is Transparent; large settings increase Opacity and small settings increase Transparency.

Shape : Choose an option—First Edge Only, Leading Edges, or All Edges—to demarcate the Object's original shape.

Angle : Rotates the Frame of reference for the feathering effect such that, as long as you don't enter a multiple of 90 degrees, the feathering edges are Skewed rather than parallel to the Object.

Gradient Feather : Use the Gradient Feather effect to soften the areas of an Object by fading them to Transparent.

Gradient Stops: Create one Gradient stop for each gradation in Transparency that you want for your Object.

To create a Gradient stop, click below the Gradient Slider (drag a Gradient stop away from the slider to remove a stop). To adjust the Position of a stop, drag it left or right, or select it and then drag the Location slider. To adjust the mid-point between two Opacity stops, drag a Diamond above the Gradient Slider. Where the Diamond is located determines how abrupt or gradual the transition between stops is.

Reverse Gradient : Click to reverse the direction of the gradations. This box is located to the right of the Gradient Slider.

Opacity : Specifies the Transparency between Gradient points. Select a point and drag the Opacity slider.

Location : Adjusts the Position of a Gradient stop. Select a Gradient stop before dragging the slider or entering a measurement.

Type : Linear shades from the starting Gradient point to the ending Gradient point in a Straight Line; Radial shades from the starting point to the ending point in a circular pattern.

Angle : For Linear Gradients, establishes the Angle of the gradation Lines. At 90 degrees, for example, the Lines run Horizontally; at 180 degrees, the Lines run Vertically.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Use Global Light : You can apply a uniform lighting Angle to Transparency effects in which shading is a factor: Drop Shadow, Inner Shadow, and Bevel and Emboss. When you choose Use Global Light with these effects, lighting is determined by the global setting in the Global Light dialog box.

Do the following to open the Global Light dialog box: Choose Global Light from the Effects panel Menu. Or Choose Object → Effects → Global Light. → Enter a value or drag the Angle radius to set the Angle and Altitude, and click OK.

Set the Opacity of an Object.

You can apply Transparency to a single Object or selected Objects (including Graphics and Text frames), but not to individual Text characters or layers. However, Imported Graphics with those types of Transparency effects will appear and print correctly.

Select the Object or Objects. → Choose Object, Stroke, Fill, or Text with any of these techniques: → On the Control panel or Effects panel, type a value for Opacity or click the arrow next to the Opacity setting and drag the slider. As the Opacity value of Objects is Reduced, the Transparency increases.

Note: If you direct-select and cut or copy an Object from a Transparent group in InDesign, and then paste the

Object somewhere else in the document, the pasted Object won't be Transparent unless it was previously

selected individually and had Transparency applied.

Apply Transparency to groups

Besides applying Transparency effects to single Objects, you

can apply them to groups. If you simply select Objects and change

their individual Opacity settings, the selected Objects' Opacity will change relative to that of the others. Any overlapping areas will show an accumulated Opacity.

In contrast, if you target a group that has been created with the Group command, and then change the Opacity, the

group is treated as a single Object by the Effects panel (the

Effects panel shows only one level option—Group), and the

Fig: 9.8: Individual Objects selected and

set to 50% Opacity (left) and group

selected and set to 50% Opacity (right)

opacities within the group don't change. In other words,

Objects within the group don't interact with each other in Transparency.

Change the appearance of Transparent artwork on screen

Use the Display Performance dialog box to set Transparency preferences. These preferences determine the on- screen quality of Transparent Objects in new documents and in documents saved with modified preferences.

You can also set the preferences to turn on or off the display of Transparency in the document. Turning off Transparency in the display preferences doesn't turn off Transparency when printing or Exporting the file.

Note: Before you print a file containing Transparency effects, make sure that you check the Transparency

preferences first. Printing automatically flattens the artwork, and may affect the appearance of the

Transparency effects.

Choose Edit → Preferences → Display Performance → Select an option (Fast, Typical, High Quality) in the Adjust View Settings section to determine the on-screen resolution of any effect in the document. The settings you change apply only to the option you select here: Fast turns off Transparency and sets the resolution to 24 dpi. Typical displays low-resolution effects and sets the resolution to 72 dpi. High Quality improves the display of effects, especially in PDF and EPS files, and sets the resolution to 144 dpi. Drag the Transparency65 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೩೩ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 slider. The default setting is Medium Quality, which displays drop shadows and feathering. → Click OK. When inks overlap with Blend modes, choose View Overprint Preview. This option ensures that you can see on screen how any inks interact with Transparency.

Note: Use the View Menu to quickly change Transparency display between Fast Display, Typical Display, and

High Quality Display.

Apply an effect to type on a path

1. Using the Selection Tool or the Type Tool, select the type on a path. 2. Choose Type → Type on a Path →Options, or double-click the Type On A Path Tool. 3. Choose one of the following in the Effect Menu, and then click OK:

To keep the center of each character's baseline parallel to the path's tangent, choose Rainbow. This is the default setting. To keep characters' Vertical edges perfectly Vertical regardless of the path shape, while letting characters' Horizontal edges follow the path, choose Skew. To keep characters' Horizontal edges perfectly Horizontal regardless of the path shape, while keeping each character's Vertical edge perpendicular to the path, choose 3D Ribbon. To keep the left edge of each character's baseline on the path without Rotating any characters, choose Stair Step. To keep the center of each character's baseline on the path while keeping each Vertical edge in Line with the path's center point, choose Gravity. You can control this option's perspective effect by adjusting the arc of the Text's path.

CHANGING STROKES

You can modify Objects in a number of ways in InDesign For example you can resize, Rotate and add Color to Objects. For Objects drawn with InDesign drawing Tools you can also change Stroke that is the width of Lines drawn with the drawing Tools, and the width of borders around Rectangles, ellipses, and Polygon as well as the Fill patterns. To add Strokes, Select the Object→ Go to Window→Strokes. Then Strokes panel is displayed, There click on the required Stroke. You can change the width of Stroke, style, thickness of Stroke, you can even set arrow at the starting or ending point of a Line, you can add cap, joint, miter limit, gap Color, gap Tint and Color of the Stroke.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 CHAPTER 10 WORKING WITH TABLES

A table is an Object made up of rows and columns used to organize huge amount of data in an effective way. The intersection of row and column is called as cell. You can create a table directly in InDesign or Import it from MS-Word or any other package. You can also apply styles to the table. In InDesign a table is placed in a Text frame, which might be larger or smaller than the table. You can drag the corner of the Text frame to adjust the Frame.

If the Text frame is smaller than the table, an overflow symbol appears in the bottom right corner. The overflow symbol works the same for tables as it does for normal Text. When the table overflows, you can repeat the header and footer rows of a table when it appears in a different Text frame on the same or different page.

When you create a table, InDesign automatically creates Strokes around cells to format it. You cannot remove or customize the Strokes or add Fills by using the Strokes and Fills tab on the cell option dialog box. You can apply a border to the table. If you want to make formatting to the next level, you can add an alternating pattern to rows or columns to make it easier to read information in a table.

CREATING TABLES

A table consists of rows and columns of cells. A cell is like a Text frame in which you can add Text, Inline Graphics, or other tables. You can create tables from scratch or by converting them from existing Text.

You can also embed a table within a table.

Create a Table from Scratch

Place a cursor where you need to insert a table → Select Type Tool and create a Text frame where you wish to insert table. →Go to Table Menu →Insert Table→ Then a table dialog box appears

Enter Body Rows (No. of rows), Columns,{

Header Rows(Enter no. to set the no. of Heading rows), Footer Rows(Enter no. of footer rows) } →click the Table style list arrow and then select a table style →click Ok.

Fig: 10.1: Insert Table Dialog Box

Adding Text to table

You can use the table to organize the data in an efficient

way using a structured format. If you have already inserted a

table, click the cursor into a cell where you need to enter Text/data. →Set the Font face, Size, Style →Type the Text in that cell. To move to next cell press tab key/ place the cursor to

next cell using mouse.

Working with rows and Column

You can modify the table which has been inserted either

by adding extra rows and columns or by deleting the unwanted

rows and columns.

Inserting Rows and Columns

Select any cell, where you want to insert a new column

Fig: 10.2: Cell Options Dialog Box

→Go to Table → Insert →Row. Then the insert row dialog box appears. You can insert a row above or below a particular cell. You can insert as many rows you want. Enter the number of rows you wish to insert in Number : spin box and select where it should be inserted (above/ below) and press ok.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Note : The above procedure is same for inserting column also but for column we can insert it to left or right side of the particular cell.

Changing the Row Height and Column Width

You can change the row height and column width using Cell options. You can keep all the rows and columns with similar or varying heights and widths.

To Change Row Height

Select a row from the table for which you want to increase/decrease the height. →Go to Table →Options →Cell options →Rows and columns → The cell options dialog box appears. Select on the option Row Height drop down list. (Exactly, ) → Type a value in row height spin box to define the row height. You can specify minimum and maximum height of a row here. →Click ok

Note : The same applies to column also.

Deleting Rows and Columns

If you want to delete any unnecessary data in a

table you can delete a particular, Table, column, rows

of a table. You can delete rows and columns by a.

Select the table options or the delete option from the

table for deleting rows and columns. Select a

row/column/table you want to delete from the table →Go to Table →Delete →Row/Column/Table

Inserting a Header in a table

A title gives the professional look to the table.

You can include the title in the header of the table. The

header region appears just below the top margin of the

page. If the table is large and divided into several

sections. Then headers are vital to help users to familiarize the data in a table.

Fig: 10.3: Header and Footer window in Table option

Select a row in the table where you want to add Header → Table →Table Options → Headers and Footers →Select a number from the Header rows spin box →Ok →type the Text in the header of the table

Aligning, Splitting and Merging Cells

To align a Text present in a cell of the

table, and to make table attractive we align cells.

There are 4 types of alignment like align right, left,

center and align towards spine. You can apply any of

Fig: 10.4: Merging and Splitting of Cells

these alignment required.

To align cells, Select cells →Click align center from Control panel You can also merge cells if required by selecting cells →then go to Table→Merge cells. To split cells select cells you want to split →Go to Table →Split cell Horizontally/Split cell Vertically.

INDESIGN CS6 GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE Defining Cell and Table Styles

A table styles accumulates several attributes to format tables such as cell insets, Paragraph styles, Strokes, etc.,

Creating a Cell Style

It can be created using Cell Styles panel and can be applied to any cells. To do select the cells →Go to Window →Styles →Cell styles →Click the Panel Menu icon to view cell styles panel →Select the New cell style option →Type the name of a style and in Text tab : type cell insets for top, bottom, left and right in Text tab. In

Vertical justification tab select Align type as top or bottom

or center or justify Vertically. Click the Strokes and Fills tab on the left pane of the new cell style dialog box there

you can set Stroke weight, Color, type, cell Fill, gap Color,

Fig: 10.5: Cell Styles Dialog Box

gap Tint, and Tint. You can also add diagonal Lines if

required by using diagonal Lines tab at the left side of your cell styles panel.

To Apply a Cell Style Select the cell →Select the cell style from the list of styles in the Cell styles panel. → The style is applied to the cell. Similarly you can create a table style also. Go to window→styles→Table styles →And follow the same steps used for creating a cell style. In Table style can be

applied for whole table, row, column and you can apply Fill to a table.

In Table Strokes and Fills you can change the border of a table, add

Colors to the background of a table,

CONVERT TEXT TO TABLE

Select the Text that you want to convert into a table →click the table Menu, and then click convert Text to table → click the column separator list arrow, and then select a separator: tab, comma or Paragraph. → click the row separator list arrow, and then select a separator : tab, comma or Paragraph. Enter a column number to set the number of columns in the table. → click the table style list arrow, and then select a table style →click ok.

Fig: 10.6: Convert Text to table

CONVERT A TABLE INTO TEXT

Click to place the insertion point inside any cell in the table → click the table Menu and then click convert table to Text → click the column separator list arrow and then select a separator like tab or comma or Paragraph → click the row separator list arrow, and then select a separator like tab or comma or Paragraph → click Ok.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 CHAPTER 11

PUBLISHING THE DOCUMENT AND BOOK

Publishing is a process of finalizing the document for print. You can publish short documents like advertisements, broachers, etc., and long documents like books, user manual, etc., There are several features to perform different publishing and printing operations such as the PreFlight option to check errors in the document and printing layouts. You can save a document as a PDF file, PNG format, etc.,

PERFORMING THE PREFLIGHT CHECK IN THE DOCUMENT

PreFlight option is used to check a document for errors before printing. This option checks all the images, Objects, Colors, Text in a document and displays the errors. The error are displayed in Error pane of the PreFlight panel. The errors are classified into Links, Colors, images, Objects, Text and Document categories.

The error is checked based on the criteria defined in the PreFlight profile. You can fix errors by manually correcting errors in each page. InDesign

automatically updates the PreFlight error

status as you correct errors.

To do error check, open a document to which you need to check → Go to window→output→PreFlight →PreFlight panel is opened, →Click the panel Menu →Select Define profiles option →Here type a name for the new profile, select the Color

check box to find all errors related to the

Colors used in the document. (Checkmark Fig: 11.1: PreFlight profile dialog box (Define profile) which ever items you need to do PreFlight→Links, Color, Images, Objects, Text, Document)→Click ok. →The newly created profile appears in PreFlight panel. Select the new profile from the panel

The PreFlight panel begins checking the document for the type of errors defined in the New profile.

Click right faced triangle corresponding to the document error category in the error page. The document category expands to display the error type →Select the Bleed and Slug option in the Document category → Click the right faced triangle corresponding to info option to view the error description →Click close to close the panel.

SAVING A DOCUMENT AS PDF

Go to File →Adobe PDF Presents → Press Qualify →The Export dialog box appears. → Type the

file name and press save.

Instead of PDF in Export dialog box→ save as type → select as PNG to convert the document from InDesign to PNG format.

PREVIEWING AND EXPORTING IN GRAYSCALE

This option is used to Export a file in GrayScale format or to print a file in GrayScale. It previews the content of a document such as Objects, images, Text in GrayScale.

Open a document →Click view→Proof Setup →Custom→Select Gray option from the Device to stimulate drop down list. →Click ok.

To view it back in Color Mode go to view →Proof Setup →Document CMYK option70 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೩೮ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ INDESIGN CS6 GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE Exporting a PDF in GrayScale

Go to File →Adobe PDF Presents → Press Qualify →The Export dialog box appears. → select the output tab in the left pane → In Color tab select Color conversion → select convert to destination → then Destination box is highlighted there select Gray→Click Export button in the Export Adobe PDF.

PRINTING A DOCUMENT

Printing is one of the most Important features in any package. It is used when you want to create a hard copy of the document which you created. But before printing we have to preview the document to check about margin or how they look before printing. You can make any changes if required before printing.

Previewing a document

Click the preview option from the flyout of the screen mode button. Different screen modes are : normal, preview, Bleed, Slug, presentation.

You can print a whole document or print only range of pages.

File →Print →Select Default option from the print present →Select printer →In pages option select

All→Print.

Printing using range of Pages

File →Print →Select Custom option from the print present →Select Printer →In pages option select

Ranges→Type the range of pages you wish to print→Print.

Note : To print contiguous page use "-", for non-contiguous use ","

PRINT PRESENT

Print presents are print settings that you can save and use in an InDesign. It is helpful when you want to get hardcopy of the document with the same print settings frequently. It helps us to get accurate prints of the documents when multiple prints are required.

To create : File →Print presents →Define →Click New →Type a new print present name, select printer name, select the pages type and sequence you need to print commonly→Select other options if required →Press ok CREATE A BOOK FILE

A book file is a collection of documents that can share styles, Swatches, Master pages, and other items.

You can sequentially number pages in booked documents, print selected documents in a book, or Export them to PDF. One document can belong to multiple book files.

One of the documents added to a book file is the style source. By default, the style source is the first document in the book, but you can select a new style source at any time. When you synchronize documents in a book, the specified styles and Swatches from the style source replace those in other booked documents. Choose File → New → Book.-->Type a name for the book, specify a location, and then click Save.--> The Book panel appears. The book file is saved with the file name extension .indb. →Add documents to the book file.

Add documents to a book files:

When you create a book file, it opens in the Book panel. The Book panel is the working area of a book file, where you add, remove, or rearrange documents. Choose Add Document in the Book panel Menu, or click71 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೩೯ GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 the plus button at the bottom of the Book panel. → Select the Adobe InDesign document or documents you want to add, and then click Open.

Note: You can drag and drop files onto the Book panel from an Explorer window. You can also drag a

document from one book to another. Hold down Alt to copy the document.

If you included documents created in earlier versions of InDesign, they will be converted to Adobe InDesign CS6 format when added to the book. In the Save As dialog box, specify a new name for the converted document (or leave the name as is), and then click Save.

Note: You must convert Adobe PageMaker or QuarkXPress documents before adding them to the book file.

If necessary, change the order of the documents in the panel by dragging them up or down to the appropriate locations in the list. To designate a document as the style source, click the box next to the document's name in the panel. To open a document in a book file, double-click the document name in the Book panel.

Manage book files

Each open book file appears on its own tab in the Book panel. If multiple books are open at the same time, click a tab to bring that book to the front and access its panel Menu.

Icons in the Book panel indicate a document's current status, such as open , missing (the document was moved, renamed, or deleted), modified (the document was edited or its page or section numbers changed while the book was closed), or in use (if someone else has the document open in a managed workflow). No icon appears next to closed documents.

Note: To view the pathname of any document in a book, hold the mouse pointer over the document name until

a Tooltip appears. Or, choose Document Information from the Book panel Menu.

Save a book file

Book files are separate from document files. For example, when you choose the Save Book command, InDesign saves the changes to the book, not the documents in the book.

Do one of the following:

• To save a book under a new name, choose Save Book As in the Book panel Menu, specify a location and filename, and click Save.

• To save an existing book under the same name, choose Save Book in the Book panel Menu, or click the Save button at the bottom of the Book panel.

Note: If you are sharing book files over a server, make sure that you have a file management system in

place so that you don't save over each other's changes accidentally.

Close a book file

To close a single book, choose Close Book in the book's panel Menu. To close all open books docked together in the same panel, click the close button on the Book panel's title bar.

Remove book documents

Select the document in the Book panel. → Choose Remove Document in the Book panel Menu. Removing the document from the book file doesn't delete the file on disk; the document is removed only from the book file.

INDESIGN CS6 GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE Replace book documents

Select the document in the Book panel. → Choose Replace Document in the Book panel Menu, locate the document you want to replace it with, and then click Open.

Open a book file in Explorer or Finder

In the books panel, select a document. → From the books panel Menu, choose Reveal In Explorer → A browser window opens that displays the selected file.

Synchronize book documents

When you synchronize documents in a book, the items you specify—styles, variables, Master pages, trap presets, cross-reference formats, conditional Text settings, numbered lists, and Swatches—are copied from the style source to the specified documents in the book, replacing any items that have identical names. If items in the style source are not found in the documents being synchronized, they are added. Items that are not included in the style source are left as is in the documents being synchronized.

Select items to synchronize → Choose Synchronize Options in the Book panel Menu. → Select the items you want to copy from the style source to other book documents. Be sure to select all styles included in the definition of other styles. For example, an Object style may contain paragraph and character styles, which in turn include Swatches. →Select Smart Match Style Groups to avoid duplicating uniquely named styles that have been moved into or out of style groups. Suppose the style source includes a character style in a style group, and the documents being synchronized include this same character style outside the style group. If this option is selected, the character style is moved into the style group in synchronized documents.

If this option is not selected, a second instance of the character style is created in the style group with options that match the style source. The character style outside the style group does not change. → click ok.

Note: If a document contains multiple styles that have the same name (for example, Character Style 1 in a style

group and Character Style 1 outside of a style group), InDesign behaves as if the option is not selected. For best

results, create styles with unique names.

Synchronize documents in a book file

You can synchronize the book while documents in the

book are closed. InDesign opens the closed documents, makes

any changes, and then saves and closes the documents.

Documents that are open when you synchronize are changed but

not saved. In the Book panel, click the blank box next to the

document that you want to be the style source; the style source icon indicates which document is the style source.

Selected style source

Make sure that the items you want copied from the style source are selected in the Synchronize Options dialog box.

In the Book panel, select the documents you want to synchronize with the style source document. If no document is selected, the entire book will be synchronized.

Note: To make sure that no documents are selected, click the blank Gray area below the booked documents—

you may need to scroll or resize the Book panel. You can also hold down Ctrl and click a selected document to

deselect it.

Choose Synchronize Selected Documents or Synchronize Book from the Book panel Menu, or click the Synchronize button at the bottom of the Book panel.

GRAPHICS DESIGNER COURSE

INDESIGN CS6 Note: Choosing Edit → Undo will undo changes only in documents that are open at the time synchronization occurs.

Synchronize Master pages

Master pages are synchronized in the same way as other items—Master pages with the same name (such as A-Master) as those in the style source are replaced. Synchronizing masters is useful for documents that use the same design elements, such as running headers and footers. However, if you want to preserve page items on a Master page in documents other than the style source, either don't synchronize Master pages or create Master pages with different names.

It's also a good idea to synchronize Master pages using only one style source. If you need to synchronize using a different style source, deselect the Master pages option in the Synchronize Options dialog box before doing so.

Print or output a book file

One advantage of using a book file is that you can use a single command to output—for print, PreFlight, package, or Export to EPUB or PDF—selected booked documents or the entire book.

In the Book panel, do one of the following:

To output specific documents, select the desired documents.

To output the entire book, make sure no documents are selected.

Choose an output command (such as Print Book or Print Selected Documents) in the Book panel Menu.

CORELDRAW(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)X6(cid:3)

CHAPTER(cid:3)1(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)BASICS(cid:3)OF(cid:3)CORELDRAW(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)77(cid:3)

Introduction(cid:3).............................................................................................................(cid:3)77(cid:3) Vector(cid:3)images(cid:3)..........................................................................................................(cid:3)76(cid:3) Bitmaps(cid:3)graphics(cid:3)(cid:3)(raster(cid:3)images)(cid:3).............................................................................(cid:3)76(cid:3) Coreldraw(cid:3)terminology(cid:3)............................................................................................(cid:3)76(cid:3) Starting(cid:3)coreldraw(cid:3)x6(cid:3)...............................................................................................(cid:3)77(cid:3) Exploring(cid:3)toolbox(cid:3).....................................................................................................(cid:3)79(cid:3) Starting(cid:3)and(cid:3)opening(cid:3)drawings(cid:3).................................................................................(cid:3)84(cid:3) Starting(cid:3)new(cid:3)drawings(cid:3).............................................................................................(cid:3)84(cid:3) Opening(cid:3)existing(cid:3)drawings(cid:3).......................................................................................(cid:3)85(cid:3) Previewing(cid:3)the(cid:3)drawing(cid:3)(screen(cid:3)preview)(cid:3)................................................................(cid:3)85(cid:3) Specifying(cid:3)the(cid:3)page(cid:3)layout(cid:3).......................................................................................(cid:3)87(cid:3) Saving(cid:3)drawings(cid:3).......................................................................................................(cid:3)87(cid:3)

CHAPTER(cid:3)2(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)GRIDS(cid:3)AND(cid:3)GUIDELINES(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)88(cid:3)

Grids(cid:3)and(cid:3)guidelines(cid:3).................................................................................................(cid:3)88(cid:3)

Changing(cid:3)the(cid:3)order(cid:3)of(cid:3)objects(cid:3)..................................................................................(cid:3)91(cid:3)

CHAPTER(cid:3)3(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)WORKING(cid:3)WITH(cid:3)DRAWING(cid:3)TOOLS(cid:3)...............................(cid:3)93(cid:3)

Drawing(cid:3)lines(cid:3)...........................................................................................................(cid:3)93(cid:3)

Drawing(cid:3)rectangles(cid:3)and(cid:3)squares(cid:3)...............................................................................(cid:3)95(cid:3)

Drawing(cid:3)ellipses,(cid:3)circles,(cid:3)arcs,(cid:3)and(cid:3)pie(cid:3)shapes(cid:3)..........................................................(cid:3)96(cid:3)

Drawing(cid:3)polygons(cid:3)and(cid:3)stars(cid:3).....................................................................................(cid:3)97(cid:3)

Drawing(cid:3)spirals(cid:3)........................................................................................................(cid:3)98(cid:3)

Drawing(cid:3)predefined(cid:3)shapes(cid:3)......................................................................................(cid:3)99(cid:3)

Drawing(cid:3)by(cid:3)using(cid:3)shape(cid:3)recognition(cid:3).........................................................................(cid:3)99(cid:3)

CHAPTER(cid:3)4(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)EXPLORING(cid:3)CROP(cid:3)TOOLS(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)101(cid:3)

Crop(cid:3)Tool(cid:3)...............................................................................................................(cid:3)101(cid:3)

Straightening(cid:3)Bitmaps(cid:3)............................................................................................(cid:3)102(cid:3)

Using(cid:3)Pick(cid:3)Tool(cid:3)For(cid:3)Selecting(cid:3)Objects(cid:3).....................................................................(cid:3)103(cid:3)

Freehand(cid:3)Pick(cid:3)Tool(cid:3).................................................................................................(cid:3)104(cid:3)

(cid:3)

CHAPTER(cid:3)5(cid:3)(cid:3)WORKING(cid:3)WITH(cid:3)IMAGES(cid:3).................................................(cid:3)105(cid:3)

Copying,(cid:3)duplicating,(cid:3)and(cid:3)deleting(cid:3)objects(cid:3).............................................................(cid:3)105(cid:3) Copying(cid:3)object(cid:3)properties,(cid:3)transformations,(cid:3)and(cid:3)effects(cid:3)........................................(cid:3)105(cid:3) Finding(cid:3)and(cid:3)replacing(cid:3)objects(cid:3).................................................................................(cid:3)106(cid:3) Inserting(cid:3)barcodes(cid:3)..................................................................................................(cid:3)106(cid:3) Creating,(cid:3)editing,(cid:3)and(cid:3)deleting(cid:3)symbols(cid:3)..................................................................(cid:3)106(cid:3) Cloning(cid:3)objects(cid:3).......................................................................................................(cid:3)107(cid:3) Positioning(cid:3)objects(cid:3).................................................................................................(cid:3)107(cid:3) Grouping(cid:3)objects(cid:3)....................................................................................................(cid:3)109(cid:3) Locking(cid:3)objects(cid:3).......................................................................................................(cid:3)110(cid:3) Combining(cid:3)objects(cid:3)..................................................................................................(cid:3)110(cid:3) Aligning(cid:3)and(cid:3)distributing(cid:3)objects(cid:3)............................................................................(cid:3)111(cid:3) Snapping(cid:3)objects(cid:3)....................................................................................................(cid:3)112(cid:3) Using(cid:3)curve(cid:3)objects(cid:3)................................................................................................(cid:3)112(cid:3) To(cid:3)trim(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)....................................................................................................(cid:3)114(cid:3) Welding(cid:3)and(cid:3)intersecting(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)........................................................................(cid:3)114(cid:3)

CHAPTER(cid:3)6(cid:3)(cid:3)WORKING(cid:3)WITH(cid:3)TEXT(cid:3)......................................................(cid:3)115(cid:3)

Adding(cid:3)and(cid:3)manipulating(cid:3)text(cid:3)................................................................................(cid:3)115(cid:3) Adding(cid:3)artistic(cid:3)text(cid:3).................................................................................................(cid:3)115(cid:3) Fitting(cid:3)text(cid:3)to(cid:3)a(cid:3)path(cid:3)..............................................................................................(cid:3)117(cid:3) Changing(cid:3)text(cid:3)case(cid:3).................................................................................................(cid:3)118(cid:3) Adjusting(cid:3)character(cid:3)and(cid:3)word(cid:3)spacing(cid:3)....................................................................(cid:3)119(cid:3) Adding(cid:3)bullets(cid:3)to(cid:3)text(cid:3).............................................................................................(cid:3)120(cid:3) Inserting(cid:3)drop(cid:3)caps(cid:3).................................................................................................(cid:3)121(cid:3) Changing(cid:3)character(cid:3)position(cid:3)and(cid:3)angle(cid:3)...................................................................(cid:3)121(cid:3) Aligning(cid:3)Text(cid:3)..........................................................................................................(cid:3)122(cid:3) Adding(cid:3)tabs(cid:3)and(cid:3)indents(cid:3).........................................................................................(cid:3)123(cid:3) Displaying(cid:3)nonprinting(cid:3)characters(cid:3)..........................................................................(cid:3)124(cid:3)

CHAPTER(cid:3)7(cid:3)...................................................................................................(cid:3)125(cid:3)

WORKING(cid:3)WITH(cid:3)TRANSFORMATION(cid:3)TOOLS(cid:3)....................................(cid:3)125(cid:3)

Sizing(cid:3)and(cid:3)scaling(cid:3)objects(cid:3).......................................................................................(cid:3)125(cid:3)

Rotating(cid:3)and(cid:3)mirroring(cid:3)objects(cid:3)...............................................................................(cid:3)126(cid:3)

CHAPTER(cid:3)8(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)LAYERS(cid:3)................................................................................(cid:3)127(cid:3)

Creating(cid:3)layers(cid:3).......................................................................................................(cid:3)127(cid:3) Viewing(cid:3)layers,(cid:3)pages,(cid:3)and(cid:3)objects(cid:3).........................................................................(cid:3)128(cid:3) To(cid:3)delete(cid:3)a(cid:3)layer(cid:3)....................................................................................................(cid:3)128(cid:3) Changing(cid:3)layer(cid:3)properties(cid:3)......................................................................................(cid:3)129(cid:3) Showing(cid:3)and(cid:3)hiding(cid:3)layers(cid:3)......................................................................................(cid:3)129(cid:3) Printing(cid:3)and(cid:3)exporting(cid:3)layers(cid:3).................................................................................(cid:3)129(cid:3) Setting(cid:3)a(cid:3)layer's(cid:3)editing(cid:3)properties(cid:3).........................................................................(cid:3)130(cid:3) Renaming(cid:3)layers(cid:3).....................................................................................................(cid:3)130(cid:3) Using(cid:3)layer(cid:3)color(cid:3)to(cid:3)view(cid:3)objects(cid:3)............................................................................(cid:3)130(cid:3) To(cid:3)copy(cid:3)a(cid:3)layer(cid:3).......................................................................................................(cid:3)131(cid:3)

CHAPTER(cid:3)9(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)WORKING(cid:3)WITH(cid:3)COLORS(cid:3)................................................(cid:3)132(cid:3)

Working(cid:3)with(cid:3)color(cid:3).................................................................................................(cid:3)132(cid:3)

Filling(cid:3)objects(cid:3).........................................................................................................(cid:3)132(cid:3)

Applying(cid:3)pattern(cid:3)fills(cid:3)..............................................................................................(cid:3)134(cid:3)

Applying(cid:3)texture(cid:3)fills(cid:3)..............................................................................................(cid:3)136(cid:3)

Applying(cid:3)postscript(cid:3)texture(cid:3)fills(cid:3)..............................................................................(cid:3)137(cid:3)

Applying(cid:3)mesh(cid:3)fills(cid:3).................................................................................................(cid:3)137(cid:3)

Working(cid:3)with(cid:3)fills(cid:3)...................................................................................................(cid:3)139(cid:3)

CHAPTER(cid:3)10(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)ADDING(cid:3)EFFECTS(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)141(cid:3)

Contour(cid:3)..................................................................................................................(cid:3)141(cid:3) Applying(cid:3)perspective(cid:3)to(cid:3)objects(cid:3).............................................................................(cid:3)142(cid:3) Creating(cid:3)extrusions(cid:3)................................................................................................(cid:3)143(cid:3) Creating(cid:3)bevel(cid:3)effects(cid:3).............................................................................................(cid:3)144(cid:3) Drop(cid:3)shadow(cid:3)..........................................................................................................(cid:3)145(cid:3) Blending(cid:3)objects(cid:3).....................................................................................................(cid:3)145(cid:3) Applying(cid:3)lenses(cid:3)......................................................................................................(cid:3)146(cid:3) Creating(cid:3)rollovers(cid:3)...................................................................................................(cid:3)148(cid:3) Powerclip(cid:3)...............................................................................................................(cid:3)148(cid:3)

CHAPTER(cid:3)(cid:3)11(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)IMPORTING(cid:3)......................................................................(cid:3)152(cid:3)

Why(cid:3)provide(cid:3)these(cid:3)different(cid:3)formats?(cid:3)...................................................................(cid:3)152(cid:3)

Importing(cid:3)files(cid:3)........................................................................................................(cid:3)152(cid:3)

Converting(cid:3)vector(cid:3)graphics(cid:3)to(cid:3)bitmaps(cid:3)...................................................................(cid:3)152(cid:3)

Creating(cid:3)objects(cid:3)for(cid:3)the(cid:3)web(cid:3)..................................................................................(cid:3)154(cid:3)

CHAPTER(cid:3)12(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)PRINTING(cid:3)A(cid:3)DRAWING(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)...............................................(cid:3)155(cid:3)

Printing(cid:3)your(cid:3)work(cid:3).................................................................................................(cid:3)155(cid:3)

Laying(cid:3)out(cid:3)print(cid:3)jobs(cid:3)..............................................................................................(cid:3)155(cid:3)

Previewing(cid:3)print(cid:3)jobs(cid:3).............................................................................................(cid:3)156(cid:3)

Applying(cid:3)print(cid:3)styles(cid:3)..............................................................................................(cid:3)156(cid:3)

Printing(cid:3)color(cid:3)separations(cid:3)......................................................................................(cid:3)157(cid:3)

Working(cid:3)with(cid:3)shortcut(cid:3)keys(cid:3)...................................................................................(cid:3)159(cid:3)

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 CHAPTER 1 BASICS OF CORELDRAW

INTRODUCTION(cid:3)

CorelDRAW is a comprehensive vector based drawing program that makes it easy to create a professio nal artwork from simple logos to intricate technical illustrations. Corel is one of the world's top software companies, with more than 100 million active users in over 75 countries. The software helps people to express their ideas and share their stories in more exciting, creative, and persuasive ways. The industry has responded with hundreds of awards for software innovation, design, and value. CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X6 offers several workflow innovations that help you be more efficient and productive.

The suite's content library includes:

(cid:120) 10,1000 high quality clipart and digital images (cid:120) 1,000 professional, high resolution digital photos (cid:120) 1,000 open type fonts, including premium fonts like Helvetica (cid:120) 350 vehicle templates (cid:120) 800 frames and more….

Computer imaging applications are based on creating either vector graphics or bitmap graphics.

Graphical elements in a vector file are called objects. Each object is a self contained entity with properties such as color, shape, outline, size and position on the screen included in its definition. In CorelDRAW X6, the redesigned Object Properties docker now presents only object-dependent formatting options and properties. CorelDRAW X6 introduces additional shaping tools that provide new creative options for refining your vector objects. CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X6 provides support for 64-bit processors, which lets you work faster than ever before with large files, The extension of CorelDRAW file is .CDR.

The enhanced import and export support for Adobe Illustrator CS5 and Adobe Photoshop CS5, as well as import support for Adobe Acrobat X and Microsoft Publisher 2010, ensure that you can exchange files with colleagues and clients. With new advanced OpenType support, and enhanced complex script support for working with foreign language text, CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X6 makes it easier than ever before to layout your project. The new and improved odd, even, and all-pages Master Layers make it easier to create page-specific designs for your multi-page documents. If you are laying out multi-page documents, such as brochures and flyers, it's now easy to incorporate page-specific headers, footers, and page numbers. In addition, page numbers are automatically updated when you add or delete pages in your document. You can also insert a page number inside existing artistic or paragraph text.

CorelDRAW X6 provides interactive frames that help you efficiently generate mock-ups of design ideas.

The interactive frame functionality has also been implemented in a collection of pre-designed picture frames included with the suite, giving you stylish, content-ready design assets that you can customize with ease. In CorelDRAW X6, the revamped styles engine introduces a new Object Styles docker that simplifies the creation, application, and management of styles. A style is a set of properties that governs the appearance of objects in your document. CorelDRAW X6 also introduces new style sets, you can create and apply styles and style sets to graphic objects, artistic and paragraph text, callout and dimension objects, and objects created with Artistic Media tools. The new Color Styles docker lets you add the colors used in a document as color styles. The new color harmony functionality lets you group a document's color styles so that you can quickly and easily produce iterative designs with varying color77 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೪೭ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 schemes. By combining two or more color styles into a harmony, you are linking the colors into a hue- based relationship. You can also edit the individual color styles in a harmony.

In addition, you can also create a special type of color harmony called a gradient, which consists of one master color style and a number of varying shades of that color. When you alter the master color, the gradient colors automatically adjust to the same degree that the master color was altered. This is especially useful when outputting multiple color variations of the same design.

Computer graphics fall into two main categories: Vector graphics and Bitmaps.

VECTOR(cid:3)IMAGES(cid:3)

Vector graphics are made of lines and curves, and they

are generated from mathematical descriptions that

determine the position, length, and direction in which

lines are drawn. Vector graphics are also called as object

oriented or draw images, are defined mathematically as

a series of points joined by lines and curves. Graphical

elements in a vector file are called objects. Vector

graphics are ideal for logos and illustrations because they

are resolution-independent and can be scaled to any size,

or printed and displayed at any resolution, without losing detail and quality. In addition, you can produce sharp

Fig 1.1 : Above : Vector Graphics

Below : Bitmap Graphics

and crisp outlines with vector graphics.

BITMAPS(cid:3)GRAPHICS(cid:3)(cid:3)(RASTER(cid:3)IMAGES)(cid:3)

Bitmaps images are composed of small squares called pixels; each pixel is mapped to a location in an image and has numerical color values. Bitmaps are excellent for photographs and digital paintings because they reproduce color gradations well. Bitmaps are resolution-dependent; that is, they represent a fixed number of pixels. They look good at their actual size, but they can appear jagged or lose image quality when scaled, or when displayed or printed at a resolution higher than their original resolution.

You can create vector graphics in CorelDRAW. You can also import bitmaps (such as JPEG and TIFF files) into CorelDRAW and add them to your drawings.

CORELDRAW(cid:3)TERMINOLOGY(cid:3)(cid:3)

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

STARTING(cid:3)CORELDRAW(cid:3)X6(cid:3)

Goto Start Menu(cid:198)All programs(cid:198)CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X6(cid:198) CorelDRAW X6 (cid:198) The welcome screen appears as shown in fig 1.2. The Welcome screen appears when you start CorelDRAW.

The Welcome screen gives you easy access to application resources and lets you quickly complete common tasks. You can also access the Welcome screen after starting the application by clicking Windows menu (cid:198) Welcome Screen. It has 5 tabs:

(cid:120) Quick start: It has options to create new blank document or new blank template, It also has records of recently opened files.

Fig 1.2 : CorelDRAW Welcome Screen

(cid:120) What's New: List that explains new features in CorelDRAW X6. (cid:120) Learning Tools: It shows tips and tricks, video tutorials, guidebook and provide online resources (cid:120) Gallery: You can also find out about the new features in CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X6 and get inspired by graphic designs

(cid:120) Updates: Shows any package related updates if available.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 To create a new graphic image from scratch select quick start tab in welcome screen window (cid:198) New Blank Document (cid:198) When you do, you will see an empty CorelDRAW X6 window. When you launch CorelDRAW, the Application window opens containing a drawing window. The CorelDRAW Fig 1.3 : CorelDRAW Application Window

application window appears as shown in fig:1.3. Circled numbers correspond to the numbers in the

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

11. Document navigator

The area at the bottom left of the application window that contains controls for moving between pages and adding pages

12. Drawing page

The rectangular area inside the drawing window. It is the printable area of your work area. You can store graphic image you do not want to print in the area of the drawing window ie., outside drawing page.

13. Status bar An area at the bottom of the application window that contains information about object properties such as type, size, color, fill, and resolution. It shows the current cursor position. The X value (first one) represents the distance from the left edge of the drawing. The Y value (the second one) represents the distance your current point is from the bottom of the drawing page.

14. Navigator A button at the lower-right corner that opens a smaller display to help you move around a drawing

EXPLORING(cid:3)TOOLBOX(cid:3)

The toolbox contains tools for drawing and

editing images. Some of the tools are visible by

default, while others are grouped in fly outs.

Fly outs open to display a set of related

CorelDRAW tools. You can access the tools in a flyout by clicking a small arrow in the lower-

Fig 1.4 : Exploring Toolbox

right corner of a toolbox. It contains related tools.

They can be selected by hovering over any of the toolbox buttons which have flyout arrows. Flyouts function like toolbars when you drag them away from the toolbox. In the default workspace, clicking the flyout arrow on the Shape tool opens the Shape edit flyout.

Flyouts(cid:3)

(cid:3)

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

that have intersecting sides.

The Graph paper tool lets you draw a grid of lines

similar to that on graph paper

The Spiral tool lets you draw symmetrical and

logarithmic spirals.

OBJECT TOOL FLYOUT

The Basic shapes tool lets you choose from a full set of

shapes, including hexagram, a smiley face, and a right-

angle triangle

The Arrow shapes tool lets you draw arrows of

various shape, direction, and number of heads

The Flowchart shapes tool lets you draw flowchart

symbols BASIC SHAPES TOOL FLYOUT The Banner shapes tool lets you draw ribbon objects

and explosion shapes

The Callout shapes tool lets you draw callouts and

labels.

The Text tool lets you type words directly on the

screen as artistic or paragraph text

TEXT TOOL

The Table tool lets you draw and edit tables

TABLE TOOL

The Parallel dimension tool lets you draw slanted

dimension lines

The Horizontal or vertical dimension tool lets you

draw horizontal or vertical dimension lines

The Angular dimension tool lets you draw angular

dimension lines

The Segment dimension tool lets you display the distance between end nodes in single or multiple DIMENSION TOOL FLYOUT

segments82 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೫೪ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

STARTING(cid:3)AND(cid:3)OPENING(cid:3)DRAWINGS(cid:3)(cid:3)

To(cid:3)Start(cid:3)CorelDRAW(cid:3)

CorelDRAW lets you start a new drawing from a blank page, a

template, or an existing drawing. A blank page gives you the

freedom to specify every aspect of a drawing. A template provides

you with a starting point and leaves the amount of customization up

to you.

STARTING(cid:3)NEW(cid:3)DRAWINGS(cid:3)(cid:3)

File (cid:198)New(cid:198)Blank Document (cid:198)Type a filename in the Name text box. (cid:198) From the Preset destination list box, choose an output destination for the drawing: (cid:198)Select paper size, unit of measurements (cid:198) number of pages you wish to insert (cid:198)Enter Fig 1.5 : Create New Dialog Box84 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೫೬ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 primary color mode (cid:198)resolution (cid:198)Preview Mode : Enhance/ Simple wireframe/ wireframe/Normal/ Draft/Pixel (cid:198)press ok.

The Different CorelDRAW Present are:

(cid:120) CorelDRAW Default: Applies CorelDRAW default settings for creating graphics that are destined for printing.

(cid:120) Default CMYK: Applies settings for creating graphics that are destined for commercial printing. (cid:120) Default RGB: Applies settings for creating graphics that are destined for printing to a high-fidelity printer

(cid:120) Web: Applies settings for creating graphics that are destined for the Internet (cid:120) Custom: Lets you customize destination settings for a document

When starting a new drawing, CorelDRAW lets you specify page, document, and color management settings. You can choose from a list of preset settings, which are based on how you intend to use the drawing. For example, you can choose the Web option if you are creating a drawing for the Internet, or the Default CMYK option if you are creating a document destined for commercial printing. However, if the preset settings are not suitable for the drawing that you want to create, you can also customize the settings and save them for future use.

OPENING(cid:3)EXISTING(cid:3)DRAWINGS(cid:3)(cid:3)

CorelDRAW lets you open existing drawings saved to the CorelDRAW (CDR) format as well as drawings and projects saved to various file formats such as Corel DESIGNER (DSF or DES), Adobe Illustrator (AI), Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF), Encapsulated PostScript (EPS), and Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM). However, you may not be able to open certain files, depending on their file type and contents. In such cases, you can try importing the files as objects in an open drawing. Goto File (cid:198)Open (cid:198)Locate the folder where the file is stored(cid:198)Click on a filename (cid:198)Press Open

PREVIEWING(cid:3)THE(cid:3)DRAWING(cid:3)(SCREEN(cid:3)PREVIEW)(cid:3)

You can preview a drawing to see how it will look when printed or exported. When you preview a drawing, only the objects on the drawing page and in the immediate area of the drawing window are displayed, and you can see all layers that are set to print in the Object manager docker. If you want a closer look at specific objects in a drawing, you can select and preview them. When you preview selected objects, the rest of the drawing is hidden

To(cid:3)Preview(cid:3)a(cid:3)Drawing(cid:3)

Click View menu (cid:198) Full-screen preview (cid:198) Click/press anywhere on the screen, to return to the application window. (cid:198) You can press Page up and Page down to preview pages in a multipage drawing.

Working(cid:3)with(cid:3)Views(cid:3)

You can save a view of any part of a drawing. For example, you can save a view of an object at 230% magnification and then return to this specific view at any time. If a document contains multiple pages, you can view them all at once by using the Page Sorter view. You can also display consecutive left-hand and right-hand pages on the screen at the same time (facing pages) and create objects that span two pages85 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೫೭ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

To(cid:3)Save(cid:3)a(cid:3)View(cid:3)

Goto Tools menu (cid:198)View Manager (cid:198) Use the Zoom tools in the view manager docker to set up a view (cid:198)Click the Add current view button. If you disable the page icon next to a saved view in the docker, CorelDRAW switches to the magnification level only, not the page, when you switch to that view. Similarly, if you disable the magnifying glass icon, CorelDRAW switches to the page only, not the magnification level.

To(cid:3)Switch(cid:3)to(cid:3)a(cid:3)saved(cid:3)view(cid:3)

Click Tools (cid:198)view manager (cid:198)Click a view in the view manager docker.

To(cid:3)view(cid:3)all(cid:3)pages(cid:3)in(cid:3)a(cid:3)multipage(cid:3)document(cid:3)

Click View (cid:198)Page sorter view

To(cid:3)view(cid:3)facing(cid:3)pages(cid:3)

Click Layout (cid:198)Page setup (cid:198) In the Document list of categories, click Layout (cid:198) Enable the Facing pages check box (cid:198) Choose one of the following settings for the Start on list box: Left side/right side. Left side (cid:198) starts the document on a left hand page. Right side: Starts the document on a right hand page.

Working(cid:3)with(cid:3)other(cid:3)views(cid:3)of(cid:3)CorelDRAW(cid:3)

You can control how you see and work with your page by selecting from view options. The viewing mode you choose affects the amount of time it takes for a drawing to open or be displayed on the monitor. For example, a drawing displayed in Simple Wireframe view takes less time to refresh or open than does a drawing displayed in Enhanced view.

(cid:120) Simple Wireframe: Displays an outline of the drawing by hiding fills, extrusions, contours, drop shadows, and intermediate blend shapes; also displays the bitmaps in monochrome. This mode lets you quickly preview basic elements in a drawing.

(cid:120) Wireframe: Displays a drawing in simple wireframe mode plus intermediate blend shapes. (cid:120) Draft: Displays fills and bitmaps with a low resolution. This mode eliminates some detail to allow you to focus on the color balances in a drawing.

(cid:120) Normal : Displays a drawing without PostScript fills or high-resolution bitmaps. This mode refreshes and opens slightly faster than the Enhanced mode.

(cid:120) Enhanced: It is the default view. It displays a drawing with PostScript fills, high-resolution bitmaps, and anti-aliased vector graphics.

(cid:120) Pixels: displays a pixel-based rendition of the drawing, which allows you to zoom in on an area of an object, and then position and size the object more precisely. This view also lets you see what the drawing will look like when it is exported to a bitmap file format.

(cid:120) Simulate overprints: simulates the color of areas where overlapping objects were set to overprint and displays PostScript fills, high-resolution bitmaps, and anti-aliased vector graphics.

(cid:120) Rasterize complex effects: Rasterizes the display of complex effects, such as transparencies, bevels, and drop shadows when in Enhanced view. This option is useful for previewing how the complex effects will be printed. To ensure the successful printing of complex effects, most printers require complex effects to be rasterized.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 SPECIFYING(cid:3)THE(cid:3)PAGE(cid:3)LAYOUT(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can begin working on a drawing by specifying settings for the size, orientation, and layout style of the page.

There are two options for specifying a page size: choosing a preset page size or creating your own. You can choose from many preset page sizes ranging from legal-size paper and envelopes to posters and Web pages. If a preset page size does not meet your needs, you can create a custom page size by specifying a drawing's dimensions.

The orientation of the page can be Landscape or Portrait. With landscape orientation the drawing's width is greater than its height, and with portrait orientation the drawing's height is greater than its width. Any pages you add to a drawing project assume the current orientation; however, you can give single pages in a drawing project a different orientation. The options you choose when specifying the page layout can be used as a default for all new drawings you create. You can also adjust the page size and orientation settings to match the standard paper settings for printing.

To(cid:3)set(cid:3)the(cid:3)default(cid:3)page(cid:3)layout(cid:3)(cid:3)

Click Tools menu (cid:198) Options. (cid:198) In the list of categories, click Document (cid:198)Enable the Save options as defaults for new documents check box. (cid:198)Enable the Page options check box.

The next new document is created with the page size and orientation options that were last specified with the Resize current page only check box disabled.

SAVING(cid:3)DRAWINGS(cid:3)(cid:3)

By default, drawings are saved to the CorelDRAW file format (CDR) and are compatible with the latest version of the application. You can also save a drawing that is compatible with an earlier version of CorelDRAW Graphics Suite. You can save a drawing to other vector file formats as well. If you want to use a drawing in another application, you must save it to a file format that is supported by that application. When you save a drawing, CorelDRAW lets you add reference information so that you can easily find and organize drawings later on. Goto File (cid:198)Save(cid:198)Type a filename in the filename box (cid:198) locate the folder where you want to save the file (cid:198) Choose the file format from the Save as type dropdown box (cid:198)click Save.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 CHAPTER 2 GRIDS AND GUIDELINES

GRIDS(cid:3)AND(cid:3)GUIDELINES(cid:3)

Grids and guidelines are tools that enable you to easily position a selected object to a horizontal or vertical location or both. Working with the grid displayed is like working on graph paper. You can use grids to align your object to a position. The grids and guidelines are non-printing lines placed to align and place the objects in your drawing.

You can draw a grid and set the number of rows and columns. A grid is a grouped set of rectangles that you can break apart. To draw select Graph paper tool (cid:198) Type values in the top and bottom portions of the Columns and rows box on the property bar (cid:198) The value you type in the top portion specifies the number of columns; the value you type in the bottom portion specifies the number of rows (cid:198)Point to where you want the grid to appear (cid:198)drag diagonally to draw a grid. Note : I f you want to draw the grid from its center point outward, hold down Shift as you drag; if you want to draw a grid with square cells, hold down Ctrl as you drag.

To(cid:3)Ungroup(cid:3)a(cid:3)grid(cid:3)

Select a grid using pick tool (cid:198)Goto Arrange menu (cid:198)Ungroup Guidelines are of two types Vertical & Horizontal. Figure 2.1 shows a Horizontal and Vertical guideline.

Fig 2.1 : Horizontal and Vertical Guideline

Defining(cid:3)Grids(cid:3)

. The intersecting horizontal and vertical lines are called Gridlines. You can also adjust the distance between the grids and number of lines(frequency) between each vertical and horizontal unit, can be set according to your requirement.

There are 3 types of grids: Document grid, Baseline grid and Pixel Grid88 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೬೦ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 (cid:120) Document Grid: The document grid is a series of non-printing intersecting lines that you can display in the drawing window. You can use the document grid to precisely align and position objects.

(cid:120) Baseline Grid : A series of evenly spaced

horizontal lines that follow the pattern of a ruled

notebook and help align text and objects.

(cid:120) Pixel Grid : It displays a pixel based rendition

of the drawing, which allows you to zoom in an

area of an object, then position and size the

object more precisely.

To display grids do this:

1. Click View menu (cid:198) Grid (cid:198) Document Grid/Baseline Grid/ Pixel Grid.

Fig 2.2 : Customizing Gridlines

To customize grids do this: Click View menu (cid:198)Setup (cid:198) Grid and Ruler Setup. The Option dialog box appears as in Figure 2.2. Here you can set all types of Grids.

2. Click Grid lines per inch /inches apart, to specify the distance between each gridline. Type the values: Horizontal: type the distance between horizontal grid. Vertical: type the distance between vertical grid.

3. To display the grids as lines, click the Show grid as line radio button. To display the grids as dots, click the Show grid as dots radio button.

4. . To display the grid click Show grid check box.

To place a Vertical Guideline, do this:

(cid:120) Drag on the ruler on the left side of the Drawing window, and pull it to the position you want to place the guide.

(cid:120) Alternatively, Click View menu (cid:198) snap to (cid:198)Guideline Setup(cid:198) The dialog box appears. In the dialog box, click the Vertical and type the number then click Add button.

To place horizontal guideline do this:

(cid:120) Drag on the ruler situated on the top of the drawing window, and pull it until the line placed at the desired location.

(cid:120) Alternatively, click View menu (cid:198)snap to (cid:198) Guideline Setup(cid:198)The dialog box that appears :

In the dialog box, click on Horizontal and type the number then click on Add button.

Snap to Grid feature will make the grid coordinates act like magnets that attract the object you are moving If you want to move an object to a location not a grid coordinate, you will find it difficult with snap to Grid turned on. You can place custom defined horizontal and vertical guidelines on your page and use them to align objects to a required position. CorelDRAW allows you to snap your object that is you can force your object that is being drawn to align automatically to a point on another object.

Note:- The hotkey for toggling snap to Grid on and off is Ctrl+Y.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 To snap to guidelines do this:

1. Click on View menu (cid:198)snap to (cid:198) choose Snap to Guidelines. Now the guidelines will act as magnetic borders.

To remove guidelines do this:

1. Select the guideline you want to remove with the pick tool.

2. Press the Delete button or Right click and select Delete option from floating menu.

Using(cid:3)Dynamic(cid:3)Guides(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can use Dynamic Guides to place objects in

relation to other objects as you draw them You can

display Dynamic Guides to help you precisely move, align, and draw objects in relation to other objects.

Dynamic Guides are temporary guidelines that you

Fig 2.3 : Dynamic Guides

can pull from the following snap points in objects:

center, node, quadrant, and text baseline.

The object from the snap point that was used to create the dynamic guide, which helps you position the object precisely.. You can also display intersecting Dynamic Guides and then place an object at the intersection. In the above figure the dynamic guide was pulled from a node in the object on the left. The screen tip next to the node displays the angle of the dynamic guide (0º) The object on the right was dragged along the dynamic guide and positioned precisely 1.5 inches away from the node that was used to generate the dynamic guide.

Dynamic Guides contain invisible divisions, called ticks, to which your pointer gravitates. Ticks let you move objects with precision along a dynamic guide. You can adjust tick spacing to suit your needs, and you can disable snapping to ticks. You can turn off Dynamic Guides at any time.

To(cid:3)enable(cid:3)or(cid:3)disable(cid:3)Dynamic(cid:3)Guides(cid:3)(cid:3)

Click View (cid:198) Dynamic Guides. A check mark beside the Dynamic Guides command indicates that Dynamic Guides are enabled. You can toggle Dynamic Guides on and off by pressing Shift + Alt + D.

To(cid:3)set(cid:3)dynamic(cid:3)guide(cid:3)options(cid:3)

Click View (cid:198)Setup (cid:198)Dynamic Guides setup (cid:198) On the Dynamic Guides page of the Options dialog box, enable angle screen tip/ distance screen tip check boxes:. (cid:198) Type a value in the Tick spacing box to change the distance between the invisible divisions on the Dynamic Guides (cid:198) In the Guides area, enable or disable the angle check boxes to choose the angles at which to create the Dynamic Guides (cid:198) Enable the Extend along segment check box to create Dynamic Guides that are extensions of line segments.

Angle screen tip: Lets you display or hide the angle of Dynamic Guides. Distance screen tip: lets you display or hide the distance from the snap point that is used to create a dynamic guide. When you enable an angle check box, a preview of the dynamic guide appears in the Guides preview window90 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೬೨ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

Using alignment Guides

You can align objects interactively on the drawing

page by using alignment Guides. Alignment Guides

are temporary guidelines that appear when you create,

resize, or move objects in relation to other nearby

objects. While Dynamic Guides provide precise

measurements for creating technical illustrations, alignment Guides are useful in page layout to align

text or graphic elements quickly and accurately.

Alignment Guides help you align the center of an object

with the center of another object (center to center) or the

edge of an object with the edge of another object (edge to

edge). In addition, you can align the edge of an object with

the center of another object (edge to center).

Alignment Guides appear as an object is moved. If you

want to align an object at a set distance from the edge of

Fig 2.4 : Alignment Guides

another object, you can set margins for the alignment Guides. After you specify the margins, you can choose how the edge Guides appear: they can follow either the margins, or both the margins and the edges of the object. In the above figure Left: Alignment Guides following the margins only (around the object at the top). Right: Alignment Guides following the margin (vertical guide) and the object's edge (horizontal guide)

Alignment Guides are turned off by default. You can easily enable or disable alignment Guides, or modify their default settings. You can choose whether alignment Guides appear for individual objects in a group, or for the bounding box of the group as a whole.

To(cid:3)enable(cid:3)or(cid:3)disable(cid:3)alignment(cid:3)Guides(cid:3)(cid:3)

Click View (cid:198)Alignment Guides. You can also enable or disable alignment Guides by clicking Layout menu (cid:198)Layout toolbar or Window (cid:198)Toolbars (cid:198)Layout. You can also enable alignment Guides by pressing Shift + Alt + A. To modify alignment guide settings: Click View (cid:198)Setup (cid:198)Alignment Guides setup (cid:198)

To(cid:3)place(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)in(cid:3)relation(cid:3)to(cid:3)another(cid:3)object(cid:3)

With Dynamic Guides enabled, select an object (cid:198) Drag the object to an eligible snap point of the target object (cid:198) When the snap point of the target object becomes highlighted, drag the object along the dynamic guide to position it.

If you want to move the object by a specific snap point, move the pointer over the snap point until the snap point becomes highlighted. The eligible snap points: the node, center, quadrant, and text baseline snap points; appear only when the corresponding snapping modes are activated.

CHANGING(cid:3)THE(cid:3)ORDER(cid:3)OF(cid:3)OBJECTS(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can change the stacking order of objects on a layer or a page by sending objects to the front or back of other objects. You can also position objects precisely in the stacking order, as well as reverse the stacking order of multiple objects.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 To(cid:3)move(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)in(cid:3)the(cid:3)stacking(cid:3)order(cid:3)(cid:3)

Select an object (cid:198)Click Arrange (cid:198)Order, and then click any one of the following commands

To front of page : moves the selected object in front of all other objects on the page. To back of page:

moves the selected object behind all other objects on the page. To front of layer: moves the selected object in front of all other objects on the active layer. To back of layer: moves the selected object behind all other objects on the active layer. Forward one: moves the selected object forward one position. If the selected object is in front of all other objects on the active layer, it is moved to the layer above. Back one: moves the selected object behind one position. If the selected object is behind all other objects on the selected layer, it is moved to the layer below. In front of: moves the selected object in front of the object that you click in the drawing window. Behind :moves the selected object behind the object that you click in the drawing window.

An object cannot be moved to a locked (non-editable) layer; instead, it is moved to the closest editable layer. An Order command is unavailable if the selected object is already positioned in the specified stacking order.

To(cid:3)reverse(cid:3)the(cid:3)order(cid:3)of(cid:3)multiple(cid:3)objects(cid:3)

Select the objects (cid:198) Click Arrange (cid:198) Order Reverse order92 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೬೪ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

CHAPTER 3

WORKING WITH DRAWING TOOLS

DRAWING(cid:3)LINES(cid:3)(cid:3)

CorelDRAW lets you add lines and brushstrokes by using a variety of techniques and tools. After you draw lines or apply brushstrokes to lines, you can format them. You can also format the outlines that surround objects. CorelDRAW provides preset objects that you can spray along a line. You can also create flow and dimension lines in drawings. Lines, Rectangle, square are the basic shapes of a drawing.

CorelDRAW X6 lets you draw various types of lines like straight line, freehand lines, calligraphic lines and Bezier lines. The Curve flyout offers a wide variety of tools for drawing lines — whether freehand or precise, straight or curved!

(cid:3)

Freehand(cid:3) tool: lets you draw lines and curves as if you were sketching on a sketch pad. If you make a mistake while drawing freehand curves, you can erase the unwanted part immediately and continue drawing. To use freehand tool: Select freehand tool (cid:198)

Polyline(cid:3) tool : lets you draw freehand lines (with curved and straight segments) as if you were sketching on a sketch pad. the Polyline tool is easier to use for quickly drawing a complex line that consists of alternating curved and straight segments.

Select Polyline tool (cid:198)to draw straight segment, click where you want to start the line segment and then click where you want to end. To draw curved segment: click where you want to start the segment and drag across the drawing page. (cid:198) You can add as many segments as you want. You can also close an open object by clicking the close curve button on the property bar.

(cid:3)93 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೬೫ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 2(cid:486)point(cid:3) line(cid:3) tool:(cid:3) lets you draw a straight two-point line segment. This tool also allows you to create 2 point straight lines, perpendicular 2-point line and tangent 2-point line to objects.

To draw a straight line: Select 2 point line tool (cid:198) point to where you want to start the line and drag to draw the line.

To draw a perpendicular line: Select 2 point line tool (cid:198) On the property bar, click : Perpendicular 2 point line button (cid:198) click the edge of an object, and drag to where you want the line to end.

If you want to draw a line that is perpendicular to 2 objects, drag to edge of the second object, and release the mouse button where the perpendicular snap point appears. To extend the line beyond the 2nd object, hold CTRL key when the perpendicular snap point appears and drag to where you want the line to end.

To draw a tangent line : Select 2 point line tool (cid:198) On the property bar, click : Tangential 2 point line button (cid:198) click the edge of a curved segment in an object, and drag to where you want the tangent line to end.

If you want to draw a line that is tangent to 2 object, drag the edge of the 2nd object and release the mouse button when the tangent snap point appears. When the quadrant snap points coincides with tangent snap point, the quadrant snap points appears.

Bézier(cid:3) tool(cid:3) :(cid:3) lets you draw lines one segment at a time by placing each node with precision and controlling the shape of each curved segment. Select Bezier tool (cid:198) To draw a curved segment, click where you want to place the 1st node, and the control handle to where you want to place the next node. (cid:198) Release the mouse button and drag the control handle to create the curve. To draw a straight segment, click where you want to start the line segment and click where you want to end it. (cid:198)Press space bar to finish the line.

(cid:3)

Pen(cid:3) tool : lets you draw lines one segment (curved or straight) at a time by placing each node with precision and controlling the shape of each curved segment. When we are using this tool we can preview the line segments you are drawing.

Select Pen tool (cid:198)To draw curved segment : click where you want to place the first node and then drag the control handle to where you need to place next node (cid:198)release the mouse button and drag the control handle to create the curve you want. To draw straight segment : click where you want to start the line segment and click where you want to end it. (cid:198) Double click to finish the line.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

B(cid:486)Spline(cid:3) tool: lets you draw curved lines and b splines by setting control points that shape the curve without breaking it into segments. B-Splines touch the first and last control points and are pulled by the point.

Select B-Spline tool (cid:198)Click where you want to start the line (cid:198)click to set as many control points as you need to shape a line. (cid:198) double click to finish the line.

Smart(cid:3)drawing(cid:3)tool(cid:3)

The Smart drawing tool lets you use shape recognition to draw straight and curved lines.

(cid:3)

3(cid:3) point(cid:3) curve(cid:3) tool:(cid:3) lets you draw a curve by defining the start, end, and center points Select the 3 point curve tool (cid:198) click where you want to start the curve, and drag to where you want the curve to end (cid:198) release the mouse button and click where you want the center of the curve to be. To draw a symmetrical curve hold shift while dragging. To draw a circular curve hold ctrl while dragging.

DRAWING(cid:3)RECTANGLES(cid:3)AND(cid:3)SQUARES(cid:3)(cid:3)

CorelDRAW lets you draw rectangles and squares. You can draw a rectangle or square by dragging diagonally with the Rectangle tool or by specifying the width and

height with the 3-point rectangle tool. The 3-point rectangle tool

lets you quickly draw rectangles at an angle.

You can also draw a rectangle or square with rounded, scalloped or chamfered corners. You can modify each corner individually or

apply the changes to all corners. In addition, you can specify that

Fig 3. 1: Above : 3-point GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 rectangle by first drawing its baseline Below: drawing its height.

all corners scale relative to the object. You can also specify the default corner size for drawing rectangles and squares.

Draw a rectangle In the toolbox, click the Rectangle tool. Drag in the drawing window until the rectangle is the size you want.

Draw a square In the toolbox, click the Rectangle tool. Hold down Ctrl, and drag in the drawingಭಾಗ ೧ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X⁶ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೬೭ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 default corner size for drawing rectangles and squares.

(cid:3)

default corner size for drawing rectangles and squares.

To(cid:3)draw(cid:3)a(cid:3)rectangle(cid:3)or(cid:3)square(cid:3)by(cid:3)dragging(cid:3)diagonally:(cid:3)

a square from its center outward by holding down Shift + Ctrl as you drag. You can draw a rectangle that To(cid:3)draw(cid:3)a(cid:3)rectangle(cid:3)by(cid:3)specifying(cid:3)height(cid:3)and(cid:3)width(cid:3)

To(cid:3)draw(cid:3)a(cid:3)rectangle(cid:3)by(cid:3)specifying(cid:3)height(cid:3)and(cid:3)width(cid:3)

covers the drawing page by double-clicking the Rectangle tool. In the toolbox, click the 3-point rectangle tool (cid:198) In the drawing window, point to where you want to start the rectangle, drag to draw the width, and release the mouse button (cid:198) Move the pointer to draw the height, and click. (cid:198) To adjust the size of the rectangle, type values in the Object size boxes on the In the toolbox, click the 3-point rectangle tool (cid:198) In the drawing window, point to where you want to property bar. (cid:198) To constrain the angle of the baseline to a preset increment, known as constrain angle, start the rectangle, drag to draw the width, and release the mouse button (cid:198) Move the pointer to draw the hold down Ctrl as you drag. height, and click. (cid:198) To adjust the size of the rectangle, type values in the Object size boxes on the property bar. (cid:198) To constrain the angle of the baseline to a preset increment, known as constrain angle, To(cid:3)draw(cid:3)a(cid:3)rectangle(cid:3)or(cid:3)square(cid:3)with(cid:3)rounded,(cid:3)scalloped,(cid:3)or(cid:3)chamfered(cid:3)corners(cid:3)

To(cid:3)draw(cid:3)a(cid:3)rectangle(cid:3)or(cid:3)square(cid:3)with(cid:3)rounded,(cid:3)scalloped,(cid:3)or(cid:3)chamfered(cid:3)corners(cid:3)

hold down Ctrl as you drag. Click a rectangle or square. (cid:198) Click one of the following buttons on the property bar (cid:198)select rounded corner/scalloped corner/ chamfered corner (cid:198) Type values in the Corner radius areas on the property bar. (cid:198) click apply. Click a rectangle or square. (cid:198) Click one of the following buttons on the property bar (cid:198)select rounded corner/scalloped corner/ chamfered corner (cid:198) Type values in the Corner radius areas on the property bar. (cid:198) click apply. Round corner — produces a curved corner Scalloped corner — replaces a corner with an edge that has a curved notch Round corner — produces a curved corner Chamfered corner — replaces a corner with a flat edge

Scalloped corner — replaces a corner with an edge that has a curved notch You can apply the same changes to all the corners by clicking the edit corners button together on the Chamfered corner — replaces a corner with a flat edge property bar. Click the Relative corner scaling button the property bar to disable the scaling of corners relative to object. You can apply the same changes to all the corners by clicking the edit corners button together on the property bar. Click the Relative corner scaling button the property bar to disable the scaling of corners You can also modify the corners of a selected rectangle or square by clicking the Shape tool , clicking a relative to object. corner option button on the property bar, then dragging a corner node toward the shape's center. If you prefer to modify only one corner, hold down Ctrl, then drag a corner node toward the shape's center. You can also modify the corners of a selected rectangle or square by clicking the Shape tool , clicking a corner option button on the property bar, then dragging a corner node toward the shape's center. If you To specify the default corner size of drawing rectangles and square : click tools menu (cid:198) options prefer to modify only one corner, hold down Ctrl, then drag a corner node toward the shape's center. (cid:198)Double click toolbox from the workspace list of categories (cid:198)click rectangle tool (cid:198) in the rectangle corners area, type values in the boxes. To specify the default corner size of drawing rectangles and square : click tools menu (cid:198) options (cid:198)Double click toolbox from the workspace list of categories (cid:198)click rectangle tool (cid:198) in the rectangle corners area, type values in the boxes. DRAWING(cid:3)ELLIPSES,(cid:3)CIRCLES,(cid:3)ARCS,(cid:3)AND(cid:3)PIE(cid:3)SHAPES(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can draw an ellipse or circle by dragging diagonally with the Ellipse tool, or you can draw an ellipse DRAWING(cid:3)ELLIPSES,(cid:3)CIRCLES,(cid:3)ARCS,(cid:3)AND(cid:3)PIE(cid:3)SHAPES(cid:3)(cid:3) by using the 3-point ellipse tool to specify its width and height. The 3-point ellipse tool lets you quickly create an ellipse at an angle, eliminating the need to rotate the ellipse. You can draw an ellipse or circle by dragging diagonally with the Ellipse tool, or you can draw an ellipse by using the 3-point ellipse tool to specify its width and height. The 3-point ellipse tool lets you quickly create an ellipse at an angle, eliminating the need to rotate the ellipse.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 Using the Ellipse tool, you can draw a new arc or pie shape,

or you can draw an ellipse or circle and then change it to an

arc or a pie shape. You can also change the default properties

of new objects that are drawn with the Ellipse tool. For example, you can set the default properties so that all new

shapes you draw are arcs or pie shapes. Note: You can draw Ellipse as you draw rectangle

Fig 3. 2: Above :3-point ellipse by first

drawing its baseline Below: drawing its

height.

To(cid:3)draw(cid:3)an(cid:3)arc(cid:3)or(cid:3)a(cid:3)pie(cid:3)shape(cid:3)

You can draw an ellipse or a circle from its center outward by holding down Shift as you drag.

Fig 3. 3: Left : Drawing arc Right : Drawing Star and polygon

DRAWING(cid:3)POLYGONS(cid:3)AND(cid:3)STARS(cid:3)(cid:3)

CorelDRAW lets you draw polygons and two types of stars: perfect and complex. Perfect stars are traditional-looking stars and can have a fill applied to the entire star shape. Complex stars have intersecting sides and produce original results with a fill applied. You can modify polygons and stars.

For example, you can change the number of sides on a polygon or the number of points on a star, and you can sharpen the points of a star. You can also use the Shape tool to reshape polygons and complex stars, just as you would with any other curve object.

To(cid:3)draw(cid:3)a(cid:3)polygon(cid:3)(cid:3)

In the toolbox, click the Polygon tool (cid:198) and drag in the drawing window to draw a polygon of required size . You can draw a polygon from its center by holding down Shift as you drag. You can draw a symmetrical polygon by holding down Ctrl as you drag.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 To(cid:3)modify(cid:3)a(cid:3)polygon(cid:3)

To(cid:3)draw(cid:3)a(cid:3)star(cid:3)

To(cid:3)modify(cid:3)a(cid:3)star(cid:3)(cid:3)

Fig : 3.4 : Left to right: The Shape tool was used to change a

Fig : 3.5 :Drawing Spirals

polygon into a star that can be shaped as a curve object. The line

segments of the star were then converted to curves and adjusted to

produce the starfish shape

DRAWING(cid:3)SPIRALS(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can draw two types of spirals: symmetrical and logarithmic. Symmetrical spirals expand evenly so that the distance between each revolution is equal. Logarithmic spirals expand with increasingly larger distances between revolutions. You can set the rate by which a logarithmic spiral expands outward. To draw a spiral: select the spiral tool (cid:198) type a value in Spiral revolution box on property bar (cid:198) In property bar select the type of spiral (Symmetrical/Logarithmic spiral) (cid:198) If you want to change the amount by which the spiral expands as it moves outward, move the Spiral expansion factor slider (cid:198) Drag diagonally in the drawing window until the spiral is of required size.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 Note : You can draw a spiral from its center outward by holding down Shift as you drag. You can also draw a spiral with even horizontal and vertical dimensions by holding Ctrl key as you drag.

DRAWING(cid:3)PREDEFINED(cid:3)SHAPES(cid:3)(cid:3)

Using the Perfect Shapes collection, you can draw

predefined shapes. Certain shapes specifically basic

shapes, arrow shapes, banner shapes, and callout

shapes — contain diamond-shaped handles that are

called glyphs. You can drag a glyph to modify the

appearance of a shape. You can Add text to the inside or outside of the shape. For example, you

Fig : 3.6: Using the Shape tool, you can

drag a glyph to alter a shape.

might want to put a label inside a flowchart symbol

or a callout.

In the toolbox, click one of the following tools(cid:198) Basic shape tools/ Arrow shapes/ Flowchart shapes/ banner shapes/ callout shapes (cid:198) Open the Perfect Shapes picker on the property bar, and click a shape. (cid:198) Drag in the drawing window until the shape is of required size you want.

Like other shapes, shapes that are drawn with a Perfect Shapes tool can be modified. Select a shape that contains a glyph (cid:198) Drag a glyph until you achieve the shape you want.

Note: The right-angle, heart, lightning bolt, explosion, and flowchart shapes do not contain glyphs

To(cid:3)add(cid:3)text(cid:3)to(cid:3)a(cid:3)predefined(cid:3)shape(cid:3):(cid:3)

Click the Text tool (cid:198) Position the cursor inside the shape's outline until it changes to a text cursor (cid:198) Type inside the shape, choose a font, and format the text.

DRAWING(cid:3)BY(cid:3)USING(cid:3)SHAPE(cid:3)RECOGNITION(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can use the Smart drawing tool to

draw freehand strokes that can be

recognized and converted to basic shapes.

Rectangles and ellipses are translated to

native CorelDRAW objects; trapezoids and parallelograms are translated to

Fig : 3.7: Drawing shape using shape recognition

Perfect Shapes objects; lines, triangles,

squares, diamonds, circles, and arrows are translated to curve objects. If an object is not converted to a shape, it is smoothed. Objects and curves drawn with shape recognition are editable. You can set the amount of time to elapse between making a pen stroke and the implementation of shape recognition. For example, if the timer is set to one second and you draw a circle, shape recognition takes effect one second after you draw the circle. You can make corrections as you draw. You can also change the thickness and line style of a shape that was drawn by using shape recognition.

To(cid:3)draw(cid:3)a(cid:3)shape(cid:3)or(cid:3)line(cid:3)by(cid:3)using(cid:3)shape(cid:3)recognition(cid:3)(cid:3)

Click the smart drawing tool (cid:198)Choose a recognition level from the Shape recognition level list box on the property box (cid:198) choose a smoothing level from the smart smoothing level list box on the property bar (cid:198)Draw a shape or line in the drawing window. Note : The Smart drawing tool property bar is displayed only when the Smart drawing tool is selected To(cid:3)set(cid:3)shape(cid:3)recognition(cid:3)delay(cid:3)

Goto Tools menu (cid:198)options (cid:198) in the workspace list of categories select smart drawing tool (cid:198) move the drawing assistance delay slider. (min delay is 10 ms; max is 2 sec)

To(cid:3)make(cid:3)a(cid:3)correction(cid:3)while(cid:3)using(cid:3)shape(cid:3)recognition(cid:3)

Before the delay recognition period has elapsed, hold down Shift, and drag over the area you want to correct. You must start erasing the shape or line from the last point drawn

To(cid:3)change(cid:3)the(cid:3)outline(cid:3)thickness(cid:3)of(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)drawn(cid:3)with(cid:3)shape(cid:3)recognition(cid:3)

Click the Smart drawing tool (cid:198)Click the shape(cid:198) From the outline width list box on the property bar, choose an outline thickness.

(cid:3)100 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೭೨ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 CHAPTER 4 EXPLORING CROP TOOLS

CROP(cid:3)TOOL(cid:3)

Cropping lets you quickly remove unwanted areas in objects and imported graphics, eliminating the need to ungroup objects, break linked groups apart, or convert objects to curves. You can crop vector objects and bitmaps. When cropping objects, you define a rectangular area (cropping area) that you want to keep.

Object portions outside the cropping area are removed. You can specify the exact position and size of the cropping area, and you can rotate and resize it. You can crop only selected objects without affecting other objects in a drawing, or you can crop all objects on the drawing page. To crop objects: Select the object you want to crop (cid:198)select crop tool (cid:198)drag to define a cropping area (cid:198) double click inside the cropping area.

KNIFE(cid:3)TOOL(cid:3)

You can split a bitmap or vector object in two and reshape it by redrawing its path. You can split a closed object along a straight or jagged line. CorelDRAW lets you choose between splitting an object into two objects, or leaving it as one object composed of two or more sub paths. You can specify whether you want to close paths automatically or keep them open. The knife tool snaps upright when positioned properly. Select Knife tool(cid:198) Position the Knife tool over the object's outline where you want to start cutting. (cid:198) click the outline to start cutting (cid:198) position the knife over the objects outline where you want to stop cutting and click again.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 Eraser(cid:3)Tool(cid:3)

To erase a portions of an object. The Eraser tool works just like a pencil eraser, removing any part of the image over which you click and drag. Erasing automatically closes any affected paths and converts the object to curves. If you erase connecting lines, CorelDRAW creates sub paths rather than individual objects

Note : You can change the size of the eraser nib by changing the eraser thickness box on the property bar and you can change the shape of the eraser nib by clicking the eraser shape button the property bar. Select an object (cid:198) select eraser tool (cid:198) drag over the object

Virtual(cid:3)Line(cid:3)Segment(cid:3)

You can delete multiple line segments at one time by dragging the points to enclose or intersect all target segment. You can also weld line segments. The Virtual segment delete tool snaps upright when positioned properly. If you want to delete multiple line segments at one time, click the pointer to drag a marquee around all line segments you want to delete. The Virtual segment delete tool does not work on linked groups such as drop shadows, text, or images. Select the Virtual segment delete tool(cid:198) Move the pointer to the line segment you want to delete. (cid:198) Click the line segment.

(cid:3)

CROPPING(cid:3)BITMAPS(cid:3)

Cropping removes unwanted areas of a bitmap. To crop a bitmap into a rectangular shape, you can use the Crop tool. To crop a bitmap into an irregular shape, you can use the Shape tool and the Crop bitmap command.

Click the Shape tool(cid:198).Select a bitmap. (cid:198) Drag the corner nodes to reshape the bitmap. (cid:198) If you want to add a node, double-click the node boundary (dotted line) by using the Shape tool where you want the node to appear. (cid:198) Click Bitmaps(cid:198) Crop bitmap.

STRAIGHTENING(cid:3)BITMAPS(cid:3)

This feature is useful for straightening photos that were taken or scanned at an angle. You can rotate an image by typing a rotation angle. You can specify a custom rotation angle from -15 to 15 degrees.

If you want to change the orientation of the image before straightening it, you can start by rotating the image 90 degrees clockwise and 90 degrees counterclockwise. A grid is displayed in the preview window to help you straighten the image. You can make more precise adjustments by controlling the cell size of the grid. By default, the straightened image is cropped to the cropping area that is displayed in the preview window. The final image has the same aspect ratio as the original image, but it has smaller dimensions. However, you can preserve the original width and height of the image by cropping and resampling the image.

Original image (left); straightened and cropped image (right)

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 You can also produce an image at an angle by disabling cropping and then using the Crop tool to crop the image in the drawing window.

Select an image. (cid:198) Click Bitmaps (cid:198) Straighten image. (cid:198) Move the Rotate image slider, or type a value between 15 and -15 in the Rotate image box. If necessary, move the Grid slider to adjust the size of the grid cells. (cid:198) To crop and straighten the image, enable the Crop image check box.

USING(cid:3)PICK(cid:3)TOOL(cid:3)FOR(cid:3)SELECTING(cid:3)OBJECTS(cid:3)(cid:3)

Before you can change an object, you must select it. You can select visible objects, objects that are

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 Select Pick tool , hold down Shift, and click each object that you want to include in the selection group(cid:198) Press Ctrl + a number from 0 to 9 (cid:198) The number you pressed is associated with the new selection group.

To(cid:3)deselect(cid:3)objects(cid:3)

To(cid:3)change(cid:3)how(cid:3)unfilled(cid:3)objects(cid:3)are(cid:3)selected(cid:3)

Click Tools (cid:198)Options (cid:198) In the Workspace list of categories, click Toolbox (cid:198) Pick tool. (cid:198) Enable or disable the Treat all objects as filled check box.

Enabling the check box lets you select an unfilled object by clicking on its outline or the area enclosed by the outline; disabling the check box lets you select an unfilled object by clicking only on its outline.

FREEHAND(cid:3)PICK(cid:3)TOOL(cid:3)(cid:3)

The Freehand pick tool lets you select objects by using a freehand selection marquee104 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೭೬ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH IMAGES

COPYING,(cid:3)DUPLICATING,(cid:3)AND(cid:3)DELETING(cid:3)OBJECTS(cid:3)(cid:3)

CorelDRAW provides you with several ways to copy objects. When you no longer need an object, you can delete it.

Cutting,(cid:3)copying,(cid:3)and(cid:3)pasting(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can cut or copy an object to place it on the Clipboard and paste it into a drawing or another application. Cutting an object places it on the Clipboard and removes it from the drawing. Copying an object places it on the Clipboard but keeps the original in the drawing.

To cut or copy an object : Select an object. (cid:198) Click Edit, and click cut / copy (cid:198) place the cursor where you need to place the text (cid:198) go to Edit menu (cid:198)Paste.

Duplicating(cid:3)(cid:3)

Duplicating an object places a copy directly in the drawing window and does not use the Clipboard.

Duplicating is faster than copying and pasting. Also, when duplicating an object, you can specify the distance between the duplicate and the original object along the x and y axes. This distance is known as the offset. To Duplicate an object: Select an object. (cid:198) Click Edit, and click duplicate

Copying(cid:3)objects(cid:3)at(cid:3)a(cid:3)specified(cid:3)position(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can create multiple copies of objects simultaneously, while specifying their position, without using the Clipboard. For example, you can distribute object copies horizontally, to the left or right of the original object; or you can distribute copies of objects vertically, below or above the original object. You can specify the spacing between copies of objects, or you can specify the offset at which copies of objects are created in relation to each other Select an object (cid:198) goto edit menu (cid:198) step and repeat (cid:198) type a value in the number of copies box (cid:198)click apply. Note : You can distribute copies of objects horizontally, vertically and offset all copies of objects by a specified distance.

To(cid:3)create(cid:3)a(cid:3)copy(cid:3)of(cid:3)objects(cid:3)quickly(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3) In the toolbox, click the Pick tool (cid:198) press the Spacebar while moving, rotating or transforming the object.

To(cid:3)copy(cid:3)size,(cid:3)position,(cid:3)or(cid:3)rotation(cid:3)from(cid:3)one(cid:3)object(cid:3)to(cid:3)another(cid:3)(cid:3) In the toolbox, click the Attributes eyedropper tool (cid:198) Click the Transformations flyout on the property bar, and enable size/ rotation/ position check boxes: (cid:198) Click the object whose transformations you want to copy (cid:198) The Attributes eyedropper tool automatically switches to the Apply object attributes mode (cid:198) Click the object to which you want to apply the copied transformations.

COPYING(cid:3)OBJECT(cid:3)PROPERTIES,(cid:3)TRANSFORMATIONS,(cid:3)AND(cid:3)EFFECTS(cid:3)(cid:3)

CorelDRAW lets you copy attributes from one object to another. You can copy object properties such as outline, fill, and text properties. You can copy object transformations such as sizing, rotating, and positioning. You can also copy effects applied to an object.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 To(cid:3)copy(cid:3)fill,(cid:3)outline,(cid:3)or(cid:3)text(cid:3)properties(cid:3)from(cid:3)one(cid:3)object(cid:3)to(cid:3)another(cid:3)

In the toolbox, click the Attributes eyedropper tool(cid:198) Click the Properties flyout on the property bar, and enable outline/fill/text (cid:198) Click the object whose properties you want to copy. (cid:198) The Attributes eyedropper tool automatically switches to the Apply object attributes mode (cid:198) Click the object to which you want to apply the copied properties.

FINDING(cid:3)AND(cid:3)REPLACING(cid:3)OBJECTS(cid:3)

You can use the Find and Replace wizards to locate and edit objects in a large drawing.

Using search criteria that you specify, the Find wizard Guides you step-by-step when you need to find and select objects in a drawing. The search criteria can include object type and its related properties, fill and outline properties, vector effects applied to objects, or the name of an object or style. For example, you can search for and select all rectangles with rounded corners and without fill, or all text on a path.

You can also search for objects that contain the same properties as a selected object. You can change the search criteria in the middle of a search. You can also save search criteria for later use.

The Replace wizard Guides you through the process of finding objects that contain the properties you specify and then replacing those properties with others. For example, you can replace all object fills of a certain color with fills of a different color. You can also replace color models and palettes, outline properties, and text attributes, such as font and font size. You can also search for specific words and replace them with other words

To(cid:3)find(cid:3)and(cid:3)select(cid:3)objects(cid:3)

Click Edit (cid:198) Find and replace(Ctrl + F) (cid:198)Find objects (cid:198) Follow the instructions in the Find wizard. If you save an object search, you can reactivate the last search you performed by clicking Edit (cid:198)Find and replace (cid:198)Recent search To replace object properties Click Edit Find and replace Replace objects (cid:198) Follow the instructions in the Replace wizard INSERTING(cid:3)BARCODES(cid:3)

The Barcode wizard in CorelDRAW lets you add bar codes to drawings. A bar code is a group of bars, spaces, and sometimes numbers that is designed to be scanned and read into computer memory. Bar codes are most commonly used to identify merchandise, inventory, and documents. The Barcode wizard Guides you through the process of inserting a bar code. If you need additional information at any step, you can consult the Help in the Barcode wizard.

To insert a bar code Click Edit Insert barcode (cid:198) Follow the instructions in the Barcode wizard. A bar code is inserted into a drawing as an object

CREATING,(cid:3)EDITING,(cid:3)AND(cid:3)DELETING(cid:3)SYMBOLS(cid:3)(cid:3)

Symbols are objects that are defined once and can be referenced many times in a drawing. You can have multiple instances of a symbol in a drawing with little impact on file size. Symbols make editing a drawing quicker and easier, as changes made to a symbol are automatically inherited by all instances To create a symbol: Select an object or multiple objects. Click Edit Symbol New symbol (cid:198) Type a name for the symbol in the Create new symbol dialog box.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 To edit a symbol : In the Symbol manager docker, choose a symbol from the list (cid:198) To open the Symbol manager docker, click Edit Symbol Symbol manager (cid:198) Click the Edit symbol button (cid:198) Modify the objects on the drawing page (cid:198) Click the Finish editing object tab in the bottom-left corner of the drawing window. To delete a symbol: In the Symbol manager docker, choose a symbol from the list (cid:198) Click the Delete symbol button When you delete a symbol, all instances of the symbol are removed from the drawing.

To(cid:3)make(cid:3)a(cid:3)linked(cid:3)symbol(cid:3)internal(cid:3)

Select a symbol in the drawing window (cid:198) Click Edit Symbol Break link (cid:198) If there are other instances of the symbol in the drawing, you are given the choice to break the link to all instances. If you do, the internal symbol will then apply to all the instances.

CLONING(cid:3)OBJECTS(cid:3)(cid:3)

When you clone an object, you create a copy of

an object that is linked to the original. Any

changes you make to the original object are

reflected automatically in the clone. Changes

you make to the clone are not automatically

reflected in the original, however. You can Fig 5.1 : Cloning an object

remove changes made to the clone by reverting to the original. Cloning lets you modify multiple copies of an object simultaneously by changing the master object. The object on the left was cloned twice.

Different fill and outline properties were applied to the clones. The clone on the right was also reshaped To(cid:3)clone(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)

Select an object. (cid:198)Goto edit menu (cid:198) clone.

You can also : Select the master object of a clone by right clicking the clone and click Select master.

Select the clone objects of a master by right clicking the master and click Select clones. Note : You can clone a master object multiple times, but you cannot clone a clone

POSITIONING(cid:3)OBJECTS(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can position objects by dragging them to a new location, by nudging, or by specifying their horizontal and vertical coordinates. Nudging lets you move an object in increments by pressing the Arrow keys. The increment value is known as "nudge distance." Micro-nudging lets you move an object by a fraction of the nudge distance. Super-nudging lets you move an object by a multiple of the nudge distance. By default, you can nudge objects in 0.1-inch increments, but you can change this increment value to suit your needs. You can also change micro-nudge and super-nudge values.

To position an object, you can set horizontal and vertical coordinates that are relative to the center anchor point, or other anchor point, of the object. You can also move an object to another page.

To(cid:3)Move(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)

Select an object (cid:198) Point to the center of the bounding box (cid:198) the position cursor appears, drag the object to a new position in the drawing.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

You can move an object to another page by

dragging the object over a page number tab at the

bottom of the document window and then

dragging the object into the document window Fig 5.2 : Moving an object

To(cid:3)move(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)while(cid:3)drawing(cid:3)

Start drawing a shape such as a rectangle, ellipse, or polygon (cid:198) Hold down the right mouse button without releasing the left mouse button, and drag the unfinished object to its new position (cid:198) Release the right mouse button, and continue drawing .

To set nudge distance: Click Tools (cid:198)Options (cid:198) In the Document list of categories, click Rulers (cid:198) Type a value in the Nudge box (cid:198)Type super nudge/micro nudge . You can also set the nudge distance by deselecting all objects and typing a value in the Nudge distance box on the property bar. To save the new nudge distances to use in new drawings, click Tools (cid:198)Save settings as default

To(cid:3)position(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)by(cid:3)x(cid:3)and(cid:3)y(cid:3)coordinates(cid:3)(cid:3)

Select an object (cid:198) If you want to change the object origin, click a point on the Object origin button on the property bar. (cid:198) Type values in x and y to position the object in x and y axis. The x and y values specify the exact position of the object origin(cid:198) Press Enter The object origin, also known as "anchor point" or "reference point," can be the center of an object or any one of the object's selection handles. The object origin remains stationary when an object is positioned by typing values in the x and y boxes on the property bar.

To(cid:3)position(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)by(cid:3)changing(cid:3)anchor(cid:3)points(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)

Select an object. (cid:198) Click Window Dockers Transformations Position (cid:198) Disable the Relative position check box in the Transformation docker (cid:198)specify H and V values for the position of an object along the horizontal and vertical axis (cid:198) Enable the check box that corresponds to the anchor point that you want to set (cid:198) click apply By default, the point of origin (0,0) is at the lower-left corner of the drawing page When you enable the Relative position check box on the Transformation docker, the position of the center anchor point is identified as 0,0 in the H and V boxes. When you specify a different position in the H and V boxes, the values represent a change from the current position as measured from the center anchor point of the object.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 GROUPING(cid:3)OBJECTS(cid:3)(cid:3)

When you group two or more objects, they are

treated as a single unit but retain their individual

attributes. Grouping lets you apply the same

formatting, properties, and other changes to all

the objects within the group at the same time. In

addition, grouping helps prevent accidental

changes to the position of an object in relation to other objects. You can also create nested

Fig 5.3 : Grouping an object

groups by grouping together existing groups.

You can add objects to or remove objects from a group. You can also edit a single object in a group without ungrouping the objects. If you want to edit multiple objects in a group at the same time, you must first ungroup the objects. If a group contains nested groups, you can ungroup all objects in the nested groups simultaneously. To group an object: Select an objects (cid:198) goto arrange menu (cid:198) group.

You can select objects from different layers and group them; however, after objects are grouped, they reside on the same layer and are stacked on top of one another. You can create a nested group by selecting two or more groups of objects and clicking Arrange (cid:198)Group. You can also group objects by dragging an object in the Object manager docker over another object. If the Object manager docker is not open, click Window (cid:198)Dockers(cid:198)Object manager. You can also group objects by clicking the Group button on the property bar

To(cid:3)add(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)to(cid:3)a(cid:3)group(cid:3)

In the Object manager docker, drag the object to the group. If the Object manager docker is not open, click Window(cid:198) Dockers (cid:198)Object manager

To(cid:3)remove(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)from(cid:3)a(cid:3)group(cid:3)(cid:3)

In the Object manager docker, drag an object outside the group. If the Object manager docker is not open, click Window(cid:198) Dockers (cid:198)Object manager. To delete an object in a group, select the object in the object list, and click Edit (cid:198)Delete

To(cid:3)edit(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)in(cid:3)a(cid:3)group(cid:3)(cid:3)

Click the Pick tool (cid:198) Hold down Ctrl, and click an object in a group to select it (cid:198) Edit the object. You can also select an object in a group by clicking the object in the Object manager docker. If the Object manager docker is not open, click Window(cid:198) Dockers(cid:198) Object manager

To(cid:3)ungroup(cid:3)objects(cid:3)

Select one or more groups (cid:198) Click Arrange, (cid:198) Select Ungroup / Ungroup All. Ungroup — breaks a group into individual objects, or a nested group into multiple groups. Ungroup all — breaks one or more groups into individual objects, including objects within nested groups. Choosing Ungroup all also ungroups all nested groups. To preserve nested groups, select Ungroup.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 LOCKING(cid:3)OBJECTS(cid:3)(cid:3)

Locking an object prevents you from accidentally moving, sizing, transforming, filling, or otherwise changing it. You can lock single, multiple, or grouped objects. To change a locked object, you need to unlock it first. You can unlock one object at a time, or all locked objects at the same time.

To(cid:3)lock(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)

Select an object, and click Arrange (cid:198)Lock object. You cannot lock linked objects, such as blends, contours, or text inside an object. You also cannot lock objects within groups or linked groups. You can also lock an object by right-clicking it and then clicking Lock object

To(cid:3)unlock(cid:3)objects(cid:3)

Select a locked object, and click Arrange (cid:198)UnLock object / Unlock all objects. You can also unlock an object by right-clicking it and then clicking Unlock object

COMBINING(cid:3)OBJECTS(cid:3)(cid:3)

Combining two or more objects creates a single object with common

fill and outline attributes. You can combine rectangles, ellipses,

polygons, stars, spirals, graphs, or text so that they are converted to a

single curve object. If you need to modify the attributes of an object

that has been combined from separate objects, you can break apart the

combined object. You can extract a subpath from a combined object to create two separate objects. You can also weld two or more objects to

create a single object. in the fig: 4.4 The two objects (left) are

combined to create a single object (right). The new object has the fill

and outline properties of the last object selected.

To combine objects

Combined text objects become larger blocks of text. You can also

combine selected objects by clicking the Combine button on the Fig 5.4 : Combining an object property bar. You can close open lines in a combined object by clicking Arrange (cid:198)Join curves and choosing settings in the Join

curves docker. Select the objects to be combined. (cid:198) Click Arrange (cid:198)Combine

To break apart a combined object

If you break apart a combined object that contains

artistic text, the text breaks apart into lines first, and

then into words. Paragraph text breaks into separate paragraphs. Select a combined object (cid:198) Click Arrange Break

curve apart.

To extract a subpath from a combined object

Fig 5.5 : Align and Distribute an

Click the Shape tool , and select a segment, node, or group of nodes on a combined object (cid:198) Click the Extract subpath button on the property bar (cid:198) After you extract the subpath, the fill and outline properties of the path are removed from the combined object.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 ALIGNING(cid:3)AND(cid:3)DISTRIBUTING(cid:3)OBJECTS(cid:3)(cid:3)

CorelDRAW lets you precisely align and distribute objects in a drawing. You can align objects with each other and with parts of the drawing page, such as the center, edges, and grid. When you align objects with objects, you can line them up by their centers or by their edges. You can align multiple objects horizontally or vertically with the center of the drawing page.

Single or multiple objects can also be arranged along the edge of the page and to the nearest point on a grid. Distributing objects automatically adds spacing between them based on their width, height, and center points. You can distribute objects so that their center points or selected edges (for example, top or right) appear at equal intervals. You can also distribute objects so that there is equal space between them. You can distribute objects over the extent of the bounding box surrounding them or over the entire drawing page.

To(cid:3)align(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)with(cid:3)another(cid:3)object(cid:3)

If you select the objects one at a time, the last object selected is the reference point for aligning the other objects. If you marquee select the objects before you align them, the object that is positioned in the upper-left corner of the selection is used as a reference. Select the objects (cid:198) Click Arrange Align and distribute Align and distribute (cid:198) Click the align tab (cid:198) Specify vertical alignment, horizontal alignment, or both. (cid:198) From the Align objects to list box, choose Active objects

To align objects along the vertical axis, enable the Left, Center, or Right check box To align objects along the horizontal axis, enable the Top, Center, or Bottom check box.

If you are aligning text objects, choose one of the following from the For text source objects use list box:

First-line baseline — uses the baseline of the first line of text as a reference point. Last-line baseline —

uses the baseline of the last line of text as a reference point. Bounding box — uses the bounding box of a text object as a reference point You can also align objects by clicking Arrange (cid:198)Align and distribute and clicking any of the first six alignment commands. The letter next to a command name indicates the keyboard shortcut that you can use to align objects. You can also open the Align and distribute dialog box by selecting the objects and clicking the Align and distribute button on the property bar.

To(cid:3)distribute(cid:3)objects(cid:3)(cid:3)

Select the objects (cid:198) Click Arrange (cid:198)Align and distribute (cid:198)Align and distribute. (cid:198) Click the Distribute tab (cid:198) To distribute the objects horizontally, enable one of the following options from the top-right row: Left — evenly spaces the left edges of the objects. Center — evenly spaces the center points of the objects.

Spacing — places equal intervals between the selected objects Right — evenly spaces the right edges of the objects

To distribute the objects vertically, enable one of the following options from the column on the left:

Top — evenly spaces the top edges of the objects. Center — evenly spaces the center points of the objects. Spacing — places equal intervals between the selected objects. Bottom — evenly spaces the bottom edges of the objects

To indicate the area over which the objects are distributed, enable one of the following options

Extent of selection — distributes the objects over the area of the bounding box surrounding them.

Extent of page — distributes the objects over the drawing page111 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೮೩ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

Fig : 5.6 : Top row: Options for distributing objects horizontally. 1) The Left option evenly spaces the left edges. 2) The

Center option evenly spaces the center points. Bottom row: Options for distributing objects vertically. 3) The Top option

evenly spaces the top edges. 4) The Center option evenly spaces the center points.

SNAPPING(cid:3)OBJECTS(cid:3)

When you move or draw an object, you can snap it to another object in a drawing. You can snap an object to various snap points on the target object. When you move the pointer close to a snap point, the snap point becomes highlighted, which identifies it as the pointer's snapping target.

To(cid:3)Snap(cid:3)objects(cid:3)

Select the object that you want to snap to the target object (cid:198) Move the pointer over the object until the snap point becomes highlighted. Drag the object close to the target object until the snap point on the target object becomes highlighted

To snap an object as you draw it, drag in the drawing window until the snap point in the target object becomes highlighted.

USING(cid:3)CURVE(cid:3)OBJECTS(cid:3)(cid:3)

A curve object has nodes and control

handles, which you can use to change the

object's shape. A curve object can be any

shape, including a straight or curved line.

An object's nodes are the small squares

that appear along the object's outline. The

line between two nodes is called a

segment. Segments can be curved or

straight. Each node has a control handle for each curved segment connected to it.

Fig 5.7 : Components of a curve: control handles,

segments, nodes

Control handles help you adjust the curve112 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೮೪ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 of a segment.

Curve objects created in CorelDRAW follow a path that gives them their defining shape. A path can be open (for example, a line) or closed (for example, an ellipse) and can sometimes include subpaths. Most objects that are added to a drawing are not curve objects, with the exception of spirals, freehand lines, and Bézier lines. Therefore, if you want to customize the shape of an object or text object, it is recommended that you convert it to a curve object To convert an object to curves : Select the object (cid:198) Click Arrange menu (cid:198)Convert to curves (cid:198) You can convert artistic text to curves so that you can shape individual characters. Bitmaps cannot be converted to curve objects.

Adding,(cid:3)removing,(cid:3)joining,(cid:3)and(cid:3)aligning(cid:3)nodes(cid:3)(cid:3)

When you add nodes, you increase the number of segments

and, therefore, the amount of control you have over the

shape of the object. You can delete selected nodes to simplify an object's shape.

When curve objects contain many nodes, it is difficult to Fig 5.8 : Reducing the number of nodes to smooth a curve object

edit and output them to plotter and other devices. You can

have the number of nodes in a curve object reduced

automatically. Reducing the number of nodes removes

overlapping nodes and can smooth a curve object. This feature

is especially useful for reducing the number of nodes in objects imported from other applications. You can join the

Fig 5.9 : Aligning nodes horizontally

start and end nodes of an open path such as a line to create a

closed object..

To(cid:3)add(cid:3)or(cid:3)delete(cid:3)a(cid:3)node(cid:3)

To(cid:3)reduce(cid:3)the(cid:3)number(cid:3)of(cid:3)nodes(cid:3)in(cid:3)a(cid:3)curve(cid:3)object(cid:3)(cid:3)

Select shape tool (cid:198)To reduce the number of nodes in the entire object: click the Select all nodes button on property bar. To reduce the number of nodes in a part of a curve object, marquee select the part you want to change. (cid:198)Click Reduce nodes on the property bar to have overlapping and redundant nodes are automatically removed. Or move the curve smoothness slider to control the number of nodes that are removed. Removing many nodes can reshape the curve object. Note : You can close multiple subpaths in an object by clicking Arrange (cid:198)Join curves and choosing settings in the Join curves docker. To join the end nodes of a single subpath: Select shape tool (cid:198) click a sub path (cid:198) click the close curve button on the property bar. To join the nodes of multiple subpaths: Select shape tool (cid:198)press shift and click a node from each subpath (cid:198) click the extend curve to close button on the property bar. Note : If you want to join nodes from separate curve objects, you must first combine them into a single curve object, and then join the end nodes of the new subpaths.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 To align Nodes: Select shape tool (cid:198) select a curve object (cid:198) press shift and select the nodes you want to align (cid:198) click the align nodes button on the property bar.

TO(cid:3)TRIM(cid:3)AN(cid:3)OBJECT(cid:3)

Select the source object (cid:198)press shift and click the target object (cid:198)goto Arrange menu (cid:198)shaping (cid:198)trim. To Trim front or back objects : Marquee select the source and target objects. (cid:198) click arrange (cid:198)shaping(cid:198) and click front minus back(removes the back object from the front one)/ back minus front (removes the front object from the back one)

To(cid:3)Trim(cid:3)overlapping(cid:3)areas(cid:3)among(cid:3)objects(cid:3)

Marquee select the objects you want to trim(cid:198) goto arrange menu (cid:198)shaping (cid:198)simplify.

WELDING(cid:3)AND(cid:3)INTERSECTING(cid:3)AN(cid:3)OBJECT(cid:3)

You can create irregular shapes by welding and intersecting objects. You can weld or intersect almost any object, including clones, objects on different layers, and single objects with intersecting lines.

However, you cannot weld or intersect paragraph text, dimension lines, or masters of clones.

WELDING/(cid:3)INTERSECTING:(cid:3)(cid:3)

Select the source object (cid:198)press shift and click the target object (cid:198)goto Arrange menu (cid:198)shaping (cid:198)Weld/Intersect.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH TEXT

ADDING(cid:3)AND(cid:3)MANIPULATING(cid:3)TEXT(cid:3)(cid:3)

CorelDRAW provides multiple ways to add and manipulate text (also known as 'type'). You can create two types of text objects: artistic text and paragraph text. Artistic text is useful for adding a single word or a short line of text. Paragraph text is suitable for creating text-intensive documents, such as newsletters or brochures. You can change the position and appearance of text. For example, you can fit text to a path, wrap text around objects, or rotate text. You can also format the appearance of characters and paragraphs.

Importing(cid:3)and(cid:3)pasting(cid:3)text(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can import text in a new or existing document. This allows you to type text in a word processor and then add it to a CorelDRAW document. CorelDRAW supports the following text file formats: ANSI Text (TXT), Microsoft Word Document (DOC) files, Microsoft Word Open XML Document (DOCX) files, WordPerfect file (WPD) Rich Text Format (RTF) files.

To(cid:3)import(cid:3)text(cid:3)in(cid:3)a(cid:3)document(cid:3)

Using the Text tool , position the cursor in the text frame where you want to import the text. (cid:198) Click File (cid:198)Import (cid:198) Choose file (cid:198) click import. (cid:198) In the Importing/Pasting text dialog box select any maintain fonts and formatting/ maintain formatting only / discard fonts and formatting.

If you want to apply CMYK black to the imported black text, enable the Force CMYK black check box.

ADDING(cid:3)ARTISTIC(cid:3)TEXT(cid:3)(cid:3)

Artistic text is useful for adding single words or short lines Fig 6.1: Artistic text of text, such as headlines, to a document. You can then

apply a wide range of effects to the artistic text, such as

drop shadows or a contour. You can add artistic text

along an open or closed path or fit existing artistic to a

path. In addition, you can assign hyperlinks to text

To add artistic text

Using the Text tool , click anywhere on the drawing

page, and type.

You can convert artistic text to paragraph text by

Fig 6.2: Adding paragraph text inside

graphic object

selecting the artistic text using the Pick tool and then clicking Text (cid:198)Convert to paragraph text.

Adding(cid:3)paragraph(cid:3)text(cid:3)(cid:3)

You add paragraph text in a document by using text frames. Paragraph text, also known as "block text," is generally reserved for larger bodies of text that have greater formatting requirements. You can insert a text frame directly in the drawing window. You can also place text inside a graphic object, which increases the number of different shapes that you can use as text frames. You can create a text frame from a closed object and then type text inside the frame. You can separate the frame from the object at any time, so that you can modify them independently. You can convert a text frame back to an object.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 If you want to see the layout of your

document before you add the final

content, you can fill the text frames

with temporary placeholder text. You

can also use custom placeholder text.

By default, text frames have a fixed

size, regardless of how much text you

add to them. You can increase or decrease the frame size, so that the text

Fig 6.3 : Text frame with overflown text.

fits in the frame. If you add more text than

a frame allows, the text continues past the

lower-right border of the text frame, but

remains hidden. The color of the frame

turns red to alert you that there's

additional text. You can fix the overflow

manually by increasing the frame size, Fig 6.4 : text adjustment

adjusting the text size, adjusting the column

width, or linking the frame to another text

frame.

You can also choose to automatically adjust the point size of text so that it fits neatly inside a frame. If the text overflows, CorelDRAW automatically decreases the point size; if you have little text, the application expands it to fill the frame. You can also change the formatting of selected paragraph text frames and any frames to which they are linked

To(cid:3)add(cid:3)paragraph(cid:3)text(cid:3)

Click the Text tool (cid:198) Drag in the drawing window to size the paragraph text frame (cid:198) Type in the text frame.

You can use the Pick tool to adjust the size of a paragraph text frame. Click the text frame, and drag any selection handle116 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ೭೮೮ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

To(cid:3)create(cid:3)a(cid:3)frame(cid:3)from(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)

Using the Pick tool , click the object in which you want to insert a text frame. Or Using a shape tool, draw a closed shape. (cid:198) Select the object, and click Text (cid:198)Paragraph text frame (cid:198)Create empty text frame.

If the frame contains content, the content is deleted when the frame reverts to a regular object. You can also click the No frame button on the Layout toolbar. To open the Layout toolbar, click Window (cid:198)Toolbars (cid:198)Layout or Layout (cid:198)Layout toolbar.

To(cid:3)separate(cid:3)a(cid:3)text(cid:3)frame(cid:3)from(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)

Click the Pick tool (cid:198) Select the object that includes the text frame (cid:198) Click Arrange (cid:198)Break paragraph text inside a path apart (cid:198) The text frame and the object can now be moved or edited separately.

When you separate a text frame from some objects, such as ellipses or stars, the text does not retain the shape of the object. Alternatively, the text is contained in a standard rectangular text frame.

To adjust text to fill the text frame If you choose to fit text to a frame that is linked to other frames, the application adjusts the size of text in all linked text frames. Select a text frame (cid:198) Click Text (cid:198)Paragraph text frame (cid:198)Fit text to frame.

To align paragraph text to the baseline grid Click View (cid:198)Grid (cid:198)Baseline grid (cid:198) Select a text frame (cid:198) Click Text (cid:198)Align to baseline grid FITTING(cid:3)TEXT(cid:3)TO(cid:3)A(cid:3)PATH(cid:3)

You can add artistic text along the path of an open object (for example, a line) or a closed object (for example, a square). You can also fit existing text to a path. Paragraph text in a text frame can be fitted to open paths only. After you fit text to a path, you can adjust the text position relative to that path. For example, you can mirror the text horizontally, vertically, or both. Using tick spacing, you can specify an exact distance between the text and the path.

CorelDRAW treats text fitted to a path as one object; however, you can separate the text from the object if you no longer want it to be part of the path. When you separate text from a curved or closed path, the text retains the shape of the object to which it was fitted. You can also modify the text and path properties independently. The text reverts to its original appearance when you straighten it117 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೮೯ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6

Fig 6.5 : Text and curve as separate objects (upper left), choosing a path with Fit Text to Path tool

(upper middle), aligning text while fitting it to path (upper right), text fitted to path (lower left),

interactive feedback about offset distance (lower middle), and text and curve stretched horizontally by

200% (lower right)

Aligning(cid:3)text(cid:3)by(cid:3)using(cid:3)the(cid:3)baseline(cid:3)grid(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can align text within a frame or in different frames by using the baseline grid. This is useful, for example, when you want to align two or more text frames that contain different fonts, font sizes, and spacing.

To add text along a path Using the Pick tool, select a path (cid:198) Click Text (cid:198)Fit text to path (cid:198) type along the path.

The text cursor is inserted on the path. If the path is open, the text cursor is inserted at the beginning of the path. If the path is closed, the text cursor is inserted at the center of the path. Text cannot be added to the path of another text object. You can also fit text to a path by clicking the Text tool and pointing to a path. When the pointer changes to a Fit to path pointer, click where you want the text to begin, and type.

Artistic text can be fitted to open or closed paths. Paragraph text can be fitted to open paths only. Text cannot be fitted to the path of another text object

CHANGING(cid:3)TEXT(cid:3)CASE(cid:3)(cid:3)

CorelDRAW lets you change the text case of artistic and paragraph text. For example, you can apply small caps to acronyms so they visually blend with the text. This is a useful formatting technique for headings, such as book or chapter titles. You can automatically convert text to lowercase or uppercase without deleting or retyping letters.

Note : If the Object properties docker is not open, click Window Dockers Object properties.

To change the text case Using the Text tool , select a character or a block of text (cid:198) In the Object properties docker, click the Character button to display the character-related options (cid:198) In the Character area of the Object properties docker, choose any of the following options from the Caps list box

(cid:120) None — turns off all of the features in the list. (cid:120) All caps — substitutes lowercase characters with upper case equivalents. (cid:120) Titling caps — applies the OpenType version of the feature if the font supports it. (cid:120) Small caps (auto) — applies the OpenType version of the feature if the font supports it. (cid:120) All small caps — substitutes characters with a scaled-down version of the upper case characters. (cid:120) Small caps from caps — applies the OpenType version of the feature if the font supports it.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 You can also change text case by selecting a character or a block of text, clicking Text (cid:198)Change case, and enabling an option in the Change case dialog box.

ADJUSTING(cid:3)CHARACTER(cid:3)AND(cid:3)WORD(cid:3)SPACING(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can improve text readability by adjusting the character and word spacing. When letters or words are too close together, or too far apart, they become difficult to read. CorelDRAW offers you different tools for controlling text spacing.

Character(cid:3)spacing(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can change the spacing between characters (also known as "letter spacing") in a block of text. For example, fully justifying a block of text may insert too much space between characters, which creates a visual imbalance. To improve readability, you can decrease the character spacing. If you want to change the spacing between several characters, you need to adjust the kerning.

Using the Text tool , position the cursor in a block of text or Using the Pick tool , click an artistic text object or a text frame (cid:198) In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph button to display the paragraph-related options (cid:198) In the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker, type a value in the Character spacing box.

Values for adjusting spacing represent a percentage of the space character. The Character values range from -100 to 2000 percent. All other values range from 0 to 2000 percent You can also change the character spacing proportionally by clicking the Shape tool (cid:198) selecting the text object, and dragging the Interactive horizontal spacing arrow in the lower-right corner of the text object.

Word(cid:3)spacing(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can also adjust the spacing between words.

Using the Text tool , position the cursor in a block of text or Using the Pick tool , click an artistic text object or a text frame (cid:198) In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph button to display the paragraph-related options (cid:198) In the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker, type a value in the Word spacing box.

You can also change the word spacing proportionally by clicking the Shape tool , holding down Shift, selecting the text object, and dragging the Interactive horizontal spacing arrow in the lower-right corner of the text object.

Adjusting(cid:3)line(cid:3)and(cid:3)paragraph(cid:3)spacing(cid:3)

You can change the spacing between lines of text, which is also known as "leading" or "interline spacing." When changing the line spacing for artistic text, it applies only to the lines of text that are separated by a hard return. The line spacing of paragraph text applies only to the lines of text within the same paragraph. In CorelDRAW, you can also adjust line spacing of a text object by using the Shape tool

To adjust interline spacing Using the Text tool , select the paragraph text (cid:198) In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph button to display the paragraph-related options (cid:198) In the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker, choose one of the following units of measurement. % of Char height/ points or percentage of point size119 | P a g e ಭಾಗ ೧ ಕರ್ನಾಟಕ ರಾಜ್ಯಪತ್ರ, ಗುರುವಾರ, ಮೇ ೧೮, ೨೦೧೭ ೭೯೧ GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 Percentage of character height — lets you use a percentage value that is relative to the character height.

Points — lets you use points. % of Pt.size — lets you use a percentage value that is relative to the character point size (cid:198) Type a value in the Line spacing box. You can also change the spacing between lines proportionally by clicking the Shape tool , selecting the text object, and dragging the Interactive vertical spacing arrow in the lower-left corner of the text object.

To adjust the spacing between paragraphs Using the Text tool , select the paragraph text (cid:198) In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph button to display the paragraph-related options (cid:198) In the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker, Type a value in one of the following boxes:

Before paragraph spacing — lets you specify the amount of space to insert above the paragraph text.

After paragraph spacing — lets you specify the amount of space to insert below the paragraph text.

You can also use this procedure to adjust the spacing between items in a bulleted list

ADDING(cid:3)BULLETS(cid:3)TO(cid:3)TEXT(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can use bulleted lists to format information. You can wrap text around bullets, or you can offset a bullet from text to create a hanging indent. CorelDRAW lets you customize bullets by changing their size, position, and distance from text. You can also change the spacing between items in a bulleted list.

Using the Text tool , select the paragraph text (cid:198) In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph button to display the paragraph-related options (cid:198) In the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker, click the arrow button located at the bottom of paragraph area to display additional options (cid:198) enable the bullets check box (cid:198) click the bullet settings button (cid:198) In the bullets dialog box, perform a task from the following table

You can adjust the spacing in between bullets by increasing or decreasing the space before and after a paragraph. Bullets are inserted at the beginning of each new line that is preceded by a return.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 INSERTING(cid:3)DROP(cid:3)CAPS(cid:3)(cid:3)

Applying drop caps, also known as initial

caps, to paragraphs enlarges the initial letter

and insets it into the body of text. You can

customize a drop cap by changing different

settings. For example, you can change the distance between the drop cap and the body of

Fig 6.6 : Applying DropCap

text, or specify the number of lines of text that

you want to appear next to the drop cap. You can remove the drop cap at any point without deleting the letter. You can preview a drop cap before you add it to a drawing. The changes you make are temporarily applied to the text in the drawing window, so you can see how the drop cap will look when you add it. Using the Text tool , select the paragraph text (cid:198) In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph button to display the paragraph-related options (cid:198) In the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker, click the arrow button located at the bottom of paragraph area to display additional options (cid:198) enable the Dropcap box (cid:198) click the dropcap settings buttons (cid:198) In the dropcap dialog box, perform a task from the following table.

CHANGING(cid:3) CHARACTER(cid:3) POSITION(cid:3) AND(cid:3)

ANGLE(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can modify the appearance of text by

shifting the characters vertically or horizontally, which changes the position of the

Fig 6.7 : Different examples of rotating

selected characters relative to the surrounding

characters. You can also rotate characters

by specifying an angle of rotation.

Using the Text tool , select the paragraph text (cid:198) In the Object properties docker,

click the Character button to display the character-related options (cid:198) In the

Character area of the Object properties docker, click the arrow button located at

Fig 6.8 : align a text object with other objects by using the baseline of

the bottom of Character area to display

the first line, the baseline of the last line, or the edge of the text

additional options to shift characters

frame.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 horizontally/ vertically. Note : type the value in object properties (cid:198)character (cid:198)character angle box to rotate a character in coreldraw.

ALIGNING(cid:3)TEXT(cid:3)

CorelDRAW lets you align text in various ways. You can align paragraph text horizontally and vertically in relation to its text frame. You can align paragraph text with the baseline grid. You can also align text to a selected object.

Artistic text can be aligned horizontally, but not vertically. When you align artistic text, the entire text object is aligned in relation to the bounding box. If characters have not been shifted horizontally, applying no alignment produces the same result as applying left alignment

To(cid:3)align(cid:3)text(cid:3)horizontally(cid:3)

Using the Text tool , select the text that you want to align OR Using the Pick tool , click an artistic text object or a text frame whose content you want to align (cid:198) In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph button to display the paragraph-related options (cid:198) In the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker, click any type of alignment

The types of alignment are : None — applies the default alignment setting. Align left — aligns text with the left side of the text frame or the bounding box of artistic text. Center — centers text within the text frame. Align right — aligns text with the right side of the text frame and the bounding box of artistic text. Full justify — aligns text, with the exception of the last line, with the left and right sides of the text frame. Force justify — aligns text, including the last line, with the left and right sides of the text frame.

You can also align text horizontally by clicking the Horizontal alignment button on the property bar and choosing an alignment style from the list box. The property bar displays an icon that corresponds to the current alignment style

To(cid:3)align(cid:3)paragraph(cid:3)text(cid:3)vertically(cid:3)

Using the Pick tool , click a text frame (cid:198) In the Object properties docker, click the Frame button to display the frame- related options . (cid:198) In the Frame area of the Object properties docker, choose an alignment option from the Vertical alignment list box.

To(cid:3)align(cid:3)text(cid:3)with(cid:3)an(cid:3)object(cid:3)

Using the Pick tool , hold down Shift, click the text object, and then click the object (cid:198) Click Arrange Align and distribute Align and distribute (cid:198) Choose one of the For text source objects use list box.(first line baseline/ last line baseline / bounding box) (cid:198) Enable any one horizontal alignment check boxes (left, center, right)(cid:198) enable any one vertical alignment check box (top, center, bottom) (cid:198) click apply.

Source object list box: First line baseline — uses the baseline of the first line of text to align the objects Last line baseline — uses the baseline of the last line of text to align the objects. Bounding box — aligns text with its bounding box.

If you select the text objects one at a time, the last object selected is the reference point for aligning the other objects. If you marquee select the objects before you align them, the object that is positioned in the upper-left corner of the selection is used. If you have applied a linear transformation, such as rotation, to the text and are aligning objects with a baseline, the objects align with the baseline point of the starting edge of the text object. You can also align text objects by selecting them and clicking the Align and distribute button on the property bar.

GRAPHIC DESIGNER COURSE CORELDRAW X6 ADDING(cid:3)TABS(cid:3)AND(cid:3)INDENTS(cid:3)(cid:3)

You can modify existing tab stops by changing their alignment. You can also add trailing leader characters, so that dots, or other characters, automatically precede the tab stops. In addition, you can add new tab stops and remove existing tab stops.

Indenting changes the space between a text frame and the text that it contains. You can add and remove indents without deleting or retyping text. You can indent an entire paragraph, the first line of a paragraph, or all lines of a paragraph except the first line (a hanging indent). You can also indent from the right side of the text frame.

To modify a tab stop Click Window (cid:198)Dockers (cid:198)Object properties. (cid:198) In the Object properties docker, click the Paragraph button to display the paragraph-related options (cid:198) In the Paragraph area of the Object properties docker, click the arrow button located at the bottom of Paragraph area to display additional options (cid:198) Click the Tab settings button (cid:198) Perform a task from the following table.